Volume 03 - University Civil Specifications

S.T.
H Consultant ‫ﺳوﺳﯾﺗﻲ ﺗﻛﻧوﻟوﺟﻲ ھﺎوس‬
Kyung Hee University
Al Ain City, U.A.E.
VOLUME 3:
CIVIL WORKS SPECIFICATIONS
COMM. NO. STH/Q/343

Abu Dhabi Branch P.O. Box 108707 Tel : 026417627 Fax: 026449572
S.T.H. CIVIL WORKS SPECIFICATIONS
KYUNG HEE UNIVERSITY-AL AIN
PROJECT No.: STH/Q/343
__
LIST OF CONTENTS PAGES

__
SECTION NO. TITLE
DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100 SUMMARY 5
01200 PROCEDURE 2
01300 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 3
01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 2
01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 6
01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 3
01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 7
01800 FACILITY OPERATION 2
01900 ESTIDAMA – PBRS v1.0 REQUIREMENTS 6
DIVISION 2: EXISTING CONDITIONS
02300 EARTHWORK 8
02700 BASES, BALLASTS, PAVEMENTS AND APPURTENANCES 4
DIVISION 3: CONCRETE
03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 16

03500 CEMENTITIOUS DECKS AND UNDERLAYMENT 3
DIVISION 4: MASONRY
04200 MASONRY UNITS 6
DIVISION 5: METALS
05300 METAL DECK 8

05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 6
05515 METAL RAIILINGS 5
05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 5
05810 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLE 3
DIVISION 6: WOOD AND PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 6

06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 10
06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 5
06600 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 7
06610 WOOD AND PLASTIC SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 7
1
_________
LIST OF CONTENTS PAGES

__
DIVISION 7: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07100 DAMP PROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 5

07200 THERMAL PROTECTION 5
07500 MEMBRANE ROOFING 15
07800 FIRE AND SMOKE PROTECTION 8
07900 JOINT SEALERS 3
DIVISION 8: DOORS & WINDOWS
08100 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 12

08200 WOOD AND PLASTIC DOORS 3
08460 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 4
08600 SKYLIGHTS 7
08700 HARDWARE 43
08800 GLAZING 9
08900 ALUMINIUM FRAMING, DOORS & WINDOWS 11
DIVISION 9: FINISHES
09200 PLASTER & GYPSUM BOARD 4

09250 GYPSUM BOARD 9
09300 TILE 8
09310 STONE TILE 9
09500 CEILINGS 9
09710 WALL COVERINGS 5
09720 COMPOSITE ALUMINUM WALL & CEILING PANELS 10
09900 PAINTING AND COATINGS 9
DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES
10150 COMPARTMENTS & CUBICLES 3

10200 KITCHEN CABINET 2
10210 CUBICLE CURTAINS & TRACKS 4
10400 SIGNAGE 3
10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER & CABINETS 3
10800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY SPECIALTIES 8
10810 MIRROR UNITS 1
10900 SHEDS 6
DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT
11014 WINDOW WASHING EQUIPMENT 7

11950 MATERIALS/SUPPLIERS SCHEDULE 8
DIVISION 12: FURNISHING
12700 LABORATORY FURNITURE 6
2
DIVISION 13: SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13100 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEM 13

13300 BED HEAD UNIT AND PENDANTS 13
DIVISION 14: LIFT INSTALLATION
14200 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR 36

14310 COMMERCIAL ESCALATORS 18
3
S.T.H. SUMMARY 01100-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: The “Kyung Hee University Al Ain– project comprises the execution,
completion and maintenance during the defects liability period of the following:
1. Main Building which consisting of lower level floor, ground floor, first floor, second floor,
third floor, Fourth floor & roof floor.
2. Temporary facilities (Site offices, signboard, temporary roads, temporary utilities (water,
electrical, drainage & other utilities)
Project Location: Al Ain City.
1.03 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
CSI/CSC’s “Master Format” numbering system.
Section Identification: The Specification use section numbers and titles to help cross-
referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning
of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract
Documents.
B. Specification Content: The Specification use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is
abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not
stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural,
and the plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the
Contract Documents indicates.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to
describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by other when so
noted.
1. The words “shall,” “shall be,” or “shall comply with,” depending on the context, are implied
where a colon ( : ) is used within a sentence or phrase.
1.04 SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS LOG
As soon as possible after the contract has been awarded but within a maximum period of 30
days, the contractor shall submit to the Engineer/Client a list of Subcontractors, materials and
______________________________________________________________________________
shop drawings Log necessary for the execution of the works for approval. After a period of 30
days from the date of contract has been awarded, the contractor has to commence submitting
of contract documents for approval of Engineer/Client.
1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS
The contractor shall check and verify all site measurements and shall submit with sufficient
promptness as to cause no delay in the works, three copies checked and approved by him of
all shop or setting out drawings and schedules required for the works or which have been
specifically requested by the Engineers/Client. The Engineer/Client shall check and approve
with reasonable promptness (within 14 working days) such schedules and drawings for the
contract documents. The contractor shall make any corrections in the schedules and drawings
as required by the Engineer/Client and resubmit further prints thereof until approved by the
Engineer/Client. The contractor will be responsible for making all copies necessary for his own
use and the use of his own sub-contractors.
The shop drawings shall be complete and show the design, dimensions, materials used
finishes, type of shop paint and all other details and information necessary and shall also show
adjoining work and details of connections thereto.
Where adjoining work requires shop drawings, the contractor shall prepare and submit
composite shop drawings which shall show and define the work under all affected trades. If the
contractor installs work before co-coordinating with other trades so as to cause interference
with work of those trades, he shall make changes necessary to correct the conditions at his
own cost.
No changes shall be made by the contractor to resubmitted shop drawings in excess of those
corrections noted by the Engineer/Client in previously returned drawings, unless such new
changes are brought to the attention of the Engineer/Client in a separate note on the shop
drawings.
No works at the site shall be started and no material or equipment to be ordered until the
Engineer/Client has approved. It shall be responsibility of the contractor to submit the shop
drawings on a schedule that allows reasonable time checking and approval and subsequent
fabrication. Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking, correcting and
rechecking will not justify delay in time of completion of work.
The approval by the Engineer/Client of shop drawings and schedules shall not relieve the
contractor from responsibility for deviating from the drawings or specifications, unless such
deviations have the prior approval of the Engineer/Clients, nor shall it relieve him from
responsibility for errors in such drawings and schedules.
The term ‘shop drawings’ as used here in shall also include:
Manufacturer’s standard drawings, descriptive literature, catalogues, brochures, performance

and test data, wiring and control diagrams and all other such descriptive data pertaining to
materials, equipment and method of construction. Catalogues, pamphlets, etc., shall be clearly
marked in ink. Data of general nature will be accepted.
The contractor shall also check and verify all site measurements wherever requested by other
specialist contractors or by nominated or other sub-contractors to enable them to prepare their
own shop drawings and pass on the information with sufficient promptness as will not in any
way delay the works. A copy of all such information passed on shall be given to the
Engineer/Client.
______________________________________________________________________________
1.06 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
The Contractor’s choice is limited to same and no other manufacturer shall be considered only
if the Client asks to replace any of the items with an equivalent brand. However, the Contractor
has to submit at least three (mock up, samples) of different suppliers on the site for Client
choice and approval, the Client has the right to approve any of them. No claims will be
accepted in this regards. When reference is given to one manufacturer or equal and approved
the Contractor shall submit same together with at least two alternatives for approval. When the
sole manufacturer is limited to that specified, the contractor shall submit all required
documentation, samples and the like for approval.
1.07 TESTING AND INSPECTION
All equipment necessary for the testing of materials and workmanship shall be regarded as a
constructional plant as defined in the conditions of contract. It shall be delivered to the
Engineer/Client in accordance with the schedule of requirements of such equipment described
in the contract, and if he so requires, within four weeks of the order in writing from the
Engineer/Client to the contractor to commence the works. All equipment shall be kept in good
conditions throughout the period of the works.
Where it is necessary and required by the Engineer and Client to visit places away from the
works (inside and outside border of U.A.E.) for supervision or inspection in compliance with the
contract.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer/Client with protective clothing and any other articles
or equipment necessary for the Engineer and Client to carry out their duties in accordance with
the Contract. Duration of visit will be according to the work’s requirements.
Unless directed otherwise by Engineer/Client, the required tests & inspections (frequency of
visits shall be one (1) visit per each test) for materials and equipment shall be carried out at the
expense of contractor and attendance of one person representing the Engineer, one per visit,
for but not limited to the followings tests: -
A. Marble & Granite.
B. Curtain Walls.
C. Limestone.
D. Lifts.
E. Cradle.
F. Pumps (All Types)
G. Generator.
H. Electrical Panels.
I. Industrial kitchen & laundry.
J. Chillers.
K. Cooler Tower.
L. A.H.U.
______________________________________________________________________________
1.08 CONTROL AND TEST EQUIPMENT TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR
During the contract, the contractor shall provide, maintain and clear away on completion the
following listed items of control and test equipment. All items shall be to Engineer/Client’s
approval.
The items listed here under are indicative only and not limited. The Client/Engineer may
request for additional equipment to be provided during the contract.
a. A separate caravan or the like for housing all test and control equipment as well as for the
approved samples of projects, construction material.
b. Four sets of six number, 150x150 mm cast iron or steel cube moulds, for pre-paring
concrete cubes.
c. Maximum and minimum thermometers including replacements in the event of breakage.
d. Metric weighting scales.
e. Water tank with thermostatically controlled heating and cooling for curing concrete test
cubes.
f. Proctor compaction equipment.
g. Slump testing equipment.
h. 4 No. of special Thermometer for measuring concrete Temperature.
1.09 SAMPLING AND TESTING
The contractor shall supply all samples of materials for testing. He shall provide materials,
equipment transportation and appropriate manpower assistance as may be required from time
to time by the Engineer/Client in taking and packing samples into containers, provided by the
contractor, and dispatching them for testing. All cost of these will be contractor’s expense.
1.10 THIRD PARTY
Third part whom carry out all test of materials shall be submitted by contractor for approval of
Engineer/Client. All cost of these tests will be on contractor’s expense.
1.11 DAILY & MONTHLY REPORTS
The contractor shall deliver daily to the Engineer/Client representative daily report comprise of
a machinery report as to the number of work people employed on the works in each trade and
copies of delivery notes of all materials, goods delivered to the site during the day, events or
accidents occurred and daily construction progress at the site in forms, should approved by the
Engineer/Client.
Monthly Reports will be include updated program, photographs for all activity at the site,
material submitted and need to approve in the current month any works open but not started,
formats & details of this monthly report to be directed by the Engineer/Client.
1.12 FIRST AID
The contractor has to provide sets of First Aid and all related tools for Clients, Engineers and
contractor staffs.
______________________________________________________________________________
1.13 CHECK REQUEST
The contractor must request the Engineer/Client to check any parts of the works at least 24
hours before staring the works in order that the necessary inspection and checking can be
arranged in an orderly manner.
This notification must be submitted in writing upon the checking request form in a format to be
approved by the Engineer/Client.
1.14 STATIONERY
The contractor shall provide an adequate supply of stationery and miscellaneous office
equipment for the use of the project throughout the period of construction and until the end of
the maintenance period.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. PROCEDURE 01200-1
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1. GENERAL
The tender documents and addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification
and must be read in junction herewith.
1.2. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
1. Scheduled preconstruction, progress meetings.
2. Progress schedules.
1.3. PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
As soon as possible, arrange meeting(s) between the Engineers, subcontractors,

project superintendents, and representatives of others whose coordination is required
during construction.
1.4. SITE MEETINGS
Invite all Engineers to attend regular site meetings called and conducted by the
Contractor, to discuss with his Subcontractors project scheduling, document
interpretation and completion to keep the Contract proceeding smoothly without delay.
1.5. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
1. Submit a construction progress schedule within fourteen (14) working days of

notification of tender acceptance, for approval.
2. Correct, revise, up-date, and otherwise maintain schedule during progress of

construction on a monthly basis as a minimum or as directed by the Engineer.
3. Revision to the schedule alerting the intent of the schedule must first be approved by the
consultant prior to implementing and issuing said version.
4. Construction progress schedule to be in bar chart format in sufficient detail to monitor

the actual progress of the Work and should be updated immediately when required.
1.6. PROGRESS REPORTS
Maintain at site a permanent, legibly written record of progress of work. Make the
record available at all times with copies provided when requested. Include in
record each day, giving the following minimum data:
1. Date.
2. Weather conditions.
3. Commencement and completion dates of the work of each trade in each area
of project.
S.T.H. PROCEDURE 01200-2
___________________________________________________________________________
4. Name of each Subcontractor working on site giving for each the number of
tradesmen working on site, type of work, location of work and a record of
the work they performed.
5. Dates, status and particulars of submissions, i.e. shop drawings, samples,

mock-ups and the like.
6. Dates, status and particulars of deliveries, i.e. manufacturing dates,

delivery and installation dates.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300-1
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1. GENERAL
1. The tender documents and addenda thereto form an integral part of this
specification and must be read in junction herewith.
2. Make submittals specified in this Section to the Engineer unless otherwise

specified.
1.2. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
1. Submit proposed construction progress schedule.
2. As construction progresses, submit updated construction schedules each

month.
3. In addition, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer drawings and full
particulars of all temporary Works he intends to construct at least fourteen (14)
days before he intends to commence such Works. The Engineer may require
modifications to be made if he considers the proposals to be insufficient and the
Contractor shall give effect to such modifications at his own cost but shall not be
relieved of his responsibility for the sufficiency thereof.
1.3. SHOP DRAWINGS
1. Include in final shop drawings submissions detailed information, templates and

installation instructions required for incorporation and connections of the Work
concerned.
2. In addition to shop drawings specified in other Sections, submit shop drawings

required by jurisdictional authorities in accordance with their requirement.
3. The Contractor shall check, sign and make notations he considers necessary on
shop drawings before each submission to the Engineer.
4. Indicate on each submission, changes from the Contract Documents that

have been incorporated in the shop drawings.
5. Submit shop drawings folded into A4 size.
6. Do not proceed with work dependent on shop drawing information until approval
is given and verification received from the Engineer. The Contractor shall be
responsible for work performed prior to receipt of reviewed shop drawings.
1.4. SAMPLES
1. Submit samples for which submission requirements is specified in trade

Sections of this specification.
2. Submit samples in triplicate of adequate size to represent the material in its

intended use on project.
3. Label samples with project name, number, Contractor, and date.

___________________________________________________________________________
4. If sample is disapproved, two samples will be returned. If sample is approved,

one sample will be returned, marked "approved".
1.5. COORDINATION DRAWINGS
1. Prepare interference and equipment placing drawings to ensue that all

components will be properly accommodated within the spaces provided.
2. Prepare drawings to indicate coordination and methods of installation of a

system with other systems where their relationship is critical.
1.6. PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS
1. Submit project record drawings on completion. Final acceptance of the

Work will be predicated on receipt and approval of record drawings.
2. Record, as the work progresses, work constructed differently than shown on

Contract Documents.
1.7. WARRANTIES
1. The Contractor shall submit all the warranties as herein specified.
2. The Contractor shall countersign and guarantee all warranties submitted, stating
that all work executed will be free from defects of materials and workmanship.
The Contractor further agrees that he will repair and replace all such defective
work and all other work damaged thereby which become defective during the
term of the warranty/guarantee, except if damage is due to negligence on the
part of the end user.
3. Submit each warranty in an approved uniform format.
1.8. MAINTENANCE/MANUAL AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1. Submit three (3) maintenance manuals at completion of project. Maintenance

manual shall consist of shop drawings, extended warranties and project data
book.
2. Include in maintenance manual one copy of each final approved shop drawings
issued for project of which have been recorded changes made during fabrication
and installation caused by unforeseen conditions.
3. The project data book shall:
1. Contain only types or printed information and notes, and nearly drafted
drawings.
2. Contain maintenance instructions as specified in various sections and as

referenced in Section 01700, Contract Project Closeout.
3. Contain brochures and parts listed on all equipment.
4. Contain a list of manufacturers and trade names of finishes and coatings

applied.
___________________________________________________________________________
5. Contain finished hardware schedule.
6. Contain charts, diagrams and reports specified in Division 15 and 16.
1.9. EXTRA STOCK
Supply extra stock at completion of project as specified in trade sections of this

specification.
1.10. INSPECTION COMPANY REPORTS
1. Submit copies of test reports as specified in Section 01400.
2. Submit one copy of each report unless specified otherwise, and signed by a
responsible officer of the inspection and testing company to the Employer and
the Engineer.
3. The Contractor shall submit test certificates in accordance with the appropriate
British Standards or other equivalent standards.
1.11. SURVEY DATA
Submit final survey of completed contract work and site, including underground
services.
1.12. COST BREAKDOWN AND CASH FLOW
Submit a complete cost breakdown and cash flow within fourteen (14) working
days of notification by letter of intent of award of Contract in a format approved
by the Engineer and Employer.
1.13. PROGRESS BILLING
1. Format of progress billing shall be as requested by and approved by the

Employer.
1.14. SOILS INVESTIGATION REPORT
1. Verify soil report to the local authorities for approval prior to start of any
structural work.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1. GENERAL
The tender documents and addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification
and must be read in junction herewith.
1.2. RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1. Inspections and testing required by the laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of
jurisdictional authorities.
2. B.S.S. 5606: 1990 Accuracy
3. Testing, balancing and adjusting of equipment: In applicable mechanical and

electrical sections of the specification.
4. Cutting and patching: Section 01041.
5. Submission of inspection and testing reports: Section 01300.
6. Soils investigation report.
1.3. TOLERANCE FOR INSTALLATION OR WORK
1. Unless acceptable tolerances are otherwise specified:
1. "Plumb and level" shall mean plumb or level within 3mm in 3m non cumulative.
2. "Square" shall mean not in excess of 10 seconds lesser or greater than 90

degrees.
3. "Straight" shall mean within 3mm under a 3m long straight edge.
1.4. CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
1. The Engineer may carry out construction review during the progress of the Work. The
Engineer's general review during construction and inspection and testing by
Independent inspection and testing companies reporting to the Engineer are both
undertaken to inform the Employer of the Contractor's performance and shall in the
Contractor's quality control or relieve him of contractual responsibility.
1.5. QUALITY CONTROL
1. Bring to the attention of the Engineer any defects in the Work or departures from the
Contract Documents which may occur during construction. The Engineer will decide
upon corrective action and state his recommendations in writing.
2. Except where otherwise stated or approved by the Engineer, all materials used in
the Works shall be of the best quality of their respective kinds as specified or
described in the Specification, Drawings and Bills of Quantities and shall comply
wherever possible with the appropriate current standard published by the British
Standards Institution or other equivalent standards.
S.T.H. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-2
______________________________________________________________________________
3. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer copies of all orders for materials.
1.6. INSPECTION AND TESTING SERVICES QUALIFICATIONS AND

REFERENCE STANDARDS
1. Qualifications of inspections and testing companies:
1. Companies engaged for inspection and testing shall provide equipment,

methods of recording and evaluation, knowledgeable personnel to conduct
test precisely as specified.
2. Reference Standards:
1. Perform inspection and testing reports in accordance with standards quoted

and as required by procedures described in specified reference standards
that are applicable to the work being inspected and tested.
1.7. SUBMITTALS
Submit inspection and testing reports in accordance with Section 01300.
1.8. RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR
1. All inspection and testing performed by firms engaged for source and field quality
control specified in other sections shall be appointed and paid by the Contractor.
2. Notify the Engineer and inspection and testing company at least 48 hours before
work to be inspected and tested commences.
3. When it is discovered on inspection that work is proceeding with incorrect materials

or methods, ensure that corrections are immediately made and that improperly
completed work is replaced.
1.9. DEFECTIVE WORK
1. Where factual evidence exists that defective workmanship has occurred

or that work has been carried out incorporating defective materials, the
Engineer may have tests, inspections or surveys performed, analytical
calculation of structural strength made, and the like, in order to help
determine whether the Work must be replaced. Testing, retesting,
inspections or surveys carried out under these circumstances will be
made at the Contractor's expense, regardless of their results, which
may be such that, in the Engineer's opinion, the Work may be
acceptable.
2. Defective work discovered before expiration of the warranty period will

be rejected, whether or not it has been previously inspected. If rejected,
defective materials or work incorporating defective materials or
workmanship shall be promptly removed and replaced.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-1
________________________________________________________________________
1.1. GENERAL
1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary
construction and support facilities for easy access.
2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet (9m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.
3. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before

Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after substantial completion will be
permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
1.2. TEMPORARY ROADS AND PAVED AREAS
Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate to support loads
and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction period. Locate temporary
roads and paved areas within the construction limits indicated on Drawings.
1. Provide a reasonably level, graded, well-drained sub-grade of satisfactory soil

material, compacted to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density in the top 6
inches (150 mm).
2. Provide gravel paving course of sub-base material not less than 3 inches (75 mm)
thick; roller compacted to a level, smooth, dense surface.
3. Provide dust-control treatment that is non-polluting and non-tracking. Re-apply

treatment as required to minimize dust.
1.3. TRAFFIC CONTROLS
Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of temporary roads with public roads.
Include warning signs for public traffic and “STOP” signs for entrance onto public
roads. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 DEWATERING FACILITIES AND DRAINS
Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 for construction activities included

in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain Project site,
excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide

temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is
completed.
1.5 PROJECT SIGNBOARD
1. Contractor has to installed and maintain a new signboard as per drawing and
specifications mentioned herein below.
______________________________________________________________________________
2. General: Prepare project signboard and other signs in sizes indicated. Install signs
where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not
permit installation of unauthorized signs.
The Contractor shall maintain of internal illuminated sign boards for the site consisting
of:
 Aluminum Frame to match the Architectural finishing of the Building.

 Flex face fascia – Digital Printing
 Electrical Fittings (Fluorescent tubes, Transformers, Wiring, Starter etc.)
are all European made.
 Internal Structures in Aluminum Sections.
 Cladding back side of the Sign Cabinet by Aluminum Sheet.
(Size and height shall be as per sign writer to include)
Each board shall be lettered by a skilled sign writer to include:
 Project Name
 Owner’s Name
 Owner’s Representative Name
 Consultant & Sub-Consultant Name and Address
 Contractor’s & Sub-Contractors Name and Address
The signboard shall also include illuminated photograph of the perspective of the
building in a size (as per approved drawing)
Large scale layout shall be prepared and submitted for the Engineer/Client’s approval
before fabrication. No advertising material other than the above will be permitted.
The sizing and layout of sub-contractors or manufacturers signboards to be provided
with the approval of the Engineer/Client.
3. Submittal
 Shop Drawings (including layout, shape, color, size, dimension …etc),

design, R.C. footings, bracing detail shall be submit to Engineer/ Client for
approval.
4. Warranty
 Unless otherwise directed by Engineer/ Client, signboard shall be

warranted for min. period of 2 years against manufacturing defect and
other defects.
1.6 WASTE DISPOSAL FACILITIES
Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from

construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or
unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
1. If required by Authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly

labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited.
______________________________________________________________________________
2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on project. Indicate types of
waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide
detailed information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials.
Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be
used to dispose of all waste materials.
1.7 JANITORIAL SERVICES
Provide janitorial services on a daily basis for temporary offices, first aid stations,
toilets, wash facilities, lunchrooms, and similar areas.
1. Construction
a. Temporary Offices: Provide temporary offices of approval construction (pre-

fabrication porta-cabin) as per selection of Engineer/ Client.
b. Interior Materials in Offices: Unless appointed by Engineer/ Client, Interior
materials shall be but not limited to:
* Provide re-silent floor covering and painted gypsum wallboard walls and
acoustical ceiling. Provide operable windows with adjustable blinds and insect
screens. All materials shall be approved by Engineer/ Client.
c. Lighting for offices: Fluorescent to all rooms, 500 lux at desktop height, exterior
lighting at entrance doors.
d. Fire Extinguishers: Appropriate type fire extinguisher at each office and each
storage area.
e. Interior Materials in Storage Sheds: As required to provide specified conditions
for storage products.
2. Environmental Control
a. Heating, Cooling, and ventilating for offices: Automatic equipment (split units) to
maintain comfort conditions, heating and cooling.
b. Storage spaces: Heating and ventilation as needed to maintain products in
accordance with Contract Documents; adequate lighting for maintenance and
inspection of products.
3. Engineer / Client Site Office
a. Client’s Representative’s Site Offices ( 1 No. Room)
(Size 3500 x 3500 mm) shall have but not limited to the following:
1 No. Desk (L Shape) size (2000 x 1000 mm) approx. including armchair
1 No. Table for drawings size 1500 x 1000 approximately
2 No. Visitor chairs with coffee table
1 No. Lockable filling cabinet 2600 x 400 x 1500 mm approx.
1 No. Multi line telephone handset with zero facility
1 No. Meeting Table
6 No. Arm Chairs
1 No. Drawings Holders
1 No. Individual Toilet (W/C, Basin, Mirror & waste Bin)
1 No. Waste Bin (Plastic with cover)
b. Consultant Site Office ( 3 No. Rooms)
Each office (Size 3500 x 3500 mm) shall have but not limited to the following:
______________________________________________________________________________
1 No. Desk (L Shape) size (2000 x 1000 mm) approx. including armchair
1 No. Table for drawings size 1500 x 1000 approximately
2 No. Visitor chairs with coffee table
1 No. Lockable filling cabinet 2600 x 400 x 1500 mm approx.
1 No. Multi line telephone handset with zero facility
1 No. Meeting Table
6 No. Arm Chairs
1 No. Drawings Holders
1 No. Individual Toilet (W/C, Basin, Mirror & waste Bin)
1 No. Waste Bin (Plastic with cover)
c. Other Facilities
1. Meeting Rooms (Size 8700 * 4000 mm) shall have but not limited to the
following:
1 No. Meeting Table size 1500 x 6000 min.

16 No. Chair (with arms)
1 No. White Board with movable screen for Projector
1 No. Multi Line telephone handset with zero facility
1 No. Waste Bin (plastic with cover)
2. Male Toilets with multiple facilities as per drawings. (Consisting of: W.C,
basins, shower with mirrors and waste bins.
3. Female toilets with multiple facilities as per drawings. (Consisting of: W.C.,
basins with mirrors and waste bins).
4. Suitable shared kitchen each included but not limited to the following:
1 No. Refrigerator
1 No. water Cooler
2 No. waste Bin (plastic with cover)
1 No. Cooker range – 1 hot plates electric
1 No. Coffee Machine
1 No. Kettle
Minimum of 2000mm length floor cabinet with stainless steel sink and min. 2000
mm wall cabinet.
Crockery for coffee and tea making.
Tea sets for 16 persons (cups), Coffee sets for 16 persons, 16 Nos. Glasses,…etc.
5. Tel/Electrical Room:
Tel. operator & server for Client & Engineer.
6. Reception Area
1 No. Reception counter
6 No. Chairs
1 No. Tea Table
7. Sample Room (8700 x 4000 mm)

______________________________________________________________________________
8. I.T. Requirements for the Client’s and Engineer’s
QTY
Item Description / Specification
Client Engineer Total
a- Server & PCs
Processor
Server Dell Power Pentium Xeon 3.0 or above. 3 HD – 300 G or
Edge 2800 above, NIC-1 GB, Keyboard, Optical Mouse, 0 1 1
17’ LCD Monitor, interface network card
Intel Core i7 - cache (24 MB) or above. HD-

Desktops Mini 6TB or above, RAM 36 GB or above, Video
Tower or Lap top Card 2 GB, CDRW-DVDRW ROM, 22” LCD 1 4 5
view sonic Monitor multi media – HD.
b- Printers / Copiers / Scanners
Printer Color A3 / HP-HP 7500 A wide format e-all-in-one

A4 and scanner Printer- E9102. 1 4 5
c- Communication
Internet Business
1 4 5
1
Internet Lease 512 kbps
Line 1 1 2
Telephone
1 4 5
Land Lines Land Lines / Local with zero facilities
Telephone Land Lines / International 1 4 5
PABX Ericsson
1 4 5
Business Phone 50 Cabinet, 50 Extensions
Telephone Ericsson Digital + Analogue
Headsets 1 4 8
d- Backup Storage
Backup device Overhead Super DL Tape 320 external drive /

single tape HP Storage Works SLDT 320 GB External 1 1 2
tape Drive
Backup Tapes DLT Tapes 1 4 5
e- Digital Imaging & Display
Data Projector Projector

1 1
Digital Video Sony DVD handy cam, DVD-R/-RW/+RW
1 1
Camera compatible
f- Power & surge protection
g- Software
Antivirus Trend 1 4 5
______________________________________________________________________________
Micro small & medium business – SMB-

Client/Server/Messaging
MS Office Microsoft
Professional Office Professional 2007 including MS 1 4 5
Project
CAD & graphics AutoCAD 2012
1 4 5
S/W
Revit Autodesk Software (latest version) with
1 4 5
comprehensive Training Courses / sessions
Notes:
1- Brands & models are indicative of standard & specification required.

2- Communication & network hardware to be reviewed as necessary.
3- Installation & configurations as per the contract.
4- Warranty for all Computers & devices listed above shall be valid till satisfaction
complete date of the works included hardware & software
a. Provide adequate number of waste basket, ash trays, coat hangers, mail trays in
each room/ hall etc.
b. All external doors should be provided by door closer as the choice of Engineer /
Client.
c. Stationery (shall be appointed by Engineer / Client) shall be provided by the

Contractor for the whole duration of the works.
d. Stationery, cartilage paper, ink, color ink, and all other items required for operating
and maintenance of above machines shall be provided by the Contractor for whole
period of the works at his experience.
e. The Contractor has to provide qualified laborers for serving the staff of the Client &
and staff of the Engineer for whole period of works as follows:
f. ( 1 ) No. of qualified laborers for Engineer’s rooms.
g. Shaded Parking shall be provided, numbers, detail & location shall be provided by
Engineer/Client
END OF SECTION
STH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-1
________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1. GENERAL
2. Where equivalent products are specified, or where alternatives are proposed, these
products claimed by the Contractor as equivalent shall be comparable in
construction, type, function, quality, performance, and, where applicable, in
appearance. Where specified equivalents are used in the stipulated price for the
Work, they shall be subject to final approval by the Engineer.
3. Products delivered to the project site for incorporation in the Work shall be
considered the property of the Client.
1.2. PRODUCT HANDLING
1. Manufacture, pack, ship, deliver and store products so that no damage occurs to
structural qualities and finish appearance, nor in any other way be detrimental to
their function or appearance, or both.
2. Ensure that products, while transported, stored or installed, are not exposed to an
environment which would increase their moisture content beyond the maximum
specified.
1.3. STORAGE AND PRODUCTION
1. Store products on site or in storage sheds with secure protection. Prevent damage,
adulteration, staining and soiling of materials while stored.
2. Store manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.4. SPECIFIED PRODUCTS
1. Products specified by manufacturer's name, brand name or catalogue reference

shall be the basis of the bid and shall be supplied for the Work without exception in
any detail, subject to allowable substitutions as approved by the Engineer and the
Client.
2. For products specified by reference standards, the onus shall be on the supplier
to establish that such products meet reference standard requirements.
1.5. SCHEDULING OF PRODUCT DELIVERY
1. Verify that products supplied by all sections are ordered from suppliers in sufficient
time to ensure delivery for incorporation in the work within the time limits established
by approved construction schedule. Schedule delivery of products to ensure no
delay in the progress of the Work and provide delivery access and unloading areas.
2. Obtain confirmed delivery dates from product and supplier.
3. Immediately inform the Engineer should supplier's confirmation of delivery dates

indicate that project completion may be delayed.
S.T.H.
________________________________________________________________________
4. Submit copies of purchase orders and confirmations of delivery dates for products
as may be requested.
5. Submit copies of all material and product delivery notes to the Engineer.
1.6. SUBSTITUTION OF PRODUCTS DURING PROGRESS OF WORK
1. Products substituted for those specified or approved, or both shall be permitted only
as approved. Substitute only a product that is of equal or superior quality to the
specified product as approved, and with no addition to the contract price. If only a
product of inferior quality is available and acceptable to the Client, the contract price
shall be adjusted accordingly as approved by the Engineer.
2. Submit, with request for substitution, documentary evidence that substituted

products are equal to, or superior to, approved products and a comparison of price
and delivery factors for both specified or approved products, and proposed
substitute.
1.7. WORKMANSHIP
Unless otherwise specified in a more detailed manner, workmanship shall be of the

highest quality recognized by the trade executing the work in accordance with
standard practices, by the best methods recommended by the manufacturer of the
product, and as approved by the Engineer.
1.8. DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS AND WORK
1. Products and work found defective not in accordance with the specifications will be
rejected for incorporation in the Work whether or not incorporated in the Work.
2. Replace rejected products and work with no delay after rejection.
1.9. CONCEALMENT OF MATERIAL
1. Conceal pipes, ducts, tubing and wiring in the floor, wall and ceiling construction
of finished areas.
2. Arrange to have mechanical and electrical work laid out well in advance of concrete
placement and furring installation so that provisions may be made for proper
concealment.
1.10 FASTENINGS
1. Include in the work of each section necessary fastenings, anchors, inserts,
attachment accessories, and adhesives.
2. Install metal-to-metal fastenings fabricated of the same metal or of a metal which will
not set up electrolytic action causing damage to fastenings or components, or both.
Use stainless steel fastenings for exterior work, and where attached to, or contained
within, exterior walls and slabs.
S.T.H.
________________________________________________________________________
1.11 Estidama Pearl Rating System Requirements:
A. All construction equipment and materials during the construction stage to be used in the
project shall be Asbestos Containing Material (AMC’s) Free from site and from the building
after completion and/or to be removed from refurbished building if required. This credit
requirement builds on Cabinet Resolution No.39 of 2006 Concerning Prohibiting import,
Production and Utilization of Asbestos Boards and extends the Prohibition to ALL AMC’s.
B. Eliminate Materials or building products containing elements or compounds with the

following R-phrase attribution under EU Risk Phrases (R-Phrases) Listed in Annex III EU
Derivatives 67/548/EEC:
R20 – harmful by inhalation R48 – Danger of serious damage to health by

R21 – harmful in contact with Skin prolonged exposure
R22 – harmful if swallowed R49 – May cause cancer by inhalation
R23 – Toxic by inhalation R50 – Very toxic to aquatic organisms
R24 – Toxic in contact with skin R51 – Toxic to aquatic organisms
R25 – Toxic if Swallowed R52 – Harmful to aquatic organisms
R26 – very Toxic by inhalation R53 – May Cause long-term adverse effects in the
R27 – very Toxic in contact with skin aquatic environment
R28 – very Toxic if Swallowed R54 – Toxic to flora
R29 – Contact with water liberates toxic gas R55 – Toxic to fauna
R31 – Contact with acids liberates toxic gas R56 – Toxic to soil organisms
R32 – Contact with acids liberates very toxic gas R57 – Toxic t bees
R33 – Danger of cumulative effects R58 – May Cause long-term adverse effects in
R36 – irritating to the eye environment
R37 – irritating to respiratory skin R59 – Dangerous for the ozone layer
R38 – irritating to skin R60 – May Impair fertility
R39 – Danger of very serious irreversible effects R61 – May cause harm to the unborn child
R41 – Risk of Serious Damage to Eyes R62 – Possible risk of impaired fertility
R42 – May Cause sensitization by inhalation R63 – Possible risk of harm to the unborn child
R43 – May Cause sensitization by skin contact R64 – May cause harm to breastfed babies
R45 – May Cause Cancer R65 – Harmful: may cause lung damage if
R46 – May Cause heritable genetic damage swallowed
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.
STH EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-1
____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1. GENERAL
The tender documents and addenda there to form an integral part of this
1.2. JURISDICTIONAL AUTHORITIES
Where reference is made to jurisdictional authorities, it shall mean all authorities

who have, within their constituted power, the right to enforce the laws of the place
of the building.
1.3. FIRE PREVENTION AND SAFETY
Maintain clear emergency exist paths for personnel and emergency vehicles at all
times.
1.4. FIRE SEPARATIONS
Ensure that fire separations are installed to maintain total integrity and that they
are not diminished or breached by work following their installation.
1.5. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
Maintain roads and sidewalks clear of construction materials debris, including

excavated material. Clean roads and sidewalks as frequently as required to
ensure that they are cleared of materials debris and excavated material to be
standards acceptable to the local authorities having jurisdiction, and to the
Engineer and the Client.
1.6. REFERENCES STANDARDS
1. Whenever reference is made in this specification to British Standards or Standard

Codes of Practice or other equivalent standards, the issue current at the date of
issue of this Contract Document shall be deemed to apply unless stated
otherwise.
2. Have a copy of each code, standard and specification, and manufacturer's

directions, instructions and specifications, to which reference is made in the
specifications, always available at construction site.
1.7. LAND
The Contractor shall arrange with the relevant authorities the provision of all
land, way leaves and easements for the Permanent Works and the Contractor
may, where approved by the Engineer, so far as they are available, use the same
for temporary purposes.
In case of land required for temporary purposes, such as workshops, work yards,
offices, storage of materials, the Contractor will be responsible for all authorization
and permits necessary from the relevant, and will be deemed to have included the
costs for this in his cost for the project.
S.T.H.
____________________________________________________________________________
1.8. USE OF SITE
The following provisions shall be deemed to apply to the possession and use of the site.
1. The land and other places outside the Site shall be used strictly in accordance
with the instructions of the Engineer.
2. The Contractor shall at any time move any vehicles, machine, vessels, or any
other obstruction within his control that may be required by the Engineer to be
moved.
3. The Contractor shall maintain access for the inspection of the Works belonging to
the Client or other Statutory Authorities which lie within the Site or elsewhere.
4. The Contractor shall not use any portion of the Site for any purpose not connected
with the Works unless the prior written permission of the Engineer shall have been
obtained.
1.9. ACCESS TO THE WORK
The actual route to be used by the Contractor between the public highway and the
Site of the Works is to be agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer prior
to the start of the Works. All movement of the Contractor's plant and personnel
and all supporting transport shall be restricted to such agreed routes, and the
Contractor shall be responsible for the installation, maintenance and removal of
such temporary access as necessary.
1.10. TRANSPORT OF MATERIALS AND PLANT
The Contractor is to ensure that damage to any public or private roads, footpaths
or tracks used by any vehicles or plant proceeding to or from the Site shall be kept
to a minimum and he shall be responsible for the cost of all repairs necessary to
restore such roads, tracks, or footpaths to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the
local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.11. SERVICES
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the supply of water,
electricity, telephone, compressed air and other services to the Works, Temporary
Works and Plants and shall provide and maintain all pipes, cables and fittings
which may be necessary to carry such services to his operations.
1.12. DRINKING WATER
The Contractor shall provide an adequate supply of drinking water, with all
necessary drainage, on the Site and shall make all the necessary arrangements.
The number, capacity and location of the installations shall be to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
1.13. SANITARY CONVENIENCES
Sanitary conveniences for the use of persons employed in the Works shall be
provided and maintained by the Contractor to the extent and locations as shall be
approved by the local authority concerned.
S.T.H.
____________________________________________________________________________
1.14. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. This Contractor is responsible for quality control of the Work in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
2. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: Coordinate requirements of

all local jurisdictional authorities.
3. QUALITY CONTROL
1. Ensure that Work meets specified requirements.
2. Schedule, supervise and coordinate inspection and testing.
3. Maintain accurate job records of the Work.
1.15. JOB CONDITIONS
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the Work proceeds under
conditions meeting specified environmental requirements and that such conditions
are maintained.
2. Ensure that protection of adjacent property and public and the Work is adequately
provided and maintained.
3. The Contractor shall take upon himself the full and entire responsibility for the
sufficiency of plant, centering, scaffolding, timbering, machinery, implements sleeves,
openings in structure etc. and generally for all means used for the fulfillment of the
contract even though previous approval has been received from the Engineer .
4. Existing Buildings and Services
The Contractor is to execute the Works in such a manner that he does not damage
or interfere with existing services which are located in proximity to the Site. The
Contractor shall accept responsibility and shall allow in his rates for any damages or
interference which may be caused to these services due to the execution of the
works and shall carry out the necessary repairs at his own expenses and to
satisfaction of the Engineer.
5. Drains, Water Courses, etc.
All drains, pipes, channels, etc. temporarily cut through or disturbed by the
Contractor's execution of the Works are to be restored so that the water flowing in
them may continue to flow in as full and free a manner as it did before the
disturbance.
6. Materials on and under the Site
All materials in the excavation of the Site shall belong to the Client. Such materials
must not be removed from the Site without the consent of the Engineer.
S.T.H.
____________________________________________________________________________
7. Levels
a) Datum
The datum to which all levels are shown on drawings, is to be established on

site with the Engineer.
b) Surface Levels
Immediately before any work or any section or part section of the Works
commenced, all necessary levels shall be taken and agreed with the Engineer.
8. Slips
The Contractor shall during this Contract and as ordered by the Engineer make good
any damages or defect caused by slips to any cuttings, excavations or embankments
and shall do any necessary work to prevent or remedy the same.
9. All structures and buildings erected by the Contractor on the Site at his own
expense during the course of construction and until the completion of the Works be
deemed to become the property of the Client and the Contractor shall not demolish
or remove any buildings or part of any buildings without the written permission of the
Engineer. On completion of the Works, they shall become the property of the
Contractor who shall, if so ordered, remove them entirely with all drains and water
mains and restore the surface of the land to its original condition or other reasonable
condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Maintenance of the buildings during the
Contract will be sole responsibility of the Contractor.
The whole cost of the installation, use, charges and their maintenance during the
period of the Contract and the removal on the completion of the Contract shall be
included in the Contract Price.
The Client shall not at any time be liable for the loss or damage of the aforesaid
works.
10. Site Sign
The Contractor shall provide and erect one fully illuminated sign of minimum
overall size 660 x 300cm with the names of the Employer, the project, the
Contractor, and the Consultant clearly painted and illuminated in a manner and
design and position approved by the Engineer. Include on the sign an illuminated
perspective 300 x 120cm. Sign to be maintained throughout the duration of the
project.
11. Construction Waste Management
The General contractor, working collaboratively with all subcontractors and

specialty contractors (e.g. demolition), shall develop a Construction and
Demolition Waste Management Plan (CDWMP) prior to the start of construction
and demolition activities. The CDWMP shall include subcontractors activity log
register to be filled-up in a weekly basis and must identify the materials to be
diverted from landfill and indicate whether the materials will be segregated on-site
or commingled. If materials are planned for salvage, the plan must indicate their
planned use.
S.T.H.
____________________________________________________________________________
The Contractor shall implement monthly monitoring of the CDWMP, and achieved
a minimum final recycling/salvage rate of 30% of construction and demolition
waste (by weight or volume). This figure excludes all hazardous waste that must
undergo specialized treatment.
The Contractor will be held responsible for compliance of the requirements of

Estidama (SM-R2), no deferring of responsibility to subcontractors can be
accepted.
1.16. EXAMINATION
1. SITE: Examine the site, and ensure that each Section performing Work related to
site conditions has examined it.
2. Ensure by examination that all physical features at the Work, and working
restrictions and limitations which exist are known, so that the Client is not
restricted in his use of the premises for his needs.
3. PREVIOUSLY COMPLETED WORK:
1. Where dimensions are required for proper fabrication, verify dimensions of

completed Work in place before fabrication and installation of Work to be
incorporated with it.
2. Commencement of the Work will constitute acceptance of site conditions and

previously executed Work as satisfactory.
1.17. CONSTRUCTION MEASUREMENTS:

1. Take site dimensions before installation of Work to be incorporated
commences.
2. Before commencing installation of Work, verify that its layout is accurately in

accordance with intent of drawings, and those positions, levels, and
clearances to adjacent Work are maintained.
3. Before commencing installation of Work, verify that all clearances required by

jurisdictional authorities can be maintained.
1.18. RELATED MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK

1. Coordination of the installation of systems specified in Divisions 15 and 16,
including the inter-relating operation and functioning between components of a
system and between systems, is the responsibility of those performing the
work of Division 15 and 16, with final coordination the responsibility of the
Contractor.
2. Ensure that service poles, conduit, wires, fill-pipes, vents, regulators, meters
and similar project service work are located in inconspicuous locations.
Conceal pipes, ducts control systems and electrical distribution systems within
wall or ceiling construction.
S.T.H.
____________________________________________________________________________
3. Ensure that the integrity of required fire separation is maintained.
1.19. COORDINATION
1. Review Contract Documents and advise the Engineer of possible conflicts

between parts of the work before preparation of shop drawings, ordering of
products or commencement of affected work.
2. Coordinate and be responsible for all Work in each area and Work in which
works depends to facilitate mutual progress, and to prevent conflict between
parts of the Work.
3. Ensure that setting of drawings, templates, and all other information

necessary for the location and installation of materials, fixtures, equipment,
holes, sleeves, inserts, anchors, accessories, fastenings, connections, and
access panels are provided by each Subcontractor whose Work requires
cooperative location and installation by other Subcontractor's, and that such
information is communicated to the applicable installer. Contractor shall
coordinate to ensure that above mentioned items are to the Engineer's
approval, but this approval will not relieve the Contractor of any
responsibilities in the future.
4. Provide interference and equipment placing drawings to ensure that all

components will be properly accommodated within the spaces provided.
5. Remove and replace Work installed in error which is unsatisfactory for

subsequent Work at no extra cost to the Client.
1.20. REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
1. The Contractor as soon as possible after award of the Contract, shall itemize
in the form of two lists, all documentation as required by the Contract.
The first list shall itemize all operating instructions, maintenance manuals,
spare parts and similar data which are required to allow the Client to properly
operate the premises.
2. The second list shall itemize all dates, operating, instructions, maintenance
manuals, record drawings, spare parts, warranties and the balance of the
documentation as applicable to the project and as required by the Contract
which will later be required to be submitted and approved by the Engineer
before he will issue his final certificate for payment.
1.21. PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS

Record as the Work progresses, Work constructed differently from that shown on
Contract Drawings. Coordinate preparation of record drawings as described in
Section 01300 Submittals.
S.T.H.
____________________________________________________________________________
1.22. CUTTING AND PATCHING

1. Before cutting, drilling or sleeving structural load-bearing elements, obtain the
Engineer's approval of location and methods in writing.
2. Do not endanger Work or property by cutting, digging, or similar activities. No

Subcontractor shall cut or alter the Work of another Subcontractor unless such
cutting or alteration is approved by the latter Subcontractor.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.
S.T.H. FACILITY OPERATION 01800-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1. GENERAL
The tender documents and addenda thereto form an integral part of this
1.2. CLEANING
1. Use only cleaning materials which are recommended for the purpose by both
the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned and of the cleaning material.
2. Ensure that cleaning operations are scheduled to avoid deposit of dust or

other foreign matter.
3. Each section shall supply the Contractor with instructions for final cleaning of
his work, and for inclusion in project data books as specified in each trade
section and in Section 01300, Submittals.
1.3. FINAL CLEANING
1. Coordinate final clean-up.
2. Include in Work final cleaning by skilled cleaning specialists on completion of

construction.
3. Remove temporary protections and make good defects before the

commencement of final cleaning.
4. Replace glass and mirrors that have been broken, damaged and/or etched
during construction, or which are otherwise defective.
5. Remove, dust, stains, paint spots, soil, grease, fingerprints, and

accumulations of construction materials, interior and exterior to the building.
Perform cleaning in accordance with installer's instructions for each material.
6. Final cleaning shall include:
1. Washing of interior floors and vacuuming of ceilings and walls.
2. Cleaning and polishing of: glass; mirrors; porcelain; enamel, and finish
metal; and washroom accessories, tile and finished flooring, glazed
surfaces and hardware.
3. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition, clean and replace

filter of mechanical equipment.
1.4. SUBMITTAL
1. Submit maintenance manual, project record drawings and extra stock as

specified in Section 01300.
2. Submit other documents as required by specified take-over procedures.

S.T.H. FACILITY OPERATION 01800-2
_____________________________________________________________________________
1.5. FINAL INSPECTIONS AND CLOSEOUTs
1. Submit proposed close-out procedures and schedule of inspection to the

Engineer's approval before final inspections commence.
2. Arrange for, conduct and document final inspections, close out and take-over at
completion of work of this specification in accordance with local close out and
take-over procedures.
3. After the date of substantial completion of the total project is established, all
subcontractors shall complete within sixty (60) days all deficient work including the
required documentation. All deficient work not completed within the above time
will be completed by the Client and the cost of this work will be deducted from the
Contractor's final progress claim.
1.6. SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION

1. Prior to final inspection, demonstrate the operation of each system to the Clients
and Engineers.
2. Instruct personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and

systems, using provided operation and maintenance data as the basis for
instruction.
1.7. DOCUMENTS
1. Collect reviewed submittals (Section 01300) and assembly documents executed
by Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.
2. Submit material prior to final application for payment. For equipment put into use
with the Client's permission during construction, submit within ten (10) days after
start-up. For items of work delayed materially beyond date of Substantial
Completion, provide updated submittals acceptance as start of warranty period.
3. Provide warranties fully executed and notarized.
4. Submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract amounts,
previous payments, and monies remaining due.
1.8. PROJECT COMMISSIONING

1. Expedite and complete deficiencies and defects identified by the Engineer.
2. Review maintenance manual contents (operating, maintenance instructions,

record "as built" drawings, spare parts, materials) for completeness.
3. Submit required documentation such as, warranties, certificates of approval or

acceptance from regulating bodies.
4. Review condition of all equipment which have been used in the course of the
Work to ensure turning over at completion in "as new condition" with warranty,
dated and certified from time of substantial performance of the work.
5. Arrange and coordinate instruction of the Client's staff in care, maintenance and
operation of building systems and finishes by suppliers or Subcontractors.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. ESTIDAMA – PBRS v1.0 REQUIREMENTS 01900-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. It is contractor’s responsibility to ensure full coordination between approved Architectural,

Structural, MEP, DOT, Civil Defense and all other services drawings, calculations, simulations
and Building Rating System (PBRS) requirements as a dominant.
B. In case there is any discrepancy, the contractor has to raise it to the Consultant and project
PQP for the final decision.
C. This project is classified under Estidama 1 Pearl Building Rating System; Contractor shall
achieve the required credits to obtain Estidama 1 Pearl Building Rating System.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 Architectural Requirements:
A. Contractor has to visit the site prior to submit his final price, check the site condition, take into
consideration all requirements which needed to start the work until handing over the project.
B. Plants selection for landscaping must follow the NS-R3 credit requirements for 1 pearl.
C. Plant Protection:
1. The existing site shall be protected by temporary fencing and the related environmental
agency NOC shall be carried out by the contractor prior to construction.
2. The protection recommendation and transplantation measures of the specialist

Environmental professional shall be implemented during the construction for any natural
habitats available along the site and Contractor will be held the responsibility of that.
D. Plant Monitoring and Maintenance:
1. The Contractor shall select species that requiring minimal maintenance and choose long
term management measures e.g. place plants with similar water requirements in an area
to match any irrigation demands, select irrigation methods which account for seasonal
variations.
2. The Contractor shall select the most adaptable to harsh environmental conditions which
include those of rapid early growth, adequate height, longevity, wind firmness, dense
crown, drought resistance and salt tolerance.
E. Plant Nursery
1. The Contractor shall establish and maintain an approved suitable holding nursery on
adjacent to the site. It shall be protected from construction works, shaded from sun and
wind and shall be provided with an approved and adequate supply of irrigation water.
F. All shading elements must have a minimum solar reflectance index (SRI) of 29.
G. Roof finish coat shall have SRIs> 78
2.2 CIVIL Works (Structural) Requirements
A. Roof construction Average U-value must not exceed than 0.2 W/m2K.
B. Above-Grade Wall Construction Average U-Value must not exceed than 0.3 W/m2K.
______________________________________________________________________________
C. Vertical Glazing average U-Value must not than 2.1 W/m2K
D. Vertical Glazing SHGC must not exceed 0.22
2.3 Drainage Requirements
A. The results of commissioning systems shall be reviewed and approved by Independent

Commissioning Agent.
B. Water fixture must meet Estidama PW-R1 credit requirements.
C. Exterior water meter has to comply with Estidama and shall be as per PW-R2 credit
requirements.
D. Legionella Management Plan must be applied to all water-based systems.
E. Irrigation System shall be:
1. Drip irrigation system with water monitoring leak detection.
2. Use of moisture retention additives (e.g. pebbles or bark) that improve the soil water
holding capacity in order to reduce evaporation from the soil.
2.4 Electrical Requirements
A. The Energy meter has to comply with Estidama and shall be as per RE-R2 credit requirement.
B. The results of commissioning systems shall be reviewed and approved by Independent

C. Lighting power densities shall comply with ASHARE space by space method.
D. Electrical water heater thermal efficiency design value shall comply with ASHARE for the
system and shall be achieved and to be demonstrated during the commissioning.
2.5 HVAC Requirements
A. The design value of CoP to be achieved as per RE-R1 credit requirement and to be
demonstrated during the commissioning.
B. Refrigerant & gaseous suppression system shall have Ozone Depletion Potential of zero.
C. The results of commissioning systems shall be reviewed and approved by Independent

D. Air ventilation must comply with the outdoor air ventilation rates required by ASHRAE
62.1:2007 and has to comply with LBi-R1 credit requirement.
E. The distance between air intake of fresh air and exhaust must be more than the values TABLE
5-1 “Air Intake Minimum Separation Distance” of ASHRAE 62.1:2007; (more than 5m.)
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. PQP shall convene an Estidama Workshop including representatives of the Employer, PM,
CM/CS, ICA, Employer’s FM and Contractor for the purpose of establishing a Construction
Stage Estidama Plan.
B. PQP shall convene periodic Estidama Progress meetings as necessary to ensure timely
completion of related work and submittals.
C. Execute the Work in compliance with all applicable PBRS requirements and all other Project
requirements.
3.2 PBRS REQUIRED CREDITS (MANDATORY)
A. Provide PBRS Construction Rating submittals for the following required PBRS credits and as
directed by PQP.
1. IDP-R1 : Integrated Development Strategy
a. Comply with PBRS Design Rating Process Chart for IDP methodology for assuring
appropriate construction team involvement.
b. Participate in the PBRS Design Rating strategy for smooth transition between design
and construction stages.
c. As directed by PQP, participate with other members of the Estidama Team in creating
a narrative of construction stage IDP processes, listing successes and challenges
during construction stage.
2. IDP-R2 : Tenant Fit-Out Design & Construction Guide
a. IDP-R2 only applies to Core & Shell Projects.
b. No contractor requirements
3. IDP-R3 : Basic Commissioning
a. Provide documentation of commissioning activities as directed by PQP and PBRS

requirements in this credit.
4. NS-R1 : Natural Systems Assessment
a. No Contractor requirements.
5. NS-R2 : Natural Systems Protection
Where natural significant and valuable assets were presented in NS-R1 credit the Natural
Systems Protection, Mitigation or Compensation plan and supporting studies must be
prepared by a suitably qualified ecological professional. In Addition, the contractor must;
a. Comply with Design Rating Protection/Mitigation/Compensation Strategy Report

which identifies setback requirements from natural system assets.
______________________________________________________________________________
b. Submit plan for Natural Systems Protection during Construction in accordance with
the design stage Protection/mitigation/Compensation Strategy Report and as directed
by PQP.
c. Submit dated photographs of successfully protected areas/features.
d. Provide as-built site map delineating disturbance areas, construction activity limits,
protected areas, mitigated areas, setback zones and buffer areas and compensation
areas.
6. NS-R3 : Natural Systems Design & Management Strategy
Updated Natural Systems Design and Management Strategy including:
a. Reporting of any landscape/ habitat design alterations or procedures;
b. Report on any failures and rectification work undertaken; and
c. Confirmation of the appointment of a management and maintenance organization

(with a contract running for at least 5 years), if management not to be undertaken by
the local municipality. The confirmation must contain details of individuals responsible
and their duties in line with the strategy.
7. LBo-R1 : Plan 2030
8. LBo-R2 : Urban Systems Assessment
9. LBo-R3 : Outdoor Thermal Comfort Strategy
a. Provide as-built drawings and photographs of applicable shade structures and planted
areas.
b. Provide product submittals of all purchased and installed elements of shade structures
demonstrating compliant outer surface SRIs.
10. LBi-R1 : Healthy Ventilation Delivery
a. Provide as-built mechanical system drawings marked-up to clearly show distances

between air intake and exhaust air or other discharge points and the distances from
the air exhaust points to any defined public realm areas.
11. LBi-R2 : Smoking Control
a. Provide photographs of posted no smoking and health impact signage and facilities
for collecting ash and cigarette ends.
b. Provide as-built plans indicating the location of dedicated outside smoking areas and
facilities for collecting ash and cigarette ends which clearly indicate their distance
from entrances, operable windows and air intakes.
c. Provide copy of training material for security staff.

______________________________________________________________________________
12. LBi-R3 : Legionella Prevention
a. Comply with Legionella Prevention provisions as per PBRS requirements in this

credit.
b. Provide excerpts of O & M Manual of relevant water and HVAC systems.
c. Provide as-built drawings of air conditioning systems.
d. Provide as-built drawings of other water-based systems.
13. PW-R1 : Minimum Interior Water Use Reduction
a. Provide manufacturer information for all installed interior water fixtures and fittings
indicating flow rates and flow regulation systems.
b. Provide manufacturer information for all installed appliances including information on

their water use.
c. Provide photographic evidence confirming installation of specified fixtures and

appliances.
14. PW-R2 : Exterior Water Monitoring
a. Provide manufacturer’s data and as-built drawings indicating type, extent and
locations of all metering and central monitoring system.
b. Provide photographic documentation of installation of meters and central monitoring

system.
15. RE-R1 : Minimum Energy Performance
 Contractor shall provide:
a. Third party certificate confirming the U-value or K-value for each opaque envelope
component (block, insulation, rock wool etc.)
b. Third party certificate confirming the average U-value of glazing system and
windows besides the SHGC of the glass.
c. Third party certificate confirming the U-value or K-value of insulation of the roof.
d. Where cover is provided by structures such as canopies or other architectural

elements, evidence showing that the outer surface of the shading element have a
minimum Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) of 29.
e. LUX calculation of the lighting fittings showing the light power density (LPD) space
by space.
f. Data sheet or evidence of EWH efficiency stating compliance.
g. The supplier of the A/C must provide test certificate for CoP at AHRI conditions at
full load prior to procurement and confirm this to the UPC.
16. RE-R2: Energy Monitoring & Reporting
a. Provide energy system schematics illustrating the metering strategy confirming that
the required level of metering has been achieved.
______________________________________________________________________________
b. Provide Manufacturer’s data and as-built building services layout drawings clearly
indicating the type, extent and locations of all metering and central monitoring
system.
c. Provide photographic evidence confirming installation of specified meters and

central monitoring system.
17. RE-R3 : Ozone Impacts of Refrigerants & Fire Suppression Systems
a. Provide manufacturer’s information for all installed refrigerants and gaseous fire
suppression systems including the ODP of each refrigerant and gas is zero.
18. SM-R1 : Hazardous Materials Elimination
a. Provide evidence of materials purchase indicating that no asbestos-containing

materials (ACM’s) or chromate copper arsenate (CCA) treated timber were used in
the project.
b. If ACMs are found existing on site, provide evidence of disposal at an approved

hazardous waste facility.
19. SM-R2: Basic Construction Waste Management
a. Provide Waste Management Report indicating compliance with PBRS requirements

in this credit.
b. Provide detailed receipts of haulers, materials reclaims, recycling and processing

facilities and waste materials receivers.
c. Provide a tabular summary of items recycled and salvaged from their source within
the project, their total weight or volume, the name and location of reclaimed and
recycled materials haulers and markets for the recyclable materials.
d. All of the waste manifests must be 100% completed and stumped by the hauler.
20. SM-R3 : Basic Operational Waste Management
a. Provide as-built drawings and photographs indicating location of the storage and
disposal facilities and waste removal vehicle access areas.
b. Provide Updated waste transfer inventory outlining the contracted receiver of

waste. This should include information indicating that the carrier, recycling and
disposal facilities are licensed
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. EARTHWORK 02300-1
________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1. GENERAL CONDITIONS
1. The tender documents and addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification
and must be read in conjunction herewith.
1.2. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1. Section 01300: Administrative Requirements
2. Section 01400: Quality Requirements
3. Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement
1.3. SITE CONDITIONS
1. EXAMINE SITE: When visiting the Site prior to submitting his Tender, the Contractor
shall determine the nature of all earth, soils or other materials that he shall encounter
during the Works and the quantities, locations and suitability to meet the requirements
as specified herein and in all Contract Documents. The Contractor shall base his
Tender on his own determination of soil conditions. After award of the Contract, no
claims for extras based on source of soil information or failure of the Contractor to
examine the Site and perform his own independent soil investigation and subsurface
investigation will be entertained.
2. LEVELS: Existing grade levels shown on drawings are furnished in good faith for the
guidance of the Contractor.
3. Before commencing the works the Contractor shall obtain information pertaining to
bench marks and shall subsequently establish all additional supplementary bench
marks as directed by the Engineer. All pertinent existing levels, lines locations must be
checked and verified before commencing the works. All the above shall be at expense
of the Contractor.
4. TOPOGRAPHY: The Contractor shall, before commencing any excavation, survey the
whole of the site and the existing sidewalks, curbs and surrounding roads and shall
prepare plans and cross sections at intervals not exceeding 25m. All sections must
show existing levels and proposed subgrade levels . The plans and sections shall,
when finally and mutually agreed, be signed by both the Engineer and the Contractor as
truly representing the configurations of the site.
5. On completion of the excavation of any area, the Contractor shall survey the site and
prepare plans and sections accordingly. The plans and sections shall, after agreement
and signature, shall be deemed to represent the final configurations.
________________________________________________________________________
6. UNDERGROUND SERVICES:
1. Notify public utilities or municipal authorities in advance of planned excavations
adjacent to their services. Take care not to damage or displace encountered known
and unknown services. When brace and support active services. Where repairs
become necessary, use the following procedure:
a. Known Services: Repair at no expense to the Client.
b. Unknown Services: Forward complete breakdown of estimated cost of such

work. Proceed immediately with repairs upon receipt of written approval to
proceed with such repair work.
c. In the case of damage to an essential service, notify the Engineer immediately

and repair service under the Engineer's direction. Inform the Engineer of
services encountered which require adjustment, relocation or abandonment and
arrange for disconnection and capping of pipe.
1.4. STORAGE, DELIVERY, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
1. Stockpile materials in designated areas. Stockpile each type of fill material and
granular materials separately to prevent integration.
2. Keep surrounding roads free of soil deposits from material hauling trucks. Load
trucks carefully to prevent spillage and wind drift.
3. To protect neighborhood from wind-blown sand and dust, sprinkle with water entire
excavated area and stockpiled excavated materials when necessary.
4. Protect adjacent property from damage which may occur from any cause in the
performance of the work.
5. Do not interfere with using existing buildings that are to remain or in use.
6. Take precautions against the movement, settlement or collapse of sidewalks, and

public services adjoining property and be liable for all damage to the same.
7. Before commencing Work verify the location of survey monuments in the areas in
which the Work is to be executed.
8. Take precautions against movement or settlement of existing buildings to remain.

Provide and place bracing and shoring necessary for the safety and support of the
structure and execute the Work in a manner to prevent movement, settlement,
damage or injury caused thereby or resulting there from.
9. Supply and maintain adequate and proper planking, cants and bridging over
municipal sidewalks, curbs, paving and boulevards to protect these areas from the
pass of vehicles and damage caused by them.
10. SHORING AND TRENCHING: In addition to requirements of local authorities, carry

out in accordance with requirements of the local authorities for construction projects,
British Institution of Occupational Safety and Health and all other applicable
regulations.
________________________________________________________________________
11. Protect existing trees, shrubs and plants not designated for removal. Suitably wrap
trunks of trees susceptible to damage by construction work. Remove wrappings at
job completion.
1.5. SOIL REPORT
1. This clause shall apply to soil mechanics science as well as foundation engineering
to the Site where the work is being constructed, to determine the suitability of the
foundation proposed for the works to be constructed on the Site.
2. Soil Investigation: Soil investigation shall be carried out at the Contractor's

expense, by an experienced and specialized technical firm who employs the
services of an experienced soil mechanics engineer and who has the necessary
facilities to carry out all boring, classification, soil testing on the Site and in the
laboratory, and can provide the required technical reports and recommendations.
The soil and foundation engineering firm proposed to carry this must be approved
by the Engineer.
3. Code of Practice: Soil investigation shall be carried out in accordance with the
recommendations of BS 5390 or according to the applicable ASTM recommended
practice.
4. The report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist or can occur on the
site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from the report,
changes in the design and construction of foundations will be made.
5. EXTENT OF SOIL INVESTIGATION WORK: The Contractor shall bore in locations

approved by the Engineer boreholes each not less than 20 meters deep. The
number of field and laboratory tests needed shall not be less than that
recommended by best practice and adequate with respect to the Works and the
Site.
6. Soil investigation work shall be done in accordance with the recognized standards,
local Regulations and Bylaws.
7. The Engineer reserves the right to request additional and supplementary boring and
tests if, in his opinion, they are required.
8. Supervision: All field work shall be continuously supervised by a trained and

specialized technician under the employment and responsibility of the specialized
firm appointed to carry out the work.
9. SOILS REPORT: a comprehensive soil report shall be submitted, to include the

following:
1. Soil profile and logs of boring.

2. Results of laboratory tests.
3. Elevation of the water table.
4. The physical and chemical characteristics of the soil.
5. The safe allowable bearing capacity of the soil.
6. The total and differential settlement.
7. The most suitable type of foundation design recommended.
8. The depth of foundations recommended.
9. The depth to which piling shall be carried out in the case of piled foundations.
________________________________________________________________________
10. The strength of the bedrock and its capacity to take the pile loads carried down to
it, including for the existence of gaps, caverns or shallow bedrock below the
bottom of the pile.
11. Fill materials and compaction densities.
12. In the event unsuitable soil is encountered during the performance of works
under this Contract or when directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry
out exploratory excavations and carry out such tests as may be required to
determine the suitability of such material and what steps are to be taken at those
areas.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
1. FILL MATERIAL TYPE 1: For sodden areas or site grading work shall be clean,
excavated material free from waste materials, debris, rubbish, organic or cohesive
matter and rocks larger than 75 mm in diameter. If a sufficient quantity of material is
not available from the excavation, use imported fill having the same characteristics.
2. FILL MATERIAL TYPE 2: For backfill and fill under paved areas, walks and areas
to receive floor slabs, shall be Granular 'B' material in accordance with local
requirements, well graded and with a maximum aggregate size of 50 mm. Material
shall be maintained at optimum moisture content during placing and while
compacting work is in progress, in strict accordance with inspection engineer's
instructions and to his approval.
3. Imported fill material shall be of selected granular material and obtained from an
approved source and it shall contain no perishable or organic rubbish and no
particles in excess of 150 mm in diameter. The maximum dry density of the
material shall be no less than 1600 kg. per cubic meter.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1. PREPARATION
1. In the area of excavations for the building where there exist foundations of former
buildings which have been demolished to grade level, break out foundation walls,
remove fill debris from basements and break out floor slabs.
2. Clear and remove, from site, obstructions to excavating. Establish and maintain
accurate lines and levels as required. Provide batter boards, line stakes and
templates, and establish permanent reference lines and bench marks required.
3. DEWATERING
1. At locations where the excavation extends below the groundwater table, the
Contractor shall provide a dewatering system which shall effectively reduce the
hydrostatic pressure and lower the groundwater levels below excavation levels
as required for the safe and proper excavation of the work , which shall result
in obtaining a stable, dry sub grade for the performing of subsequent
operations .
________________________________________________________________________
2. The Contractor shall design dewatering methods and settling basins so that
neither during the initial operations nor during the construction operations any
critical amount of soil, sand or silt is removed.
The Contractor shall submit also for review and approval by the Engineer
complete shop drawings showing the type of dewatering and groundwater
control system proposed by the Contractor.
3. The Contractor's submittal drawings shall indicate the arrangement, location

and depth of the proposed dewatering system, a complete description of the
equipment and materials to be used and the procedure to be followed, the
standby equipment, standby power supply, and the proposed location or
locations of points of discharge of water.
4. The Contractor shall provide necessary facilities for dewatering, during, or

diversion of stream flow when necessary for the protection of the works or as
directed by the Engineer.
3.2. EXISTING UTILITIES
1. Before commencing any construction work, the Contractor shall obtain from the
various Utility Departments, the location of any existing utilities on the Site.
Active utilities on the Site shall be carefully protected from damage, relocated
or removed as required by the work. When an active utility line is exposed
during construction, its location and elevation shall be plotted on the Record
Drawings and both the Engineer and the utility owner notified in writing.
2. Inactive or abandoned utilities encountered during operations shall be removed.

The location of the such utility shall be noted on the Record Drawings and
reported in writing to the Engineer.
3. Use all necessary precautionary and protective measures required to maintain

existing utilities, services and appurtenances that must be kept in operation. In
particular, the Contractor shall take adequate measures to prevent undermining
of utilities and services presently in service.
4. Protect existing or new utilities and services where required by the Contractor's
operations and/or as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be
responsible for bracing and supporting utilities and services to prevent
settlement, displacement or damage to same.
5. The Contractor shall not remove any utility or service line, conduit or any
structures, above or below the ground, within the limits of the works until
receiving written permission from the respective service Utility Department and
written permission from the Engineer.
6. The locations of the existing service facilities may not be indicated on the
Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall make his own determination of the
existence and locations of such utilities. The Contractor shall adjust to the
finished grade or level all existing utilities within the limits of the Contract.
________________________________________________________________________
3.3. EXCAVATION: GENERAL
1. Excavate with due regard for the peculiarities of soil conditions and take precautions
to protect adjacent foundations and property.
2. Remove subsoil and excavated material not required from the site, including
material excavated by other sections. Under no circumstances shall material
declared to be unsuitable for fill be stored next to material declared to be suitable for
fill. Excavated material shall not be piled up along the sides of excavations in a
manner that will overload or increase the danger of collapse of excavation sides.
3. All surplus stockpiled materials remaining upon completion of the backfilling work
shall be removed from the site.
4. Excavate to the extent, elevations and depths required for completion of work,
leaving sufficient space for removal of formwork and application of waterproofing.
Excavate sections shown on drawings to allow finishing sections to install their work
to the required thicknesses.
5. Keep excavation free of water (storm water, percolation water or subsoil water) by
dewatering or system of drainage as required, and provide pumps, suction and
discharge lines of sufficient capacity. Maintain until such time as a permanent
drainage system is installed or until the Engineer's approval for removal of
equipment is obtained. Take all necessary measures to prevent the flow of water
into the excavation. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and clear away on
completion any equipment necessary together with temporary drains and the like.
Under no circumstances shall concrete be poured, fill placed, pipes laid or
appurtenances installed in excavations containing water.
6. Keep bottoms of excavations clean and clear of loose materials levelled and
stepped at changes of levels except for excavations made for drainage purposes
which are to the slope as required.
7. If removal of the earth causes displacement of adjacent earth, remove disturbed

earth at no additional cost to the Owner.
8. Remove soft, wet or unconsolidated ground, quicksand and organic material

encountered in excavating and fill the void with well compacted, clean, dry fill of
quality as herein specified.
9. After completion of excavation and prior to placing concrete or fill, notify the
Engineer so he may make the inspection of exposed bearing surfaces. In event,
founding levels are subjected to rain or other moisture after inspection and approval
but prior to installation of concrete, notify the inspection engineer to re-examine all
exposed bearing surfaces. Do not place concrete until re-examination has taken
place and approval given.
10. Excavate for footings to firm, undisturbed subsoil capable of safely supporting
respective soil bearing values shown.
11. Should the nature of subsoil at depths shown prove to be unsatisfactory for placing
of structural work thereon, then upon Engineer's written order, excavate to greater
depth until satisfactory bottom is reached.
________________________________________________________________________
12. If excavations reveal seepage zones, running water or other unexpected subsurface
conditions which may necessitate revisions or additions to any drainage system,
inform the Engineer immediately for remedial action.
13. Excavated surfaces scheduled to receive concrete skim slabs shall be protected
from excessive traffic and other disturbances and shall not be left exposed for
extended periods of time. Coordinate work with Section 03300 to allow for
immediate installation of skim slabs.
3.4. EXCAVATED NATIVE MATERIAL
1. The work of this section includes excavation of all types of strata including rock. All
excavated material including broken asphalt and base material; broken concrete;
abandoned foundations and rubble fill at the site of previous buildings; oil storage
tanks, catch basins, sumps and related piping, piling; concrete sidewalks and
paving; and the like, shall become the property of Contractor and shall be removed
from the site and disposed of in location to be determined by Contractor in
accordance with governing regulations. Obtain Engineer's approval prior to using
excavated material for backfill and protect as necessary.
2. Piling not interfering with construction of the project may be cut off a minimum 600
mm below finish grade and abandoned or as directed by the Engineer.
3.5. TRENCH EXCAVATING
1. Excavate with suitable machinery or by hand as may be necessary to depths and

dimensions shown or required.
2. Cut and trim sides of trenches evenly and as near vertical as possible, shore as
required to prevent cave-ins.
3. Keep the bottoms of trenches clean and clear of loose material. Slope or grade as
required. Hand trim at least the slast 100 mm of trench excavations to ensure
minimum disturbance to load bearing value of trench bottoms.
4. Bottoms of trenches shall be graded evenly to secure the required falls for pipes
and to ensure bearing over the entire length of the pipe. Bottoms of trenches shall
be firm, undisturbed soil, and free from rock, stones, hard substances, rubbish, etc.
Where rock, stones or other hard materials occur, these shall be removed for a
depth of at least 150 mm and the space backfilled with selected sand or granular
material compacted in accordance with backfill requirements. No such material
shall be excavated or backfilling carried out without the approval of the Engineer.
3.6. BACKFILLING
1. Proceed promptly with backfilling as the building progresses. Proceed only when
work to be backfilled has been inspected and approval to backfill has been
obtained. Place backfill in 200 mm thick maximum layers. Compact each layer
before placing next. Maintain optimum moisture content to achieve required
densities.
2. Backfill evenly on both sides of foundation walls to avoid unequal fill pressures on
walls. Care shall be taken when filling or backfilling to avoid any wedging action or
eccentric action upon or against the structure of work.
________________________________________________________________________
Before placing of fill, the surface of the sub-grade shall be compacted at optimum
water content to the same percent of maximum dry density required of subsequent
layers and by mechanical means where possible.
3. Fill over-excavations under bearing surfaces and footings, or within pyramid
enclosed by 7 in 10 slope from bearing surface with concrete of same strength as
specified for footings. Fill over-excavation under all other areas with approved
sand/gravel mixture and compact as directed. Fill over excavation at no additional
cost to the Owner.
4. Withdraw shoring material during backfill.
5. Compaction equipment to be of size and type to permit required compaction without
causing lateral forces resulting in displacement of foundation walls. Exercise
caution in this regard to avoid movement of foundations.
6. Take care to avoid damage to waterproofing or displacement of waterlines, drains,
conduit and other underground installations.
7. Prior to placing fill or concrete floor slabs on earth, consolidate subgrade to obtain
same compaction specified for fill material.
8. Compact with mechanical tampers, areas adjoining vulnerable building components
which cannot be thoroughly compacted by drawn equipment.
3.7. TESTING
1. Sequentially test each stage of backfill commencing at founding elevations and
continuing through the installation of subsequent lifts or material and compaction
thereof.
2. Do not proceed with the installation of any material until the preceding surface or
layer meets design criteria. Engage and pay for an independent testing agency to
conduct testing in addition to tests noted in the paragraph above, and as described
in Division 1.
3.8. COMPACTION
1. Density of fill in place shall be in accordance with the latest revision of A.S.T.M.
D698-70, 95% Standard Proctor Density for all fill unless specifically noted
otherwise. Fill to the underside of the asphalt base – with 100% Standard Proctor
Density. The Engineer is authorized to check the degree of compaction at any place
in any layer from time to time. Costs of such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
2. Maintain optimum moisture content during backfill and fill compaction to achieve the
required density. Deposit in layers of such thickness that equipment being used for
compacting can produce specified density.
3. Puddling or flooding with water for consolidating granular fill will not be permitted.
The addition of water is limited only to the extent required to provide optimum
moisture level of fill material.
4. During and immediately after levelling, thoroughly compact each layer of fill by use
of compaction equipment of size and type to permit required compaction without
causing lateral forces resulting in the displacement of foundation walls. Exercise
caution in this regard to avoid movement of foundations.
5. After a period, adequate to reveal settlement has passed, place additional fill and
compact in all depressions. Make good any subsequent settlement without extra
cost to the Client.
END OF SECTION
STH BASES, BALLASTS, PAVEMENTS AND APPURTENANCES 02700-1
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This Section includes solid concrete interlocking pavers, pre-cast concrete pavers, and
stone pavers set in latex Portland cement setting beds over concrete bases.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of unit pavers, erect mock-ups for
each form and pattern of unit pavers required to verify selections made under
sample submittals. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using
materials and the same base construction including special features for expansion
joints and contiguous work as indicated for the final unit of work.
1. Construct mock-ups on site as a part of finished construction in location and

size directed by the Employer Representative but in no case less than 1500 x
1500 mm for each paver type.
2. Notify Employer Representative one week in advance of the dates and times
when mock-ups will be erected.
3. Demonstrate the quality of workmanship that will be produced in the final unit
of work.
4. Obtain the Employer Representative's acceptance of mock-ups before the

start of final unit of work.
5. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition

as a standard for judging completed units of work.
a. Retain mock-ups as part of finished construction upon Employer

Representatives for judging completed units of Work.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of setting beds. Provide artificial shade and
wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with
temperatures of 38 deg C and above.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS/ PRODUCTS
A. Unit Pavers: Provide selections as or equal to those listed in Division 9 "Finish

Legend" and approved by the Employer Representative.
___________________________________________________________________________
2.2 COLORS AND TEXTURES
A. Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed unit
paver surfaces and joints complying with the following requirements:
1. Match color and texture indicated by reference to manufacturer's

standard designations for these characteristics.
2.3 CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS
A. Solid Concrete Interlocking Pavers, General: Solid, dense concrete paving units
made from a "no slump" concrete mix cast under extreme pressure with high-
frequency vibration to achieve a compressive strength exceeding 55 mPa, and that
meets or exceeds applicable requirements of ASTM C 936.
1. Maximum Water Absorption: 5%.
2. Freeze-Thaw Properties: Meeting or exceeding the requirements of

Section 8, ASTM C 67.
B. Pre-cast Concrete Plaza Pavers, General: Solid, pre-cast concrete paving units of
concrete having an average compressive strength of 35 MPa, with an absorption
rate of less than 5%, that show no weight loss after 50 freeze-thaw cycles. Provide
auto-claved units having a gauged tolerance of plus-minus 1 mm in any direction.
2.4 GRANITE PAVERS
A. Granite Building Stone Standard: ASTM C 615.
B. Association Standard: The National Building Granite Quarries Association's

(NBGQA) "Specifications for Architectural Granite".
C. Granite Selections: As indicated in Finish Legend.
2.5 LIMESTONE PAVERS
A. Limestone Building Stone Standard: ASTM C 568, classification as follows.
1. Classification: III (High-Density) dolomitic limestone.
B. Limestone Selections: As indicated in Finish Legend.
2.6 LATEX MODIFIED PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR SETTING BED MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
B. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 with a fineness module of 2.25 plus or minus 0.10.
C. Latex additive (water emulsion) describe below, serving as replacement for part or all
of gauging water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer
for use with job-mixed Portland cement and aggregate and not containing a retarder.
___________________________________________________________________________
1. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
D. Water: Clean, free of materials detrimental to strength or bond of mortars.
E. Mortar Mixes: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturer's

instructions relative to mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing
containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce setting-bed and
joint materials of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics.
Discard mortars and grout when they have reached their initial set.
1. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting-bed Mortar: Proportion and mix portland

cement, aggregate, and latex additive for setting bed to comply with directions of
latex additive manufacturer and as necessary to produce a stiff mixture with a
moist surface when the bed is ready to receive pavers.
2. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Proportion and mix of

Portland cement, aggregate, and latex additive for a slurry bond coat to comply
with directions of latex additive manufacturer.
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Joint Patterns: As indicated on drawings.
1. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1.5 mm unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) and a
tolerance of 10 mm in 3 m from level or slope as indicated for a furnished
surface of paving.
2. Hand tight Joints: Where unit pavers are indicated without spaced joints, set
unit pavers with sand-filled hand-tight joints.
3.2 LATEX MODIFIED PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR APPLICATIONS
A. Saturate-concrete sub-base with clean water several hours before placing setting-
bed. Remove surface water about 1 hour before placing setting-bed.
B. Apply cement paste slush coat over surface of concrete sub-base about 15 minutes
prior to placing setting-bed. Limit area of slush coat to avoid its drying out prior to
placing setting-bed. Do not exceed 1.5 mm thickness for cement slush coat.
C. Apply mortar setting bed over cement paste slush coat immediately after latter has
been applied. Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness at sub-grade
elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated.
D. Mix and place only the amount of mortar setting bed that can be covered with pavers
prior to initial set. Cut back, bevel edge, remove, and discard setting bed material
that has reached initial set prior to placing pavers.
E. Wet pavers several hours before laying unless their initial rate of absorption (suction)
when subjected to testing by method described in Section 9 of ASTM C 67 is less
than 3 / 4 oz. per 30 sq. inches of immersed area. Do not lay pavers with free
moisture on the surface.
F. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately prior to placing pavers
on green or wet setting bed, apply uniform 1.5 mm thick slurry bond coat to bed or
back of each paver with a flat trowel just prior to placing it on end.
___________________________________________________________________________
G. Tamp and beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contract
with setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each
paver in single operation prior to initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already
set and disturb pavers for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03200-1
________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1. The tender documents and Addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification
1.2. SCOPE OF WORK
1. This section describes and specifies work required for plain and reinforced
concrete, including formwork intended to be used for the Project under the
Contract in accordance with the Drawings, Bill of Quantities and as directed by the
Engineer.
1. Prior to the commencement of Concrete Work, the Contractor shall submit

samples of concrete components to the Engineer before sending them to the
laboratories for testing, to establish the probability of the materials passing tests for
specified requirements.
2. The Contractor shall have the tests made, at his own expense, in the laboratories
approved by the Engineer.
3. Testing
1. All concrete delivered to the Site shall have a minimum strength of 400
Kg/cm2 and be accompanied by manufacturers test certificates showing
compliance with BS 1881. Copies of these certificates shall be given to the
Engineer.
2. Notwithstanding initial compliance with the foregoing clauses, concrete which

at the time of proposed usage is more than 6 weeks old from the date of
manufacture shall be tested for fineness, setting time, strength and soundness
in the presence of the Engineer and evidence of the satisfactory nature of the
cement shall be submitted before use. Costs of all tests are deemed to be
included in the Contract Price.
4. Tests for Water
1. When required by the Engineer the quality of the mixing water shall be
determined by the Standard Method of Test for Quality of Water to be used in
Concrete, as specified in BS 2690 & B.S. 1328 or ASTM D 512 & D 516.
1.4. MONOLITHIC SMOOTH FINISH SURFACES

1. All concrete surfaces which are not in acceptable condition and which are require to
be surface-finished as designed herein, shall be rubbed to a smooth and uniform
texture with a carborundum brick and clear water as soon as the forms are removed
and the concrete is ready to hone.
2. Concrete surface shall be free from honeycombing, air holes, fins and projection
arising from defective mixing, placing or formwork.
________________________________________________________________________________________
1.5. DELIVERY
1. The rate of delivery of concrete during concreting operations shall be such, as to
provide for the proper handling, placing and finishing of the concrete. The rate shall a
be such that the interval between batches shall not exceed 20 minutes.
2. Protection of Steel Reinforcement: Steel reinforcement shall be protected at all

times from injury. When placed in the work, it shall be protected from dirt, detrimental
scale, paint, oil, loose rust, grease or foreign substances.
1.6. SUBMITTALS
1. Trial Mixes (Design Mixes Only)
1. The Contractor shall submit not less than 3 weeks before the
commencement of manufacture of preliminary trial mixes the following
information to the Engineer in respect of each grade of concrete.
1. Grade of concrete.
2. Title of particular trail mix.
3. The grading of the aggregates.
4. The ratio by weight of all the constituents of the concrete.
5. The expected compacting factor and slump.
6. Full details of the proposed site quality control.
7. Full details of the proposed laboratory for testing.
2. At least six weeks before commencing any concreting in the Works, The
Contractor shall make preliminary trial mixes using samples of aggregates and
cement typical of those to be used.
3. Preliminary test cubes shall be taken from the mixes as follows:-
1. For each grade a set of 6 cubes shall be made from each of 3

consecutive batches. Three from each set of 6 shall be tested at an
age of 7 days and three at an age of 28 days. The cubes shall be
made, cured, stored, transported and tested in compression in
accordance with BS 1881. The test shall be carried out in a
laboratory approved by the Engineer.
2. If it is proposed to use an admixture in the mix then for each grade of

concrete a batch shall be made with a double dose of the additive.
For each of these batches 3 cubes shall be made and 1 tested at
days and 2 at 28 days to determine the likely effect of errors in
dispensing.
3. At each stage of test no cube strength shall fall below the appropriate
minimum specified on the approved drawings.
4. Before commencing the Works, the Contractor shall submit to the

Engineer for his approval full details of the mixes he proposes to use,
with their anticipated average strength, which must be based on the
satisfactory results of these preliminary tests.
________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
1. Cement
1. General
Cement shall be Portland Type I for superstructure and Type II for

substructure, originating from approved manufacturers, obtained in sealed and
labeled bags, each 50 kgs net capacity; name and brand of the manufacturer.
The quality of cement shall conform to the standard Specification for
Portland Cement of ASTM Designation C150 or B.S. 12.
2. Alkali Content
1. The total alkali content (Na2 0 + 0.658 k2 0) shall not be in excess of

0.60 percent by weight of cement when tested in accordance with
"Standard Method for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement ASTM
C114.
3. Expansion Due to Sulphate Exposure
1. The expansion in fourteen days shall be less than 0.045 percent when
tested in accordance with "Standard Method of Test for Potential
Expansion of Portland Cement Mortars Exposed to Sulphate ASTM
C452.
4. Heat of Hydration
1. The heat of hydration shall not exceed 70 calories per gram and 80
calories per gram at seven days and twenty-eight days respectively
when tested in accordance with "Standard Method Test for Heat of
Hydration of Portland Cement ASTM C186.
5. Autoclave Expansion
1. The autoclave expansion shall not exceed 0.80 percent when tested in
accordance with "Standard Method of Test for Autoclave Expansion of
Portland Cement ASTM C151.
2. Aggregates
1. General Requirements
1. Aggregates shall conform to the requirements in ASTM C33 and BS
882 in addition to other requirements specified herein.
3. Fine Aggregates
1. All fine aggregates for concrete shall conform to Standard
Specification for Concrete Aggregates of ASTM Designation C-33.
________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Organic Impurities : The color shall have an intensity not darker than two-
thirds the intensity of the standard color solution (not darker than Plat 2) as
determined by the Standard Method of Test for Organic Impurities in
Sands Concrete of ASTM Designation : C-40.
3. Chlorides Soluble in : Not more than 0.10 percent by weight dilute Nitric
Acid when expressed as sodium chloride (Na C1).
4. Total Acid Soluble: Not more than 0.50 percent by weight Sulphates when
expressed as sulphur trioxide (S03).
5. Silt: Not more than 2 percent
6. Mortar Strength : Compression ratio not less than 95 percent.
7. Soundness: Weighted average loss when subjected to 5 cycles of the

soundness test using magnesium sulphate, not more than 10 percent.
4. Coarse Aggregates
1. General Requirements: All coarse aggregate for concrete shall conform to

Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates consist of crushed stone, having
hard, strong durable pieces, free from adherents and deleterious substances
Coarse aggregates shall be washed thoroughly with demineralized water to ensure
compliance with the Specifications. The minimum aggregate size shall be 20mm
down grade.
2. Grading
1. Coarse aggregate, when tested according to the requirements of ASTM,
shall meet the following gradation and shall by uniformly graded within the
limits stated in Table 3.3.D.4.1 here below:
Table 3.3.D.4.1
Percentage by weight Passing
Grading Grading
(3/4" to No. 4) (3/8" to No. 4)
1 inch 100 -
3/4 inch 95-100 -
1/2 inch 35-70 100
3/8 inch 20-55 95-100
No. 4 0-10 25-50
No. 8 0-5 0-10
No. 200 0-1 0-1
3. Combined Aggregates
Approved fine and coarse aggregate in each batch of concrete shall be combined
in proportions as approved by the Engineer.
________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Aggregate for Mortar

General Requirements: Aggregate for mortar shall conform to the Standard
Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar of ASTM Designation: C-144
and shall consist of hard, strong, durable, uncoated mineral or rock sparticles,
free from injurious amounts of organic or other deleterious substances.
5. Water
1. Quality of Water
1. The water used for ice production, chilling, rinsing, concrete
production and for curing concrete shall be clean and free from
contamination. A complete chemical analysis of the water used
from each source shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval at the trial mix and thereafter as provided in these
specifications.
2. The pH of the water for mixing and curing of concrete shall not
be less than pH 6.5 or more than pH 8.5.
6. Admixtures
1. General :
1. Admixtures in concrete shall be used only when approved in

writing by the Engineer and shall conform to the requirements of
the ASTM Standard Specifications Designation C-494-71 Type
B and Type for Water Reducing and Retarding Admixtures.
2. Costs of such admixtures, sampling and testing shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
7. Corrosion Inhibitor Admixture
1. General :
The corrosion inhibiting admixture shall be added in an aqueous

solution form at batching plant and must be specially formulated for
Gulf area of hot weather. Also the manufacturer’s of this product
must be ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 certified such as CORTEC’s
CORPORATION (USA) product MCI-2005(GS). Together with the
above certificates the Manufacturer / supplier should be consulted in
a specific circumstances. (If mentioned on the drawing)
The corrosion Inhibiting Admixture product, when used in accordance

to manufacturer’s recommendations, it should impart changes to
three important properties of concrete compared to similar concrete
without the product. The changes are increased corrosion resistance
(Durability), No adverse effects on physical properties of concrete and
effective even where corrosion is active.
The Migrating Corrosion Inhibitor (MCI) when used in accordance

with manufacturer’s recommendation, it should form a suitable
alternative for compliance with design to the relevant sections of BS
1881, ASTM G109.
________________________________________________________________________________________
The corrosion inhibitor must comply with an international standard

such as ANSI / NSF standard 61 certification states that it can
come in contact with potable water.
2. Mix Design :
The Migrating Corrosion Inhibitor (MCI) should be incorporated

into the mixing water for the purpose of determining the water
cement ratio of the concrete.
The Contractor must submit with the above design mix a letter of
undertaking by the local MCI supplier in which it states that he
would carry out his full duties and responsibilities under the
relevant section of these special specifications.
3. Supervision and Control :
During the course of the construction of the works, the MCI

supplier should be advised to be present and carry out the
necessary quantity control of the corrosion inhibitor addition and
supervision. The Contractor / Readymix manufacturer must give
all necessary and possible assistance to the supplier in order for
him to carry out his duties.
2.2. CONCRETE COMPOSITION AND STRENGTH

1. General
1. All concrete mixes shall be made in accordance with the
requirements of BS 5328 or similar approved Standard(s) and as
designated on drawings approved by the Engineer.
2. Before any concrete is placed in the Works, all sources of concrete
materials shall be approved by the Engineer and satisfactory
evidence provided of compliance of those materials with the
physical and chemical tests detailed in the approved Standards.
The Contractor shall submit full details of each mix he proposes to
use in the Works, including its characteristic Works strength, its
principal intended use, source of materials, type of cement, mix
constituents by weight, minimum cement content, max. water
cement ratio, aggregate nominal size and grading limits, workability
etc. Such information shall be based on the results of Trial Mixes
as detailed in the following Clauses.
3. Concrete mixes to be used in various parts of the works shall be

such that their strengths be equal to or better than those indicated
below.
4. The following tables give the recommended grades of structural c
concrete and their relevant composition and
strength:
________________________________________________________________________________________
Grade of Cube N/sq.mm.

Concrete Strength 7 days
N/sq.mm 21 Days
Prelim Test Working Test Prelim Working

Test Test
C40-45 40 36 32
C35-40 35 32 28
C15 - 15 - 10
Grade of Max Agg. Min.Cement Max.W/C Compressive

Concrete Size mm. Content Ratio Strength
kg.cu.m. (28 days)
C 50 20 425 0.4 50 N /mm2
C40 20 375 0.4 40 N/mm2
C20 20 275 0.5 20 N/mm2
2. Concrete Testing
For test purposes two sets of three standard 15cm cubes shall be taken from
each day's pour.
Test specimens shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C31: one
set at 7 days and the other at 28 days shall be tested in accordance with
ASTM C39. The average results of strength tests of laboratory controlled
cubes for any portion of the job must be higher than the minimum allowable
compressive strength at 28 days by at least 15 kg/cm2 with no individual
result less than 85% that strength otherwise, the Engineer reserves the right
to order changes in proportions of aggregates or water content of the
concrete, or both for the remaining portions of the job, without extra cost to
the Client.
Reports of test shall be submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours of being

tested and shall include the name of the job, date, location of pour, design
strength, mix date , slump, compressive strength, age and condition of test
cylinder, type of fracture and type of curing; report shall be in sextuplet.
In case admixtures are to be used, concrete tests shall be conducted with the
admixture incorporated to establish that specified strengths are achieved and
that densities are not reduced.
3. Record of Test Cubes
1. Up to date records shall be kept by the Contractor at the Works of

positions in the Works of all batches of concrete, of their grade and of
all test cubes, cores, or other specimens taken from them. Copies of
these records shall be supplied to the Engineer.
________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Changes in Materials or Mix Proportions
1. Neither the mix proportions nor the source of supply of materials shall
be altered without the prior approval of the Engineer.
5. Failures to Meet Test requirements
1. If the strength of the test cubes, the mix proportions of prescribed mixes
or the limits on cement content do not comply with those specified or if
in the opinion of the Engineer, the concrete fails to meet the specified
requirements in other respects, the concrete in that part of the works
from which the sample has been taken will be considered not to comply
with the specified requirements.
2. As and where directed by the Engineer, cylindrical core specimens of

150 mm nominal diameter shall be cut from the hardened concrete in
the Works for the purpose of examination and testing. The cutting
equipment and the method of doing the work shall be approved by the
Engineer. The specimens shall be dealt with in accordance with BS
1881. Prior to preparation for testing the specimens shall be made
available for examination by the Engineer. The results of such test shall
not nullify the fact of non-compliance with the Specification.
3. If the specified requirements have not been met, the Contractor shall
propose such remedial action as may be required. Such action is
subject to the Engineer's satisfaction and approval.
6. Water/Cement Ratio
1. The water/cement ratio of a batch of concrete should not exceed the

specified maximum value by more than 5% of that value.
7. Cement Content
1. Where a minimum or maximum cement content of designed mix is

specified and compliance is assessed by observation of the batching or
from autographic records, the cement content shall not be less than
95% of the specified minimum or more than 105% of the specified
maximum.
2. Where compliance is assessed from the results of analysis tests on

fresh concrete, the content shall not be less than 90% of the specified
minimum or more than 110% of the specified maximum.
8. Slump Tests
1. Slump tests shall be carried out periodically to ensure the appropriate

water cement ratio in accordance with Standard Method of Test of
Slump of Portland Cement Concrete of the ASTM Designation: C-143.
2. Sample shall be taken within 30minutes after the truck has arrived on
site.
3. The required slump for C50 and C40 concrete will not exceed 75mm
and for C20 concrete will not exceed 125mm - all as per ACI Code.
4. Concrete temperature shall be between 27°C and 35°C

________________________________________________________________________________________
2.3 MIXING OF CONCRETE
1. General
1. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, concrete shall be machine

mixed.
2. Truck Mixing
1. Truck mixers, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer shall be of the

revolving drum type, watertight, and so constructed that the concrete can
be mixed to ensure a uniform distribution of materials throughout the mass.
All solid materials for the concrete shall be accurately measured in
accordance with Section 2.7, and charged into the drum at the
proportioning plant. Except as subsequently provided, the truck mixer shall
be equipped with a tank carrying water. Only the prescribed amount of
water shall be placed in the tank unless the tank is equipped with a device
by which the quantity of water added can be readily verified. Truck mixing
shall be continued for not less than 50 revolutions after all ingredients
including water, are in the drum. Mixing shall begin within 30 minutes after
the cement has been added to the aggregate. When cement is charged
into a mixer drum containing water or surface-wet aggregate and when the
temperature is above 30 degrees, the limit shall be reduced to 15 minutes:
the limitation on time between the introduction of the cement to the
aggregates and the beginning of the mixing may be waived when, in the
judgment of the Engineer, the aggregates are sufficiently free from
moisture, so that there will be no harmful effects on the cement.
3. Partial mixing at the Central Plant
1. When a truck mixer provided with adequate mixing blades is used for
transportation, the mixing time at the mixing plant may be reduced to 30
seconds and the mixing complete in the truck mixer. The mixing time in the
truck mixer shall be as specified under Section 2.4.3.1 for truck mixing.
4. Plant Mix
1. Mixing at a central plant shall conform to the requirements for mixing at the
Site and shall conform to the applicable requirements of the Standard
Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete of ASTM Designation: C-94.
2. Cement
It should be noted that the cement to be used shall be selected after
careful study of the different types available, and that the chosen variety
shall confirm as closely as possible to the requirements for variation
outlined in ASTM C-917 as follows:
PROPERTY MAX VARIATION
Tricalcium silicate 4%
Loss on ignition 0.5%
Fineness 325 Ccm2/gm (max)
SO3 0.4%
________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Time of Hauling and Placing Concrete
1. If the distance from the mixing plant to the construction site is so great that
between the time of mixing and pouring the concrete, the temperature is
below 40 degrees centigrade and the traveling time is more than 30
minutes, truck mixers must be employed.
2. When truck mixers are used, concrete shall be discharged and placed in its
final position in the forms within forty five (45) minutes after water is first
added to the mix.
6. Delivery
The rate of delivery of concrete during concreting operations shall be such

as to provide for the proper handling, placing and finishing of the concrete.
The rate shall be such that the internal between batches shall not exceed
thirty minutes. The method of delivering and handling the concrete shall be
such as will facilitate placing with the minimum of rehandling and with no
damage to the structure of concrete.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 HANDLING AND PLACING CONCRETE
1. General
1. Prior to pouring concrete in any structure, the Contractor shall secure a

written order to commence from the Engineer.
2. In preparation for the placing of concrete all sawdust, clips, and other
construction debris and extraneous matters shall be removed from the
interior of forms. Struts, stays and braces, serving temporarily to hold the
forms in correct shape and alignment, pending the placing of concrete at
their locations, shall be removed when the concrete placing has reached an
elevation rendering their services unnecessary.
2. Precautions for concreting in hot weather
1. Cooling the mixing water and/or replacing 50% of the mixing water by
crushed ice. Where crushed ice is used it shall be stored at a temperature
that will prevent formation of lumps. The ice shall be completely melted by
the time the mixing is completed.
2. Maintaining the mixing time and the delivery time to the minimum
acceptable.
3. Sprinkling of forms sub-grade and reinforcement with cool water prior to

placement of concrete.
4. Water reducing and retarding admixture shall be used in all concrete work
when the temperature of concrete exceeds 32 degrees centigrade.
5. The water cement ratio inclusive of free surface moisture on aggregates

and any admixtures shall be kept to a minimum.
________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Vibrating Concrete
Concrete during and immediately after depositing, shall be thoroughly compacted.

The compaction shall be done by mechanical vibration subject to the following
provisions:-
1. The vibration shall be internal.
2. Vibrators shall be of a type and design approved by the Engineer. They

shall be capable of transmitting vibration to the concrete at frequencies of
not less than 4500 impulses per minute.
3. Concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers not more than 300 mm thick
except as hereinafter provided. Each layer shall be placed and
compacted before the preceding batch has taken initial set to prevent
injury to the green concrete and avoid surfaces of separation between the
batches.
4. Immediately following an approved discontinuance of placing concrete, all

accumulations of mortar splashed upon the reinforcement bars and the
surfaces of forms shall be removed.
5. The concrete blinding thickness required shall be a minimum of 100mm,

have minimum strength of 100 KG/cm2 and a minimum cement content of
200 Kg/m3 moderate Sulphur resistant concrete as per BS 4027.
3.2. PRECAST CONCRETE CURBSTONES
1. Precast or cast-in-situ curbstones shall be vibrated concrete Class C40, cast in

steel moulds to the dimensions and shapes as directed by the Engineer and shall
be uniform in color, free from cracks, flaws or other defects and with well-defined
arises.
2. The curbstones shall be either prefabricated in standard units of 800 mm long or

cast-in-situ to the lengths as directed by the Engineer’s. Samples of curbstones
proposed to be used shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior to
order or manufacture.
3. The visible face of curbstones facing the road and pathways shall have batter
from the top of the curbstone to the finished elevation of the road pavement and
shall be straight from this elevation to the bottom.
4. Curbstones shall be laid on concrete base Class C20 bedded and jointed with
cement and sand (1:3) mix. Each unit shall be cleaned and saturated with water
before being laid. All curbstones shall be well bedded and settled in place true to
line and level with a suitable wooden maul. Before the joints are mortared, any
curbstones which are set in such manner that their top surfaces are not in correct
alignment, when ordered by the Engineer, shall be removed and reset at the
Contractor's expense.
5. Joint or curbstones shall be not less than 6 mm nor more than 10 mm in width,
and thickness shall be uniform from top to bottom. Joints shall be completely
filled with mortar and shall be pointed before the mortar has set.
________________________________________________________________________________________
3.3. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
1. General
1. Construction joints shall be placed as directed by the Engineer.

Shear keys or inclined reinforcement shall be used where
necessary to transmit shear or bond the two sections.
3.4. FORMWORK
1. General:
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and suitability of the
formwork. The Contractor shall submit a full program of work indicating
the various phases for the erection and removal of forms and the manner
in which he intends to execute all concrete works.
2. Material
1. All forms shall be built of sufficient rigidity to prevent distortion due to the
pressure of the concrete and other loads incident to the construction
operations. Forms shall be constructed and maintained so as to prevent
warping and the opening of joints due to shrinkage of the wood.
3. Workmanship
1. Forms should be inspected by the Engineer prior to installation of

reinforcement.
2. The number and spacing of the Form struts and braces shall be such that
the forms will be braced rigidly and uniformly, lock joints between form
sections shall be free from play or movement.
3. The shape, strength, rigidity, water tightness and surface smoothness of

re-used forms shall be maintained at all times. Forms which are
unsatisfactory in any respect shall not be re-used.
4. All forms shall be treated with oil and saturated with water immediately
before placing the concrete. For members of exposed faces, the forms
shall be treated with an approved oil to prevent adherence to concrete.
4. Removal of Formwork
1. In determining of the time for removal of forms, consideration shall be
given to the location and character of the structure, the weather and other
conditions influencing the setting of the concrete, and materials used in
the mix. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, forms shall remain in
place for the following specified period of time.
- Centering under beams: 14 days

- Floor slabs: 14 days
- Wall sides of beams and other vertically formed surface: 36 hours
2. In general, the forms shall be removed from the bottom upwards. Forms
and their supports shall not be removed without the written approval of
the Engineer. Supports shall be removed in such a manner as to permit
the concrete to uniformly and gradually take the stresses due to its
weight.
________________________________________________________________________________________
3.5. REINFORCEMENT
1. General:
The Contractor shall prepare for his own bar bending schedules from the
information given on the Drawings and as instructed in writing by the Engineer.
The ties, links or stirrups connecting the bars shall be tied so that the bars are
properly braced. The inside of their curved part shall be in actual contact with the
bars, around which they are intended to fit.
2. Type and Quality of Steel Reinforcement.

1. Steel reinforcing shall be high tensile deformed bars conforming to BS
4449, BS4461 or ASTM A615M. The minimum characteristic strength
FY=4600 kg/cm2.
3. Wire: Wire for binding reinforcement bars shall be of soft black annealed mild
steel wire. The diameter of the wire shall not be less than 16 S.W.G. (1.6 mm)
and the binding shall be twisted tight with proper pliers. The free ends of the
binding wire shall be bent inward.
4. Fabrication
Bar reinforcement shall be bent to the shapes shown on the Drawings; Bending
dimensions and Scheduling of bars to be approved by the Engineer. All bars
shall be bent cold, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. No bars partially
embedded in concrete shall be bent except as shown on the plans or specifically
permitted by the Engineer.
5. Placing and Fastening
1. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against

displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement
operations. Locate and support reinforcing by chairs, runners, bolsters,
spacers and hangers, as required. Exercise particular care to maintain
proper distance and clearance between parallel bars and between bars
and forms. Provide spreaders and spacers to hold the steel in position.
Support steel at proper height upon approved chairs.
2. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete

protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold
reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set tie
wires so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete
surfaces.
Provide and place additional reinforcing steel at all sleeves and openings
in beams, slabs and walls as specified on the drawings. Where sleeves
or openings not shown on the drawings interrupt the reinforcement,
consult with the Engineer for instructions for placing and splicing of bars.
3. Distance from the forms shall be maintained by means of trays, blocks,

ties, hangers, or other approved supports. Blocks for holding
reinforcement from contact with the forms shall be precast mortar blocks
of approved shapes and dimensions or approved metal chairs. Metal
________________________________________________________________________________________
chairs which are in contact with the exterior surface of the concrete shall
be galvanized. Layers of bars shall be separated by metal chairs or by
other equally suitable devices. The use of pebbles, piece of broken
stones or brick, metal pipe and wooden blocks shall not be permitted.
Reinforcement in any member shall be placed and then inspected and
approved by the Engineer, before the placing of concrete begins.
4. Minimum cover to concrete shall be comply with ACI-318-08/7.7.1&

ADIBC 2013 721.2.3
5. All reinforcement shall be furnished in the full lengths indicated on the

Drawings. Splicing of bars, except where shown on the Drawings, will not
be permitted without the written approval of the Engineer. Splices shall
be staggered as far as possible. Minimum lap length to be 45 times the
diameter of the bar.
6. Provide shrinkage and temperature reinforcement as indicated on the

drawings at right angles to main top and bottom bars for all structural
slabs unless detailed otherwise on the drawings.
7. Splice length/ development length shall be as per ACI-318-08/chapter 12)
3.6. CURING AND PROTECTION
1. The method, procedure, materials and equipment for curing shall be approved by
the Engineer.
1. Water Curing
1. Emphasis has to be given to the very early and continuous wetting

of all exposed concrete surfaces.
2. Immediately after initial setting and for ten continuous days

thereafter all concrete shall be protected against harmful effects of
sunshine, drying winds. During this period, concrete shall be kept
continuously wet by the continuous supply of the water to wet
Hessian sheets covering all exposed concrete surfaces and
maintained wet by covering with heavy duty sealing polythene
sheet.
3. Curing has to be carried out in accordance with ACI 305 and in
Horizontal Surface:
1. Polythene sheeting should be placed immediately after finishing.
2. After initial set has taken place and in any case not later than 8
hours after pouring, the polythene should be replaced by wet
Hessian which is then to be immediately covered with polythene.
The measure must be taken to ensure that the Hessian is

always wet and continuously supplied with water.
3. After 10 days the Hessian and polythene should be removed

and an approved aluminized or white pigmented resin based
curing compound sprayed on the surface. The rate of application
________________________________________________________________________________________
should be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.
4. Concrete shall be shaded.
Vertical Surfaces:
1. Immediately after stripping, the member should be wrapped with

wet Hessian and then covered with polythene which is to be held
firmly in place. The Hessian must not be allowed to dry out.
2. After an initial curing period of 10 days the Hessian and

polythene may be removed the concrete surface sprayed with
an approved aluminized or white pigmented resin based curing
compound as an alternative to retaining the Hessian and
polythene in place for at least another 7 days.
2. Curing with Curing Media
1. Curing media shall meet all requirements of the Specification for

Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete of
ASTM Designation: C-309 and test for water retention by
concrete curing materials of ASTM Designation: C-156.
2. The compound shall be applied to the concrete surfaces by

means of a sprayer. Ample time shall be allowed for the
concrete surface to harden and to prevent any damage.
3. The compound shall be completely compatible with adhesives,

joint sealants and cement group
3.7. CONCRETE WORK FOR FOUNDATIONS
1. Materials Generally
1. All materials used for plain or reinforced concrete work shall have the
approval of the Engineer and shall be as specified.
2. Cement
1. The cement used shall be Moderate Sulphate Resisting Portland cement

MSRPC (ASTM C150 type 11). Cement complying with BS 12 but
containing not less than 4% and not more than 8% proportion by weight
of tricalcium aluminate C3A. It shall not contain more than 3.0%
proportionally weight of sulphate trioxide S03.
2. Protection of Concrete in Foundations
Not less than 100 mm of blinding concrete shall be placed in a base for
all reinforcement concrete to be placed below ground. All concrete
placed below ground or in filing shall be sulphate resisting as specified.
3.8. FORMWORK REMOVAL

1. The removal of formwork shall be affected in such a manner as will ensure that
no damage to the concrete occurs.
________________________________________________________________________________________
3.9. POLYETHYLENE MEMBRANE

1. Polyethylene vapor barrier membrane,1000 gauge heavy-duty grade shall be
provided on the compacted fill, under all ground level slabs. Membrane shall be
laid with laps as recommended by the manufacturer, according to homologation
sheets. All other concrete surfaces in contact with soil shall be coated with two
layers of hot-applied bitumen paint approved by the Engineer.
3.10. WATERSTOPS
Water stops shall be high water pressure, heavy duty 250 mm wide extruded
PVC with center bulb as manufactured by an approved manufacturer. They shall
be fixed in positions mentioned by the Engineer and in all construction joints
submerged under water in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
3.11. PRECAST CONCRETE LINTELS

Supply and install all recast concrete lintels to all door and wall openings. Check
widths and lengths to match openings required.
3.12. PRECAST CONCRETE CURBS

1. Supply and install all recast concrete curbs to roads and parking areas within the
plot limits.
2. Profile of curb to match profiles approved by the Local Municipality.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. CEMENTITIOUS DECKS AND UNDERLAYMENT 03500-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
The tender documents and Addenda thereto form an integral part of this
specification and must be read in conjunction herewith.
Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement
1. QUALIFICATIONS: Execute the work of this section by a subcontractor who

has adequate equipment and skilled tradesmen to perform it expeditiously.
2. ALLOWABLE TOLERANCE: Levels of finished concrete floors shall be within

6 mm of established elevations in any 6100 mm x 6100 mm square area.
Provide and securely set screeds not more than 3 m apart to required
elevation, using engineer's level. Place concrete and rough screed making
sufficient allowance for compacting of concrete due to machine finishing.
3. JOB MOCK-UP:
1. At a location directed by the Engineer, provide a completely finished sample

area of steel trowel led floor for approval.
2. Approved mock-up will serve as a standard by which subsequent work will be

judged acceptable.
3. REFERENCE STANDARDS: Reference standards quoted in this section refer

to:
1. ASTM C309-74, specification for liquid membrane-forming compounds for

curing concrete.
2. DDENV 206, concrete materials and methods of concrete construction.
4. CO-OPERATION: Ensure that concrete supplied for slabs contains no

admixtures which would be incompatible with floor hardener material.
1.4. JOB CONDITIONS
1. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: Perform work only when

environmental conditions are as specified in Section 03300.
1. Provide adequate moisture, sun shades and wind barriers to prevent too
rapid drying of concrete during hot weather.
______________________________________________________________________________
2. Protection: Ensure that finished concrete floor areas are protected from
abrasion from a foot or wheeled traffic, and from damage caused by
spillage of oil or other harmful materials.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
1. Unless specified otherwise, materials shall meet specified requirements of

section 03300.
2. CURING SHEET: 2 mil polyethene or waterproof paper.
3. CURING-SEALING COMPOUND: Chlorinated rubber resin formulation to

meet specified requirements of ASTM specification C309, type 1; Class 'B' for
plain exposed concrete.
4. JOINT SEALANT: Two component pourable self-leveling polysulphide;

minimum shore Audometers hardness of 25 –
5. TOP PROTECTION: To protect where screed area with Master top 330
system of MBT. or equal approved by Engineer.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1. EXAMINATION
1. Before commencing work, ensure that surfaces are acceptable to receive and
maintain concrete finishing, and that specified installation will be achieved.
3.2. INSTALLATION
1. CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING:
1. Immediately after placing, screed and darby concrete before any water has to
the surface.
2. Roll or tamp concrete to force coarse aggregate into concrete mix and then
screed.
3. Strike off concrete level to screeds leaving no low spots. If vibrators are used
on a straight edge, ensure that concrete is not over vibrated causing
segregation and collection of water fines over the surface.
4. Smooth concrete to an even plane with a darby or bull float, and leave until
bleed water and water sheen has disappeared.
5. Proceed with finishing only when concrete has hardened sufficiently to support
a man with only a slight footprint left on surface.
6. Finish edges of concrete surfaces smooth with an edging tool to provide

slightly round exposed corners.
7. Finish concrete surface with power float or with metal hand floats in areas
inaccessible to power floats. Floating shall embed large aggregate below the
______________________________________________________________________________
surface, consolidate mortar at the surface, provide even planes with no humps
or depressions, remove marks from edging, and prepare the surface for
further specified finishing. Do not bring water and fine material to the surface
by overworking.
8. Steel trowel floated surface with power trowels or hand trowels in areas
inaccessible to power trowels. Proceed with trowel ling only when there is no
sheen on the surface. Repeat trowel ling until surface is bought to approved
finish. Allow sufficient time between towelling for an additional set of concrete.
9. Draw a soft-bristled brush over steel trowel led surfaces to provide a very light
broom surface where non-skid floor is required or as indicated.
10. Finish floor surfaces shall be level dense, with no aggregate showing, and free
of blemishes.
2. CURING: Cure concrete as specified in Section 03300 and DDENV 206; and
by methods specified in concrete floor finishing schedule. Ensure that no
curing compound is used which is detrimental to bond of bedding for finish
flooring or finish flooring materials.
3. SEALED FLOORS: seal with a floor covering concrete floors that are not
finished.
4. CONTROL JOINTS:
1. As soon as the concrete surface is firm enough not to be torn or damaged by
cutting, cut 4.8 mm wide control joints into the surface of the concrete with
abrasive lade power saw.
2. Locate control joints on centre lines of columns, and at maximum spacing of
6100 mm in both directions unless noted, or as otherwise indicated on
drawings.
3. Cut joints in slabs on grade 38 mm deep.
4. Within four weeks of cutting joints, fill them with joint sealant. Completely clean
side joint surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, and similar contaminants.
5. Mask floor surfaces at joints while pouring. Prime side joint surfaces with
compatible primer if surfaces are not completely dry. Install bond breaker of
silica sand, polyethylene film strip or foam filler in bottom of joints. Apply
sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
3.3. CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING SCHEDULE
1. EXPOSED CONCRETE: Steel trowel smooth finish, cured by liquid curing
compound or moist curing.
2. FOR CONCRETE STAIRS AND LANDINGS: Broom finish, with non-slip
inserts on all stair treads.
3. FOR CERAMIC, MARBLE AND GRANITE: Light steel trowel finish, cured by
curing sheet or moist curing.
4. FOR DEPRESSED SLABS: Rough broom finish, cured by curing sheet or
moist curing.
END OF SECTION
STH MASONRY UNITS 04200-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL

2. Section 05500: Metal Fabrication
3. Section 07500: Membrane Roofing
4. Section 07900: Joint Sealers
5. Section 09300: Tile
1. SAMPLES: Submit samples of the block, mortar, masonry accessories, masonry

reinforcement, anchors, ties, and counter flashing, for Engineer's approval before
commencing Work. All accessories to satisfy B.S. 5750 Part 2: 1987.
1.4. DELIVERY AND STORAGE
1. Deliver and store masonry units on site on pallets. If not used immediately after
delivery, cover with tarpaulins. Keep units protected from roofing bitumen,
concrete, mortar and other work and materials which could stain them.
2. Store bagged products such as lime, cement and metal accessories in dry,
waterproof sheds.
1.5. JOB CONDITIONS
1. Conform to BS 8000 Part 3. Maintain temperature of mortar around 50ꞏC until

used.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. CONCRETE BLOCK
1. Cement:
1. Ordinary Cement: Cement for solid or hollow blocks and mortar shall be ordinary
Portland Cement Type 1 as specified in Section 03300: Concrete
2. Aggregates:
1. Aggregate for Concrete Blocks and Mortar: Aggregate for solid and hollow
concrete blocks shall conform to the requirements of the AASHO Designation:
M6 and M80, except that the requirements for gradation shall not apply (maximum
aggregate size 10 mm), and aggregate for mortar shall conform to the
requirements of the AASHO Designation: M45.
S.T.H.
_____________________________________________________________________________
2. Aggregate for Mortar: Shall conform to the foregoing requirements, except that the
aggregate shall be of an approved white crushed limestone chipping.
3. Water
1. Water to be used in block work shall conform to the requirements specified for
water under Section 03300: Concrete.
4. Lime
1. Non-hydraulic lime complies in all respects with BS 900, and shall be

prepared in accordance with the appropriate requirements of Clause 504
of C.P. 121.101: latest revision.
2. The contractor must satisfy himself by analysis or otherwise that the

ground lime is not adulterated or air-slaked.
3. The factory-produceds dry hydrated non-hydraulic or semi-hydraulic lime,

ready for use shall be mixed with sand and made into coarse stuff or be
soaked to putty by mixing with water and allowing to stand not less than 16
hours before use.
4. The lump or ground non-hydraulic or quick-lime shall be slaked, run to

putty and matured for not less than 2 weeks.
5. Blocks shall be autoclave or bubble cure process, high-pressure steam

cured, modular, conforming to BS 6073, part 1, part 2; linear shrinkage
and moisture movement not to exceed 0.045% and shall be as follows:
1. {S/15/A/M} , 100% solid for all locations where structural members bear on
concrete block.
2. {H/15/A/M } , for all other block work.
6. Where concrete block walls are required as fire separations or barriers,

they shall conform to the local building code requirements and British
Standards Institute with respect to equivalent thickness and type of
concrete. Consult with Engineer for locations and special conditions.
2.2. MORTAR MATERIALS
1. Mortar materials shall conform to BS 5838 Part 2.
2. AGGREGATE: BS 4550, except that the maximum allowable percentage passing

no. 30 sieve shall be 80%, and maximum passing no. 50 sieve shall be 50%.
3. CEMENT: Normal Portland, BS 5224.
4. HYDRATED LIME: ASTM C207.
S.T.H.
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.3. MORTAR MIXES
1. MIXING: Prepare and mix mortar materials under strict supervision and in small batches
for immediate use only. Mix proprietary mortars in strict accordance with BS 5838 Part 2.
Do not use re-tempered mortars.
2. FOR BEDDING LINTELS: Use type 'M' cement mortar having compressive strength of
17.2 MPa minimum.
3. For all other masonry: Use type 'N' masonries mortar having a compressive strength of 5
MPa.
4. Mortar shall be prepared in the following proportions with the addition of the minimum
quantity of clean water for workability: Cement and sand mortar (1:3) mix shall be
composed of one-part cement to three parts of sand by volume. Hydrated lime up to 1/4
by volume of the dry cement may be added for bedding blocks, upon the approval of the
Engineer, to improve workability, without appreciably reducing the strength.
5. The ingredients for cement and sand shall be measured in proper clean gauge boxes and
the mixing shall be carried out by means of an approved mechanical batch mixer.
6. In the case of cement lime mortar, the sand and lime shall be mixed first, and the cement
added.
2.4. NON-SHRINK GROUT
1. Conforming to BS 5838 Part 2, Table 3.
2.5. MASONRY REINFORCING, TIES AND ANCHORS
1. Masonry reinforcement, ties and anchors shall be in accordance with

Connectors for Masonry - BS 8000.
2. MASONRY REINFORCEMENT: Wire mesh shall be 9 gauge deformed, brite basic

finish, reinforcement for interior wall locations and hot dipped galvanized after
fabrication at exterior wall locations, sized 40 mm to 50 mm narrower than wall
partitions.
2.6. SEALANT
1. Multi-component, chemical curing or two component "Dymeric" sealant.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION: GENERAL
1. Maintain dimensions, lines and levels.
2. Keep exposed faces free from stains, chips and cracks. Keep tolerance in plane 3 mm in
2438 mm. Do not use chipped, cracked or deformed units in exposed work.
S.T.H.
_____________________________________________________________________________
3. Buttering corners of units, throwing mortar droppings into joints, will not be permitted. Do not shift or
tap units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustments must be made after mortar has
started to set, remove mortar and replace with fresh supply.
4. When mortar is "thumbprint'' hard, tool all masonry joints (exposed or concealed) concave.
5. Lay all joints 10 mm thick unless otherwise specified or otherwise indicated. Fill all joints
with mortar except where specifically designated to be left open.
6. Stagger joints in every course. Align joints plumb over each other in every other course.
Vertical and horizontal joints to be uniform in thickness
3.2. BLOCKWORK
1. Lay block with face shell bedding only. When solid units are used lay block with full beds
of mortar. Leave no cells open in exposed work. Supply and install wall reinforcement in
all blockwork.
2. Locate corners accurately. Use full bed of mortar for first course. Bed face shells and
cross and end webs fully in mortar. Stagger joints in every course. Align joints plumb over
each other in every other course.
3. Bond intersecting block walls in alternate courses. Where blockwork abuts concrete, bond
each block course with dovetail anchors, ties and dovetail slot. Do not break bond of
corridor walls or other walls of exposed units where partitions intersect and if bonding
would show through on exposed face of walls. Bond these partitions to walls they
intersect with prefabricated intersection masonry reinforcement in each course.
3.3. PARTITIONS
1. Carry all partitions up through the ceiling to concrete slab above, unless noted or specified
otherwise.
2. Except around staircases and shafts, terminate through partitions within 20 mm of
structure above, and where such partitions occur directly under and parallel to structural
framing carry these partitions up to within 20 mm of bottom of such structural framing.
3. Around staircases and shafts, wedge and grout masonry solidly to structure above.
Laterally support other partitions as required by building code. Where tops of partitions
are exposed to view, lateral supports shall be concealed.
4. Where walls and partitions are pierced by structural members, ducts or pipes, fill voids
with mortar as required to maintain fire rating and flush with wall finish where exposed.
5. Fill spaces between partition and structure, ducts and pipes with compressed glass fiber or
mineral wool insulation completely from one side of wall to other and top of wall to
structure.
S.T.H.
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.4. CONTROL JOINTS
1. Provide vertical through wall control joints 7600 mm c to c. maximum (except as

otherwise shown or specified) in continuous walls having no openings,
intersections or columns. Locate control joints as directed by Engineer.
2. Locate control joints at high stress concentrations and at points of weakness such
as at abrupt changes in work height, wall thickness changes such as at chases and
at pilasters and maximum of 3600 mm from corners.
3. Construct joint as follows: Place building paper against end of masonry unit on
one side of control joint. Use paper to prevent mortar bonding to one side of joint.
Extend bond breaker full wall thickness. Fill voids between ends of masonry unit
with mortar to form key and strike back exposed vertical joints 20 mm deep, ready
to receive caulking by Section 07900. Reinforce joints every third course with two
6 mm diameter greased smooth rods. Locate rods 30 mm in from faces of
masonry unit centered on joint running parallel to wall.
3.5. REINFORCEMENT AND REINFORCING TIES

1. Reinforce all masonry walls with continuous masonry reinforcement in every third
block course.
2. Provide extra reinforcement and reinforcing ties at openings so that first and
second courses above and below openings are reinforced. Extend extra
reinforcement 600 mm beyond opening in each direction.
3. LATERAL SUPPORTS
1. At top of walls that span over 3 meters in height from floor to underside of
structure above provide 100 mm x 100 mm x 150 mm long x 6 mm clip angles
each side of wall bolted to concrete slab @ 2000mm c/c maximum. All other walls
to be wedged with metal wedges and the joints packed with mortar.
3.6. PLASTER
Plaster all interior masonry walls to ensure a smooth, plumb surface.
3.7. BUILT-INS
1. Build in items provided by other sections, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts, loose steel
lintels, shelf angles, access panels, and other such items. Leave wall openings
required for ducts, grilles, pipes and other items.
2. Fill voids between masonry and metal frames with masonry mortar for interior
walls. Exterior walls shall have frames filled with fiber glass insulation.
3.8. REPOINTING OR TUCKPOINTING
1. EPOINT DEFECTIVE JOINTS AS FOLLOWS: Cut back joints 13 mm, taking care
not to damage units. Remove dust and loose materials by brushing or by water jet.
S.T.H.
_____________________________________________________________________________
If a water jet is used, allow excess water to drain before repointing. Repoint with
same mix as original. Pack mortar tightly in thin layers, and tool joints or strike
flush as required.
3.9. CLEANING
1. Keep work clean and free of mortar stains during laying.

2. Remove mortar with wood paddles and scrapers before wetting. Saturate masonry
with clean water and flush off loose mortar and dirt. Clean block work using water,
scrubbing brushes and wood paddles only.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H.
S.T.H. METAL DECK 05300-1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. AAMA 611, Voluntary Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.
B. ASTM A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by Hot-Dip Process.
C. ASTM A792/A95M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc

Alloy-Coated by Hot-Dip Process.
D. ASTM B209, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
E. ASTM C920, Specification and Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
F. ASTM C1311. Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants.
G. ASTM D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in

Roofing and Waterproofing.
H. ASTM D4586, Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
1.03 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim:
1. Formed wall flashing and trim.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural
movement, thermally induces movement and exposure to weather without failing,
rattling, leaking and fastener disengagement.
B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting the following
forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49:
C. Wind Zone 2: For velocity pressures of 31 to 45 lbf/sq. corner uplift force and 45-lbf/sq.
ft. outward force.
D. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and
surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation,
_____________________________________________________________________
overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections and other

detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as result of
sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 def F (100
deg C), material surfaces.
A. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water
infiltration to building interior.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details
material descriptions, dimension of individual components and profiles, and
finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and
elevations.
Distinguish between shop-field- assembles work. Include the following:
1. Identify material, thickness, weight and finish for each item and location in
Project.
2. Details for forming sheet flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams
and dimensions.
3. Details for fastening joining, supporting and anchoring sheet metal flashing and
trim, including fasteners, clips, cleats and attachments to adjoining work.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below:
1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 300 mm long. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures
and other attachments.
2. Trim: 300 mm long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.
3. Accessories: Full-size Sample.
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA’s “Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual”. Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more
stringent requirements are indicated.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

_____________________________________________________________________
A. Delivery sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet
metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and
handling.
B. Unload, store and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a
manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weather tight and
ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contract
with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage.
1.08 COORDINATION
Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining
construction to provide a leak proof, secure and noncorrosive installation.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET METALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005,
Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than
H14.
B. Finish: Unless otherwise directed by Engineer/Client, Finish shall be Anodized.

Apply the following coil-anodized finish:
1. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular

as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating:
Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA
611.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welder rods, protective
coatings, separators, sealants and other miscellaneous as required for complete
sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
B. Fasteners: Screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets

and bolts and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching colour of sheet metal by means of plastic

caps or factory-applied coating.
2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws,

gasketed, with hex washer head.
3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
4. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching
internal gutter width.
_____________________________________________________________________
C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solid polyisobutylene compound

sealing tape with realease-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag,
nontoxic, non- staining tape.
D. Underlayment Felts: ASTM D226, Type II (No.30), asphalt-saturated organic felt,

nonperforated.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric polyurethane sealant; of type, grade,

class and use classification required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim
and remain watertight.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber

sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints
with limited movement.
G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,

recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including
riveted joints.
H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, asbestos free of consistency required for
application.
2.03 FABRICATION GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
recommendations in SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” that apply to
design, dimensions, metal and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop
fabricates items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit
before shop fabrication.
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply
with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application
and metal.
C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and metal flashing and trim without excessive oil
canning, buckling and tool marks and true to line levels indicated, with exposed
edges folded back to form hems.
1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Forms
seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges
to be seamed, form seams and solder.
E. Sealed Joints: From nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate

elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
F. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the

Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not
less than 25 mm deep, filled with elastomeric butyl sealant concealed within joints.
_____________________________________________________________________
G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view

sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
I. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” and

FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application but not less than thickness of
metal being secured.
2.04 LOW SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 2400
mm long, but not exceeding 10-foot long, sections. Furnish with 150 mm wide joint
cover plates.
1. Joint Style: Lap, 100 mm wide.
B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 2400 mm long, but not exceeding 3 m long,

sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with
continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for
fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal and solder or weld watertight.
1. Joint Style: Butt, with 300 mm wide concealed back up plate.
2.05 FINISHED
A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finished Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finished.
B. Protect mechanical and painted finished on exposed surfaces from damage by

applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent

pieces area acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved
Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in
appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions with Installer present to verify actual
locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage and
securely anchored.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
_____________________________________________________________________
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the
Work Securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
Use fasteners, solder welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants
and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and
trim system.
1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive
substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by
fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or

wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip
sheet or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.
2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for
waterproof performance.
C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,
buckling and tool marks.
D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide
uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solders, welds and elastomeric
butyl sealant.
E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimension of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
1. Space cleats not more than 300 mm apart. Anchor each cleat with two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and

trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 3 m with no joints allowed within
provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form
expansion 25 mm deep, filled with elastomeric butyl sealant concealed within
joints.
G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 32
mm for nails and not less than 16 mm for wood screws.
H. Seal joints with elastomeric butyl sealant as required for watertight construction.
1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint

members not less than 25 mm into sealant. Form joints to completely
conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is
moderate, between 5 and 35 deg C, set joint members for 50 percent
movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher
ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant- type joints at temperatures
below (5 deg C).
_____________________________________________________________________
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7

Section “Joint Sealant”.
3.03 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance
requirements, sheet metal manufacturers written installation instructions and
SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.” Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with
laps, joints and seams that will permanently water tight.
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to
recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind
zone and as indicated.
1. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored
to substrate at 400 mm centers.
C. Copings: Anchors to resist uplift and outward forces according to

recommendations in FMG Loss Preventions Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind
zone and as indicated.
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleats anchored to

substrate at 400 mm centers.
2. Anchors interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at 450 mm
centers.
D. Counter flashing: Coordinate installation of counter flashing with installation of

base flashing. Insert counter flashing in reglets or receivers and fir tightly to
base flashing. Extend counter flashing 100 mm over base flashing. Lap counter
flashing joints a minimum of 100 mm and bed elastomeric butyl sealant.
1. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant

or lead wedges and sealant.
E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinates installation of roof-penetration flashing

with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as
follows:
1. Seal with elastomeric butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating
roof except for lead flashing on vent piping.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform

oxidation and weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealant.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal

flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished
_____________________________________________________________________
surfaces, including removing unused fasteners metal filings, pop rivet stems and
pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have
deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair
procedures.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
The tender documents and Addenda thereto form an integral part of this

2. Section 04200: Masonry Units
3. Section 05515: Metal Railings
4. Section 06400: Architectural Woodwork
6. Section 08800: Glazing
7. Section 09900: Painting and Coatings
8. Div. 15 & 16 Mechanical and Electrical
1. Conform to requirements of DDENV 1993 - Design of steel Structures.
2. Work to be executed by firm thoroughly conversant with laws, by-laws and

regulations which govern, and capable of workmanship of best grade of modern
shop and field practice known to recognized manufacturer's specializing in this
work. Shop drawings shall be certified by a Professional Registered Engineer.
3. Work shall be executed by workmen especially trained and experienced in this

type of work. Have a full time, senior, qualified representative at the site to direct
the work.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1. Make thorough examination of drawings and details, determine the intent, extent,
and materials, and be fully cognizant of requirements when preparing shop
drawings.
2. Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions. Show and

describe in detail all work of this section including large scale detail of members
and materials, of connection and interfacing with work of other sections,
jointing details, and of anchorage devices, dimensions, gauges, thicknesses,
description of materials, metal finishing, as well as other pertinent data and
information.

1. Co-ordinate deliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange ahead
for strategic off the ground, under cover storage locations. Do not load any area
beyond the design limits.
_____________________________________________________________________________
2. Adequately protect and crate all components against damage, dirt, disfigurement
and weather during delivery and storage. Damaged materials shall not be used
and shall be replaced by approved material.
3. Cover and protect the work of other sections in the area of work from damage.
Make good all damage to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4. Protect the installed work of this section and on completion the work shall be
examined and damage shall be remedied to the complete satisfaction of the
Engineer.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
1. STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTIONS AND STEEL PLATE: B.S. 4, B.S. EN 10029
2. STAINLESS STEEL: NO. 304, A.I.S.I. NO. 4 Finish, Brushed.
3. HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTIONS: B.S. 4, B.S. EN 10029
4. SHEET STEEL (STRUCTURAL QUALITY): ASTM A570-1979.
5. SHEET STEEL (COMMERCIAL QUALITY): ASTM A366-1979 Stretcher Leveled

or Temper Rolled.
6. TUBE: ASTM A153
7. GALVANIZED SHEET STEEL (COMMERCIAL QUALITY): Galvanized coating

G90 (Z275) in accordance with ASTM A526-80A, minimized spangle, stretcher
leveled or temper rolled. Specially treat by phosphate conversion process
conforming to B.S. 5411 ready to receive prime paint finish.
8. GALVANIZING: All uncoated steel specified to be galvanized shall be galvanized

after fabrication by the hot dip process according to B.S. 729. Coating 640 g/m2.
Galvanize after all welding is complete. Welding of galvanized material will not be
permitted. Specially treat by phosphate conversion process conforming to B.S.
5411, ready to receive prime paint finish.
9. BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS: ASTM A325-80A.
10. WELDING MATERIALS: To B.S. 25817
11. METAL FILLER: Polyester based.
12. PAINT PRIMER: Zinc Chromate Conforming to CGSB 1-GP-40M.
13. ZINC RICH PRIMER: Primer conforming to CGSB 1-GP-181M. 15. Repaint
finish: For galvanized surfaces to be exposed and finish painted –ASTM
D2029-68.
14. NON-SHRINK GROUT (NON-METALLIC): As per BS 6319-83.

_____________________________________________________________________________
15. ALUMINUM: shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 1470 for plate sheet and
strip. B.S. 1474 for bars, extruded round tubes and sections, grade 6063 (HEQ
TF). Stress induced in aluminum framing members and their fixings shall not
exceed the values in C.P. 118.
16. STEEL: Steel components where required for load bearing structural elements
and anchor structures shall be in accordance with B.S. 5950. All steel
components which will no longer be accessible after installation shall be zinc -
coated. Permissible process is hot zinc coating.
2.2. FABRICATION
1. Fit and assemble work in shop where possible. Execute work according to details
and reviewed shop drawings.
2. Take measurements at the building for work which is to fit or be connected to

steel, concrete framing or masonry, before commencing fabrication.
3. Where shop fabrication is not possible, make trial assembly in shop.
4. Do all welding in accordance with requirements of B. S. 25817. Grind welds

smooth and flush with surface of parent metal, where exposed to view and where
specifically indicated on drawings. Welds shall be continuous seam welds unless
specified otherwise.
5. Fit joints and intersecting members accurately in true planes, square, plumb,
straight with tight joints and intersections.
6. Provide adequate reinforcing, fastenings, anchors, accessories required for

fabrication and erection of work of this section. Such items occurring on or in an
exterior wall or slab shall be hot-dip galvanized.
7. Fabricate, drill and tap members to accommodate attachments, anchorage and

work of other sections where located and directed by them.
8. Exposed steel surfaces shall be smooth and free from imperfections such as
warping, buckling, weld marks, burrs, rust and scale.
9. PRIMING:
1. Thoroughly clean steel free of rust, scale and weld spatter by power wire
brushing. Remove oil and grease with solvent and clean cloths, apply shop coat of
primer to all surfaces except areas requiring field welding. Apply by brush, working
paint well into surfaces, interstices and cavities.
2. Prime field welded areas after erection and touch up shop coat where damaged
and bared by erection and handling.
3. Prime steel with two full coats of zinc rich paint having high corrosion resistance in
strict accordance with paint manufacturer's directions.
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.1. GENERAL
1. Verify at site that the work to receive the work of this section is free of irregularities
detrimental to the installation and performance of the work and that it is located
correctly and at proper levels before delivery and installation.
2. ERECTION: To meet specified requirements of DDENV 1993.
3. BEARING PLATES AND ANCHORS: Standard.
4. ANCHORS: Anchors to structural concrete shall be approved inserts set into

concrete or approved self-drilling expansion inserts drilled and placed afterwards.
3.2. INSTALLATION
1. Assemble and erect work plumb, true, square, straight, level and accurate to sizes
detailed, to reviewed shop drawings, free from distortion and defects detrimental
to appearance and performance.
2. Insulate metals where necessary to prevent corrosion due to contact between

dissimilar metals and between metals and masonry, concrete or plaster. Use
bituminous paint or butyl tape.
3. Supply adequate instructions, templates, and if necessary, supervise installation

of the fastenings or accessories requiring to be built-in by other sections of the
work.
4. SCHEDULES
1. GENERAL: Supply and install all miscellaneous metal work indicated on

drawings and not included in the work of other sections in addition to items
listed below. Where items are required to be built into masonry, concrete or
other work, supply such items to respective sections with all anchors and
accessories for building in.
2. ITEMIZED LIST: Supply and install metal work listed below unless
specifically designated to be supplied only. Each item shall be as shown on
drawings and as detailed on reviewed shop drawings.
3. MILLWORK SUPPORTS, BRACKETS, ETC: Fabricate to details, supply to

carpentry, concrete or masonry sections as required for building-in. Supply
galvanized tube and angle framing at vanity supports and mounting
hardware, brackets, bolts, sleeves, and the like.
4. VANITY SUPPORTS:
1. Fabricate and install galvanized steel supporting framing as for support of

vanities.
2. Co-ordinate installation with work of masonry and carpentry sections.
5. MISCELLANEOUS STEEL FRAMING, BEAMS, CHANNELS, ANGLES,

PLATES AND BRACKETS:
Check all drawings and documents and supply and install where required.
_____________________________________________________________________________
6. RAILINGS AROUND OPENINGS AND FOR STAIRS: Where required.

Supply all miscellaneous galvanized steel metals required and as detailed
including brackets, inserts, counter sunk screws, bent plates, channels,
plates, bars, moldings, and the like, and install with the co-ordination of
Sections 03300, 05100, 06100 and 08800. The Finished work shall be
ready for painting by others, and be capable of withstanding loads applied
horizontally at top of railings as designated in local code requirements.
7. ALUMINUM DOOR SUPPORT FRAMING AND ALUMINUM SCREEN

SUPPORT FRAMING: Provide and install under the co-ordination of
Section 08310, all necessary steel support framing in ceiling space for
aluminum doors and screens that do not extend up to structure above.
Supply inserts, brackets and the like to Section 03100 for building into
concrete.
8. WOOD DOORS SUPPORT FRAMING: Supply and install all necessary

steel support framing for doors and panels to provide rigidity and strength
to the entire wood screen assembly.
9. Anodized Aluminum (Metallic Door Frame)
- Tensile Test should according to UNE EN 10002-1:02 (DIN EN

10002-1:02 / BS EN 10002-1:02)
- Determination of anodized thickness according to UNE-EN ISO

2360:04 (DIN EN ISO 2360:04 / BS EN ISO 2360:04)
- Tensile Test
Specimen machining on: 29/05/08
Test Date: 30/05/09
Standard Test Method: UNE-EN 10002/1:02 (DIN EN 10002-
1:02 / BS EN 10002-1:02)
Apparatus:
- Testing machine Shimadzu AG-IS Uncert = 0.5%
- Caliper MA 990036 Uncert = 0.02 mm
- Micrometer INV99007 Uncert = 0.002 mm
Specimen Description:
- S0: Initial Cross Section 34.29 mm
- L0:gauge Length 80 mm
- Tensile test according to UNE 10002-1:02 (din en 10002-1:02 / bs en

10002-1:02)
- Determination of Zn thickness according to UNE-EN ISO 2178:1996

(DIN EN ISO 2178:96 /BS EN ISO 2178:84)
Standard Test Method: UNE-EN 10002-1:02 (DIN EN 10002-
1:02 / BS EN 10002-1:02)
Apparatus:
- Testing machine Dartec 9500 Uncert = 0.5%
- Caliper MA 990036 Uncert = 0.03 mm
_____________________________________________________________________________
Specimen Description:
- S0: Initial Cross Section 27.08 mm
- L0: Gauge Length 80.00 mm
Testing Conditions:
- Temperature: 22°C
- Relative Humidity 40%
- Speed of Testing 10 MPa/s
- Calculated proof/ductile strength: High ductile strength
(Reh)
- Ductile Strength (MPa) 336 ± 8
- Tensile Strength (MPa) 403 ± 10
- Elongation After Fracture % 33.5 ± 0.5
10. Fire Resistance Door
The doors of one leaf with EXTENSIBLE AND DISMOUNTABLE METALLIC

FRAME are defined as a provoting door of one wood leaf. Its function is to
resist to fire as per the characteristics of integrity and thermal insulation
described in part 5 of norm: BS/DIN/UNE – EN 13501-2.
Test Norms:
BS/DIN/UNE – EN 1634-1: 2000: “Doors and hollow lock elements fire

resistance test.
Firewall doors and lockers”
Door in position A:
Integrity Integrity is maintained during the time of

the test, 30 minutes.
Thermal Thermal Insulation is maintained during

Insulation the time of the test, 30 minutes.
Door in position B:
Integrity Integrity is maintained during the time of

the test, 30 minutes.
Thermal Insulation Thermal Insulation is maintained during

the time of the test, 30 minutes.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H METAL RAILINGS 05515-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
The tender documents and addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification and
must be read in conjunction herewith.

3. Section 05500: Metal Fabrication
1. Conform to requirements of DDENV 1993 - Design of Steel Structures and related

standards and codes required by the authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Work of this section shall be executed by firm having five years minimum continuous
experience in similar fabrications, thoroughly conversant with laws, by-laws, regulations
which govern and capable of workmanship of best grade of modern shop and field
practice and with ample facilities to produce, furnish and erect the work so as to satisfy
the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions. Show and describe in
detail profiles, members, type and details of fastening and anchorage, fabrication and
erection, anchorage and mounting details, gauges and metal finishing and all other
pertinent data. Show location of expansion and construction joints and coordinate with
building expansion joints.
2. Submit 2 copies of the manufacturer’s technical data, specifications, anchor details,

product handling and installation, instructions, including copies of manufacturer's
certifications and other data as may be required to show compliance with these
specifications.
3. The Contractor shall submit samples of rails, mounting base, brackets, sealants and
other related materials as requested by the Engineer.
4. MOCK UP: The Contractor shall erect a railing sample installation before proceeding
with the work. The mock-up shall be complete with anchors, fittings, rails, and other
accessories to simulate final condition. The mock-up shall be reviewed and approved by
the Engineer.
1.5. WARRANTY:
1. The Contractor shall submit a written warranty signed by the Subcontractor for a period
of 5 years against any defective materials or workmanship, to repair or replace any
defective railing work during the warranty period without any extra cost to the Client.
S.T.H. METAL RAILINGS 05515-2
______________________________________________________________________________
1.6. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - RAILINGS:

1. The drawings show the overall sizes and type of railing required. It is the intention that
similar details used by different manufacturers will be acceptable provided that they
comply with the size requirements and this specification.
2. Railings shall be capable of withstanding a load of at least 91 kg (200 lb) applied in any
direction at any point on the rail.
3. The Contractor shall design, fabricate and install the railing system to suit the conditions
outlined in these specifications, the drawings, and the requirements of local authorities.
1.7. PRODUCT HANDLING, DELIVERY AND PROTECTION:
1. Materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, above grade,

properly protected from the weather and construction activities.
2. Protection shall be provided during delivery, storage, erection and construction so as to

avoid development of non-uniformity of appearance or other deleterious effects.
3. Protection shall be removed when requested by the Engineer for inspection of finishes
and reinstalled. Protection shall be completely removed when no longer required.
4. Items which are to be built into the work of other trades shall be delivered in time so as
not to delay the progress of the work.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
1. ALUMINIUM: Sheet, Strip and Bent Plates B.S. 1470

Bars, tubes, sections B.S. 1474, Grade 6063 (HEQ TF)
2. BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS AND FASTENING DEVICES: Stainless steel type 316.
3. POWDER COATING: Surface treatment of aluminum components shall be carried out in

accordance with B.S. 1615 and B.S. 3987. The conversion coatings shall conform with
ASTM D 1750 - 67, method 7, and applied by electrostatic spraying.
4. NON-SHRINK GROUT As per B.S. 6319-83.
2.2. CONDITIONS OF SURFACES

1. Substrates, adjoining construction and conditions under which the work is to be installed
shall be examined prior to commencement of installation. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2.3. FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE

1. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: Fabricate aluminum stairs to safely support live load of 1.5
KN/m or local code requirements (whichever is more stringent) evenly distributed over
treads and landings. Fabricate railings to conform to local requirements, the
specifications and drawings.
______________________________________________________________________________
2. GENERAL:
1. Fabricate to reviewed shop drawings and in general to details indicated on
drawings and specified herein. Where possible, fit and shop assemble and
deliver to site in largest practicable sections.
2. Fabricated work shall be complete with components required for anchoring.
3. Fit joints and intersecting members accurately with hairline joints in least
conspicuous locations and manner. Make work in true plane with adequate
fastenings, and all finished work to be square and plumb.
4. Railings shall be of the design, size and dimensions shown on the drawings with
smooth flush and mitered connected joints, complete with all sleeves, brackets,
rails, bolts, fasteners, gaskets and other accessories as required for a complete
installation.
3. Work under this section consists of furnishing everything necessary for and incidental to
the design, execution, completion and maintenance of the railing work as indicated on
the drawings and as specified herein.
4. FINISHING:
1. All Aluminum components shall be chemically procreated with a conversion

coating including zinc chromate. The polyester powder coat will be factory
applied to Engineer's later choice of color.
2. Aluminum tube handrail and aluminum sphere, to be refinished polished, mirror

finish to Engineer's approval.
5. FASTENINGS AND CONNECTIONS:
1. Weld connections and/or bolt, as shown on drawings and secure in approved

manner. Where approved, install fastenings of same material, color and finish.
2. Countersink screws unless noted otherwise and reinforce where necessary.
3. Use shop and field connections. Where not detailed, connections shall comply
with DDENV 1993.
6. RAILINGS & EXTERIOR LADDERS
1. Mounting base of brackets shall be aluminum.
2. Rails shall be aluminum of size and shape as indicated on drawings. Surface

treatment color to approval of Engineer.
3. All concealed mechanical fasteners used in assembly of railing system shall be

aluminum.
4. Anchors, plates, inserts, for concrete shall be minimum 12 mm thickness, and hot
dipped galvanized.
5. Expansion anchorage shall be lead shield or tooth steel drilled in type of

expansion bolt anchors.
______________________________________________________________________________
6. Where components come in contact with dissimilar metals, surfaces shall

beprotected from direct contact wherever damage may be caused. Protection
shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
7. Where railing components come into contact with concrete or lime mortar,
exposed surfaces shall be protected to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
8. All works shall be fitted and assembled in the shop in so far as practical. Items
shall be preassembled in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize
field splicing and assembly. Following trial, disassembled units shall be fitted
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Units shall be clearly
marked for reassembly and coordinated installation. Alignment and splice plates
shall be provided for accurate field fit.
9. All splices, corners and miters shall be accurately machined, filed and carefully
fitted and matched with a hairline contact using connectors or angle tees. Joints
shall be reinforced as required for rigidity and stability and to meet design
requirements.
10. Allowance shall be made for normal construction tolerances. Accessories and
fabrication variations required to compensate for construction tolerances shall be
provided.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
1. Furnish, set and secure framing brackets, hangers, anchors, inserts or similar
supports for proper erection of stairs before masonry and concrete is placed.
Provide temporary supports and bracing required to position stairs.
2. Do all cutting, drilling and fitting necessary to attach work of this section to
adjoining work. Cutting, drilling and fitting of joints, and other accessories
required shall be completed prior to finishing. Only methods which will avoid
distortion or discoloration of exposed surfaces shall be used.
3. Secure wall brackets to wall at 1200 mm O.C. maximum with through-bolts and
plates where they can be concealed, otherwise use bolts and expansion shields
to achieve maximum rigidity of rail. Wood plugs for fixing to walls will not be
permitted. Use metal anchoring devices.
4. Grout bases of posts, balusters or newels occurring in concrete. No sleeves,

core drill only using grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Finish
smooth, level and flush with surrounding finished surface.
5. Grout and sealants shall be applied in accordance with sealant manufacturer's

printed instructions and recommendations except as may be otherwise shown or
directed by the manufacturer's representative.
6. Sealants and grouts shall be cured in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions, to obtain maximum bond to surfaces, cohesive strength and
durability at the earliest possible date.
7. Excess sealant must be removed promptly as the work progresses and the
adjoining surfaces cleaned as may be necessary to eliminate any evidence of
spillage.
______________________________________________________________________________
8. Insulate where necessary to prevent electrolysis due to dissimilar metal-to-metal

contact or metal-to-masonry and concrete. Use bituminous paint, butyl tape,
building paper or other approved means.
9. Grind off surplus welding material and provide sharp profiles and arises.
10. Build and erect work plumb, true, square, straight, level and accurate, to sizes
detailed, to reviewed shop drawings, free from distortion or defects detrimental to
appearance and performance.
11. Prime base metal surfaces, field welds, damaged and abraded primed surfaces,
and surfaces not previously primed. Leave ready for finish painting by Section
09900.
3.2. INSTALLATION - RAILINGS
1. Proper anchors shall be selected, or stem engineered to accommodate the

mounting base. Anchors and stems shall be protected to prevent corrosion and
oxidation. All supplementary parts necessary to complete each item shall be
included, even where such work is not shown or specified.
2. Railings shall be set plumb, level and aligned. Leveling tolerance shall not
exceed ± 3 mm in 3000 mm. Align tolerance shall not exceed ± 3 mm in 3000
mm.
3.3. CLEANING AND PROTECTION
1. Finished surfaces shall be protected against damage during subsequent

construction operations and all such protection removed at time of Substantial
Performance.
2. All surfaces of railing work shall be cleaned of all dirt, grime, stains, residues and
all unwanted objects.
3. In case of any damage to the work, make repairs or replace to the satisfaction of
the Engineer without extra cost to the Client.
END OF SECTION
STH PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521-1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Stainless steel pipe and tube handrails and railing systems.
2. Steel pipe and tube handrails and railing system.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing related terms apply to this section.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: In engineering handrail and railing systems to withstand structural loads

indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based
on the following:
1. For cold-formed structural steel: AISI "Specification for Design of Cold-

Formed Steel Structural Member".
2. For stainless steel: AISI "Stainless Steel Cold-Formed Structural Design

Manual".
B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate,

and install handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements of ASTM
985 for structural performance based on the following:
1. Testing performed in accordance with ASTM E 894 and E 935.
2. Structural computations.
C. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate,

and install handrails and railing systems to withstand the following structural
loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials
for handrails, railing systems, anchors, and connections. Apply each load to
produce the maximum stress in each of the respective components comprising
handrails and railing system.
1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads

applied as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 890 N applied at any point and in any direction.
b. Uniform load of 730 N per linear meter applied horizontally and

concurrently with uniform load of 1.46kN per linear meter applied
vertically download.
c. Concentrated load need not be assumed to act concurrently with

uniform loads.
2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following

loads applied as indicated:
_____________________________________________________________________
a. Concentrated load of 890 N applied at any point and in any direction.
b. Uniform load of 730 N per linear meter applied in any direction.
c. Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act

concurrently.
3. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a horizontal

concentrated load of 890 N applied to a 300 mm square area at any point in
the system including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements
composing the infill area.
a. Above load need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top
rails of railing system in determining stress on guard.
D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by

insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible
materials.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following
maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication,
and installation of handrails and railings to prevent buckling, opening up of
joints, overstressing of components, connections and other detrimental effects.
Base design calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to
both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material

surfaces.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL
A. General: Provide metal forms and types that comply with requirements of
referenced standards and that are free from surface blemishes where exposed
to view in the finished unit. Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections on finishes
units are not acceptable.
B. Stainless Steel: Austenitic stainless steel grade and type designated below for
each form required:
1. Tubing: ASTM A 554, grade as follows:
a. Grade MT 304.
b. Grade MT 316.
2. Pipe: ASTM A 312, grade as follows:
a. Grade TP 304.
b. Grade TP 316.
3. Castings: ASTM A 743, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.

_____________________________________________________________________
4. Plate: ASTM A 167, Type as follows:
a. Type 304.
b. Type 316.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:
1. Galvanized finish for all installations.
2. Type F, or Type S, Grade A, standard weight (schedule 40), unless

otherwise indicated, or another weight, type, and grade required by
structural loads.
D. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and other requirements as

follows:
1. Cold-Formed Round Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade A, unless

otherwise indicated or required by structural loads.
2. Hot-Formed Round Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
3. Provide tubing with hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 53.
E. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
F. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30.
G. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, grade 32510.
H. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type
material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Steel Wire Mesh: For guard infill at handrails and railings where indicated
provide 8 gauge woven wire mesh of 50 x 50 mm pattern with intermediate
crimp. Fabricate with steel bar edging as shown on drawings. Provide in steel
or stainless steel matching material of railings in which infill occurs.
2.2 GROUT AND ANCHORING
A. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-

corrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C 621. Provide grout
specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications
of type specified in this Section.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to other Construction: Select fasteners of the

type, grade, and class required to produce connections that are suitable for
anchoring railing to other types of construction indicated and capable of
withstanding design loadings.
1. For steel railings and fittings use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B
633, Class Fe/ Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating or ASTM B 696,
Class 12 for cadmium plating.
2. For stainless steel railings provide fasteners fabricated from type 304
stainless steel.
_____________________________________________________________________
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use fasteners of same

basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use
metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and railing

components and for their attachment to other work except where exposed
fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for handrail
and railing system indicated.
2. Provide Philips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless

otherwise indicated.
D. Cast-In-Place and Post-Installed Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type

indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to
sustain, without failure, load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined
by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
laboratory.
1. Cast-in-place anchors.
2. Expansion anchors.
2.3 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to

application and designations of finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by application

of strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipment.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent

pieces are acceptable if they are within 1/2 of the range of approved samples.
Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in
appearance of other components are acceptable or installed to minimize
contrast.
2.4 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES
A. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish.
B. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform directional textured polished

finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each
piece.
C. Bright, Directional Polish: AISI No. 4 satin finish.
5. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove

embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
2.5 GALVANIZED FINISH
A. General: Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized to comply with

applicable standard listed below:
1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.

_____________________________________________________________________
2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing iron and steel products made from rolled,
pressed, and forged steel shapes, castings, plates, bars, and strips.
B. For all steel railings and handrails formed from steel pipe with galvanized finish,
galvanize fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.
C. All galvanized steel railings are to be primed and field painted after assembly
and installation. Priming and painting are to be in accordance with
requirements specified in Division 9 "Painting".
END OF SECTION
STH EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLE 05810-1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Floor expansion joint cover assemblies.
2. Wall expansion joint cover assemblies.
3. Ceiling expansion joint cover assemblies.
4. Exterior wall expansion joint cover assemblies.
5. Roof expansion joint cover assemblies.
6. Roof-to-exterior wall expansion joint cover assemblies.
7. Fire-rated expansion joint cover assemblies.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated in the work include.
2.2 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
A. Expansion joint cover systems for this project were developed using the
following expansion joint cover assemblies as manufactured by Construction
Specialties, Inc. Naming of manufacturer and model numbers is for the purpose
of identifying kind and configuration of joint cover assemblies required, and is
not intended to limit competition. Expansion joint cover assemblies by other
manufacturers of similar configuration and performance complying with
specifications may be proposed for use subject to approval of the Employer
Representative. Joint sizes, performance requirements, finishes, and other
characteristics of required joint cover assemblies are shown on Expansion Joint
Cover Schedule included on the drawings using type designations shown
below.
1. Type EJC-1 Floor-to-Floor Covers: Construction Specialties GFR-200D

deep recess cover, fire rated as indicated on Expansion Joint Cover
Schedule on the drawings.
2. Type EJC-2 Floor-to-Floor Covers: Construction Specialties GFR-200

recessed cover, fire rated as indicated on Expansion Joint Cover Schedule
on the drawings.
3. Type EJC-3 Floor-to-Wall Covers: Construction Specialties GFWC-300

gasket flush corner wall cover, fire rated as indicated on Expansion Joint
Cover Schedule on the drawings.
4. Type EJC-4 Wall-to-Wall/ Ceiling-to-Ceiling Covers: Construction

Specialties FWF-300 flush seal cover.
_____________________________________________________________________
5. Type EJC-5 Ceiling-to-Ceiling Covers: Construction Specialties FCF-300

flush seal cover.
6. Type EJC-6 Exterior Wall-to-Exterior Wall Covers: Construction Specialties

SF-300 flush exterior wall seal.
7. Type EJC-7 Exterior Wall-to-Exterior Wall Covers: Construction Specialties

SF-300 flush exterior wall seal with primary seal only.
8. Type EJC-8 Roof-to-Roof Covers: Construction Specialties SRJ-400/ 1600

seismic roof-to-roof cover, fire rated as indicated on Expansion Joint Cover
Schedule on the drawings.
9. Type EJC-9 Roof-to-Wall Covers: Construction Specialties SRJW-400/

1600 seismic roof-to-wall cover, fire rated as indicated on Expansion Joint
Cover Schedule on the drawings. Provide with extended height vertical leg
as indicated on drawings.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, alloy
6061-T6, sheet and plate.
1. Protect aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious

materials with a protective coating.
B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, Type 304 with 2B finish, unless indicated
otherwise, for plates, sheet, and strips.
C. Extruded Performed Seals: Single or multi-cellular elastomeric profiles as

classified under ASTM D 2000, designed with or without continuous,
longitudinal, internal baffles. Formed to fit compatible frames, in color indicated
or, if not indicated, as selected by the Employer Representative from
manufacturer's standard colors.
D. Fire Barriers: Designed for indicated or required dynamic structural movement

without material degradation or fatigue when tested according to ASTM E
1399. Tested in maximum joint width condition with a field splice as a
component of an expansion joint cover per ANSI/ UL 263, U.B.C. 43-1, or
ASTM E 119, including hose stream test of vertical wall assemblies by a
nationally recognized testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
E. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, fasteners, set screws, spacers,

flexible moisture barrier and filler materials, drain tubes, lubricants, adhesive,
sealing tapes, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as
indicated or required for complete installations.
2.4 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Provide expansion joint cover assemblies of design, basic profile,

materials, and operation indicated. Provide units comparable to those indicated
or required to accommodate joint size, variations in adjacent surfaces, and
dynamic structural movement without material degradation or fatigue when
tested according to ASTM E 1399. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths
to minimize number of end joints. Provide hairline mitered corners where joint
_____________________________________________________________________
changes directions or abuts other materials. Include closure materials and

transition pieces, tee-joints, corners, curbs, cross-connections, and other
accessories as required to provide continuous joint cover assemblies.
B. Moisture Barrier: Provide manufacturer's continuous, standard, flexible vinyl

moisture barrier under covers at location indicated.
C. Fire-Rated Joint Covers: Provide expansion joint cover assemblies with

manufacturer's continuous, standard, flexible fire barrier seals under covers at
locations indicated to provide fire-resistive rating not less than the rating
indicated in Expansion Joint Cover Schedule shown on the drawings.
D. Metal Joint Cover Assemblies: Provide continuous extruded metal frames of

profiles indicated with seating surface and raise rim or exposed trim strip to
accommodate finishes and concealed bolt and anchors embedded in concrete.
Provide assemblies formed to receive cover plates of design indicated and to
receive filler materials as indicated between raised rim of frame and edge of
plate. Furnish indicated depth and configuration to suit type of construction and
to produce a continuous flush wearing surface with adjoining finish surfaces.
E. Wall and Ceiling Joint Cover Assemblies: Provide interior wall and ceiling
expansion joint cover assemblies of same design and appearance that are
compatible with floor expansion joint cover assemblies design and appearance.
F. Flexible Filler: Secure the approved flexible filler between frames to compress
and expand with movement. Vulcanize or heat-weld splices (if any) to ensure
hermetic joint condition.
2.5 METAL FINSIHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations
and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply
finishes to products in factory after fabrication. Protect finishes on exposed
surfaces before shipment.
B. Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system

established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
1. Mill Finishes: AA-M10 (unspecified mill finish) for traffic surfaces of floor
covers.
2. Class I, Clear-Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: as

fabricated, non specular; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic
Coating: Class I Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.02 mm) complying
with AAMA 607.1.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1
_________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements
Division 01, General Requirements, is a part of this Section and shall
apply as if repeated here.
B. This section includes, but is not limited to, the following work.
1. Supply and installation of wood beams, blocking, nailers,

strapping, grounds and other rough carpentry indicated on
drawings and required for installation of work of other sections,
and as specified.
2. Provision of wood preservative treatments and means of
securing the rough carpentry.
Fire Retardant Requirements
Mark each piece of timber and plywood which has been given pressure fire
retardant treatment to attest that it meets specified requirements for fire
retardancy and complies with requirements of Civil Defense Authority of
Abu Dhabi
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards
The following reference standards included this section shall apply

as specified in Section 01 42 19:
The American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

ASTM E84-08a, Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials.
1. American Wood Preservers’ Association (AWPA):
AWPA C20 (2003) Structural Lumber Fire-Retardant

Treatment by Pressure Processes
AWPA C27 (2002) Plywood – Fire Retardant Treatment by

Pressure Processed
AWPA P8 (2008) Standards for Oil-Borne Preservative
2. British Standard Specification
BS 1202-1:2002: Specification for Nails – Part 1: Steel Nails

_________________________________________________________________________
BS 1203-2001: Specification for synthetic resin adhesives

(phenolic and aminoplastic) for plywood.
BS 1210-1963: Specification for wood screws.
BS 1282-1999: Guide on choice, use and application of wood

preservatives.
BS 5707-1997: Solutions of wood preservations in organic

solvents.
Part 1-1979: Specification for solutions for general purpose

applications, including timber that is to be painted.
Part 2-1986: Specification for pentachlorophenol wood

preservative solution for use on timber that is not required to
be painted.
Part 3-1980: Solutions of Wood Preservatives in Organics

Solvents – Part3 Methods of Treatment
BS EN 636:03 Plywood Specifications.
Part 1: 1997 Specifications requirements for plywood for use in

dry conditions.
Part 2: 1997 Specifications requirements for plywood for use in

humid conditions.
Part3: 1997 Specifications requirements for plywood for use in

exterior conditions.
BS DD ENV 1099-1998, Plywood Biological durability.

Guidance for the assessment of plywood for use in different
hazard classics.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Samples
Submit samples to the site of wood and plywood intended for

incorporation in the works.
1.05 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions
1. Adapt techniques approved by the Consultant to ensure that

storage, handling and execution methods suit environmental
conditions that are encountered at the site, and cause no
damage to the products specified in this section or to the
performance of these products in use.
_________________________________________________________________________
2. Follow recommendations of the supplier of the products.
3. Environmental conditions shall include, but shall not be limited

to, ambient temperature; humidity; moisture in the air and on
the products and surfaces with which they are in contact;
moisture content of the products and materials with which they
are in contact; and temperature of the products and the
materials with which they are in contact.
4. Preservative Treatment: Pressure treat to BS 5707 with net

retention of preservative at 6.8 kg/m³ of wood using CCA.
Pressure treat all wood in contact with roofing, concrete and
masonry.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Moisture content at time of building-in shall not exceed 19% for

timber and 15% for plywood.
B. Lumber
1. Russian or Romanian white wood, Grade 1; or Swedish Pine,

of the best available quality.
2. For utility use where concealed: Sound and free of

imperfections or deficiencies making unsuitable for use.
C. Plywood
1. To meet specified requirements of BS EN 636, softwood.
2. Adhesive: BS1203, WPB Grade.
3. Do not make up plywood panel thickness by bonding plywood

sheets together.
D. Nails, Spikes and Staples: In conformance with BS 1202, Part 1;

galvanized steel at exterior locations, at interior high humidity
locations and for treated lumber; plain finish steel elsewhere. Use
spiral shank nails generally.
E. Screws: To meet specified requirements of BS 1210, steel.
F. Fasteners:
To hollow masonry use toggle bolts; to solid masonry and concrete

use expansion shields and lag bolts; to steel use bolts or welded
stud fasteners. Use lead or inorganic fibre plugs for fasteners in
concrete and masonry. Provide washers at bolt heads and nuts.
_________________________________________________________________________
Galvanize fasteners at exterior locations, at high humidity interior

locations and for treated lumber.
G. Wood Preservative:
Oil borne wood preservative solution of types recommended for

intended locations in accordance with BS 1282, and to meet
specified requirements of BS 5707; or AWPA P8.
H. Fire Retardant Treatment
1. Pressure impregnate timber and plywood with chemicals to

provide a fire retardancy ensuring flame spread rating no
greater than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Treatment shall meet specified requirements for Interior Type A

of AWPA C20 for timber and C27 for plywood.
3. Kiln dry timber and plywood after treatment to maximum of

19% for timber and 15% for plywood.
3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Lay out items installed by this section carefully and to

accommodate requirements of other sections. Cut and fit
members accurately; erect them in position indicated by
drawings; align, level, square, plumb, and secure them
permanently in place in place. Brace work temporarily as
required. Join members only over solid backing.
2. Bore holes true to line and to same size as bolts. Drive bolts
into place for snug fit, and use plates or washers for bolt head
and nut bearings. Turn up bolts and lag screws tightly when
installed, and again just before concealed by other installations
or at completion of the work.
3. Cooperate with other sections to ensure that unity of actions

will ensure orderly progress to meet construction schedule.
4. Supply anchors, bolts and inserts required for installations of

this section, to those performing the work of other sections and
who are responsible for their installation.
5. Include rough hardware such as nails, bolts, nuts, washers,

screws, and connectors required for installations by this
section.
6. Do not attach installations of this section by wood plugs or

blocking in concrete or masonry. Use lead shields, expansion
shields, concrete nails, or similar methods only as approved.
_________________________________________________________________________
B. Blocking, Nailers, Strapping, Grounds and Miscellaneous Rough

Framing.
1. Install solid timber or plywood nailers, blocking, and such other

fastening provisions as indicated typically on drawings and
wherever else required by the works. Install required
provisions for fastening, located and secured to suit site
conditions, and adequate for intended support.
2. Provisions shall include, but shall not be restricted to:
a. Blocking for handrails.
b. Fire retardant plywood for securing of window blind carriers

at exterior walls.
c. Blocking for wall bases.
d. Blocking and recessed ceiling enclosures.
e. Blocking and nailers for fastening and/or anchorage of

finish installations, materials, fixtures, equipment and
similar work.
f. Service device mounting panels: Furnish panels required

by elevator, mechanical, electrical and communication
trades for mounting of controls, panels, switches, breakers
and similar devices.
g. Blocking and carriers around kitchen cabinet installations.
h. Blocking for setting door frames generally.
i. Blocking at vanity counters.
3. Cut members into lengths as long as practicable and with

square ends.
4. Align members at joints so that their adjacent surfaces are in

the same plane.
5. Verify that grounds required for fastening of components and

equipment are located correctly, and that they provide
adequate support.
C. Wood Preservative
1. Apply wood preservative to all wood items incorporate in

exterior wall and roof constructions, in wet areas and in areas
vulnerable to humidity moisture or dampness.
2. Apply one coat of wood preservative to wood by means a

minimum of 3 minute dip to cover all surfaces and as suitable
_________________________________________________________________________
for conditions as recommended by the preservative

manufacturer. Treat all surfaces, including freshly cut ends.
D. Fire Retardant Treated Wood:
Install fire retardant treated timber and plywood at all locations

within interior of building include timber and plywood specified in
sections 06 200 and 06 40 00 where it would affect the specified
fire rating.
3.02 ADJUSTMENT
Ensure that bolted fasteners are drawn up tightly and that members
are aligned.
END OF SECTION
STH FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-1
_______________________________________________________________________
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
Division 01, General Requirements is a part of this section and shall apply as if repeated
here.
B. This section includes but is not limited to the supply and installation of the following works
as indicated on drawings:
1. Cabinets and Counters in:
a. Kitchen and Servery.

b. Lobbies and Reception areas.
c. Vanities in washrooms as shown on drawings.
d. Security Rooms.
e. Janitor Rooms.
2. Millwork:
a. Closet shelves, etc.
3. Installation of finish hardware supplied by Section 08 71 00 or specified herein.
4. Installation of wood casework specified in sections 06 40 00.
5. Associated Electrical installations: Luminaries, swithches, trunking, cables, etc.
A. Comply with Safety Standards detailed within the ADDC/AADC “General Requirements for
Safety and Quality”.
B. Ensure a Safety and Quality system is implemented for the project which satisfies the
requirements of ISO 9001:2000 or any other similar internationally recognized Quality of
Management System.
C. All external carpentry works structures where there is a frequent and intimate live contact
shall not be CCA (Chromate Copper Arsenate) treated timbers and it shall not be used in
the project.
D. Mock-up:
1. Provide full-size cabinet complete with drawers, hinged door, adjustable shelf and
countertop.
2. Approved mock-up will establish a minimum standard of quality for this work and may
be used as part of the Work.
______________________________________________________________________________
1.03 REFERENCES
A. References Standards:
The following reference standards included in this Section shall apply as specified in
Section 01 42 19.
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSO):
ANSI/BHMA A156.9 – 03: Cabinet Hardware
2. British Standard Specification (BS):
BS 5750 P2-87: Quality Systems- Specification for Production and Installation.
BS 6566 P1- 85: Specification for Construction of Panels and Characteristics of Piles
including Marking.
BS 6566 P2- 85: Glossary of Terms.
BS 6566 P4- 85: Specification for Tolerances on the Dimensions of Plywood Panels.
BS 6566 P5- 85: Specification for Moisture Content.
BS 6566 P6- 85: Specification for limits of defects for the Classification of Plywood by
Appearance.
BS 6566 P7- 85: Specification for Classification of resistance to fungal decay and
wood borer attack.
BS 6566 P8- 85: Specification for Bond Performance of Veneer Plywood.
BS EN 942- 07: Timber in Joinery- General Requirements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer’s product data, detail sheets, specifications, indicate product description,

fabrication information and compliance with specified performance requirements.
2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings:
Submit shop drawings of all cabinets, counters, wardrobes, drawer units, etc., showing
including but not limited to following: locations, dimensions, component sizes, fabrication,
installation and joinery details, attachment provisions and coordination requirements with
adjacent work.
C. Samples:
______________________________________________________________________________
1. Submit minimum 300 mm x 300 mm samples of including but not limited to plastic
laminates, veneers, inlays, particleboard, MDF board, wood species, etc of all
specified items in each specified finish, indicating manufacturers full range of colour
and pattern variation.
2. Approved samples will be retained as standards for work.
3. Submit samples of carcass, drawer and door fronts, cabinets hardware, etc. to the
Consultant’s office.
D. Maintenance data: Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data, including repair
and cleaning instructions.
A. Protect materials from damage during handling, delivery and storage.
B. Receive and or supply and fix finish hardware and secure against theft until contract
handover.
C. Do not deliver cabinet materials to site until storage areas are completed and conditions
are such that no damage will occur to them while in storage and during installation.
A. Environmental Conditions:
1. Adapt techniques approved by the Consultant to ensure that storage, handling and
execution methods suit environmental conditions that are encountered at the site, and
cause no damage to the products specified in this Section or to the performance of these
products in use.
3. Environmental conditions shall include, but shall not be limited to, ambient temperature;
humidity; moisture in the air and on the products and surfaces with which they are in
contact; and temperature of the products and the materials with which they are in contact.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Provide hardware required for cabinets specified in this section. Use non-corrosive
hardware.
2. Moisture content of wood at time of installation shall be at an average of 7% with a

permitted range of individual pieces of 5% to 9%.
3. Use only adhesives and fastenings that develop sufficient strength for intended use, are
non-staining and are unaffected by the environment to which exposed.
______________________________________________________________________________
B. Wood
1. Where not exposed to view, use hardwood or soft wood timber of grades suitable for
fabrication, utility and structural needs.
2. Where exposed to view, meet requirements of specified AWI Quality Grade Standard or
equivalent BS EN 942 as applicable.
3. Ensure that surfaces exposed to view and given a natural or stained finish free from
markings and stains caused by milling, treatment, storage, handling and other causes.
4. Ensure that veneered panels are matched for grain configuration and uniformity of color
throughout all surfaces exposed to view which are to receive a natural or stained finish.
C. Plywood
1. Softwood: To meet specified requirements of AWI, or equivalent of BS 6566, Parts 1, 2,

4, 5, 6, 7 an 8; Sanded Grade, Solid Two Slides.
2. Hardwood: To meet specified requirements of AWI as applicable for use, smooth

sanded, rotary cut face veneers, Good Grade where exposed to view and Sound Grade
where not; except that White Oak veneers shall be sliced and matched for continuous,
straight and consistent grain.
D. Kitchen Cabinet, Carcase work and Vanities
1. Carcase cabinets to be constructed using 15mm thick medium density fiber (MDF)
board melamine rasin coated on both sides, in white or beige with all edges strip seal
lipped.
2. Carcases to be manufactured in accordance with BS 5750 Part 2.
3. Carcasing to kitchen cabinets and vanities to be designed and constructed to allow for
free passage of surface mounted pipe-works on back walls below worktop level.
4. Toe Space: As indicated.
E. Drawers
1. Drawers are to be formed in molded plastic, single piece, incorporating easy to clean
edges and angles.
2. Drawers to glide smoothly and quietly on concealed steel roller bearing runners with self
closing mechanisms (both sides), and with drawer front adjusters.
F. Shelves
1. Shelves to be constructed using 15 mm thick high-density particleboard with all edges

strip seal lipped.
2. Shelves to be adjustable via metal pin supports.

______________________________________________________________________________
3. Shelves to be capable of bearing a load of 25kg at centre span over a measured period.
G. Legs: Legs to be adjustable, plastic molded to accommodate a plinth height of 100mm to

150mm.
H. Plinth
1. Plinth to be continuous made of laminated plastic with a matching seating profile. Finish
being as indicated on drawings, otherwise plinth to match edges of carcase.
I. Doors, Drawer Front and Open Shelves
1. To serveries, vanities in washrooms:
Solid colour laminate with vertical black trims wood grain effect on 18mm thick MDF,
square design fronts. Handle: black metal, blow design. Laminate color from
manufacturer’s standard color range.
J. Sinks
1. Type ‘A’: Sinks shall be inset type, stainless steel 1 bowl and side drainer or as detailed
on drawings.
2. Type ‘B’: Sinks shall be with countertops of thick solid polymer fabrication (Corian or
similar approved) shall be as specified under Section 06 61 16 and detailed on
drawings.
K. Mixers
1. Mixers to kitchens, washrooms and tearooms to be specified in Section 22 00 00.
L. Work Tops
1. V.I.P. washroom/toilet’s counters and work tops to be 30 mm Store Type ‘1’ polished
finish as detailed on the drawings complete with 100 mm high splash backs, rounded
edges and cut out to receive sink units. All counters and work tops to be polished and
sealed with approved sealer to reduce permeability.
2. Washroom/toilet/pantry and other counters and worktops as indicated on Drawings shall

be 19 mm thick solid polymer fabrication (Corian or similar approved) as specified
under Section 06 61 16 and detailed on drawings.
M. Finish Hardware and Accessories
Provide all cabinet hardware required for completion of plastic laminate cabinets and
architectural woodwork. Cabinet hardware shall comply with requirements of ANSI/BHMA
A156.9.
1. Hinges
______________________________________________________________________________
a. Hinges to be 3-way adjustable in bright steel with hinge plates set flush into cabinet
carcase.
b. Hinges to be sturdy carry cabinet door weight and to be minimum 180° self return
swing conceled type.
2. Knobs and Handgrips to be supplied and fixed to harmonize with cabinets in all cases.
3. Wardrobe rails to be constructed using white nylon coated steel tube and nylon side
hook plates.
4. Provide all other cabinets hardware and accessories required for completion of plastic
laminated cabinets and architectural woodwork, including adjustable shelf supports and
cabinet hinges (where required and to the approval of the Consultant). Catches (2
cashes in doors over 1.2m high), locks for drawers and doors, pulls. Label holders,
cabinet towel bards, drawer accessories, bumpers and drawers slides.
N. Coat Rods (in WC cubicles):
25 mm dia chromium plated or polished stainless steel pipe, with matching flanges.
O. Seats for Benches:
1. Fabricate from 20 mm hardwood strips with protective varnish fixed to steel pipe support
as detailed on Drawings.
2. Round top edges and corners where exposed.
R. Wood Paneling
This above schedule does not necessarily incorporate listing of all finished carpentry items
to be included by this Section, but only those items which require specific description.
Ensure that all Drawings and specifications Sections, including those for architectural,
mechanical and electrical work, are consulted to establish the limits of finish carpentry
included in this Section.
2.01 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Assemble fabricated cabinets as shown on the drawings and with workstops in units as
long as possible. Design units to fit together if site assembly is required.
2. Fabricate cabinets to meet specified requirements of AWI Section 400 for Custom
Grade; or of BS EN 942 for equivalent quality.
3. Fabricate millwork and paneling to meet specified requirements of AWI Sections 300
and 500A for Premium Grade; or BS EN 942 for equivalent quality.
______________________________________________________________________________
4. Incorporate services, fixtures and trim in fabricated millwork units as indicated on

Drawings or specified in Divisions 23 or 26, or both. Make necessary cut outs to
template information.
5. Edge plywood where specified or indicated with solid wood to match face vaneer, with
profiled pressure glued edge and finished level with plywood surfaces.
6. Finger jointed or laminated solid wood members will not be acceptable.
B. Trim
1. Rout or groove backs of flat trim members.
2. Kerf backs of wide flat members.
C. Fastening
1. Fasten assemblies with screws or special fasteners at critical joints where strain and
excessive usage and shrinkage is anticipated and where required by specified quality
grade standards.
2. Glue built-up assemblies as well as nailing and screwing.
D. Plastic Laminate Facing
1. Factory bond plastic laminate generally unless otherwise indicated but where insitu
work is carried out, apply plastic laminate for counters to soft wood faced, phenolic
bonded plywood or to particleboard, minimum 19mm thick, or as otherwise indicated on
drawings. Apply plastic laminate for doors, drawer fronts, facing panels, gables, etc. of
cabinets to minimum 19mm thick wood core, close grain hardwood faced plywood.
2. Bond plastic laminate to backing with urea formaldehyde adhesive, or by methods of

equal or better quality recommended by the plastic laminate manufacturer.
3. Seal edges of cutouts with plastic laminate, or where concealed from view by other
methods that will prevent entry of moisture into core.
4. Apply plastic laminate backing sheet to core on backside of panels faced with laminate.
5. Ensure that both face and backing sheet have been sanded in the same direction.
6. Bond plastic laminate self-edges under pressure and bevel and finish smooth finished
corners.
7. Round corners of holes cut through plastic laminate and file them smooth.
8. Make joints only when length of plastic laminate facing exceeds 3660 mm. Butt joints
together, reinforce core with 6.4 mm hardwood blind splines and lock together with tite
Joint fasteners located at a maximum of 75 mm from edges.
E. Finishing
______________________________________________________________________________
1. Finish each surface of millwork to specified quality grade standard where exposed or
semi-exposed.
2. Consider that all visible surfaces are exposed, including underside surfaces above 1200
mm from floor and interiors if fitments behind glass doors.
3. Consider that underside surfaces with 1200 mm of the floor, top surfaces more than
1800 mm above the floor, interiors of fitments behind opaque doors and the back of
fitment doors are semi-exposed.
4. Find sand surfaces level and smooth after fabrication.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Before commencing installation ensure that groups, strapping and other constructions and
surfaces to which finish carpentry is installed are satisfactory for fitting and adequate for its
securement.
B. Take site measurement of construction to which finish carpentry installations must conform,
and through which access must be made, before fabricated units are delivered to site, to
ensure that adaptation is not required which would result in construction delay.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protection
1. Ensure that finish carpentry materials are protected from damage and deterioration
during installation and otherwise until project completion.
2. Take particular care that wood made fire retardant by pressure treatment is not
exposed to dampness.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Backprime exterior and interior millwork specified in this Section immediately after
delivery to site under work of Section 09 90 00. Ensure that cuts ends are primed.
Scrape or sand smooth surfaces by this Section. Notify those who are responsible for
backprming in sufficient time to enable them to schedule their work.
2. Install finish carpentry plumb, level and straight, and fasten it securely to backing to
support itself and anticipated superimposed loads.
3. Build finish carpentry into construction as indicated on Drawings or specified in other

Sections of Specifications, or both.
B. Trim
______________________________________________________________________________
1. Install in single lengths except where material limitation makes impossible. Stagger
joints where they occur and locate over solid backing for fastening.
2. Install wood bases and edging in coordination with Section 08 14 00.
C. Cutting and Fitting
1. Cut mouldings with sharp true profiles.
2. Cope trim and mouldings at interior corners and at returns.
3. Miter trim and mouldings at exterior corners. Glue and lock shop miters that are over
100 mm from heel to point.
4. Scribe and join members accurately together, and to other surfaces, to fit tightly and
with flat smooth surfaces. Install trim or fillers panels to close gaps.
D. Fastening
1. Fasten finish carpentry with nails generally, but use screws or special fasteners at
critical joints where strain, usage and excessive shrinkage is anticipated, and where
specified quality grade standards required.
2. Blind nail unless impossible.
3. Set finish nails below finished surfaces to receive putty.
E. Installation of Pressed Steel Frames
Set frames supplied by Section 08 11 00 in place for building into masonry. Anchor frames
to floor as provided for by anchor clips. Brace frames in place to prevent displacement until
anchored into masonry. Remove spreaders at floor after frames are anchored.
F. Installation of Doors
1. Install hollow metal doors supplied by Section 08 11 00 after finishing of walls.
2. Install hollow metal doors supplied by Section 08 11 00.
3. Fit wood doors with 2mm clearance at jambs and heads, and 9.5mm over finished
flooring.
4. Trim hinge side of wood doors to fit and bevel latch edges as required.
5. Ensure that top and bottom edges of wood doors are primed under Work of Section 09
90 00 after they are cut to fit.
6. Undercut wood doors where indicated on Door Schedule.
G. Installation of Finish Hardware
1. Install finish hardware supplied by Section 08 71 00. All door panels, drawers and doors
to window openings to have locks, hinges and hardware to the approval of the
Consultant.
______________________________________________________________________________
2. Make cuts in wood doors neatly.
3. Accurately locate and adjust hardware to meet manufacturer’s instructions. Use special
tools and jigs as recommended.
4. Install hardware in wood doors at same location as for hollow metalwork installed in
Project.
5. Locate door stops to contact doors 75 mm from latch edge.
6. Install hardware and trim square and plum to doors.
7. Replace missing hardware to ensure specified installation at tile of building completion.

After installation, replace wrappings for hardware provided by manufacturer.
8. Safeguard keys to keep them out of unauthorized hands, tag them with opening
number, and deliver them to person designated by Consultant at building completion.
H. Finishing
1. Sand wood surfaces after installation to leave surfaces in true planes and free of
machine or tool marks.
2. Where edges of millwork have 1.5 mm thick lamination, the edge shall be lipped or
mitered to the approval of the Consultant.
3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Adjust hinged doors to swing freely and easily, to remain stationary at any point of swing,
to close evenly and tightly against stops without binding and to latch positively when doors
are closed with moderate force. Ensure that when doors are installed with hinged stiles
adjacent, both doors can open simultaneously without binding.
B. Adjust hardware so that latches and locks operate smoothly and without binding, and
closers act positively with the lease possible resistances in use. Lubricate hardware if
required by suppliers instructions. Clean hardware after installation in accordance with
supplier’s instruction.
C. Ensure that doors equipped with closers operate to close doors firmly against anticipated
wind and building air pressure and to enable doors to be readily opened as suitable for
function, location and traffic.
D. Sand and clean woodwork to leave free from finish defects in any exposed part.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
here.
B. This section includes but is not limited to the supply, fabrication, finishing and installation
of the following caseworks:
1. Reception Counters in Lobbies.
C. Works performed by other sections and which is related to this section is specified in:
1. Section 04400 : Stone Assemblies

2. Section 09900 : Painting and Coating
D. Supply of work which shall be installed by this section as specified in:
Section 087100 : To furnish hardware as specified in section 08 71 00.
E. Coordinate with section 05 70 00 to ensure that proper provisions are made for installation
of casework on metal framed counters and display cases.
F. Coordinate with Division 23 and 26 installing mechanical, communication and similar

services and equipment in casework to ensure that suitable provisions are made and that
proper installation results.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Tolerances
Fabricate and install stainless steel where exposed to view to maintain a surface flatness
that ensures that the slope of the surface at any point is no greater that 0.5% from the
nominal plane of the surface when measured at 25mm intervals in any direction.
A. Qualifications
1. Provide caseworks specified in this section only by a fabricator who has adequate plant,
equipment and skilled tradesmen to fabricate and install the casework, and is known to
have been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to that specified during a
period of at least the immediate past 10 years.
2. Perform welding to meet specified requirements of BS EN 1011-1 or AWS D1. 1.

______________________________________________________________________________
1.04 REFERENCES
A. References Standards
The following reference standards included in this section shall apply as specified in
sections 01 42 19.
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
ANSI Z97.1- 04: For Safety Glazing Materials used in buildings – Safety Performance
Specifications and Methods of Test.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
ASTM C1048-04: Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass & # 8212; kind
HS, kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
BS 952- Glass for Glazing:
Part 1: 1995 Classification.

Part 2: 1980 Terminology for work on glass.
BS 1186- Timber workmanship in joinery.
Part 1: 1991, Specification for timber.

Part 2: 1988, Specification foe workmanship.
BS 3794-00: Decorative, High Pressure Laminates (HPL) based on thermosetting.
Part 1: 1986, Specification for Performance.
BS 4965: 1999, Specification for Decorative Laminated Plastics Sheet Veneered

Boards and Panels.
BS 6206- 81: Specification for Impact Performance Requirements for Flat Safety Glass
and Safety Plastics for use in Building.
BS EN 1011-1 98: Welding – Recommendations for Welding of Metallic Materials-

PART 1: General Guidance for Arc Welding.
BS EN ISO 11600- 03: Building Construction- Joining Products Classification and

Requirements for Sealants.
4. Federal Specification (U.S.A.)
FS DD-G-451D, Glass, Float or Plate, Sheet, Figured (Flat for Glazing, mirrors and
other uses).
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
NEMA LD3:05 High-pressure Decorative Laminates

6. Except where more stringent requirement are specified in this section, fabricate
cabinetwork and fitments to Quality Standards of:
______________________________________________________________________________
a. AWI specification, Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards and Guide

Specification, 1984, by Architectural Woodwork Institute, Section 400, Casework,
for Premium Grade quality; or
b. BS 1186, Parts 1 and 2, for equivalent to AWI Premium Grade.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings for units including full details and layouts.
B. Samples
Submit samples of plastic laminate, enamel, cork board, fabric and translucent glass yo
site and to Consultant’s office.
A. Package and otherwise protect casework from damage during handling, delivery and
storage. Provide temporary skids under large or heavy units.
B. Deliver work of this section to site as required for installation, to meet construction
schedule, and to locations as directed.
C. Store products protected from damage and as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Protect finish surfaces by steady protective wrappings.
E. Do not deliver casework to site until conditions are such that no damage will occur to it
while in storage and during installation. Ensure that humidity in storage areas does not
exceed 55%.
execution method suit environmental conditions that are encountered at the site and
cause no damage to the products specified in this section or to the performance of
these products in use.
3. Environmental conditions shall include, but shall not be limited to, ambient
temperatures; humidity; moisture in the air and on the products and surfaces with
which they are in contact; moisture content and temperature of the products and the
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Conform to Premium Grade standards of AWI or equivalent BS 1186 as defined in

applicable reference standards for timber and plywood materials and their machining,
sanding and finishing.
B. Plywood
1. Incorporate only plywood with wood plywood/lumber core.

2. Concealed: At option of fabricator.
3. Exposed: Red Oak Veneer.
C. Plastic Laminate
To meet specified requirements of BS 3794 Part 1, or BS 4965 as applicable for use; or of

NEMA LD3; GP-50 General Purpose and Post formed Grades as applicable, of texture and
colour selected from manufacturers standard range. Refer Section 06 20 00.
D. Glass
1. Tempered Glass:
Heat treated, fully tempered, safety glass to meet specified requirements of Federal
Specification FS DD-G-451D, or BS 952.
2. Translucent Glass:
Etched clear float glass to meet specified requirements of Federal Specification FS DD-
G-451D , or BS 952.
3. Laminated Glass:
Heat treated, fully tempered safety glass to meet specified requirements of BS 952, Part
1 for performance in accordance with BS 6206; or of performance specified in ANSI
Z97.1 to ASTM C1048 or U.S. Federal Specification FS DD G 451D Etch. As specified
glass before tempering. Refer also to Section 08 46 00.
E. Glazing Gaskets: Extruded, preformed, neoprene or EPDM rubber, to meet specified

requirements of BS 4255.
F. Sealant
1. At Glass-to-Metal: Low modulus type silicone, to meet specified requirements of FS TT-

S-001543A, Type A; or BS EN ISO 11600.
2. At Glass-to-Glass: High modules type silicone, to meet specified requirements of FS TT-

G. Glass Fibre Board
Glass fibre insulation board formed into rigid board with resin binders, with minimum
density of 112 kg/cu.m.
______________________________________________________________________________
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate Wood Components
1. With no finger joined or laminated solid wood members where exposed to view.
2. With edge grain of exposed and semi-exposed plywood concealed.
3. With cabinet body members assembled with adhesive.
4. Where permitted, with power-driven Tee head nails or staples with long dimensions
parallel to grain.
5. With solid wood provided at locations where hardware is secured.
B. Glass
1. Install glass with all required sealants and gaskets.
2. Grid and polish edges at external corners to provide mitered joints.
3. Fill joints with sealant and tool smooth.
C. Lighting
1. Install lights as shown on architectural drawings.
2. Install 240V/12V, 50Hz transformer as shown on electrical/architectural drawings.
3. Comply with the requirements of Division 26.
4. Incorporate services, fixtures and trim in units. Make provision for mechanical and
electrical installations included in work of Divisions 23 and 26. Make all necessary
cutouts to template information.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
Take site measurements of construction to which cabinet work must conform, and through
which access must be made, before it is delivered to site, to ensure that adaptation is not
required which would result in construction delay.
3.02 INSTALLATION
Installation of cabinets and fitments is included in work of Section 06 20 00.
A. Adjust operating parts of units to move freely without excessive play and to fit accurately.
B. Refinish damaged and defective work before completion of project. Refinishing of exposed
surfaces shall show no discernible variation in appearance.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06600-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
Division 01, General Requirements is a part of this section and shall
B. This section includes but is not limited to the supply, fabrication,

finishing and installation of:
1. Vanity counter tops with integral bowls
2. Reception counters
3. Restaurant counters
4. Kitchen countertops with sinks
5. Covered backsplashes
6. Color inlays
C. Coordinate with Sections 06 20 00, 06 40 00 and 05 70 00 to ensure

that proper provisions are made for installation.
D. Coordinate with Division 23 and 26 installing mechanical and

electrical to ensure that suitable provisions are made and for
installation results.
A. Qualifications
Provide work specified in this section only by a fabricator who has

adequate equipment and skilled tradesmen who is known to have
been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to that
specified during a period of at least the immediate past 5 years.
B. Allowable tolerances:
1. Variation in component size: ± 3 mm.
2. Location of openings: ± 3 mm from indicated location.
3. Mock-up:
Prior to final approval of Shop Drawings, erect at project site one
full size mock-up of each component for review. Should mock-up
not be approved, re-fabricate and reinstall until approval is
secured. Remove rejected units from project site. Approved
mock-ups may remain as part of finished work.
1.03 REFERENCES
The following reference standards included in this section shall

apply as specified in Section 01 42 19.
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. American National Standard Institute ( ANSI ) :
ANSI Z124.3 – 05: Plastic Lavatories

ANSI Z124.6 – 07: Plastic Sinks
2. American Society for Testing and Materials ( ASTM ):
ASTM D256-06ae1: Standard Test Methods for Determining the

Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics
ASTM D570-98(2005): Standard Test Method for Water

Absorption of Plastics
ASTM D638-08: Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of

Plastics
ASTM D696-08: Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear

Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30&#176C and
30&#176C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer
ASTM D785-08: Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness

of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D790-07e1: Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties

of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating
Materials
ASTM D2583-07: Standard Test Method for Indentation

Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
ASTM D5420-04: Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance

of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker impacted
by a falling Weight (Gardner Impact)
ASTM E84-08a: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials
NEMA LD3, 2005: High Pressure Decorative Laminates
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for units including full

details and layouts. Indicate dimensions, component sizes,
fabrication details, attachment provisions and coordination
requirements with adjacent work.
B. Samples: Submit minimum 50mm x 50mm samples. Indicate full

range of color and pattern variation. Approved samples will be
retained as standard for work.
_____________________________________________________________________________
C. Product Data: Indicate product description, fabrication information

and compliance with specified performance requirements.
D. Test Reports: Test Reports shall indicate compliance with

specified test methods and performance levels. Safety related test
data (flame spread, smoke generation, and smoke toxicity) shall be
specific to the color/pattern of the material selected, i.e. solid color
or granite pattern color.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance

data including repair and cleaning instructions.
A. Package and otherwise protect from damage during handling,

delivery, and storage. Provide temporary skids under large or heavy
units.
B. Deliver work of this section to site as required for installation, to

meet construction schedule, and to locations as directed.
C. Store products protected from damage and as recommended by

manufacturer.
D. Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for

installation. Store components indoors prior to installation.
E. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide

protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining
following installation for duration of project.
1.06 GUARANTEE
A. Provide manufacturer’s 10-year warranty against defects in

materials. Warranty shall provide material and labor to repair or
replace defective materials. Damage caused by physical or
chemical abuse or damage from excessive heat will not be
warranted.
A. Environmental Conditions.

storage, handling and execution method suit environmental

_____________________________________________________________________________
3. Environmental conditions shall include, but shall not be limited to,

ambient temperature; humidity; moisture in the air and on the
products and surfaces with which they are in contact; moisture
content and temperature of the products and the materials with
which they are in contact.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Solid Polymer Components: Cast, homogeneous filled acrylic; not

coated, laminated or of composite construction.
1. Material shall have minimum physical and performance

properties specified herein.
2. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.25 mm shall be repairable

by sanding and polishing.
B. Reception area counters:
8mm thick solid surface material adhesively joined with

inconspicuous seams on 19mm MDF and/or as detailed on
Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer; edge details as
indicated on the Drawings; color, inlays and pattern to the
Consultant’s approval.
C. Kitchen counter surfaces:
1. Install 13mm thick solid surface material as indicated on

Drawings and as recommended by the Manufacturer,
adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams; edge details and
coved backsplash and end splashes as indicated on Drawings;
color, inlays and pattern to the Consultant’s approval.
2. Follow manufacturers recommendations for reinforced joints

and cutouts, expansion joints, insulation requirements between
solid surface material and adjacent equipment, thermal
insulation between hot and cold applications, etc. Make cutouts
to templates furnished by the appliance manufacturer.
D. Countertops with sinks:
Provide countertop complete with single/double bowl with molded

drain-board sink as detailed on Drawings and recommended by the
Manufacturer. Provide counter complete with coved backsplash and
end splashes of size shown on the Drawings. Models, colors and
pattern to the approval of the Consultant.
_____________________________________________________________________________
E. Vanity tops with integral bowls:
Molded countertop of 8mm thick solid surface material adhesively

joined with inconspicuous seams on 19mm MDF and/or as detailed
on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer; 600 mm wide,
complete with integrally molded bowls of solid surface material;
edge details as indicated on the Drawings. Provide with cove
backsplash and end splashes as shown on the Drawings. Models,
colors, patterns and inlays to the approval of the Consultant.
F. Performance Characteristics
PROPERTIES TEST METHOD PERFORMANCE

CHARACTERISTICS
Stretch Resistance ASTM D 638 8000
Stretch Module ASTM D 638 1,5X10⁶ psi
Flexibility Strength ASTM D 790 5850 psi
Flexibility Module ASTM D 790 1.38X10⁶ psi
Strain Limit ASTM D 638 35%
Hardness ASTM D 785 87 Rockwell “M”
Shock Resistance ASTM D 2583 60 Barcoll Impress
Gardner ASTM D 5420 236 in – lbs
IZOD ASTM D 256A 0.27 ft – lbs –in
Ball Drop NEMA LD3-3.3 57 – in.1/2 - lb ball
Heat Expansion ASTM D 696 3.67x10⁻⁵ in/in/⁰C
Heat Resistance NEMA LD3-3.5 No Change
Boiled Water Surface NEMA LD3-3.5 No Change
Resistance
Water Absorbance ASTM D 570 0.6 % Long Period
Erosion NEMA LD3-3.5 No Loss of Tissue
Abrasion/Washable ANSI Pass
Z124.3&Z124.6
Strain Resistance ANSI Pass
Z124.3&Z124.6
Density 1.68
Average Weight 4.46 lbs/sq/ft
Color Stability NEMA LD3-3.10 No Change
Flammability ASTM E 84 Class 1/Class A
Blaze Diffuse <25
Fume Expansion <30
Category Rate 1
2.03 ACCESORY PRODUCTS
A. Provide accessory product as recommended by the manufacturer

including but not limited to:
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. Joint adhesives;
2. Panel adhesives;
3. Sealants (color-matching or clear);
4. Required mounting hardware and tools (Manufacturer’s approved
clips, inserts, fasteners, etc).
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Fabrications to be performed by a certified fabricator/installer.
B. Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and

shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and
manufacturer’s requirements.
C. Form joints between components using manufacturer’s standard

joint adhesive. Joints shall be inconspicuous in appearance and
without voids. Attach 50 mm wide reinforcing strip under each joint
or as recommended by the Manufacturer.
D. Provide holes and cutouts for plumbing and bath accessories as

indicated on the drawings.
E. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout all
cutouts, then sand all edges smooth. Repair or reject defective or
inaccurate work.
F. Surface finish:
1. Finished surfaces shall have matte (gloss rating of 5-20), semi

gloss (gloss rating of 25-50) or polish (gloss rating of 55-80)
finish, as approved by the Consultant.
G. Thermoforming:
1. Comply with manufacturer’s forming data and instructions.
H. Cove backsplashes and endsplashes:
1. Fabricate 13 mm radius cove at intersection of counters and

backsplashes or as indicated on Drawings. Fabricate in shop.
i. Colored inlays:
1. Rout 3 mm max deep groove for inlay to pattern indicated on
Drawings.
2. Fill groove using methods approved by manufacturer, avoiding

air bubbles or voids. Overfill inlay area.
3. Allow area to fully cure. Do not overheat inlay while sanding.

Finish and touch up to uniform appearance.
_____________________________________________________________________________
4. Make provision for mechanical and electrical installations included

in work of Divisions 23 and 26. Make all necessary cutouts to
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Take site measurements of construction to which work must conform,

and through which access must be made, before it is delivered to site,
to ensure that adaptation is not required which would result in
construction delay.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop

drawings and product installation details.
B. Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, with

joints inconspicuous in finished work. Keep components and hands
clean when making joints.
C. Adhere sinks/bowls to countertops using mounting hardware,

adhesives and color-matched silicone sealant as recommended by the
Manufacturer.
D. Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on the drawings.

Adhere to countertops using manufacturer’s standard color-matched
silicone sealant.
E. Keep components and hands clean during installation. Remove

adhesives, sealant and other stains.
F. Make plumbing connections to sinks in accordance with Division 23,

Mechanical.
G. Fabricator/Installer is to provide and review maintenance procedures

and the Manufacturer’s warranty with the head of maintenance upon
completion of project.
A. Project surfaces from damage until completion of project. Repair or

replace damaged work that cannot be repaired to architect’s
satisfaction.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. WOOD AND PLASTIC SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06610-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1. DESCRIPTION
Division 01, General Requirements is a part of this section and shall apply as if
repeated here.
2. This section includes but is not limited to the supply, fabrication, finishing and
installation of:
a. Vanity counter tops with integral bowls
b. Reception counters
c. Restaurant counters
d. Kitchen countertops with sinks
e. Covered backsplashes
f. Color inlays
3. Coordinate with Sections 06 20 00, 06 40 00 and 05 70 00 to ensure that proper

provisions are made for installation.
4. Coordinate with Division 23 and 26 installing mechanical and electrical to ensure

that suitable provisions are made and for installation results.
1. No Asbestos Containing Materials (ACMs) shall be used within the development.
2. No Cooper arsenate (CCA) – treated timber is used on the project. Where there is
frequent and intimate contact, such as – but not limited to shading devices and handrails.
3. The contractor to submit evidence of purchase indicating that no ACMs or CCA-treated

timber were used in the project as per Estidama Requirements.
4. Allowable tolerances:
a. Variation in component size: ± 3 mm.
b. Location of openings: ± 3 mm from indicated location.
c. Mock-up:
Prior to final approval of Shop Drawings, erect at project site one full size mock-up
of each component for review. Should mock-up not be approved, re-fabricate and
reinstall until approval is secured. Remove rejected units from project site.
Approved mock-ups may remain as part of finished work.
1.3. REFERENCES
1. Reference Standards
Section 01 42 19.
_____________________________________________________________________________
a. American National Standard Institute ( ANSI ) :

b. American Society for Testing and Materials ( ASTM ):
ASTM D256-06ae1: Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum
Impact Resistance of Plastics
ASTM D570-98(2005): Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
ASTM D638-08: Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM D696-08: Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion
of Plastics Between -30&#176C and 30&#176C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer
ASTM D785-08: Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and
Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D790-07e1: Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D2583-07: Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics
by Means of a Barcol Impressor
ASTM D5420-04: Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic
Specimen by Means of a Striker impacted by a falling Weight (Gardner Impact)
ASTM E84-08a: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials
c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for units including full details and layouts.
Indicate dimensions, component sizes, fabrication details, attachment provisions and
coordination requirements with adjacent work.
2. Samples: Submit minimum 50mm x 50mm samples. Indicate full range of color and
pattern variation. Approved samples will be retained as standard for work.
3. Product Data: Indicate product description, fabrication information and compliance with
specified performance requirements.
_____________________________________________________________________________
4. Test Reports: Test Reports shall indicate compliance with specified test methods and
performance levels. Safety related test data (flame spread, smoke generation, and smoke
toxicity) shall be specific to the color/pattern of the material selected, i.e. solid color or
granite pattern color.
5. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data including repair
1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1. Package and otherwise protect from damage during handling, delivery, and storage.
Provide temporary skids under large or heavy units.
2. Deliver work of this section to site as required for installation, to meet construction
3. Store products protected from damage and as recommended by manufacturer.
4. Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation. Store
components indoors prior to installation.
5. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to

prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project.
1.6. GUARANTEE
1. Provide manufacturer’s 10-year warranty against defects in materials. Warranty shall

provide material and labor to repair or replace defective materials. Damage caused by
physical or chemical abuse or damage from excessive heat will not be warranted.
1. Environmental Conditions.
a. Adapt techniques approved by the Consultant to ensure that storage, handling and
execution method suit environmental conditions that are encountered at the site, and
b. Follow recommendations of the supplier of the products.
c. Environmental conditions shall include, but shall not be limited to, ambient
temperature; humidity; moisture in the air and on the products and surfaces with
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
1. Solid Polymer Components: Cast, homogeneous filled acrylic; not coated,

laminated or of composite construction.
a. Material shall have minimum physical and performance properties specified

herein.
b. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.25 mm shall be repairable by sanding and

polishing.
2. Reception area counters:
8mm thick solid surface material adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams on
19mm MDF and/or as detailed on Drawings and recommended by the
manufacturer; edge details as indicated on the Drawings; color, inlays and pattern
to the Consultant’s approval.
3. Kitchen counter surfaces:
a. Install 13mm thick solid surface material as indicated on Drawings and as

recommended by the Manufacturer, adhesively joined with inconspicuous
seams; edge details and coved backsplash and end splashes as indicated on
Drawings; color, inlays and pattern to the Consultant’s approval.
b. Follow manufacturers recommendations for reinforced joints and cutouts,

expansion joints, insulation requirements between solid surface material and
adjacent equipment, thermal insulation between hot and cold applications, etc.
Make cutouts to templates furnished by the appliance manufacturer.
4. Countertops with sinks:
Provide countertop complete with single/double bowl with molded drain-board sink
as detailed on Drawings and recommended by the Manufacturer. Provide counter
complete with coved backsplash and end splashes of size shown on the
Drawings. Models, colors and pattern to the approval of the Consultant.
5. Vanity tops with integral bowls:
Molded countertop of 8mm thick solid surface material adhesively joined with
inconspicuous seams on 19mm MDF and/or as detailed on Drawings and
recommended by the manufacturer; 600 mm wide, complete with integrally
molded bowls of solid surface material; edge details as indicated on the Drawings.
Provide with cove backsplash and end splashes as shown on the Drawings.
Models, colors, patterns and inlays to the approval of the Consultant.
_____________________________________________________________________________
6. Performance Characteristics

CHARACTERISTICS
Resistance
Z124.3&Z124.6
Z124.3&Z124.6
Density 1.68
Blaze Diffuse <25
Fume Expansion <30
Category Rate 1
2.2. ACCESORY PRODUCTS
1. Provide accessory product as recommended by the manufacturer including but not

limited to:
a. Joint adhesives;
b. Panel adhesives;
c. Sealants (color-matching or clear);
d. Required mounting hardware and tools (Manufacturer’s approved clips,
inserts, fasteners, etc).
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.3. FABRICATION
1. Fabrications to be performed by a certified fabricator/installer.

2. Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes
indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s
requirements.
3. Form joints between components using manufacturer’s standard joint adhesive.

Joints shall be inconspicuous in appearance and without voids. Attach 50 mm wide
reinforcing strip under each joint or as recommended by the Manufacturer.
4. Provide holes and cutouts for plumbing and bath accessories as indicated on the
drawings.
5. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout all cutouts, then
sand all edges smooth. Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work.
6. Surface finish:
a. Finished surfaces shall have matte (gloss rating of 5-20), semi gloss (gloss
rating of 25-50) or polish (gloss rating of 55-80) finish, as approved by the
Consultant.
7. Thermoforming:
a. Comply with manufacturer’s forming data and instructions.
8. Cove backsplashes and endsplashes:
a. Fabricate 13 mm radius cove at intersection of counters and backsplashes or

as indicated on Drawings. Fabricate in shop.
9. Colored inlays:
a. Rout 3 mm max deep groove for inlay to pattern indicated on Drawings.
b. Fill groove using methods approved by manufacturer, avoiding air bubbles or

voids. Overfill inlay area.
c. Allow area to fully cure. Do not overheat inlay while sanding. Finish and touch
up to uniform appearance.
d. Make provision for mechanical and electrical installations included in work of

Divisions 23 and 26. Make all necessary cutouts to template information.
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1. EXAMINATION
1. Take site measurements of construction to which work must conform, and

through which access must be made, before it is delivered to site, to ensure
that adaptation is not required which would result in construction delay.
3.2. INSTALLATION
1. Install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop

2. Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, with joints

inconspicuous in finished work. Keep components and hands clean when
making joints.
3. Adhere sinks/bowls to countertops using mounting hardware, adhesives and

color-matched silicone sealant as recommended by the Manufacturer.
4. Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on the drawings. Adhere

to countertops using manufacturer’s standard color-matched silicone sealant.
5. Keep components and hands clean during installation. Remove adhesives,

sealant and other stains.
6. Make plumbing connections to sinks in accordance with Division 23,

Mechanical.
7. Fabricator/Installer is to provide and review maintenance procedures and the

Manufacturer’s warranty with the head of maintenance upon completion of
project.
3.3. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
1. Project surfaces from damage until completion of project. Repair or replace

damaged work that cannot be repaired to architect’s satisfaction.
END OF SECTION
_______________________________________________________________________
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
here.
B. This section includes but is not limited to the supply and installation of the following works
as indicated on drawings:
1. Cabinets and Counters in:
a. Kitchen and Servery.

b. Lobbies and Reception areas.
c. Vanities in washrooms as shown on drawings.
d. Security Rooms.
e. Janitor Rooms.
2. Millwork:
a. Closet shelves, etc.
3. Installation of finish hardware supplied by Section 08 71 00 or specified herein.
4. Installation of wood casework specified in sections 06 40 00.
5. Associated Electrical installations: Luminaries, swithches, trunking, cables, etc.
A. Comply with Safety Standards detailed within the ADDC/AADC “General Requirements for
Safety and Quality”.
B. Ensure a Safety and Quality system is implemented for the project which satisfies the
requirements of ISO 9001:2000 or any other similar internationally recognized Quality of
Management System.
C. All external carpentry works structures where there is a frequent and intimate live contact
shall not be CCA (Chromate Copper Arsenate) treated timbers and it shall not be used in
the project.
D. Mock-up:
1. Provide full-size cabinet complete with drawers, hinged door, adjustable shelf and
countertop.
2. Approved mock-up will establish a minimum standard of quality for this work and may
be used as part of the Work.
______________________________________________________________________________
1.03 REFERENCES
A. References Standards:
The following reference standards included in this Section shall apply as specified in
Section 01 42 19.
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSO):
ANSI/BHMA A156.9 – 03: Cabinet Hardware
BS 5750 P2-87: Quality Systems- Specification for Production and Installation.
BS 6566 P1- 85: Specification for Construction of Panels and Characteristics of Piles
including Marking.
BS 6566 P2- 85: Glossary of Terms.
BS 6566 P4- 85: Specification for Tolerances on the Dimensions of Plywood Panels.
BS 6566 P5- 85: Specification for Moisture Content.
BS 6566 P6- 85: Specification for limits of defects for the Classification of Plywood by
Appearance.
BS 6566 P7- 85: Specification for Classification of resistance to fungal decay and
wood borer attack.
BS 6566 P8- 85: Specification for Bond Performance of Veneer Plywood.
BS EN 942- 07: Timber in Joinery- General Requirements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer’s product data, detail sheets, specifications, indicate product description,

fabrication information and compliance with specified performance requirements.
2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings:
Submit shop drawings of all cabinets, counters, wardrobes, drawer units, etc., showing
including but not limited to following: locations, dimensions, component sizes, fabrication,
installation and joinery details, attachment provisions and coordination requirements with
adjacent work.
C. Samples:
______________________________________________________________________________
1. Submit minimum 300 mm x 300 mm samples of including but not limited to plastic
laminates, veneers, inlays, particleboard, MDF board, wood species, etc of all
specified items in each specified finish, indicating manufacturers full range of colour
and pattern variation.
2. Approved samples will be retained as standards for work.
3. Submit samples of carcass, drawer and door fronts, cabinets hardware, etc. to the
Consultant’s office.
D. Maintenance data: Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data, including repair
A. Protect materials from damage during handling, delivery and storage.
B. Receive and or supply and fix finish hardware and secure against theft until contract
handover.
C. Do not deliver cabinet materials to site until storage areas are completed and conditions
are such that no damage will occur to them while in storage and during installation.
A. Environmental Conditions:
execution methods suit environmental conditions that are encountered at the site, and
cause no damage to the products specified in this Section or to the performance of these
products in use.
3. Environmental conditions shall include, but shall not be limited to, ambient temperature;
humidity; moisture in the air and on the products and surfaces with which they are in
contact; and temperature of the products and the materials with which they are in contact.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Provide hardware required for cabinets specified in this section. Use non-corrosive
hardware.
2. Moisture content of wood at time of installation shall be at an average of 7% with a

permitted range of individual pieces of 5% to 9%.
3. Use only adhesives and fastenings that develop sufficient strength for intended use, are
non-staining and are unaffected by the environment to which exposed.
______________________________________________________________________________
B. Wood
1. Where not exposed to view, use hardwood or soft wood timber of grades suitable for
fabrication, utility and structural needs.
2. Where exposed to view, meet requirements of specified AWI Quality Grade Standard or
equivalent BS EN 942 as applicable.
3. Ensure that surfaces exposed to view and given a natural or stained finish free from
markings and stains caused by milling, treatment, storage, handling and other causes.
4. Ensure that veneered panels are matched for grain configuration and uniformity of color
throughout all surfaces exposed to view which are to receive a natural or stained finish.
C. Plywood
1. Softwood: To meet specified requirements of AWI, or equivalent of BS 6566, Parts 1, 2,

4, 5, 6, 7 an 8; Sanded Grade, Solid Two Slides.
2. Hardwood: To meet specified requirements of AWI as applicable for use, smooth

sanded, rotary cut face veneers, Good Grade where exposed to view and Sound Grade
where not; except that White Oak veneers shall be sliced and matched for continuous,
straight and consistent grain.
D. Kitchen Cabinet, Carcase work and Vanities
1. Carcase cabinets to be constructed using 15mm thick medium density fiber (MDF)
board melamine rasin coated on both sides, in white or beige with all edges strip seal
lipped.
2. Carcases to be manufactured in accordance with BS 5750 Part 2.
3. Carcasing to kitchen cabinets and vanities to be designed and constructed to allow for
free passage of surface mounted pipe-works on back walls below worktop level.
4. Toe Space: As indicated.
E. Drawers
1. Drawers are to be formed in molded plastic, single piece, incorporating easy to clean
edges and angles.
2. Drawers to glide smoothly and quietly on concealed steel roller bearing runners with self
closing mechanisms (both sides), and with drawer front adjusters.
F. Shelves
1. Shelves to be constructed using 15 mm thick high-density particleboard with all edges

strip seal lipped.
2. Shelves to be adjustable via metal pin supports.

______________________________________________________________________________
3. Shelves to be capable of bearing a load of 25kg at centre span over a measured period.
G. Legs: Legs to be adjustable, plastic molded to accommodate a plinth height of 100mm to

150mm.
H. Plinth
1. Plinth to be continuous made of laminated plastic with a matching seating profile. Finish
being as indicated on drawings, otherwise plinth to match edges of carcase.
I. Doors, Drawer Front and Open Shelves
1. To serveries, vanities in washrooms:
Solid colour laminate with vertical black trims wood grain effect on 18mm thick MDF,
square design fronts. Handle: black metal, blow design. Laminate color from
manufacturer’s standard color range.
J. Sinks
1. Type ‘A’: Sinks shall be inset type, stainless steel 1 bowl and side drainer or as detailed
on drawings.
2. Type ‘B’: Sinks shall be with countertops of thick solid polymer fabrication (Corian or
similar approved) shall be as specified under Section 06 61 16 and detailed on
drawings.
K. Mixers
1. Mixers to kitchens, washrooms and tearooms to be specified in Section 22 00 00.
L. Work Tops
1. V.I.P. washroom/toilet’s counters and work tops to be 30 mm Store Type ‘1’ polished
finish as detailed on the drawings complete with 100 mm high splash backs, rounded
edges and cut out to receive sink units. All counters and work tops to be polished and
sealed with approved sealer to reduce permeability.
2. Washroom/toilet/pantry and other counters and worktops as indicated on Drawings shall

be 19 mm thick solid polymer fabrication (Corian or similar approved) as specified
under Section 06 61 16 and detailed on drawings.
M. Finish Hardware and Accessories
Provide all cabinet hardware required for completion of plastic laminate cabinets and
architectural woodwork. Cabinet hardware shall comply with requirements of ANSI/BHMA
A156.9.
1. Hinges
______________________________________________________________________________
a. Hinges to be 3-way adjustable in bright steel with hinge plates set flush into cabinet
carcase.
b. Hinges to be sturdy carry cabinet door weight and to be minimum 180° self return
swing conceled type.
2. Knobs and Handgrips to be supplied and fixed to harmonize with cabinets in all cases.
3. Wardrobe rails to be constructed using white nylon coated steel tube and nylon side
hook plates.
4. Provide all other cabinets hardware and accessories required for completion of plastic
laminated cabinets and architectural woodwork, including adjustable shelf supports and
cabinet hinges (where required and to the approval of the Consultant). Catches (2
cashes in doors over 1.2m high), locks for drawers and doors, pulls. Label holders,
cabinet towel bards, drawer accessories, bumpers and drawers slides.
N. Coat Rods (in WC cubicles):
25 mm dia chromium plated or polished stainless steel pipe, with matching flanges.
O. Seats for Benches:
1. Fabricate from 20 mm hardwood strips with protective varnish fixed to steel pipe support
as detailed on Drawings.
2. Round top edges and corners where exposed.
R. Wood Paneling
This above schedule does not necessarily incorporate listing of all finished carpentry items
to be included by this Section, but only those items which require specific description.
Ensure that all Drawings and specifications Sections, including those for architectural,
mechanical and electrical work, are consulted to establish the limits of finish carpentry
included in this Section.
2.01 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Assemble fabricated cabinets as shown on the drawings and with workstops in units as
long as possible. Design units to fit together if site assembly is required.
2. Fabricate cabinets to meet specified requirements of AWI Section 400 for Custom
Grade; or of BS EN 942 for equivalent quality.
3. Fabricate millwork and paneling to meet specified requirements of AWI Sections 300
and 500A for Premium Grade; or BS EN 942 for equivalent quality.
______________________________________________________________________________
4. Incorporate services, fixtures and trim in fabricated millwork units as indicated on

Drawings or specified in Divisions 23 or 26, or both. Make necessary cut outs to
5. Edge plywood where specified or indicated with solid wood to match face vaneer, with
profiled pressure glued edge and finished level with plywood surfaces.
6. Finger jointed or laminated solid wood members will not be acceptable.
B. Trim
1. Rout or groove backs of flat trim members.
2. Kerf backs of wide flat members.
C. Fastening
1. Fasten assemblies with screws or special fasteners at critical joints where strain and
excessive usage and shrinkage is anticipated and where required by specified quality
grade standards.
2. Glue built-up assemblies as well as nailing and screwing.
D. Plastic Laminate Facing
1. Factory bond plastic laminate generally unless otherwise indicated but where insitu
work is carried out, apply plastic laminate for counters to soft wood faced, phenolic
bonded plywood or to particleboard, minimum 19mm thick, or as otherwise indicated on
drawings. Apply plastic laminate for doors, drawer fronts, facing panels, gables, etc. of
cabinets to minimum 19mm thick wood core, close grain hardwood faced plywood.
2. Bond plastic laminate to backing with urea formaldehyde adhesive, or by methods of

equal or better quality recommended by the plastic laminate manufacturer.
3. Seal edges of cutouts with plastic laminate, or where concealed from view by other
methods that will prevent entry of moisture into core.
4. Apply plastic laminate backing sheet to core on backside of panels faced with laminate.
5. Ensure that both face and backing sheet have been sanded in the same direction.
6. Bond plastic laminate self-edges under pressure and bevel and finish smooth finished
corners.
7. Round corners of holes cut through plastic laminate and file them smooth.
8. Make joints only when length of plastic laminate facing exceeds 3660 mm. Butt joints
together, reinforce core with 6.4 mm hardwood blind splines and lock together with tite
Joint fasteners located at a maximum of 75 mm from edges.
E. Finishing
______________________________________________________________________________
1. Finish each surface of millwork to specified quality grade standard where exposed or
semi-exposed.
2. Consider that all visible surfaces are exposed, including underside surfaces above 1200
mm from floor and interiors if fitments behind glass doors.
3. Consider that underside surfaces with 1200 mm of the floor, top surfaces more than
1800 mm above the floor, interiors of fitments behind opaque doors and the back of
fitment doors are semi-exposed.
4. Find sand surfaces level and smooth after fabrication.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Before commencing installation ensure that groups, strapping and other constructions and
surfaces to which finish carpentry is installed are satisfactory for fitting and adequate for its
securement.
B. Take site measurement of construction to which finish carpentry installations must conform,
and through which access must be made, before fabricated units are delivered to site, to
ensure that adaptation is not required which would result in construction delay.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protection
1. Ensure that finish carpentry materials are protected from damage and deterioration
during installation and otherwise until project completion.
2. Take particular care that wood made fire retardant by pressure treatment is not
exposed to dampness.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Backprime exterior and interior millwork specified in this Section immediately after
delivery to site under work of Section 09 90 00. Ensure that cuts ends are primed.
Scrape or sand smooth surfaces by this Section. Notify those who are responsible for
backprming in sufficient time to enable them to schedule their work.
2. Install finish carpentry plumb, level and straight, and fasten it securely to backing to
support itself and anticipated superimposed loads.
3. Build finish carpentry into construction as indicated on Drawings or specified in other

Sections of Specifications, or both.
B. Trim
______________________________________________________________________________
1. Install in single lengths except where material limitation makes impossible. Stagger
joints where they occur and locate over solid backing for fastening.
2. Install wood bases and edging in coordination with Section 08 14 00.
C. Cutting and Fitting
1. Cut mouldings with sharp true profiles.
2. Cope trim and mouldings at interior corners and at returns.
3. Miter trim and mouldings at exterior corners. Glue and lock shop miters that are over
100 mm from heel to point.
4. Scribe and join members accurately together, and to other surfaces, to fit tightly and
with flat smooth surfaces. Install trim or fillers panels to close gaps.
D. Fastening
1. Fasten finish carpentry with nails generally, but use screws or special fasteners at
critical joints where strain, usage and excessive shrinkage is anticipated, and where
specified quality grade standards required.
2. Blind nail unless impossible.
3. Set finish nails below finished surfaces to receive putty.
E. Installation of Pressed Steel Frames
Set frames supplied by Section 08 11 00 in place for building into masonry. Anchor frames
to floor as provided for by anchor clips. Brace frames in place to prevent displacement until
anchored into masonry. Remove spreaders at floor after frames are anchored.
F. Installation of Doors
1. Install hollow metal doors supplied by Section 08 11 00 after finishing of walls.
2. Install hollow metal doors supplied by Section 08 11 00.
3. Fit wood doors with 2mm clearance at jambs and heads, and 9.5mm over finished
flooring.
4. Trim hinge side of wood doors to fit and bevel latch edges as required.
5. Ensure that top and bottom edges of wood doors are primed under Work of Section 09
90 00 after they are cut to fit.
6. Undercut wood doors where indicated on Door Schedule.
G. Installation of Finish Hardware
1. Install finish hardware supplied by Section 08 71 00. All door panels, drawers and doors
to window openings to have locks, hinges and hardware to the approval of the
Consultant.
______________________________________________________________________________
2. Make cuts in wood doors neatly.
3. Accurately locate and adjust hardware to meet manufacturer’s instructions. Use special
tools and jigs as recommended.
4. Install hardware in wood doors at same location as for hollow metalwork installed in
Project.
5. Locate door stops to contact doors 75 mm from latch edge.
6. Install hardware and trim square and plum to doors.
7. Replace missing hardware to ensure specified installation at tile of building completion.

After installation, replace wrappings for hardware provided by manufacturer.
8. Safeguard keys to keep them out of unauthorized hands, tag them with opening
number, and deliver them to person designated by Consultant at building completion.
H. Finishing
1. Sand wood surfaces after installation to leave surfaces in true planes and free of
machine or tool marks.
2. Where edges of millwork have 1.5 mm thick lamination, the edge shall be lipped or
mitered to the approval of the Consultant.
A. Adjust hinged doors to swing freely and easily, to remain stationary at any point of swing,
to close evenly and tightly against stops without binding and to latch positively when doors
are closed with moderate force. Ensure that when doors are installed with hinged stiles
adjacent, both doors can open simultaneously without binding.
B. Adjust hardware so that latches and locks operate smoothly and without binding, and
closers act positively with the lease possible resistances in use. Lubricate hardware if
required by suppliers instructions. Clean hardware after installation in accordance with
supplier’s instruction.
C. Ensure that doors equipped with closers operate to close doors firmly against anticipated
wind and building air pressure and to enable doors to be readily opened as suitable for
function, location and traffic.
D. Sand and clean woodwork to leave free from finish defects in any exposed part.
END OF SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
here.
B. This section includes but is not limited to the supply, fabrication, finishing and installation
of the following caseworks:
1. Reception Counters in Lobbies.
C. Works performed by other sections and which is related to this section is specified in:
1. Section 04400 : Stone Assemblies

2. Section 09900 : Painting and Coating
D. Supply of work which shall be installed by this section as specified in:
Section 087100 : To furnish hardware as specified in section 08 71 00.
E. Coordinate with section 05 70 00 to ensure that proper provisions are made for installation
of casework on metal framed counters and display cases.
F. Coordinate with Division 23 and 26 installing mechanical, communication and similar

services and equipment in casework to ensure that suitable provisions are made and that
proper installation results.
A. Tolerances
Fabricate and install stainless steel where exposed to view to maintain a surface flatness
that ensures that the slope of the surface at any point is no greater that 0.5% from the
nominal plane of the surface when measured at 25mm intervals in any direction.
A. Qualifications
1. Provide caseworks specified in this section only by a fabricator who has adequate plant,
equipment and skilled tradesmen to fabricate and install the casework, and is known to
have been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to that specified during a
period of at least the immediate past 10 years.
2. Perform welding to meet specified requirements of BS EN 1011-1 or AWS D1. 1.

______________________________________________________________________________
1.04 REFERENCES
A. References Standards
sections 01 42 19.
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
ANSI Z97.1- 04: For Safety Glazing Materials used in buildings – Safety Performance
Specifications and Methods of Test.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
ASTM C1048-04: Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass & # 8212; kind
HS, kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
BS 952- Glass for Glazing:
Part 1: 1995 Classification.

Part 2: 1980 Terminology for work on glass.
BS 1186- Timber workmanship in joinery.
Part 1: 1991, Specification for timber.

Part 2: 1988, Specification foe workmanship.
BS 3794-00: Decorative, High Pressure Laminates (HPL) based on thermosetting.
Part 1: 1986, Specification for Performance.
BS 4965: 1999, Specification for Decorative Laminated Plastics Sheet Veneered

Boards and Panels.
BS 6206- 81: Specification for Impact Performance Requirements for Flat Safety Glass
and Safety Plastics for use in Building.
BS EN 1011-1 98: Welding – Recommendations for Welding of Metallic Materials-

PART 1: General Guidance for Arc Welding.
BS EN ISO 11600- 03: Building Construction- Joining Products Classification and

Requirements for Sealants.
4. Federal Specification (U.S.A.)
FS DD-G-451D, Glass, Float or Plate, Sheet, Figured (Flat for Glazing, mirrors and
other uses).
NEMA LD3:05 High-pressure Decorative Laminates

6. Except where more stringent requirement are specified in this section, fabricate
cabinetwork and fitments to Quality Standards of:
______________________________________________________________________________
a. AWI specification, Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards and Guide

Specification, 1984, by Architectural Woodwork Institute, Section 400, Casework,
for Premium Grade quality; or
b. BS 1186, Parts 1 and 2, for equivalent to AWI Premium Grade.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings for units including full details and layouts.
B. Samples
Submit samples of plastic laminate, enamel, cork board, fabric and translucent glass yo
site and to Consultant’s office.
A. Package and otherwise protect casework from damage during handling, delivery and
storage. Provide temporary skids under large or heavy units.
B. Deliver work of this section to site as required for installation, to meet construction
C. Store products protected from damage and as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Protect finish surfaces by steady protective wrappings.
E. Do not deliver casework to site until conditions are such that no damage will occur to it
while in storage and during installation. Ensure that humidity in storage areas does not
exceed 55%.
execution method suit environmental conditions that are encountered at the site and
3. Environmental conditions shall include, but shall not be limited to, ambient
temperatures; humidity; moisture in the air and on the products and surfaces with
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Conform to Premium Grade standards of AWI or equivalent BS 1186 as defined in

applicable reference standards for timber and plywood materials and their machining,
sanding and finishing.
B. Plywood
1. Incorporate only plywood with wood plywood/lumber core.

2. Concealed: At option of fabricator.
3. Exposed: Red Oak Veneer.
C. Plastic Laminate
To meet specified requirements of BS 3794 Part 1, or BS 4965 as applicable for use; or of

NEMA LD3; GP-50 General Purpose and Post formed Grades as applicable, of texture and
colour selected from manufacturers standard range. Refer Section 06 20 00.
D. Glass
1. Tempered Glass:
Heat treated, fully tempered, safety glass to meet specified requirements of Federal
Specification FS DD-G-451D, or BS 952.
2. Translucent Glass:
Etched clear float glass to meet specified requirements of Federal Specification FS DD-
G-451D , or BS 952.
3. Laminated Glass:
Heat treated, fully tempered safety glass to meet specified requirements of BS 952, Part
1 for performance in accordance with BS 6206; or of performance specified in ANSI
Z97.1 to ASTM C1048 or U.S. Federal Specification FS DD G 451D Etch. As specified
glass before tempering. Refer also to Section 08 46 00.
E. Glazing Gaskets: Extruded, preformed, neoprene or EPDM rubber, to meet specified

requirements of BS 4255.
F. Sealant
1. At Glass-to-Metal: Low modulus type silicone, to meet specified requirements of FS TT-

2. At Glass-to-Glass: High modules type silicone, to meet specified requirements of FS TT-

G. Glass Fibre Board
Glass fibre insulation board formed into rigid board with resin binders, with minimum
density of 112 kg/cu.m.
______________________________________________________________________________
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate Wood Components
1. With no finger joined or laminated solid wood members where exposed to view.
2. With edge grain of exposed and semi-exposed plywood concealed.
3. With cabinet body members assembled with adhesive.
4. Where permitted, with power-driven Tee head nails or staples with long dimensions
parallel to grain.
5. With solid wood provided at locations where hardware is secured.
B. Glass
1. Install glass with all required sealants and gaskets.
2. Grid and polish edges at external corners to provide mitered joints.
3. Fill joints with sealant and tool smooth.
C. Lighting
1. Install lights as shown on architectural drawings.
2. Install 240V/12V, 50Hz transformer as shown on electrical/architectural drawings.
3. Comply with the requirements of Division 26.
4. Incorporate services, fixtures and trim in units. Make provision for mechanical and
electrical installations included in work of Divisions 23 and 26. Make all necessary
cutouts to template information.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
Take site measurements of construction to which cabinet work must conform, and through
which access must be made, before it is delivered to site, to ensure that adaptation is not
required which would result in construction delay.
3.02 INSTALLATION
Installation of cabinets and fitments is included in work of Section 06 20 00.
A. Adjust operating parts of units to move freely without excessive play and to fit accurately.
B. Refinish damaged and defective work before completion of project. Refinishing of exposed
surfaces shall show no discernible variation in appearance.
END OF SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
Division 01, General Requirements is a part of this section and shall
B. This section includes but is not limited to the supply, fabrication,

finishing and installation of:
1. Vanity counter tops with integral bowls
2. Reception counters
3. Restaurant counters
4. Kitchen countertops with sinks
5. Covered backsplashes
6. Color inlays
C. Coordinate with Sections 06 20 00, 06 40 00 and 05 70 00 to ensure

that proper provisions are made for installation.
D. Coordinate with Division 23 and 26 installing mechanical and

electrical to ensure that suitable provisions are made and for
installation results.
A. Qualifications
Provide work specified in this section only by a fabricator who has

adequate equipment and skilled tradesmen who is known to have
been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to that
specified during a period of at least the immediate past 5 years.
B. Allowable tolerances:
1. Variation in component size: ± 3 mm.
2. Location of openings: ± 3 mm from indicated location.
3. Mock-up:
Prior to final approval of Shop Drawings, erect at project site one
full size mock-up of each component for review. Should mock-up
not be approved, re-fabricate and reinstall until approval is
secured. Remove rejected units from project site. Approved
mock-ups may remain as part of finished work.
1.03 REFERENCES
The following reference standards included in this section shall

apply as specified in Section 01 42 19.
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. American National Standard Institute ( ANSI ) :

2. American Society for Testing and Materials ( ASTM ):
ASTM D256-06ae1: Standard Test Methods for Determining the

Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics
ASTM D570-98(2005): Standard Test Method for Water

Absorption of Plastics
ASTM D638-08: Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of

Plastics
ASTM D696-08: Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear

Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30&#176C and
30&#176C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer
ASTM D785-08: Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness

of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D790-07e1: Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties

of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating
Materials
ASTM D2583-07: Standard Test Method for Indentation

Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
ASTM D5420-04: Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance

of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker impacted
by a falling Weight (Gardner Impact)
ASTM E84-08a: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for units including full

details and layouts. Indicate dimensions, component sizes,
fabrication details, attachment provisions and coordination
requirements with adjacent work.
B. Samples: Submit minimum 50mm x 50mm samples. Indicate full

range of color and pattern variation. Approved samples will be
retained as standard for work.
_____________________________________________________________________________
C. Product Data: Indicate product description, fabrication information

and compliance with specified performance requirements.
D. Test Reports: Test Reports shall indicate compliance with

specified test methods and performance levels. Safety related test
data (flame spread, smoke generation, and smoke toxicity) shall be
specific to the color/pattern of the material selected, i.e. solid color
or granite pattern color.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance

data including repair and cleaning instructions.
A. Package and otherwise protect from damage during handling,

delivery, and storage. Provide temporary skids under large or heavy
units.
B. Deliver work of this section to site as required for installation, to

meet construction schedule, and to locations as directed.
C. Store products protected from damage and as recommended by

manufacturer.
D. Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for

installation. Store components indoors prior to installation.
E. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide

protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining
following installation for duration of project.
1.06 GUARANTEE
A. Provide manufacturer’s 10-year warranty against defects in

materials. Warranty shall provide material and labor to repair or
replace defective materials. Damage caused by physical or
chemical abuse or damage from excessive heat will not be
warranted.
A. Environmental Conditions.

storage, handling and execution method suit environmental

_____________________________________________________________________________
3. Environmental conditions shall include, but shall not be limited to,

ambient temperature; humidity; moisture in the air and on the
products and surfaces with which they are in contact; moisture
content and temperature of the products and the materials with
which they are in contact.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Solid Polymer Components: Cast, homogeneous filled acrylic; not

coated, laminated or of composite construction.
1. Material shall have minimum physical and performance

properties specified herein.
2. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.25 mm shall be repairable

by sanding and polishing.
B. Reception area counters:
8mm thick solid surface material adhesively joined with

inconspicuous seams on 19mm MDF and/or as detailed on
Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer; edge details as
indicated on the Drawings; color, inlays and pattern to the
Consultant’s approval.
C. Kitchen counter surfaces:
1. Install 13mm thick solid surface material as indicated on

Drawings and as recommended by the Manufacturer,
adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams; edge details and
coved backsplash and end splashes as indicated on Drawings;
color, inlays and pattern to the Consultant’s approval.
2. Follow manufacturers recommendations for reinforced joints

and cutouts, expansion joints, insulation requirements between
solid surface material and adjacent equipment, thermal
insulation between hot and cold applications, etc. Make cutouts
to templates furnished by the appliance manufacturer.
D. Countertops with sinks:
Provide countertop complete with single/double bowl with molded

drain-board sink as detailed on Drawings and recommended by the
Manufacturer. Provide counter complete with coved backsplash and
end splashes of size shown on the Drawings. Models, colors and
pattern to the approval of the Consultant.
_____________________________________________________________________________
E. Vanity tops with integral bowls:
Molded countertop of 8mm thick solid surface material adhesively

joined with inconspicuous seams on 19mm MDF and/or as detailed
on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer; 600 mm wide,
complete with integrally molded bowls of solid surface material;
edge details as indicated on the Drawings. Provide with cove
backsplash and end splashes as shown on the Drawings. Models,
colors, patterns and inlays to the approval of the Consultant.
F. Performance Characteristics

CHARACTERISTICS
Resistance
Z124.3&Z124.6
Z124.3&Z124.6
Density 1.68
Blaze Diffuse <25
Fume Expansion <30
Category Rate 1
2.03 ACCESORY PRODUCTS
A. Provide accessory product as recommended by the manufacturer

including but not limited to:
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. Joint adhesives;
2. Panel adhesives;
3. Sealants (color-matching or clear);
4. Required mounting hardware and tools (Manufacturer’s approved
clips, inserts, fasteners, etc).
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Fabrications to be performed by a certified fabricator/installer.
B. Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and

shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and
manufacturer’s requirements.
C. Form joints between components using manufacturer’s standard

joint adhesive. Joints shall be inconspicuous in appearance and
without voids. Attach 50 mm wide reinforcing strip under each joint
or as recommended by the Manufacturer.
D. Provide holes and cutouts for plumbing and bath accessories as

indicated on the drawings.
E. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout all
cutouts, then sand all edges smooth. Repair or reject defective or
inaccurate work.
F. Surface finish:
1. Finished surfaces shall have matte (gloss rating of 5-20), semi

gloss (gloss rating of 25-50) or polish (gloss rating of 55-80)
finish, as approved by the Consultant.
G. Thermoforming:
1. Comply with manufacturer’s forming data and instructions.
H. Cove backsplashes and endsplashes:
1. Fabricate 13 mm radius cove at intersection of counters and

backsplashes or as indicated on Drawings. Fabricate in shop.
i. Colored inlays:
1. Rout 3 mm max deep groove for inlay to pattern indicated on
Drawings.
2. Fill groove using methods approved by manufacturer, avoiding

air bubbles or voids. Overfill inlay area.
3. Allow area to fully cure. Do not overheat inlay while sanding.

Finish and touch up to uniform appearance.
_____________________________________________________________________________
4. Make provision for mechanical and electrical installations included

in work of Divisions 23 and 26. Make all necessary cutouts to
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Take site measurements of construction to which work must conform,

and through which access must be made, before it is delivered to site,
to ensure that adaptation is not required which would result in
construction delay.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop

B. Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, with

joints inconspicuous in finished work. Keep components and hands
clean when making joints.
C. Adhere sinks/bowls to countertops using mounting hardware,

adhesives and color-matched silicone sealant as recommended by the
Manufacturer.
D. Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on the drawings.

Adhere to countertops using manufacturer’s standard color-matched
silicone sealant.
E. Keep components and hands clean during installation. Remove

adhesives, sealant and other stains.
F. Make plumbing connections to sinks in accordance with Division 23,

Mechanical.
G. Fabricator/Installer is to provide and review maintenance procedures

and the Manufacturer’s warranty with the head of maintenance upon
completion of project.
A. Project surfaces from damage until completion of project. Repair or

replace damaged work that cannot be repaired to architect’s
satisfaction.
END OF SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1. DESCRIPTION
Division 01, General Requirements is a part of this section and shall apply as if
repeated here.
2. This section includes but is not limited to the supply, fabrication, finishing and
installation of:
a. Vanity counter tops with integral bowls
b. Reception counters
c. Restaurant counters
d. Kitchen countertops with sinks
e. Covered backsplashes
f. Color inlays
3. Coordinate with Sections 06 20 00, 06 40 00 and 05 70 00 to ensure that proper

provisions are made for installation.
4. Coordinate with Division 23 and 26 installing mechanical and electrical to ensure

that suitable provisions are made and for installation results.
1. No Asbestos Containing Materials (ACMs) shall be used within the development.
2. No Cooper arsenate (CCA) – treated timber is used on the project. Where there is
3. The contractor to submit evidence of purchase indicating that no ACMs or CCA-treated

timber were used in the project as per Estidama Requirements.
4. Allowable tolerances:
a. Variation in component size: ± 3 mm.
b. Location of openings: ± 3 mm from indicated location.
c. Mock-up:
Prior to final approval of Shop Drawings, erect at project site one full size mock-up
of each component for review. Should mock-up not be approved, re-fabricate and
reinstall until approval is secured. Remove rejected units from project site.
Approved mock-ups may remain as part of finished work.
1.3. REFERENCES
1. Reference Standards
Section 01 42 19.
_____________________________________________________________________________
a. American National Standard Institute ( ANSI ) :

b. American Society for Testing and Materials ( ASTM ):
ASTM D256-06ae1: Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum
Impact Resistance of Plastics
ASTM D570-98(2005): Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
ASTM D638-08: Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM D696-08: Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion
of Plastics Between -30&#176C and 30&#176C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer
ASTM D785-08: Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and
Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D790-07e1: Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D2583-07: Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics
by Means of a Barcol Impressor
ASTM D5420-04: Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic
Specimen by Means of a Striker impacted by a falling Weight (Gardner Impact)
ASTM E84-08a: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials
c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for units including full details and layouts.
Indicate dimensions, component sizes, fabrication details, attachment provisions and
coordination requirements with adjacent work.
2. Samples: Submit minimum 50mm x 50mm samples. Indicate full range of color and
pattern variation. Approved samples will be retained as standard for work.
3. Product Data: Indicate product description, fabrication information and compliance with
specified performance requirements.
_____________________________________________________________________________
4. Test Reports: Test Reports shall indicate compliance with specified test methods and
performance levels. Safety related test data (flame spread, smoke generation, and smoke
toxicity) shall be specific to the color/pattern of the material selected, i.e. solid color or
granite pattern color.
5. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data including repair
1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1. Package and otherwise protect from damage during handling, delivery, and storage.
Provide temporary skids under large or heavy units.
2. Deliver work of this section to site as required for installation, to meet construction
3. Store products protected from damage and as recommended by manufacturer.
4. Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation. Store
components indoors prior to installation.
5. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to

prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project.
1.6. GUARANTEE
1. Provide manufacturer’s 10-year warranty against defects in materials. Warranty shall

provide material and labor to repair or replace defective materials. Damage caused by
physical or chemical abuse or damage from excessive heat will not be warranted.
1. Environmental Conditions.
a. Adapt techniques approved by the Consultant to ensure that storage, handling and
execution method suit environmental conditions that are encountered at the site, and
b. Follow recommendations of the supplier of the products.
c. Environmental conditions shall include, but shall not be limited to, ambient
temperature; humidity; moisture in the air and on the products and surfaces with
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
1. Solid Polymer Components: Cast, homogeneous filled acrylic; not coated,

laminated or of composite construction.
a. Material shall have minimum physical and performance properties specified

herein.
b. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.25 mm shall be repairable by sanding and

polishing.
2. Reception area counters:
8mm thick solid surface material adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams on
19mm MDF and/or as detailed on Drawings and recommended by the
manufacturer; edge details as indicated on the Drawings; color, inlays and pattern
to the Consultant’s approval.
3. Kitchen counter surfaces:
a. Install 13mm thick solid surface material as indicated on Drawings and as

recommended by the Manufacturer, adhesively joined with inconspicuous
seams; edge details and coved backsplash and end splashes as indicated on
Drawings; color, inlays and pattern to the Consultant’s approval.
b. Follow manufacturers recommendations for reinforced joints and cutouts,

expansion joints, insulation requirements between solid surface material and
adjacent equipment, thermal insulation between hot and cold applications, etc.
Make cutouts to templates furnished by the appliance manufacturer.
4. Countertops with sinks:
Provide countertop complete with single/double bowl with molded drain-board sink
as detailed on Drawings and recommended by the Manufacturer. Provide counter
complete with coved backsplash and end splashes of size shown on the
Drawings. Models, colors and pattern to the approval of the Consultant.
5. Vanity tops with integral bowls:
Molded countertop of 8mm thick solid surface material adhesively joined with
inconspicuous seams on 19mm MDF and/or as detailed on Drawings and
recommended by the manufacturer; 600 mm wide, complete with integrally
molded bowls of solid surface material; edge details as indicated on the Drawings.
Provide with cove backsplash and end splashes as shown on the Drawings.
Models, colors, patterns and inlays to the approval of the Consultant.
_____________________________________________________________________________
6. Performance Characteristics

CHARACTERISTICS
Resistance
Z124.3&Z124.6
Z124.3&Z124.6
Density 1.68
Blaze Diffuse <25
Fume Expansion <30
Category Rate 1
2.2. ACCESORY PRODUCTS
1. Provide accessory product as recommended by the manufacturer including but not

limited to:
a. Joint adhesives;
b. Panel adhesives;
c. Sealants (color-matching or clear);
d. Required mounting hardware and tools (Manufacturer’s approved clips,
inserts, fasteners, etc).
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.3. FABRICATION
1. Fabrications to be performed by a certified fabricator/installer.

2. Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes
indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s
requirements.
3. Form joints between components using manufacturer’s standard joint adhesive.

Joints shall be inconspicuous in appearance and without voids. Attach 50 mm wide
reinforcing strip under each joint or as recommended by the Manufacturer.
4. Provide holes and cutouts for plumbing and bath accessories as indicated on the
drawings.
5. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout all cutouts, then
sand all edges smooth. Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work.
6. Surface finish:
a. Finished surfaces shall have matte (gloss rating of 5-20), semi gloss (gloss
rating of 25-50) or polish (gloss rating of 55-80) finish, as approved by the
Consultant.
7. Thermoforming:
a. Comply with manufacturer’s forming data and instructions.
8. Cove backsplashes and endsplashes:
a. Fabricate 13 mm radius cove at intersection of counters and backsplashes or

as indicated on Drawings. Fabricate in shop.
9. Colored inlays:
a. Rout 3 mm max deep groove for inlay to pattern indicated on Drawings.
b. Fill groove using methods approved by manufacturer, avoiding air bubbles or

voids. Overfill inlay area.
c. Allow area to fully cure. Do not overheat inlay while sanding. Finish and touch
up to uniform appearance.
d. Make provision for mechanical and electrical installations included in work of

Divisions 23 and 26. Make all necessary cutouts to template information.
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1. EXAMINATION
1. Take site measurements of construction to which work must conform, and

through which access must be made, before it is delivered to site, to ensure
that adaptation is not required which would result in construction delay.
3.2. INSTALLATION
1. Install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop

2. Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, with joints

inconspicuous in finished work. Keep components and hands clean when
making joints.
3. Adhere sinks/bowls to countertops using mounting hardware, adhesives and

color-matched silicone sealant as recommended by the Manufacturer.
4. Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on the drawings. Adhere

to countertops using manufacturer’s standard color-matched silicone sealant.
5. Keep components and hands clean during installation. Remove adhesives,

sealant and other stains.
6. Make plumbing connections to sinks in accordance with Division 23,

Mechanical.
7. Fabricator/Installer is to provide and review maintenance procedures and the

Manufacturer’s warranty with the head of maintenance upon completion of
project.
3.3. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
1. Project surfaces from damage until completion of project. Repair or replace

damaged work that cannot be repaired to architect’s satisfaction.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. DAMP PROOFING AND WATER PROOFING 07100-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL
Drawings and general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Section, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
This Section includes:
A. Fluid cold-applied elastomeric membrane (for horizontal and vertical surface) to the
following locations:
1. Foundations (including top of raft foundation if not applied by enabling stage), tie
beams, columns up to S.F.L. of slab on grade of main building (For lower level floor
and ground level floor) any foundations & retaining walls not covered by enabling
works as per drawings.
B. Cold Applied Bitumen Primer Damp proofing (for horizontal and vertical surfaces) to the
following locations:
a. Service block (including pump room, medical gas room, offices building) as per
drawings.
b. Laundry as per drawings.
c. Main & emergency Gate as per drawings.
2. Foundation of pre-cast boundary walls as per drawings.
3. Concrete & masonry block walls substrate for all façade & internal cladding (such as
curtains walls, aluminum composite panels, limestone cladding, granite cladding,
marble cladding … etc.).
4. Concealed face of gypsum false ceiling at Operation Rooms.
C. SBS Modified Bituminous Anti-Routing Membrane for the flower/plant box and landscape
areas as per drawings.
D. Polyethylene sheet shall be laid under blinding concrete for all foundations and slab on
grade.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for methods of
application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness and protection course.
B. Material Certificate: For each product, signed by manufacturers.
C. Shop Drawings: Include installation requirement. Include plans, elevations, sections,

component details and attachments to other work.
_____________________________________________________________________________
D. Samples: Submit full range of colors and patterns available.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary damp proofing materials and primers through one
source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by
manufacturer of primary materials.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Manufacturers authorized representative who is trained and

approved for application of materials required for this Project.
C. Mock ups: Build mockups to verify selection made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for material and execution.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit damp proofing to be performed according to manufacturers written
instructions.
B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of damp proofing in enclosed

spaces. Maintain ventilation until damp proofing has thoroughly cured.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: Written warranty, signed by waterproofing manufacturer

agreeing to replace waterproofing materials that does not comply with requirements or that
does not remain waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that
does not remain water tight during specified warranty period.
1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared
and treated according to requirements of formation of new joints and cracks in substrate
exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6mm) in width.
2. Warranty Period: Ten years after date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Installer’s Warranty: Written waterproofing Installer’s warranty, signed by Installer,

covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of ten years.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers listed at the list of manufacturers.
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.02 BITUMINOUS DAMP PROOFING (FOR LOCATION MENTIONED ABOVE, CLAUSE

1.02, ITEM A/1)
A. Fluid cold-applied elastomeric membrane (for horizontal and vertical surface): Shall be
one component moisture-curing bitumen-modified polyurethane, seamless elastomeric.
Shall permit expansion and contraction, suitable for all climates, resistant to bacterial
attack, acid, alkali and slats, damp proofing for locations mentioned above, shall
conform to ASTM C 836. Thickness shall be 1.5mm.
B. General Properties:
1. Shore hardness, ASTM C 836 : 86
2. Tensile strength, ASTM D 412 : 1.9 MPa
3. Average elongation, ASTM D 412 : 600%
4. Crack bridging, ASTM C 836 : Passed 1/16 inch
5. Low temperature bending : 40°C
6. Tear resistance : 12 N/mm
7. Average elongation, % ASTM D 412 : 500
8. Minimum recovery, % : 90
9. Service temperature, °C : 40°C to 90°C
10. Water impermeability 0.3 MPa 30 Mins : No permeability
C. Protection of Works
1. Fiber protection board having a thickness of 12mm. Fiber board shall be applied
over fluid cold membrane for vertical surfaces.
2. Provide sand cement screed of minimum 50mm thickness and compressive

strength 30 MPa at 28 days for horizontal surfaces.
2.03 BITUMINOUS DAMP PROOFING (FOR LOCATION MENTIONED ABOVE, CLAUSE

1.02, ITEMS B/1,2,3,4)
A. Cold Applied Bitumen Primer: Solvent-Based, sulphur resistant, shall be applied with
two coat of Cold Bitumen Primer,, and each coat shall be applied over surfaces at
locations shown on the drawings at min. rate of 0.30 Kg/m2 as per manufacturer’s
recommendations and to complying with ASTM D 41.
1. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 4586, Type I.

2. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 4479, Type I.
B. Protection of Works
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. Provide sand cement screed of minimum 50 mm thickness and compressive

strength 30 MPa at 28 days for horizontal surfaces.
2.04 BITUMINOUS MEMBRANCE DAMP PROOFING FOR LOCATION MENTIONED

ABOVE, CLAUSE 1.02, ITEM C)
A. All flower boxes and planets areas shall be waterproofed using two layers of 4mm
thick SBS bitumen anti-rooting membrane, fully bonded to RCC surfaces over two
protections shall be laid over sheet membrane.
B. Primer: Liquid bituminous primer recommended by manufacturer of sheet

waterproofing material for substrate, conforming to ASTM D 2397.
C.
1. Characteristics:
a. Color : Black
b. Specific weight : 1.2
c. Flash point : Non Flammable
d. Dry residue : 45%
D. SBS Modifies Anti-Routing Bituminous Membrane: The membrane shall be

recommended by manufacturer for approval of Engineer/Client.
2.05 POLYETHYLENE SHEET (FOR LOCATION MENTIONED ABOVE, CLAUSE 1.02, ITEM
D)
The polyethylene sheet shall be of gauge 1000 with nominal weight 0.94 kg/m2, shall be
laid below the blinding.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 EXECUTION
Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for surface
smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Begin damp proofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating
work have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from
being stained, spotted or coated with damp proofing. Prevent damp proofing materials
from entering and clogging weep holes and drains.
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal
joints and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material
manufacturer.
_____________________________________________________________________________
.03 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturers written recommendations unless more stringent

requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory
performance of damp proofing.
2. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or required to achieve

coverage’s indicated.
3. Allow each coat of damp proofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats.
B. Apply damp proofing for foundations and slab on grade up to the top level of finishes.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION BOARD
Where indicated, install protection board over complete-and-cured damp proofing. Comply
with damp proofing material manufacturers written recommendations for attaching
protection board. Support with spot application of trowel-grade mastic where not otherwise
indicated.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Remove damp proofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive damp proofing.
END OF SECTION
STH THERMAL PROTECTION 7200-1
__________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section include the following insulation types in locations as indicated on

drawings:
1. Perimeter wall insulation (supporting backfill).

2. Concealed building insulation.
3. Sound attenuation insulation.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers

or glass fibers; produces in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-
cut lengths) or rolls.
A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber where indicated in ceiling plenum whose test
performance is rated as follow for use in plenums as determined by testing
identical products per “Erosion Test” and “Mold Growth and Humidity Test”
described in UL 181, or on comparable test from another standard acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking,

flaking, peeling or delemination of interior surface of duct assembly, after
testing for 4 hours at 13-m/s air velocity.
2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of
mold growth, delamination or other deterioration due to the effects of high
humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and
storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicating characteristics, performance

criteria and limitations. Indicate installation requirements and techniques, storage
and handling criteria and installation procedure acceptable to manufacturer.
B. Samples for Verification: Full –size units for each type of insulation indicated.
C. Certification: Submit installer’s certification verifying compliance with specification

requirements.
D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.

__________________________________________________________________
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through once source
from a single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with

fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical
products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics ASTM E 84.

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 84.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by

moisture, soiling and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply
with manufacturers written instructions for handling storing and protecting during
installation.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period insulation

and concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials
to Project site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as
possible in each of construction.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the manufacturers listed at the list of manufacturers.
2.02 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, with maximum flame-

spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450.
B. Physical properties:
1. Thermal conductivity : 0.030 w/m. Deg.K

(K Value) – 5 years aged value (DIN 52612)
2. Coefficient of thermal : 80*10-6 longitudinal
Expansion 60*10-6 transverse
3. Water Absorption : 1% by volume to ASTM D2842
__________________________________________________________________
4. Capillarity reaction : Nil

5. Density : Min.38 kg/m3.
6. Compressive strength : 0.22 – 0.36 N/mm2 to DIN 53421 or
42-65 PSI to ASTM D-16218
7. Combustion Characteristics : Non Combustible, ASTM e 136
8. Fire : Class B1 to BS 476/pass DIN 4102.
9. Thicknesses : 50 mm unless otherwise indicated on
drawings.
C. ACCESSORIES
1. Insulation Fasteners and accessories required for the installation shall be as

recommended by the manufacturer.
2.03 MINERAL FIBER INSULATION
A. Manufacturers (Acoustic/Fire Insulation)
B. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without

membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with
maximum flame – spread and smoke- developed indices of 25 and 50,
respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C. Thermal conductivity shall be: 0.030 w/m. Deg. K (K Value)
2.04 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond

insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and
substrates.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present for compliance with
requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and
for other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections

capable of interfering with insulation attachment.
A. Comply with insulation manufacturers written instructions applicable to products

and application indicated.
__________________________________________________________________
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry and unsoiled and that has not been left
exposed at any time to ice, rain and snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated.

Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove
projections that interfere with placement.
D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located with insulated exterior walls,

coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation
and insulation encapsulates piping.
E. For preformed insulation units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and
selected from manufacturer’s standard thicknesses, widths and lengths. Apply
single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple
layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with

manufacturers written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units
to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent
placement and support of units.
B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic or

sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place.
Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic or sealant as
recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according

to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing
members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that
will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction

fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 76-mm clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures.
4. Provide sound attenuation insulation at top of CMU partitions that stop short
of metal deck between private spaces and additional areas as indicated.
5. Install 76-mm thick, unless otherwise indicated, unfaced glass-fiber blanket

insulation 1219 mm on either side of partition.
D. Install board insulation in curtain0wall construction where indicated on Drawings

according to curtain-wall manufacturers written instructions.
1. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within
window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation
manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel
glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between insulation and
glass.
__________________________________________________________________
2. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire-containment system to

prevent insulation from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire-
containment system.
3.05 PROTECTION
Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures,

physical abuse and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where
insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent
construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION
STH MEMBRANE ROOFING 07500-1
________________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 – GENERAL
1 - EXTENT OF WORK
1.1- WORK IDENTIFICATION:
These specifications cover ROOFING and WATERPROOFING Systems. The contractor shall refer to the
Particular specifications to check which items are relevant
The works covered by this specification include:
• Waterproofing for Basement
• Waterproofing for Water Tank (External)
• Waterproofing system for Wet Areas.
• Waterproofing system for Damp proofing.
• Inverted Roofing system.
• Planters Waterproofing system.
1.2 - REGULATIONS AND BASIC STANDARDS:
Materials shall have the characteristics specified by current international regulations or failing these shall
meet the conditions specified by current standards in countries of origin.
Standards of reference are as follows :
• UEAtc (European Union for Technical Agreement in Construction)

• General Directives for the Assessment of Roof Waterproofing Systems MOAT 27, January 83
• Special Directives for the Assessment of SBS Elastomer bitumen MOAT 31, August 84
• ASTM (American Society for Testing Materials)
• ASTM Standards - Volume 04.04 - Roofing, Waterproofing and Bituminous materials
• ASTM Standards - Volume 04.06 - Thermal Insulation
• ASTM - 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103-1187. USA
1.3 - QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.3.1. GENERAL
• The Roofing and Waterproofing systems shall be laid in strict conformity with the manufacturer's
instructions and the enclosed substrate preparation's specifications.
• Waterproofing material shall be properly stored in a clean covered area and shall be kept away from
heat and sun.
• During the mobilization period, the Contractor shall submit its works program and its On-Site Quality
Control Plan.
1.3.2. PROTECTION AND SAFETY ON SITE:
The Contractor shall abide by all means to National and International Labor and health regulations. Safety
precautions on Site shall incorporate, but are not limited to :
• All roofs to be fitted at the perimeter by handrails with safety nets.
• All ladders and temporary stairs to be well secured at top and bottom.
• Sufficient number of fire extinguishers to be available.
• Required polyethylene sheet or tarpaulin to prevent spraying on adjacent structures or equipment.
• Workers to wear PPE PERSONEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENTS.
__________________________________________________________________________
1.3.3. WATER TESTING:
• Flood test 48 hours minimum after completion of the waterproofing works.

• Restrict water run-off from the membrane area by plugging drains and creating dams or dikes.
Flood restricted area to a depth of about 100 mm and maintain at this depth for 48 hours.
• Repair any leaks which develop and retest
• At the completion of the flood test, drain plugs will be removed.
1.3.4. EXTENDED GUARANTEE:
A 10 years guarantee shall be provided by the contractor to the benefit of the Client for materials and
workmanship of waterproofing. This warranty shall clearly include the following:
1. All materials in the roofing systems shall be free from manufacturing defects and comply with the
manufacturer's published technical specifications.
2. All workmanship in roofing systems shall be free from any defects and comply with all respect to the
manufacturer's technical instructions.
3. This warranty becomes operative from the date of issue of the preliminary handing over certificate of
the contract and shall be valid for a period of ten (10) calendar years.
4. Within this warranty the contractor is liable for the cost of repair of defected materials or installation of a
replacement materials or system.
5. The text of the warranty shall be to the Consultant Engineer approval.
2 - MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS & SUBMITTALS:
2.1- SUBMITTALS:
PRODUCT DATA: Manufacturer's printed specification and installation instructions, including procedures
and materials for termination, penetrations, flashing, compatibility and bonding. The Contractor shall
provide with his submittals all the relevant Standards documentation.
SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate layout of sheets including side and end labs mechanical equipment flashing,
parapet flashing, and drain details.
SAMPLES:
Membranes : Three 300 mm x 300 mm samples
Flashing Membrane : Three 300 mm x 300 mm samples
Insulation : Three 600 mm x 600 mm samples
Bitumen & Adhesive : 1 Kg
Metal flashing : Three 300 mm samples

Primer : 1 liter
Coating : 1 liter
Accepted samples will be retained to serve as a basis for checking at the time of delivery of materials to
site. The manufacturer shall furnish, when requested, proof of origin and quality of the materials that will be
used or where it has been applied. Only materials specified or approved by the Engineer will be permitted
to be used. The Engineer will stipulate acceptance tests and their mode of operation to be carried out on
materials supplied by the contractor.
2.2 - WATERPROOFING CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION
The Waterproofing Contractor is required to :

• Submit manufacturer's approval of applicator.
________________________________________________________________________________
• Submit complete details about the contractor's company: company profile, list of specialized staff
with their respective qualification and experience in the U.A.E. climatic conditions, references
(minimum 10 years), evidence of their ability to handle projects of a similar volume, specific
experience in the U.A.E. or in the Gulf.
• The waterproofing Contractor shall be certified within the frame of ISO 9000 series standards: ISO
certificate shall be available for Engineer checking at time of submission.
2.3 - MANUFACTURER APPROVAL
• For uniformity of the efficiency and future maintenance, all the products proposed for waterproofing
shall be from the same manufacturer or approved by the waterproofing membrane Manufacturer.
Furthermore, the manufacturer shall submit a guarantee of 10 years availability of the approved
materials.
• The waterproofing membrane manufacturer shall be certified within the frame of ISO 9000 series
standards: ISO Certificate shall be available for Engineer checking at time of submission.
• The manufacturer in house quality control shall be periodically audited by an independent technical
control office for compliance with the Q.C. manual and standard recommendations. Certificates
from the technical control office shall be available for Engineer checking.
2.4 . MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.1 BASEMENT WATERPROOFING:
Below ground Tanking for surfaces of piles caps, tie beams, basement walls, below ground slabs and
walls shall be carried out by application of a one layer heavy duty Tanking System consisting of:
• One coat of primer according to ASTM D 41 applied at a rate of 250gr/m2.
• Double layer of 4 mm thick SBS electrometric modified bitumen membrane, reinforced with 250
gr/m2 non-woven polyester, with 100 mm side laps and 150 mm end laps torched and seamed with
staggered joints.
• The Tanking System shall be applied over clean, dry and smooth concrete or block works surface.
All preparatory works (blinding, piles heads,) must be executed prior to any membrane installation.
• Horizontally, the Tanking System shall be loose laid over One coat of primer according to ASTM D
41 applied at a rate of 250gr/m2, and covered with 1000 Gauge PE Foil before pouring a 50 mm
thick mortar protective screed to receive reinforced concrete structure.
• Vertically, it shall be fully torched over one coat of Primer, protected with a 6 mm thick bitumen
impregnated board before backfill or concrete cast.
Technical Characteristics of the membrane:

Properties Value
Tensile strength L (EN 12311-1 MDV N/50 mm +/- 20%) : 1000
Tensile strength T (EN 12311-1 MDV N/50 mm +/- 20%) : 900
Elongation L (EN 12311-1 MDV % +/- 15% abs.) : 50
Elongation B (EN 12311-1 MDV % +/- 15% abs.) : 55
Nail tear resistance(EN 12310-1 MDV N Only MF) : ≥ 250
__________________________________________________________________________
Flexibility at low temperature (EN 1109 MLV °C : ≤-20
Surface/Bottom)
Flow temperature (EN 1110) : ≥110
Shear resistance (EN 12317-1 MDV N/50 mm) : 500
Dimensional stability (EN 1107-1 MLV) : ≤ 0.3
Fire resistance : Froof
Vapour diffusion resistance (μd) : ≥ 80 m
Root resistant (EN 13948)
Technical Characteristics of 6 mm fibre impregnated bituminous protection board:
Technical Characteristics Value
Weight 6.7 Kg/m2

Softening Point >100 oC - 125oC
Density 1.1-1.4g/cc
Puncture resistance 350N
Deflection 12.0-13.0 mm
Static Puncture resistance L3
Dynamic Puncture resistance I2
Compartment System
• The compartment system shall be applied every 200 m2 by splitting the basement area into
compartments using a swelling bar on the perimeter applied directly over the waterproofing system not
allowing water, incase of leakage, to pass from one area to another.
• Apply, an injection tube at center of each compartment. Extend the tube to the surface of the raft slab
for monitering and injection in case of leakage.
PILE HEAD TREATMENT
Shall be carried out by application of:
• Repair the top of the pile with non-shrink grout to flatten out the surface to be treated.
• One coat of primer according to ASTM D 41.
• Double layer of a 4 mm thick SBS elastomeric modified bitumen membrane, membrane Reinforced
with 250 gr/m2 composite non-woven polyester with glass fibre threads extended up to the rebars.
• Apply, high performance fluid resin system designed to encapsulate piletops and ensure water
tightness.
• Apply, a Hydrophilic bentonite strip at the outer perimeter of the pile followed by, a post-injectable
injection tube at the inner perimeter of the pile head, extended to the surface of the raft.
Technical Characteristics of Epoxy Grout
Properties Value
Usable life 2 hrs 25°C
1 hr. @ 35°C
Density 1950 kg/m3
Bond Strength Greater than the tensile strength of concrete
Water Penetration Nil (after 7 days)
(CIN 1048: Part 5:1991)
Rapid chl.permeability Negligible
(AASHTO T 277-83)
________________________________________________________________________________
The Following results were obtained curing the product @ 35°C

Compressive Strength 75 N/mm2 @ 7 days
Tensile Strength 11 N/mm2 @ 7 days
Flexural Strength 20 N/mm2 @ 7 days
Technical Characteristics Hydro swelling Bentonite:

Properties Value
Swelling capacity in contact with water Swells up to max. 250% of its original dry volume at
8% salt solution
Density Approx. 1.3 kg/dm3
Weight Approx. 0.65 kg/m
Core penetration 35.5
Elongation at break 7500%
Maximum allowable bend No cracks at 160 oC above 0 oC
Installation temperatures -15oC to 60oC
Operation temperatures -45oC to 120oC
Technical Characteristics of Injection Hose

Properties Value
Outside diameter 12 mm
Inside diameter 8 mm
Length Max. 6 metres
Weight 71 gr/m
Operating temperature Up to 70°C
Steel wire tensile strength Approx. 1800 N/mm2
Filter pore diameter 35 µm
2.4.2 WATER TANK WATERPROOFING (EXTERNAL)

• One coat of primer according to ASTM D 41 applied at a rate of 250gr/m2.
• Double layers of a, a 4 mm thick SBS electrometric modified bitumen membrane, reinforced with
250 gr/m2 non-woven polyester, with 100 mm side laps and 150 mm end laps torched and seamed
with staggered joints.
• The Tanking System shall be applied over clean, dry and smooth concrete or block works surface.
All preparatory works (blinding, piles heads,) must be executed prior to any membrane installation.
• Vertically, it shall be fully torched over one coat of Primer, protected with a 6 mm thick bitumen
impregnated board before backfill or concrete cast.
Properties Value

Nail tear resistance (EN 12310-1 MDV N Only MF) : ≥ 250
Surface/Bottom)
__________________________________________________________________________
Technical Characteristics of 6mm fibre impregnated bituminous protection board:
Weight 6.7 Kg/m2

Softening Point >100 oC - 125oC
Density 1.1-1.4g/cc
Puncture resistance 350N
Deflection 12.0-13.0 mm
Static Puncture resistance L3
Dynamic Puncture resistance I2
2.4.3. WATERPROOFING FOR DAMP ROOFING
• Apply one coat of primer according to ASTM D 41 applied at a rate of 250gr/m2.

• Apply a waterproofing and damproofing neoprene-latex based material (elastomeric/SBS), solvent
free, thixotropic at a total rate of 750 microns.
2.4.4. WATERPROOFING FOR WET AREAS

• Apply one coat of primer according to ASTM D 41 applied at a rate of 250gr/m2.
• Apply two coats of a waterproofing and damproofing neoprene-latex based material
(elastomeric/SBS), solvent free, thixotropic at a total thickness of 1.5mm,
Technical Characteristics of Elastomeric membrane:

Dry Substance +/-60%
Density +/- 0,99 g/cm³
Penetration 80-100 (T 25°C)
Softening point (R&B) >120oC
PH 11 ± 0.2
Viscosity 1.860-3.700 Ps
Shore hardness 50
Elasticity > 1.000%
Tensile strength > 1,5 N/mm²
Recovery from 200% elongation > 95%
Tear resistance > 15N
Heat resistance, 2 hours at 100°C No vertical flow
Cold flexibility < -10°C
Water vapour transmission (1,3mm film) < 10g/m²/24 hours
Permeability 0,063 ng/m/s/Pa
Adhesion on concrete 50N/50mm at 90°C
________________________________________________________________________________
2.4.5 INVERTED ROOFING SYSTEM – concrete deck
The roofs to receive tiles finish shall receive a single ply roofing system, consisting of the following built up:
 One coat of primer according to ASTM D41.

 First layer of MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125, 90 mils of hot spread fully adhered Monolithic rubberized
asphalt waterproofing.
 Flex Flash F, a spun-bonded polyester fabric reinforcing sheet.
 Second layer of MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125, 125 mils of hot spread fully adhered Monolithic
rubberized asphalt waterproofing.
 One layer of HYDROFLEX 30, specially formulated heavy duty, rubberized asphalt, protection sheet with
synthetic fiber reinforcement, 2mm thick.
• 50mm thick extruded polyestyrene thermal insulation board, 32-35kg/m3 density.
• One layer consisting of a 140 g/sq.m non – woven polyester geotextile.
• Spacers
• Tiles
Skirting, flashing and roof details shall receive the following additional items:
 60-mil (1.5mm) thick, uncured neoprene sheet, FLEX-FLASH UN, a thermoset material made of uncured
neoprene rubber and typically used as the heavy-duty reinforcing and exposed flashing membrane in
conjunction with Hydrotech’s Monolithic Membrane 6125 roofing and waterproofing membrane. Flex-
Flash UN’s thermoset properties provide ease in forming around penetrations and corners as well as
detailing expansion joints and drains.
 One layer of HYDROFLEX MB , specially formulated heavy duty, rubberized asphalt, with mineral
granules finish as a protection layer
 Install Aluminum Flashing (20cm x 1.5mm thick) with bending to terminate the top level of the
waterproofing system, fixed with a Self Tapping Screws at least 5 Nos. per linear meter and sealed on the
top with polyurethane based sealant to secure the edges of the membrane.
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125:
Property Requirement Test Method
Flash Point ≥500° F (260° C)* CGSB 37.50-M89, ASTM D-92

Penetration @ 77°F (25°C) max 110 CGSB 37.50-M89
@ 122°F (50°C) max 200 ASTM D-5329
Flow @ 140°F (60°C) 1.0mm CGSB 37.50-M89

ASTM D-5329
TOUGHNESS 16.0 Joules CGSB-37.50-M89
RATIO OF TOUGHNESS
TO PEAK LOAD 0.069 CGSB-37.50-M89
Water Vapor Permeability 0.3 ng/Pa(s)m2 CGSB 37.50-M89
ASTM E-96, Procedure E
Water Absorption 0.11 gram weight gain CGSB 37.50-M89
Low Temperature No delamination, adhesion CGSB 37.50-M89

Flexibility (-25° C) loss, or cracking
Low Temperature Crack No cracking, adhesion loss, CGSB 37.50-M89

__________________________________________________________________________
Heat Stability No change in viscosity, CGSB 37.50-M89
penetration, flow or
low temperature flexibility
Viscosity 11.0 seconds CGSB 37.50-M89
Water Resistance No delamination, blistering, CGSB 37.50-M89
(5 days/50° C) emulsification, or deterioration
Softening Point 180°F (82°C) ASTM D-36
Elongation 1000% min ASTM D-5329
Resiliency 40% min ASTM D-5329
Bond to Concrete Pass @0°F (-18°C) ASTM D-5329
Acid Resistance Pass – 50% Nitric Acid ASTM D-896-84
Pass – 50% Sulfuric Acid Procedure 7.1
Resistance 100 psi ASTM D-08.22,

Hydrostatic Pressure (=231 foot head of water) Draft 2
Resistance to Salt Water No delamination, blistering, ASTM D-896 similar

(20% sodium carbonate emulsification, or deterioration
and calcium chloride)
Resistance Fertilizer No delamination, blistering, ASTM D-896 similar

(undiluted 15/5/5 nitrogen emulsification, or deterioration
/phosphorus/potash)
Recycled Content 40% (30% REACH compliant) UL Validated

Animal Waste Resistance No deterioration 3 year exposure
Solids Content 100% – no solvents
Shelf Life 10 years (sealed containers)
Specific Gravity 1.15 ± 0.02*
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLEX FLASH F
PROPERTY TEST METHOD RESULT
Color White
Unit Weight (oz/sq yd) ASTM D1910 1.35
% elongation (to break) ASTM D2523 42
Tear Strength (lb) ASTM D2263 8
Breaking Strength (lb) ASTM D2523 25
De Matia Flex Cycles ASTM D813 100,000
Technical Characteristics of 50 mm thick extruded heat insulation board:
Properties Standard Unit Value
Density Min. DIN 53420 kg/m3 32-35

Thermal conductivity DIN 52612 W/m K 0.024
Compressive Strength DIN 53421 kpa 300
At 10% deflection ASTM D1621 psi 43
Capilarity NIL
________________________________________________________________________________
Flammability DIN 4102 Building material class B1

Water vapour permeability ASTM C-355 Perm Inch 0.4-0.6
Technical Characteristics of Geotextile - 140 g/m2 separation layer:
Properties Value Standard
Tensile strength (kN/m) 6.5 ASTM D 4595

Elongation (%) >50 ASTM D 4595
Grab tensile strength (N) 450 ASTM D 4632
Grab tensile elongation (%) >55 ASTM D 4632
Mass/unit Area (gsm) 140 ASTM D 5261
Thickness (mm) 1.0 ASTM D 5199
Trapezoidal Tear Strength (N) 172 ASTM D 4533
Puncture strength (CBR) (N) 1300 ASTM D 6241
Flow Water Rate
-5cm head(I/m2/sec) 70 ASTM D 4491
AOS (microns) 100 ASTM D 4751
UV Resistance @ 150 hrs
(% Strength Retained) >85 ASTM D 4355
Roll Width (m) 2.9 Nominal
Roll length (m) 100 Nominal
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF HYDROFLEX 30:
General Description: Hydroflex 30 is a specially formulated rubberized asphalt separation/protection sheet with
synthetic fiber reinforcement.
Basic Use: Hydroflex 30 is specifically designed to be embedded into Hydrotech’s Monolithic Membrane 6125
roofing membrane to provide light protection from construction foot traffic. Hydroflex 30 also acts as the
separation sheet between the insulation and roofing membrane in an IRMA roof configuration. Hydroflex 30 is
not designed to provide protection from vehicular construction traffic or extreme physical abuse. Additional
protection must be provided in high traffic areas or where extreme physical abuse is anticipated.
Sizes: Hydroflex 30 is available in roll form with a width of 39.4 inches and a length of 66 (20m) feet. One roll
equals approximately 216 square feet of material.
Technical Specifications :
Thickness : 0.85 inch ± .005
Color : Black (with light broadcast of sand)
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLEX FLASH UN
WIDTH (inches) ASTM D751-66 0 / +.125

LENGTH (inches) ASTM D751-66 0 / +1.0
THICKNESS (inches) ASTM D751-66 0.060 + 10%
TENSILE STRENGTH (psi, min.) ASTM D412, DIE C 1400
__________________________________________________________________________
ELONGATION (%, min.) ASTM D412, DIE C 300
ELONGATION (%, min.)
(70 hrs. @ 212° F) 125
TEAR RESISTANCE (lbs/inch, min.) ASTM D624, DIE C 150
BRITTLENESS POINT @ -30° F ASTM D2137 NO BREAK
OZONE RESISTANCE
(168 hrs./100 pphm/104° F/20% Ext.) ASTM D1149 NO CRACKS
@ 7X MAGNIF.
WATER ABSORPTION ASTM D471 -8, +2
(%, weight change range)
(46 hrs. @ 158° F)
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF HYROFLEX MB
PROPERTY RESULT
Thickness 4mm
Tensile Strenght Longitudinal 900 N/5cm
Transversal 760 N/5cm
Low Temperature Flexibility (@-20°C) No cracking, PASS
Reinforcement Weigths 200 g/m2 Polyester
2.4.6 WATERPROOFING FOR PODIUM
 One coat of primer according to ASTM D41.

 First layer of MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125, 90 mils of hot spread fully adhered Monolithic rubberized
asphalt waterproofing.
 Flex Flash F, a spun-bonded polyester fabric reinforcing sheet.
 Second layer of MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125, 125 mils of hot spread fully adhered Monolithic
rubberized asphalt waterproofing.
 One layer of HYDROFLEX 30, specially formulated heavy duty, rubberized asphalt, protection sheet with
synthetic fiber reinforcement, 2mm thick.
• 50mm thick extruded polyestyrene thermal insulation board, 32-35kg/m3 density.
• Spacers
• Tiles
Skirting, flashing and roof details shall receive the following additional items:
 60-mil (1.5mm) thick, uncured neoprene sheet, FLEX-FLASH UN, a thermoset material made of uncured
neoprene rubber and typically used as the heavy-duty reinforcing and exposed flashing membrane in
conjunction with Hydrotech’s Monolithic Membrane 6125 roofing and waterproofing membrane. Flex-Flash
UN’s thermoset properties provide ease in forming around penetrations and corners as well as detailing
expansion joints and drains.
 One layer of HYDROFLEX MB (instead of HYDROFLEX 30), specially formulated heavy duty, rubberized
asphalt, with mineral granules finish as a protection layer
 Install Aluminum Flashing (20cm x 1.5mm thick) with bending to terminate the top level of the waterproofing
system, fixed with a Self Tapping Screws at least 5 Nos. per linear meter and sealed on the top with
polyurethane based sealant to secure the edges of the membrane.
________________________________________________________________________________
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125:
Property Requirement Test Method
Flash Point ≥500° F (260° C)* CGSB 37.50-M89, ASTM D-92

Penetration @ 77°F (25°C) max 110 CGSB 37.50-M89
@ 122°F (50°C) max 200 ASTM D-5329
Flow @ 140°F (60°C) 1.0mm CGSB 37.50-M89

ASTM D-5329
TOUGHNESS 16.0 Joules CGSB-37.50-M89
RATIO OF TOUGHNESS
TO PEAK LOAD 0.069 CGSB-37.50-M89
Water Vapor Permeability 0.3 ng/Pa(s)m2 CGSB 37.50-M89
ASTM E-96, Procedure E
Water Absorption 0.11 gram weight gain CGSB 37.50-M89
Low Temperature No delamination, adhesion CGSB 37.50-M89

Flexibility (-25° C) loss, or cracking
Low Temperature Crack No cracking, adhesion loss, CGSB 37.50-M89

Heat Stability No change in viscosity, CGSB 37.50-M89
penetration, flow or
low temperature flexibility
Viscosity 11.0 seconds CGSB 37.50-M89
Water Resistance No delamination, blistering, CGSB 37.50-M89
(5 days/50° C) emulsification, or deterioration
Softening Point 180°F (82°C) ASTM D-36
Elongation 1000% min ASTM D-5329
Resiliency 40% min ASTM D-5329
Bond to Concrete Pass @0°F (-18°C) ASTM D-5329
Acid Resistance Pass – 50% Nitric Acid ASTM D-896-84
Pass – 50% Sulfuric Acid Procedure 7.1
Resistance 100 psi ASTM D-08.22,

Hydrostatic Pressure (=231 foot head of water) Draft 2
Resistance to Salt Water No delamination, blistering, ASTM D-896 similar

(20% sodium carbonate emulsification, or deterioration
and calcium chloride)
Resistance Fertilizer No delamination, blistering, ASTM D-896 similar

(undiluted 15/5/5 nitrogen emulsification, or deterioration
/phosphorus/potash)
Recycled Content 40% (30% REACH compliant) UL Validated

Animal Waste Resistance No deterioration 3 year exposure
__________________________________________________________________________
Solids Content 100% – no solvents
Shelf Life 10 years (sealed containers)
Specific Gravity 1.15 ± 0.02*
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLEX FLASH F
Color White
Unit Weight (oz/sq yd) ASTM D1910 1.35
% elongation (to break) ASTM D2523 42
Tear Strength (lb) ASTM D2263 8
Breaking Strength (lb) ASTM D2523 25
De Matia Flex Cycles ASTM D813 100,000
Technical Characteristics of 50 mm thick extruded heat insulation board:
Properties Standard Unit Value
Density Min. DIN 53420 kg/m3 32-35

Thermal conductivity DIN 52612 W/m K 0.028
Compressive Strength DIN 53421 kpa 300
At 10% deflection ASTM D1621 psi 43
Capilarity NIL
Flammability DIN 4102 Building material class B1
Water vapour permeability ASTM C-355 Perm Inch 0.4-0.6
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF HYDROFLEX 30:
General Description: Hydroflex 30 is a specially formulated rubberized asphalt separation/protection sheet with
synthetic fiber reinforcement.
Basic Use: Hydroflex 30 is specifically designed to be embedded into Hydrotech’s Monolithic Membrane 6125
roofing membrane to provide light protection from construction foot traffic. Hydroflex 30 also acts as the
separation sheet between the insulation and roofing membrane in an IRMA roof configuration. Hydroflex 30 is
not designed to provide protection from vehicular construction traffic or extreme physical abuse. Additional
protection must be provided in high traffic areas or where extreme physical abuse is anticipated.
Sizes: Hydroflex 30 is available in roll form with a width of 39.4 inches and a length of 66 (20m) feet. One roll
equals approximately 216 square feet of material.
Technical Specifications :
Thickness : 0.85 inch ± .005
Color : Black (with light broadcast of sand)
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF HYROFLEX MB
PROPERTY RESULT
Thickness 4mm
Tensile Strenght Longitudinal 900 N/5cm
Transversal 760 N/5cm
Low Temperature Flexibility (@-20°C) No cracking, PASS
________________________________________________________________________________
Reinforcement Weigths 200 g/m2 Polyester
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLEX FLASH UN
WIDTH (inches) ASTM D751-66 0 / +.125

LENGTH (inches) ASTM D751-66 0 / +1.0
THICKNESS (inches) ASTM D751-66 0.060 + 10%
TENSILE STRENGTH (psi, min.) ASTM D412, DIE C 1400
ELONGATION (%, min.) ASTM D412, DIE C 300
ELONGATION (%, min.)
(70 hrs. @ 212° F) 125
TEAR RESISTANCE (lbs/inch, min.) ASTM D624, DIE C 150
BRITTLENESS POINT @ -30° F ASTM D2137 NO BREAK
OZONE RESISTANCE
(168 hrs./100 pphm/104° F/20% Ext.) ASTM D1149 NO CRACKS
@ 7X MAGNIF.
WATER ABSORPTION ASTM D471 -8, +2
(%, weight change range)
(46 hrs. @ 158° F)
2.4.7 Flower Boxes and Planters Waterproofing System.
Flowers and planters boxes shall receive a heavy duty, anti roots roof garden waterproofing system
consisting of:
 One coat of Primer according to ASTMd-41 at a rate of 250gr/m2 on a properly prepared Surface.
• One layer of a 4 mm thick SBS elastomeric bitumen flashing membrane mineral Finished,
reinforced with a 250 gr/m2 stable spun bond non-woven polyester, laying by torch, hot bitumen or
cold adhesive, loose laid over the primer coat with 80 mm side slaps and 150 mm end laps fully
torched and seamed.
• Second layer of 4mm thick waterproofing membrane composed of elastomer (SBS) bitumen with root
resistant additives and a polyester-glass combination inlay. The upper surface is finished with sand slate
and the lower surface is protected by a thermofusible film.
• One layer of Drainage Layer at horizontal areas only.
• Sweet soil, minimum 300 mm thick, to receive plantations.
.

Properties Value
Nail tear resistance (EN 12310-1 MDV N Only MF) : ≥ 250
Surface/Bottom)
__________________________________________________________________________
Technical Characteristics of anti-root membrane

Properties Value
Tensile strength L (EN 12311-1 MDV N/50 mm +/- 20%) 1000
Tensile strength T (EN 12311-1 MDV N/50 mm +/- 20%) 900
Elongation L (EN 12311-1 MDV % +/- 15% abs.) 50
Elongation B (EN 12311-1 MDV % +/- 15% abs.) 55
Nail tear resistance(EN 12310-1 MDV N Only MF) ≥ 250
Flexibility at low temperature (EN 1109 MLV °C ≤-20
Surface/Bottom)
Flow temperature (EN 1110) ≥110
Shear resistance (EN 12317-1 MDV N/50 mm) 500
Dimensional stability (EN 1107-1 MLV) ≤ 0.3
Fire resistance Froof
Vapour diffusion resistance (μd) ≥ 80 m
Root resistant (EN 13948) OK
Technical Characteristics of Drainage System:
Properties Value
Color Black
Compressive Strength 700 kPa
Thickness Approx.. 32m x 1.25m
Puncture Resistance 1.5 kN
Fabric Grab Tensile 8/8 kN/m
Technical Characteristics of Geotextile - 200 g/m2 separation layer:
Properties Value Standard
Tensile strength (kN/m) 8.0 ASTM D 4595

Elongation (%) >45 ASTM D 4595
Grab tensile strength (N) 550 ASTM D 4632
Grab tensile elongation (%) >45 ASTM D 4632
Mass/unit Area (gsm) 200 ASTM D 5261
Thickness (mm) 1.40 ASTM D 5199
Trapezoidal Tear Strength (N) 250 ASTM D 4533
Puncture strength (CBR) (N) 1400 ASTM D 6241
Flow Water Rate
-5cm head(I/m2/sec) 50 ASTM D 4491
AOS (microns) 80 ASTM D 4751
UV Resistance @ 150 hrs
(% Strength Retained) >85 ASTM D 4355
Roll Width (m) 2.9 Nominal
Roll length (m) 100 Nominal
________________________________________________________________________________
Vertical parts and details shall receive:
1. One coat of a bituminous primer to ASTM D 41 for 0.250 kg/sq.m

2. The same above mentioned layers fully torched.
3. The Waterproofing Membrane termination shall be protected by a counterflasing system
(metal flashing, groove.) and shall be at least 150mm higher than the top level of the
soil.
3. CERTIFICATES (TO BE SUBMITTED BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT):
• Certificate of final quantities sent to site to be issued by supplier and submitted to consultant.
• Certificate to be issued by supplier confirming that the material has been used as per manufacturer's
recommendation.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. FIRE AND SMOKE PROTECTION 07800-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL

Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through

fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings
containing penetrating items.
1.03 REFERNCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials.
B. UL, Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistive-rated constructions, including both

empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-
penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire
according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases and
main original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.
B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following

ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479:
1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings

indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance ratings of
constructions penetrated.
2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration

firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems
protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials
in occupiable floor areas.
a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.
3. L-Rated Systems: where through-penetration firestop systems are indicated in

smoke barriers, provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of
not more than 3.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.01524cu. m/s x sq. m) at both ambient
temperatures and 400 degF (204 deg. C).
4. Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than
25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
5. Comply with UL "Fire Resistance Directory
_____________________________________________________________________________
C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture and

physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when
exposed to these conditions both during and after construction.
Materials: Provide the following from selected manufacturer.

Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, to include slag-/rock-wool-fiber
insulation, form board (fire-rated), fillers and sealants.
Substrate primers.
Collars.
Steel sleeves.
Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices. Formed from an outer
metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one
end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations.
Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and
lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced
elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.
Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties.
Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with
aluminum foil on one side.
Mortars: Prepackaged blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and
lightweight aggregate; mixed with water.
Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases
filled with mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives.
Silicone Foams: Multi component, silicone-based liquid elastomers mixed to produce
a flexible, non shrinking foam.
Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric
sealants.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Products Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of
construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction and type
of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and
inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition
indicated.
1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and

inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop
system configuration for construction and penetrating items.
_____________________________________________________________________________
C. Sample:
1. Submit duplicate samples of each specified material, including anchoring

impaling clips, in accordance with Contact Documents.
D. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each

through-penetration firestop system, along with the following information:
1. Types of penetrating items.
2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and where

applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.
3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop

design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
E. Qualified Data: For Installer.
F. Product Certificates: For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by

product manufacturer.
G. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-

penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive
testing of current products.
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing through-penetration fire stop

systems similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this Project,
whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance.
B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration fire stop

systems and fire-resistive joints systems in Project to a single qualified installer.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration fire stop systems, for each kind of
penetration and construction condition indicated, through once source from a
single manufacturer.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration fire stop systems

that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1
“Performance Requirements “ Article:
1. Fire stopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency
is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services
for fire stop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Mock-up:
1. Construct one complete mock-up of each type in location acceptable to

Engineer/Client.
2. Arrange for Engineer’s/Client’s review and acceptance.
3. Mock-up may remain as part of Work if acceptable by Engineer/Client. Remove
and dispose of mock-ups which do not part of Work.
_____________________________________________________________________________
A. Delivery through-penetration firestop systems products to products to Projects site

in original. Unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturer’s
labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number shelf
life applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency’s classification marking
applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component
materials.
B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent

their deterioration or damage dues to moisture, temperature changes,
contaminants or other causes.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems

when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-
penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrate are wet due to rain,
frost, condensation or other causes.
B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer’s written

instructions by natural means, or where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.09 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that that

through- penetration firestop systems are installed according to specifies
requirements.
B. Do not cover through-penetration firestop systems installations that will become

concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by
building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the manufacturers listed at the list of manufacturers.
2.02 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible

with one another; with the substances forming openings; and with the conditions of
service and applications, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system

that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 “Performance
Requirements” Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration
_____________________________________________________________________________
firestop system under manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and

inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not
limited to, the following items:
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing

materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealant.
2. Temporary forming materials
3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
2.03 FILL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill

materials indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the
end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill
materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting
agencies as “fill,” “void,” or “cavity” materials.
B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-

place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an in
tumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of sleeve for
fastening to concrete formwork and a neoprene gasket.
C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-
emulsify during exposure to moisture.
D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collar formed from galvanized steel and

lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced

elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.
F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistance putties containing

no solvents, inorganix fibers or silicone compounds.
G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with

aluminum foil on one side.
H. Mortars: Prepacked dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders,

hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with
water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
_____________________________________________________________________________
I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber

cloth cases filled with combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion
agents and fire-retardant additives.
J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-base liquid elastomers that, when

mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexiblr, nonshrinking foam.
K. Silicone Sealants: Single-components, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric

sealants of grade indicated below:
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other

horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other
surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop
limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.
2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for

opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces.
3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation openings in vertical and

other surfaces.
2.04 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-
penetration firestop system manufacturer’s written instructions for accurate
proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection
of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items procedures
needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, fro compliance with
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates and other
conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-

penetration fire stop systems to comply with fire stop system manufacturer’s written
instructions and with the following requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items

foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration fire
stop systems.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound

surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration fire
stop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
_____________________________________________________________________________
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration

fire stop system manufacturer using that manufacturer’s recommended products
and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration
onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: use masking tape to prevent through-penetration fire stop systems
from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work
and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire stop system materials.
Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire stop system’s seal with
substrate.
3.03 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install through-penetration fire stop systems to comply with Part 1

“Performance Requirements” Article and with fire stop system manufacturer’s
written installation instructions and published drawings for products and
applications indicated.
B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of typed required

to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings
indicated.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent
components of fire stop systems.
C. Install fill materials for fire stop systems by proven techniques to produce the
following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and
penetrating items as required achieving fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings

and penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to
produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify through-penetration fire stop systems with preprinted metal or plastic

labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 150 mm of
edge of the fire stop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to
remove penetrating items or fire stop systems. Use mechanical fasteners foe metal
labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesive capable of
permanently bonding labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of
permanently bonding label material, will result in partial destruction label if removal
is attempted. Include the following information on labels:
1. The words “Warning-Through-Penetration Fire stop System – Do Not Disturb.

Notify Building Management of Any Damage.”
_____________________________________________________________________________
2. Contractor’s name, address and phone number.
3. Through-penetration fire stop system designation of applicable testing and

inspecting agency.
4. Date of Installation.
5. Through-penetration fire stop system manufacturer’s name.
6. Installer’s name.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by

methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-
penetration fire stop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in
which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that
ensure that through-penetration fire stop systems are without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-
penetration fire stop systems immediately and install new materials to produce
systems complying with specified requirements.
3.06 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM LOCATIONS AND RATINGS
A. Install ULC fire stop and smoke seal systems rated to match fire resistance design
rating of assemblies into which they are installed.
B. Install fire stop and smoke seal systems. Use systems with required ratings at
following typical locations, including but not limited to:
1. Gaps at intersections of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board

partitions.
2. Control and sway joints in fire-resistance rated walls and partitions such as
masonry and gypsum board.
3. Gaps at top of fire-resistance rated partitions such as masonry and gypsum

board partitions.
4. Penetrations through fire-resistance rated walls and partitions including

mechanical and electrical services and openings and sleeves for future use.
5. Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. JOINT SEALERS 07900-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1. The tender documents and Addenda thereto form an integral part of this
1.2. DESCRIPTION
1. Read other sections of the specifications for extent of caulking specified in those
sections. Do all other caulking indicated, specified or required.
2. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

3. Section 08200: Wood and Plastic Doors
6. Section 10800: Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Specialties
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1. SAMPLES: Submit for approval and color selection of each specified type of
compound to be used, together with recommended primers and joint filler or fillers
proposed to be used.
2. WARRANTY: Warrant that work of this section shall remain free from leaks and
visible defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with General Conditions
but for five years. Agree to promptly make good any defects which become
apparent within warranty period. Defects include, but not limited to, joint leakage,
cracking, crumbling, melting, running, staining of adjointing or adjacent work or
surfaces, sag and failure in adhesion or cohesion.
1.4. CERTIFICATION
1. Submit manufacturer's literature describing each material to be used in the Work of

this section. Literature shall contain a statement that the material complies with the
specified standard.
2. Installation of sealant and caulking work shall be carried out by a recognized

specialized applicator having skilled mechanics, thoroughly trained and competent
in all phases of caulking work.
1.5. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
1. Consult the sealant manufacturer and apply sealant to dry surfaces at air and
material temperatures as recommended by him.
______________________________________________________________________________
1.6. MANUFACTURER
1. Before any sealants are applied, the manufacturer of each material shall visit the
site, examine the conditions at each joint to be sealed and make recommendations
in writing re: Joint preparation, suitable materials and application techniques and
conditions. Copies of the recommendations shall be submitted to the Contractor,
and the Engineer.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
1. COLOURS: Selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard range.
2. SEALANT TYPE "A": One component, acrylic base, solvent curing by Tremco
'Mono' or approved equal, or one component polyurethane sealant.
3. SEALANT TYPE "B": Multi-component, chemical curing conforming to BS 4254,

Type 1 and Type 2, or two component sealant by Tremco or approved equal.
4. SEALANT TYPE "C": One component, silicone base, chemical curing.
5. JOINT FILLER: Polyolefin foam rope closed cell type, circular cross section at least
30% larger than joint. SOF rod as supplied by Tremco or approved equal.
6. JOINT PRIMER: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for type of surface

being primed.
7. BOND BREAKER: 3M #226 or 481 or approved equal.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1. PREPARATION
1. Clean joints and spaces to be caulked and ensure they are dry and free of dust,
loose mortar, oil, grease and other foreign material. Clean ferrous metals of rust,
mill scale and foreign materials by wire brushing, grinding or sanding.
2. Wipe metal surfaces to be caulked, except recoated metals, with cellulose
sponges or clean rags soaked with ethyl alcohol, xylol or tuluol. Wipe dry
with clean cloth. Clean recoated metals with solutions or compounds which
will not injure finish and which are compatible with primer and sealant.
3. On horizontal traffic surfaces support joint filler against vertical movement which
might result from traffic loads, including foot traffic.
4. Where joints are 12 mm deep or deeper, install joint filler to proper, uniform depth to
give sealant bead of optimum size and shape for joint condition and expected
movement condition.
______________________________________________________________________________
5. Where surfaces adjacent to joints are likely to become coated with sealant during
application, mask prior to priming and caulking.
6. Caulk joints in surfaces to be painted before surfaces are painted. Where surfaces
to be caulked are prime painted in shop before caulking, check to make sure prime
paint is compatible with primer and sealant. If they are incompatible inform
Engineer, consult the manufacturer and change primer and sealant to approved
compatible types.
7. Prime side of joints, if priming is recommended by sealant manufacturer for type of

surface being caulked.
8. Check form release agent used on concrete for compatibility with primer and
sealant. If incompatible inform Engineer and change primer and sealant to
approved compatible types or clean concrete to Engineer's approval.
3.2. APPLICATION
1. Where joint configuration does not allow for proper depth/width ratio, place bond
breaker (pressure sensitive plastic tape) which will not bond to the sealant at the
back of the joint.
2. Apply sealant using air or hand operated guns fitted with suitable nozzles and
equipment approved by sealant manufacturer. Apply in strict accordance with
manufacturer's directions and recommendations. Apply sealant under pressure in
such a manner as to assure good adhesion to sides of joints and to completely fill all
voids in joint.
3. Form surface of sealant smooth, concave, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air
pockets, and embedded foreign matter.
4. Upon completion, remove masking and sealant smears and droppings from
adjacent and other surfaces.
3.3. USE SEALANTS SPECIFIED IN THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS
1. Type "A": Joints between interior door frames and masonry, and drywall, and/or
where required or directed on site.
2. Type "B": Masonry control and expansion joints and all other locations
where sealants are required, except for Type "A" and "C", and/or where
required or directed on site.
3. Type "C": Joints between walls and service sinks, urinals, wc, vanities, basins etc.
where non-staining sealant is required or as directed on site by the Engineer.
4. Further to the above, it is the intention of this section to provide all sealants and
caulking (interior and exterior) where gaps exist between two dissimilar materials.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100-1
________________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL

5. Section 09200: Plaster & Gypsum Board
1. The firm executing work of this section shall have a minimum of ten (10) years
continuous experience in successful installation of work of type and quality shown
and specified.
2. Erection of the aluminum work and curtain wall system and component parts shall be
performed by workmen specially trained and experienced in this type of work. Have a
senior, qualified representative at the job to direct the various stages of operations at
all times.
3. Conform to the requirements of the local authorities, latest BSI and ASTM standards.
4. Contractor's Responsibility: The contractor shall examine the contract drawings and
these specifications to ensure that the work is complete. If errors, omissions or
inconsistencies are discovered, he shall so notify the Engineer in writing before
executing a contract.
5. Only original profiles, fittings and accessories may be used for fabrication. The fittings
shall be selected by the fabricating plant to withstand anticipated stresses.
1.4. EXAMINATION
Make thorough examination of drawings and details, check anchorage, structural

deflections, size and shape of glass, system of sealing, interfacing with work of other
sections and other factors influencing design and performance of the glazing system,
and be fully cognizant of requirements.
1.5. EQUIPMENT
Provide safe and adequate equipment on the site to execute the work, tools, plant,
safety protection, and other equipment required for the completion of the work.
________________________________________________________________________________
1.6. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1. Design aluminum work and glazing in strict accordance with the requirements of the
applicable Building Code requirements and applicable BSI and ASTM standards
specified.
2. Design components to size and profiles indicated, reinforcement flange and web
thickness of aluminum shall be as required for adequate rigidity and strength. The
unit when tested at a minimum pressure of 35 P.S.F. in a positive (inward) direction
in accordance with the method specified in ASTM E330 shall show no permanent
deformation of any member nor any glass breakage. Maximum permissible
deflection of any member shall not exceed 1/200 of distance between fixing points.
Frames shall be thermally broken extruded sections.
3. The method of assembly, reinforcing and anchorage of the aluminum work and
glazing as indicated on the drawings is schematic and shows general intent only.
Location and methods of providing same shall be this contractor's responsibility, who
shall design the assembly, reinforcing and anchorage to suit each specific condition
in an acceptable manner.
4. All component parts shall be fastened, connected or anchored together to transmit

wind loading and other stresses to the system or anchors. Provide anchors which
transmit wind loading to the anchorage system without causing local over-stressing
and distortion of the aluminum work at point of attachment of anchor or to the anchor
itself. Additionally, anchors shall transmit uniformly distributed loads through
structure.
5. All fastenings shall be concealed.
6. Provide and/or make allowances for free and noiseless vertical and horizontal
thermal movement, due to the contraction and expansion of any or all component
arts, for an ambient temperature range of from -25·C to +40·C. Buckling, opening
of joints, glass breakage, undue stress on fasteners, failure of sealants or any other
detrimental effects due to the thermal movement of any or all component parts will
not be permitted. Fabrication, assembly and erection procedures shall take into
account the ambient temperature range at the time of the respective operation.
7. The design and installation of the aluminum work, including the glass, shall
accommodate all inherent building structure movements, expansion, creep and
deflections and the fabrication and installation tolerances of all related work not
included in this section, without the loss of, or detrimental effect to, the performance
requirements herein specified.
8. Thermal-barrier connection shall provide complete metal-to-metal separation

between the two main frame members. No connecting screws, clips or other devices
will be permitted which would tend to bridge the two frame members or restrict in any
manner, the expansion and contraction of individual separated frame members.
Vinyl member of thermal barrier connector shall serve as key lock only between the
two aluminum frame members in non-structural manner with minimum points of
contact and dead air pockets between vinyl and aluminum.
9. There shall be no water infiltration into the building through the aluminum work and
glazing under the design wind loads.
________________________________________________________________________________
1.7. DESIGN CRITERIA
1. Design components to sizes and profiles indicated having reinforcement, flange and
web thicknesses as required for adequate rigidity and strength to limit deflection to
L/200 maximum under positive and negative peak wind design gust pressures. Design
wind load shall be calculated by reference to B.P. 3: Chapter V: Part 2. The maximum
wind speed to be allowed for in calculations is 150 km/hr.
2. If, with a window casement open, a transom can be subjected to load by persons
leaning out, the necessary additional vertical load shall be taken into account.
3. For visual reasons, deflection of glass shall be limited to L/1000.
4. Make allowance in the design for localized zones where increased wind loads and
reactions will occur due to the building location and configuration.
5. Resultant effects of structural elements on the indoor climate shall be taken into
account, particularly in regard to the type and arrangement of the air conditioning at
exterior wall surfaces and the solar radiation involved.
6. No water infiltration when subjected to water spray at rate of 23 liters per .093 m2 per
hour maintained for 15 minutes with static pressure difference across the glass of 1.2
kPa.
7. Air infiltration and ex-filtration of 0.57 L/min/m2 for window areas and 0.57 L/min/m2
for spandrel and soffit areas, when subjected to static pressure of 0.075 kPa.
Permissible air leakage shall not be cumulative between windows, spandrels and
soffits.
8. Difference in temperature between central and edge portions of any inner pane of
sealed units shall be less than the maximum permissible difference recommended by
the manufacturer of sealed glass units.
9. All sizes such as oversize, cutting sizes, glass sizes shall be established on the sole
responsibility of the fabricator, maintaining the design intent to the approval of the
Engineer. In all cases involving abnormal stresses, it is necessary to document
details, attachments, etc. in the form of drawings, and to carry out structural
calculations for stressed profiles and anchors and to have these checked and
approved by Professional Engineer licensed to work in place of work.
10. SYSTEM DRAINAGE: Provide complete system drainage for all water which has
penetrated.
11. All components must sustain the forces acting on them and be capable of transmitting
them to the load bearing part of the building structure, complying with the requirements
of B.S. 8200 and B.S. C.P. 118.
________________________________________________________________________________
1.8. SUBMITTALS
1. Furnish complete shop and erection drawings required for the work of this section to
the Engineer for review prior to fabrication. Submit shop drawings in accordance with
General Conditions.
2. Co-ordinate shop drawings for work of this section with those for other sections to
ensure correct interface details required to provide a water-tight installation.
3. No work shall be fabricated until the shop drawings and all other related submittals,
documentation, certifications and samples as required by the specifications, have
been reviewed by the Engineer.
4. Shop drawings shall incorporate plans, elevations, sections and details for all work in
this section. The details shall be at full scale as far as practical and shall show and
specify the construction of all parts of the work including metal and glass thicknesses,
jointing details, field connections, anchoring, fastening, types and finishes; areas to be
sealed, sealing methods and sealant materials; gaskets; glazing methods; direction
and magnitude of thermal expansion; type of construction including joinery, fasteners
and welds and all other pertinent information.
5. All anchorage assemblies and components; the fabrication and erection tolerances
for the work in this section and the adjoining related work. Show connection details of
all work which is connected to or assimilated into the system.
6. Furnish prototype unit consisting of the sections necessary to make the typical
intersection of the split vertical and split horizontal mullion condition. Unit shall be
approximately 460 mm X 460 mm and be complete with glazing, gaskets, thermal
barriers, tapes and sealants.
7. On completion of work of this section, supply maintenance and glazing instructions

sfor insertion in maintenance manual.
8. The profile dimensions of frame, casement, transom and mullion shall be determined
in accordance with the structural analysis tables for profiles and fittings and in
accordance with the specifications and drawings. Cavity profiles shall be used in all
cases for inner and outer frames.
9. SAMPLES: Submit to Engineer for approval before fabrication of work, samples of all
materials, components and finishes to be used in the Work and typical frame jointing
method.
1.9. MOCK-UP
1. Supply and install to a location directed by the Engineer a mock-up panel, with glazing,
for approval prior to final production, consisting of one window units.
2. When approved by the Engineer the mock-up panel may remain as part of the building
system and become the standard by which the Work of this section is judged.
________________________________________________________________________________
1.10. WARRANTY
1. Warrant Work of this section against defects in materials and workmanship in

accordance with the General Conditions but for an extended period of five (5) years and
agree to promptly make good defects which become evident during warranty period
without cost to the Client. Defects shall include but not be limited to, leaking,
deformation of members, loss of seal in sealed glass units, frame distortions and
thermal forces, discoloration of finishes and failure of sealants.
1.11. STORAGE, DELIVERY, HANDLING & PROTECTION
1. Before shipment, coat exposed portions of aluminum with SPV blue colored film coating.
2. Co-ordinate deliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange ahead for
strategic off the ground, under cover storage locations.
3. Provide safe and adequate equipment on the site to execute the work, scaffolding,
staging, safety protection equipment, tools, plant and other equipment required for the
completion of the work.
4. Protect the Work of other trades from soiling and damage during the execution of the
Work.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
1. ALUMINUM WINDOW: Shall be thermally-broken fixed units suitable for glazing with
insulated sealed glass units. The general size and profile of the window units shall
be as indicated on the drawings.
2. OPERABLE WINDOWS: All operable windows shall be hinged as indicated on

drawings.
3. EXTRUDED SHAPES: Aluminum 6063 (HEQ TF) with a minimum yield of 139
MPa/25mm2 anodizing quality, free from defects impairing appearance, strength and
durability. Stress induced in aluminum framing members and their fixings shall not
exceed the values in CP 118 Aluminum extrusions shall be in accordance with B.S.
8200 and B.S. C.P. 118.
4. STEEL SECTIONS: BS 5950. All structural steelwork shall comply with the
requirements of the National Structural Steelwork Specification for building
Construction, publication No. 1/89 March 1989. All steel shall be hot dipped
galvanized. Welds shall be treated with "galvafroid" zinc rich paint.
5. PREFINISHED ALUMINUM SHEET: BS 1470. Aluminum sheet to match finish of

extrusions. Minimum 2.4 mm thick.
6. SETTING BLOCKS: Neoprene ASTM C542-69, 75 to 85 durometer A.
7. POLYETHYLENE ROPE: Closed cell foamed polyethylene, 50% larger than joint.
________________________________________________________________________________
8. SEALANT: Silicone rubber type, conforming to BS 5889.
9. PAINT: Bituminous, conforming to BS 6949.
10. GLASS AND GLAZING: Refer to Section 08800.
11. AIR SEAL PANELS: Fabricated from zinc coated sheet steel having Z275 coating
class, 1.0 mm thick.
12. INSULATION: Rigid fiberglass insulation. Fiberglass - Corning AF 530 or approved

alternate, with black facing.
13. FLEXIBLE FLASHING: EPDM sheet, 1.6 mm thick.
14. SCREWS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, RIVETS AND OTHER FASTENING

DEVICES: Stainless steel with a chromium content of not less than 12%.
15. DOORS:
1. Glazed doors as per drawings. Fastening shall be as inconspicuous as

possible, and to Engineer's approval.
2. Hardware shall be offset pivot hinges and closers, provide a ms lock c/w
thumb turn. Provide aluminum thresholds and complete (4 sides)
weather stripping.
16. ALUMINUM FINISH: Surface treatment of aluminum components shall be carried

out in accordance with B.S. 1615 and B.S. 3987. Quality of film thickness and
subsequent densification shall be in accordance with B.S 1615. The surface with
respect to gloss, texture, hue and its uniformity and the necessary surface treatment
E6 shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All interior and exterior components
to be powder coated, to match color from standard color chart by 'Jotun Corro -
Coat', to later selection.
17. POWDER COATINGS: All components shall be chemically treated with a conversion
coating, and shall include a zinc chromate coat (for aluminum). The conversion
coating shall conform with ASTM D 1750 - 67, Method 7 (Amorphous Chromium
Phosphate) or method. Factory apply the polyester powder coat by electrostatic
spraying to a dry film thickness of 60 - 80 microns.
1. Composition: Polyester powder coating shall consist of a polyester resin, a

curing agent and the appropriate light and heat resistance pigments.
2. Processing: Electrostatic spraying of the powder, on a metallic substrate

subjected to heat, melts the powder to form a continuous film and a fully cured
coating.
3. Application: Due to outstanding weather resistance, the grades used shall be

especially suited for outdoor use. Where applicable, grades used for indoor
use shall be suitable for exposure to ultra violet light.
________________________________________________________________________________
4. Range: Color shall be selected from the full range of the shades on the RAL
color card. Sheen shall be selected by Engineer from high gloss (G) with
approximately 80-100% gloss and satin gloss (S) with approximately 60-80%
gloss.
5. Material: Fine powder with grain size less than 100 microns, with a solid
content of 100%.
Aluminum Sliding Doors
Supply and installation of Aluminum sliding doors, with 8mm tempered clear glass
Sliding door drive unit covering to be hinged up aluminum guide way profile. Drive unit with
direct current motor mains connection with plug 220 V, 50 Hz.
Motor max current : 6A.

Nominal current : (230V) 0.6A
Power Automation : 70 W
Drive System : HTD 8M toothed belt
Max force exerted : 5Kg.
Opening speed : 57 cm/sec. Double doors
: 102 cm/sec. Double doors
Opening Tempera : from -20 to +70c
PIR sensor for opening
Safety photocells
Aluminum Swing door
Aluminum Swing Door with 8mm tempered glass.
Operator
FLY-PB 2100 manufacture by CAME Italy

Max. weight 200 Kg. Per leaf, gear motor runs at 24V
Automatic closure, Obstacle detection stop the door movement.
Adjustment of the speeds of opening, closing and slowing down during closing.
Power supply 230/24 V.A.C.

Frequency 50/60 Hz.
Nominal input 0.6 A
Motor power 24 V.D.C.
Max. motor input 6A
Absorbed input Automation 276 W
Accessories 60 W
Max. torque 40 Nxm
Opening Time from 2 to 5 second
Closing Time from 1 to 6 second
Operation intermittence Continuous duty
Operating temperature from -20 to 70 C
________________________________________________________________________________
Operated Steel Sliding Gate
Supply, installation of operated Steel Sliding Gates as per the specification given below
Steel Gates
High performance, rack and pinion type, industrial/ heavy duty sliding gate motor.
A three phase, self-locking electro-mechanical gear motor.
In case of power failure, the locking lever can be released by key manual release system/
Motor pinion
Limit stops.
Operating Limit : Gate weight up to 3500 kg.

Operation : By push button
Technical Data:
Duty cycle : 50%
Speed : 10.5 m/min.
Nominal current : 2A
Power : 0.75 Kw
Power supply : 380/220 V
Reduction ratio : 1/30
Torque : 135 N.m
Maximum thrust : 3500 (adjustable)
Weight : 74 Kg.
STAINLESS STEEL DOORS & FRAMES

Provide stainless steel doors and frames, with hardware, glazing, insulation, and other
components as required for a complete installation, appropriate for the project-specific
conditions. The complete system shall be fabricated with materials compatible with
adjacent construction which satisfy the performance requirements and life expectancy.
A. Performance:
1. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: NFPA 80, and based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
2. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: UL 1784. Install per NFPA 105.
3. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: NFPA 257 or UL 9. Install per
NFPA 80.
4. Door and Frame Design: Level A, ANSI A250.4.
B. Stainless-Steel Doors: Seamless, hollow-metal construction; with smooth, flush
surfaces without visible joints or seams on faces.
1. Face Sheets: Stainless-steel sheet, ASTM A 240M, austenitic stainless
steel, Type 316, or alloy 2205.
2. Laminated Core Construction: Honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft
paper with maximum 25.4-mm cells fastened to face sheets with
waterproof adhesive.
a. Fire-Rated Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and
temperature-rise ratings required.
3. Installation and Tolerances: ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 866.
________________________________________________________________________________
C. Stainless-Steel Frames: Machine mitered and welded stainless-steel frames, with

faces of corners mitered and contact edges closed tight. Fabricate in sizes and
thickness as required for performance.
D. Hardware: ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 866.
1. Head Reinforcement: 2.78-mm thick, stainless-steel channel or angle
stiffener for openings widths more than 1219 mm.
a. Anchors: Stainless steel jamb, expansion, frame, and floor type; of
thickness as required to achieve the specified life expectancy of
the door and frame assembly.
b. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 9.5-mm-thick by 50-mm wide from stainless
steel.
c. Plaster Guards: Not less than 0.48-mm thick stainless steel.
2. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Stainless-steel; ASTM F 738M and
ASTM F 836M,
Alloy Group 1 or 4 for bolts and nuts. Provide stainless steel alloy 2205 for atmospheric
corrosion resistance.
E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or
glass fibers.
F. Glazing: Clear tempered glass.
G. Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476.
H. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic.
I. Stainless Steel Finish: No. 4 Directional Satin.
STEEL DOORS
Provide steel doors and frames, with hardware, glazing, insulation, and other
components as required for a complete installation, appropriate for the project-
specific conditions. The complete system shall be fabricated with materials
compatible with adjacent construction which satisfy the performance requirements
and life expectancy.
A. Performance:
1. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: NFPA 80, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.
2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Maximum transmitted temperature end point of not
more than 250 deg C above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test
exposure.
3. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.
B. Hollow Metal Doors, Frames and Hardware: ANSI/SDI A250.8, for materials,
design, fabrication and core construction.
1. Exterior Doors and Frames: Metallic-coated steel sheet; ASTM A
653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum ZF120 metallic
coating.
a. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A, Model 2.
________________________________________________________________________________
2. Interior Doors and Frames: Cold Rolled Steel Sheet; ASTM A 1008M,
Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; unless metallic-coated sheet is
required.
a. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B, Model 2.
3. Installation: ANSI/SDI A250.11.
C. Hardware:
1. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 12G coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
a. Exterior: Steel sheet, ASTM A 1008M or ASTM A 1011M; hot-dip
galvanized, ASTM A 153M, Class B.
2. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A 153M.
3. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fabricated from corrosion-
resistant materials, with clips or other attachments.
D. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Movable blade type; with fusible link.
E. Grout: ASTM C 476.
F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
G. Glazing: Clear tempered glass.
H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12.
I. Shop Primer: Complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10.
2.2. FABRICATION
1. Measurements submitted and reviewed during shop drawing review may

change due to site conditions. It is this Subcontractors responsibility to
coordinate and verify, by measurement at the job site, all dimensions affecting
the Work.
2. Workmanship shall be the best modern shop and field practice known to
recognized manufacturers specializing in this work. Joints and intersecting
members shall be accurately fitted to true planes, adequately and securely
fastened and made completely watertight. Cuts shall be machined and fitted to
form permanent hairline joints. Component fastenings shall be concealed of
adequate strength, fabricated from stainless steel or shall be concealed fusion
welds.
3. Fabricate units from extrusions of profile and size indicated having wall thickness
required by design criteria (minimum 3 mm thick) and complete with rabbets,
interlocks, miscellaneous angles, trim and filler sections, as required to interface
with work of other contracts.
4. Connecting mullions shall be of special formed extruded aluminum sections

designed to provide a functional split without having a seam joint on the exterior
weathered face of the mullion. The design of the mullion shall provide and
________________________________________________________________________________
maintain positive air and vapor seals against infiltration and exfiltration, prevent
water entry into the system, permit necessary movement required by the
expansion and contraction contraction of the system and accommodate the
structural creep and deflections of the building structure.
5. The windows shall be accurately sized to suit the window openings.
6. Fabricate window sills from refinished sheet aluminum in color and finish to
match adjacent window framing. Accurately construct sills with mitered corners.
Construction of sills shall be to Engineer's approval. All fastenings shall be
concealed and stainless steel.
7. Form accurate extrusions with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles free from
any defects.
8. Joints between horizontal and vertical mullions shall be accurately cut and fitted.
Horizontal and vertical mullions shall be in true plane with interior and exterior
faces in line.
9. Frame members shall be assembled together by means of sealed mechanical

joints produced by fitting formed butyl gaskets of correct profile between the
members and secured by means of self-tapping screws through the wall of one
member into specially formed grooves of the adjoining member. Screws shall
be driven home with gauged force to ensure proper uniform compression of
sealing gaskets and permanent securement of the components in place.
10. Glazing shall be from the exterior.
11. Framing members shall have integrally formed keyed slots to receive and retain
performed gaskets, seals and thermal separators.
12. Pressure plates shall be designed with integrally formed keyed slots to receive seals
and they shall be of thickness necessary to provide permanent, uniform, sealing
pressures for the glazing units and spandrels, without deformation.
13. Vapour air seal panels of spandrel areas shall be fabricated from galvanized steel
formed and braced as required to resist specified forces and maintain the required
convector plenum. Tack weld impaling pins to panels for securement of insulation
by means of speed clips.
14. Fabricate all devices required for erection and adequate anchorage and attachment,
including but not limited to supplementary steel framing, brackets, inserts, clip angles,
anchors, straps, shims, stud bolts, nuts and washers. Attachments shall be designed
to provide for accurate adjustment and to compensate for structure tolerances and
permit unrestricted expansion and contraction of the framing members.
15. Provide inconspicuous, baffled weep holes to properly drain aluminum system
cavities to exterior.
16. Component fastenings, concealed throughout, of adequate strength, should be

stainless steel.
________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION
1. Check structural elements and adjoining work on which work is dependent, verify
governing dimensions, floor elevations, floor to floor heights, minimum clearances
between aluminum work and structural frame. Confirm conditions satisfactory before
proceeding. Commencement of work shall be deemed to be acceptance of existing
conditions.
2. Anchor assemblies to structure, galvanized steel, adjustable to permit accurate

location of wall components, conforming to design criteria and fully detailed on shop
and erection drawings.
3. Backpaint aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with concrete, surfaces between
dissimilar metals, one coat of bitumastic paint. Touch up field welds in steel with two
coats of zinc chromate paint.
4. Joints and intersections shall be accurately fitted in true planes, free of distortion,
waves, twists, buckles or other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
Prevent damage to metal finish.
5. Fit flexible seals, tapes, formed neoprene deflectors and gaskets at locations required
to provide water, air, vapor and weathertight junction. Caulk junctions of system
components to themselves and other work with sealant to maintain effective vapour,
air and water barrier. Where joints are 12 mm deep or deeper, back with polyethylene
rope filler. Sealant bead depth shall be 1/2 width but not less than 6 mm. Apply
sealants with pressure gun. Caulk exterior junction of glass to mullion caps at sill and
100 mm up each jamb with neat bead of clear silicone sealant.
6. Fixing
1. Installation and anchoring shall be carried out in accordance with the highest
standards of safety and security.
2. In the case of elements with movable casements, transoms and mullions, the
outer frames shall be anchored in such a way that the forces from the hinges,
pivots, transoms and mullions are transmitted to the building structure.
3.2. CLEANING
1. At completion of work remove all labels from glass and clean inner and outer faces of
glass and all exposed aluminum surfaces at interior and exterior. Replace scratched
or broken glass and make good any damaged materials, including operating hardware.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. WOOD AND PLASTIC DOORS 08200-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1. Section 06400: Architectural Woodwork

3. Section 08700: Hardware
6. Section 09900: Painting and Coating
The Contractor executing the Work of this contract shall have had a minimum of 5
years experience. Submit proof of experience upon Engineer's request.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with General

Conditions illustrating door construction for the Engineer to review. Show type of
core and construction detail, glazing and stops, opening required, material
designation and door schedules.
2.
3. Submit two 600 mm x 600 mm samples of solid core doors, and two corner
samples of each type of wood door.
1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
1. Coordinate deliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange ahead

for off the ground, under cover storage location.
2. Do not permit delivery of work to job site until building is sufficiently dry, wet
trades are completed and the moisture readings of surfaces in proposed storage
area is less than 18%.
3. Materials shall be carefully checked, unloaded, stored and handled to prevent

damage. Store doors flat on level surface. Protect materials with suitable non-
staining waterproof coverings, but allow air circulation at sides.
4. Wrap doors individually in protective wrapping for shipment and site storage.
1.6. EXAMINATION
1. Make thorough examination of drawings, details and schedules, determine the

intent, extent, materials and be fully cognizant of requirements.
______________________________________________________________________________
1.7. WARRANTY
1. Warrant the solid core doors against defects in materials and workmanship in
accordance with the General Conditions but for full lifetime of original installation.
2. Make defects good promptly, during warranty period, by replacing defective

doors, in finish to match original door finish.
3. Without limiting the generality of the word, "defects" shall include bubbling,
delamination of faces, cores or edges, telegraphing of core through to face, warp
or twist across the diagonal, and telegraphing of core. "Replace" as used herein
includes installing hardware, finishing, "hanging and fitting.
1.8. FIRE RATED DOORS
1. All doors that are required to be fire-rated by jurisdictional authorities shall be

provided, whether indicated or not in the contract documents.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
1. SOLID CORE PANELLED DOORS:
1. All interior doors and wardrobe cupboards to be mahogany wood veneer

paneled doors or approved equal.
2. Stiles and Rails to be solid laminated wood with first veneer in 0.8mm
thickness natural Mahogany glued under high pressure and second
veneer in Mahogany 0.8mm thickness glued and laid transversely with
first veneer.Total thickness to be 40mm.
3. Panels to be 22mm thick MDF panels of 720 kg. density with shaped
molding at perimeter of panels – finished on both sides with 0.4mm thick
Mahogany Veneer, glued under high pressure.
4. Supply and install 22mm x 28mm solid Mahogany wood edge decorative
profiled molding between rails and stiles and panels.
5. All doors and frames to be stained
6. All doors and frames to be refinished and pre-machined for butts and
strikes and to be supplied with matching stops, casings and architraves.
2.2. FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
1. GENERAL CONDITIONS:
1. 45mm Solid core doors, except as specified otherwise herein. Size doors
from (1.6 mm) clearance of heads and jambs and (10 mm) at sills.
______________________________________________________________________________
2. Incorporate solid wood blocking at locations where hinges, locksets,

closers, and similar hardware is installed and applied.
3. Indicate top and hinge side on each door.
4. Fabricate of framed construction with wood core 30mm minimum top and
bottom rails and 75mm stiles.
5. Prepare all doors for finish hardware as per the approved hardware
schedule.
6. All adhesives shall be waterproof.
7. Outside edges of top and bottom rails of doors shall be factory sealed with
one coat of sealer.
8. All doors to be installed with hardwood frames.
2. SOLID CORE WOOD DOORS:
1. Solid Particle Core: Laminated wood frame core construction comprising

solid particle board core with minimum total thickness of stiles, top and
bottom rails to be 13/4 in to AWI section 1300, NWWPA IS - 1
standards.
3. CUT OUT OPENINGS:

1. Glass and louvers shall not be closer than (125 mm) to an edge and shall
be fully framed or blocked. Wood stops and moldings shall be compatible
with face veneer and attached to one side only.
2. Prepare doors in factory to receive glass lights. Fit loose stops and tack in
place. Stops shall match face veneers.
4. FIRE RATED DOORS:

1. Doors shall be incombustible solid core type bearing Labels for class "C"
3/4 hours, and class "B" 1 - 1/2 hours.
5. VENEERED DOORS:
1. Door faces 5 - ply plywood with approved mahogany hardwood face

veneer.
2. Minimum (19 mm) hardwood edging to be of same species as face veneer.
3. Premium grade veneers shall be used for doors to be stained and

varnished. Veneers shall be slip - matched of the species of hardwood
specified and each face shall be made of tight and smoothly cut veneers.
4. Finishing: One coat filler/stain followed by a coat of clear vinyl sealer, clear
topcoat and final clear topcoat, to all veneered doors. Fire-rated doors to
receive a clear fire resistant varnish as per requirements of the local
Authorities.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460-1
__________________________________________________________________________
PART I - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. WORK INCLUDED: Furnish complete automatic swing door system, as specified, that
has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to maintain performance criteria stated
by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure.
B. RELATED WORK:
1. Masonry: Division 4, applicable sections.
2. Electrical: Division 16, applicable sections.
3. Glass; Hardware: Division 8, applicable sections.
4. Perimeter Sealants; Insulation: Division 7, applicable sections.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ZH 1/494 Germany– Guidelines on power operated doors,windows and gates.
B. Manufacture and Test Code of Practice for Automatic doors in Emergency Rescue
Routes , Issue 10/1984 Germany .
C. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE:

1. ANSI Z97.1: Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Methods of Test.
D. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS:

1. ASTM B221: Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes and Tubes.
E. THE ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION:

1. AA Aluminum Finishes Manual.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's complete product data, standard details and
instructions for all material provided in this specification.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, product

components including anchorage, accessories, finish and glazing details (where
required),necessary wiring and electrical requirements.
C. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: Submit the following:

1. Manufacturer's Operation and Maintenance Data.
2. Warranty document as specified herein.
D. Samples: Reasonably sized to adequetely represent materials and finishes.
A. INSTALLERS QUALIFICATIONS: Installer experienced to perform work of this section

who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project for
at least (5) five years and who is acceptable to product manufacturer.
__________________________________________________________________________
B. MANUFACTURER’S QUALIFICATIONS: Manufacturer to have minimum (10) ten years

successful experience in the fabrication of automatic doors of the type required for this
project. Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during installation,
approving acceptable installer and approving application method.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY: Units to be warranted against defect in material and

workmanship for a period of one year from the Date of Substantial Completion.
Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights owner may
have under Contract Documents.
B. DISTRIBUTOR'S WARRANTY: One year warranty: Labor and transportation charges for
defective parts replacement.
A. Verify that the orther trades are complete with their required work before installing the
automatic sliding door system. Verify actual dimensions/openings by field measurements
before fabrication and record on shop drawings. Coordinate with fabrication and
construction schedule to avoid construction delays.
B. Mounting surfaces shall be plumb,straight and secure;substrates shall be of proper

dimension and material;material on which the door is anchored to shall be capable of
supporting the automatic door system and associated loads .
C. Coordinate installation with glass , glazing and electrical work.
A. ORDERING AND DELIVERY: Comply with factory's ordering instructions and lead time
requirements. Delivery shall be in factory's original, unopened, undamaged containers
with identification labels intact.
B. STORAGE AND PROTECTION: Store materials in a dry, protected ,well-vented area.

Immediately report any damaged material to carrier that made the delivery and note such
damage on the carrier’s freight bill of lading.Provide protection from exposure to harmful
weather conditions and vandalism.
1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Proposals for substitutions will be accepted from approved bidders only and must be
submitted a minimum of ten ( 10 ) working days prior to the bid date. The proposed
substitution shall meet the performance and quality standards of this specification.
__________________________________________________________________________
PART ll - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
Automatic sliding door(s) furnished and installed shall be as per Approved

Manufacturers.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. MANUFACTURED DOOR UNITS: Shall include the surface mounted

,electromechanical self lubricating rack and pinion swing door operator with
microprocessor control, header , connecting hardware, actuating controls and
integrated program switch.Radar Motion detectors and safety sensors for push and
pull side to be supplied with the system , with lengths to suit door widths. All operator
components shall be factory assembled , fully adjusted and tested.The system shall be
installed and adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.A complaince
inspection shall be completed after the operating system is completely installed .The
Door units and frames shall be of sufficient design and construction to accommodate
automatic door operation.
B. OPERATOR: The Swing door operator shall be ED 250 Full energy with upgrade
cards,heavy duty operator unit, for doors with load bearing capacity 250 Kg, door
widths upto 1600mm and opening angle of 110 degrees. The drive unit should have an
adjustable closing force of Size EN 2-4.The microprocessor control is 12-
24vDC,800Ma,AC, The system to have degree of protection IP 20. The operator shall
have the following dimensions – 685mm width ,70mm height, and overall depth of
130mm.
C. OPERATOR PARAMETERS: The Operator shall have the following functions

incorporated in it .
Function programs : Off,automatic, permanent open, adjustable backcheck,adjustable

delayed closing action,connection for infra-red safety sensors for pull and push side,
connection for electromechanical lock if needed. Where specified for Access control
doors, the operator to be compatible with 24VDC/0.3Amp fail safe electromechanical
lock.The opeartor shall also monitor the open/ close signals.
Where specified use door acitvation by Magic switches for operation theaters, Elbow
switches for corridors, card readers for access control, sensors on both sides for
corridors.
Selectable performance functions :

Adjustable opening time >= 1.5 secs,
Adjustable closing time>=3 secs,
Adjustable hold-open time – 0-30 secs
2.04 RELATED WORK REQUIREMENTS
A. ELECTRICAL: 230 VAC, 60 cycle, 1 phase, 15 amp.
B. GLASS AND GLAZING: Glass stops, glazing vinyl and setting blocks for field glazing
as per Safety Glazing standard ANSI Z97.1.2. General contractor to coordinate
__________________________________________________________________________
acquisition of glass in thickness and type in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations for prescribed design.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
Site Verification of Conditions: Installer must verify that base conditions previously
installed under other sections are acceptable for product installation according to
manufacturer's instructions. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to
the proper and timely completion of work. Do not start work until all negative
conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer and manufacturer.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL: Install door units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of
frames or sash with manufacturer's prescribed tolerances. Provide support and anchor
in place.
B. DISSIMILAR MATERIALS: Comply with AAMA 101, Appendix Dissimilar Materials by

separating aluminum materials and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion
or electrolytic action contact points.
C. WEATHER-TIGHT CONSTRUCTION: Install header and framing members in a bed of

sealant or with joint filler or gaskets. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and
other components of construction.
D. ELECTRICAL: General or electrical contractor to install all wiring to operator on a

separate circuit breaker routed into header.
3.03 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
A. CLEANING: After installation, installer to take following steps:

1. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas.
2. Remove construction debris from construction site and legally dispose of
debris.
3. Repair or replace damaged installed products.
4. Clean product surfaces and lubricate operating equipment for optimum
condition and safety.
B. ADJUSTMENT: Installer to adjust operator and controls for optimum condition and
safety.
C. ADVISE CONTRACTOR: Of precautions required through the remainder of the

construction period, to ensure that doors will be without damage or deterioration (other
than normal weathering) at the time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. SKYLIGHTS 08600-1
_____________________________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
This Section includes aluminum-framed skylights and sloped glazing with the following
glass glazing retained by field-installed pressure caps on four sides.
A. Provide metal-framed skylights, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without

failure, the effects of the following:
1. Structural Loads.
2. Thermal Movements.
3. Movements of supporting structure.
4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame
5. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent constructions.
B. Failure includes the following:
1. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. Water leakage.
3. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.
4. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
5. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements, to glazing.
6. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments and other components.
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads, Snow Loads and Seismic Loads; As indicated by structural design
data on Drawings.
2. Load Combinations: Calculate according to requirements of applicable code

indicated on Drawings.
D. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
a. Span Up to 6m: Limited to 1/175 of clear span or 25.4 mm, whichever is smaller.
b. Span Exceeding 6 m: limited to 1/240 of clear span.
c. Glass Edge Deflection: Limit edge deflection of individual glass lites to 19 mm.
E. Lateral Bracing of Framing Members: Compression flanges of flexural members are

laterally braced by cross members with minimum depth equal to 50 percent of flexural
member that is braced. Glazing does not provide lateral support.
F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of
materials due to both solar heat gain and night time-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100def
C), material surfaces.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of

individual components and profiles and finishes for metal-framed skylights.
B. Shop Drawings: For metal-framed skylight. Include plans, elevations, sections, details
and attachments to other work.
1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer’s
standard sizes.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency, for metal-framed skylights.
E. Maintenance Data: For metal-framed skylights to include in maintenance manuals.
F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Installer Qualifications: Entity capable of assuming engineering responsibility and

performing work of this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for metal frames skylight systems

including the following:
a. Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer’s

standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and
submission of reports of tests performed on manufacturer’s standard
assemblies.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications established

requirements for skylights aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetics
effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment and profiles of
components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines to one another, and to adjoining
construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification
by one or more methods including testing conducted by an independent testing agency
and in-service performance.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect’s approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, “Structural

Welding Code- Aluminum.”
Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace components of metal-framed skylights that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finished and other materials beyond normal

weathering.
d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
e. Water leakage.
2. Warranty Period: Ten Years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components on which finished fail within specified warranty period.
Warranty does not include normal weathering.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, checking, crazing, peeling, chalking and
fading of finished.
2. Warranty Period: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers listed at the list of manufacturers.
2.02 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Systems: Naturalite HP-1175, or equal, 44.5 mm by 171.5 mm thermal aluminum

system using HP-1103 rafters and HP-1103 rafters and HP-1106 purlins.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of use
and finish indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 M.

2. Extruded Bards, Rods, Profiles and Tubes: ASTM B 221 M.
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
C. Pressure Caps: Manufacturer’s standard aluminum components that mechanically

retain glazing.
1. Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners.
D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer’s standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning skylight components.
E. Anchors, Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard, corrosion-resistant,

nonstaining and nonbleeding; compatible with adjacent materials.
1. At pressure caps, use ASTM A 193/A 193M, 300 series stainless-steel screws.
2. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural
movements, wind loads or vibration, use self-locking devices.
3. Exposed Fasteners:
a. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk screw heads.

b. Finish exposed portions ti match framing system.
4. At movement joints, use slip-joint linings, spacers and sleeves of material and type
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
F. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot0dio galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel

inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
G. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), hot-dip zinc
coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
H. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0.457-mm thick stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M
type recommended in writing by manufacturer.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
I. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Manufacturer’s standard aluminum components not

less than 0.762 mm thick.
J. Framing Gaskets: Manufacturer’s standard.
K. Framing Sealants: As recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2.03 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: Fritted glass as specified in Division 08 Section “Glazing.”
B. Spacers, Setting Blocks and gaskets: Manufacturer’s standard elastomeric types.
C. Glazing Sealant: As recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Insulating Materials: Specified in Division 07 Section “Building Insulation.”
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 0.762-mm thickness per
coat.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum components before finishing.
B. Fabricate aluminum components that, when assembled, have the following

characteristics:
1. Profiles those are sharp, straight and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints,

condensation occurring within framing members and moisture migrating within
skylight to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.
C. Fabricate aluminum sill closures with weep holes and for installation as continuous
component.
D. Weld aluminum components as required to receive fasteners threads.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
E. Weld aluminum components in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to

minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides
from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
F. Factory-Glazed Units:
1. Factory install glazing to comply with requirements in Division 08 Section “Glazing.”
G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according
to Shop Drawings.
2.06 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finished Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the

Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
C. Class II, Clears Anodic Finish: AA- M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as
fabricated; Chemical Finish, etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class
II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker, complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of burrs and
distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and
electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impending movement of moving joints.
6. Weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of

finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
7. Seal joints water tight, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar materials, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or by installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended in writing by manufacturer for this purpose.
C. Install continuous aluminum still closure with weatherproof expansion joints and locked
and sealed or welded corners. Locate weep holes at rafters.
D. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within skylight to exterior.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and elevation.
F. Install glazing as specifies in Division 08 Section “Glazing.”
G. Install insulation materials as specified in Division 07 Section “Building Insulation.”
H. Erection Tolerances: Install metal-framed skylights to comply with the following

maximum tolerances:
1. Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 0.8 mm where surfaces abut in line,
edge to edge at corners or where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned
surfaces by less than 76 mm; otherwise, limit offset to 3.2 mm.
2. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 3.2 mm in 3.7 m
but no greater than 13 mm over total length.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. HARDWARE 08700- 1
_______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope
It is the intent that this section shall provide for the supply of all items of finishing hardware
and adequately service this project as indicated in the Hardware Schedule and the
drawings.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
Supply of finishing hardware as scheduled including Hardware Schedule-Hardware Sets

reviewing in conjunction to latest revision of Drawings and Specifications.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Door hardware and furniture shall be approved types, suitable for the location and the
intended function of the doors, in accordance with the Product Information and relevant
Standards.
B. Submit Product Information, and Control Samples if directed.
C. Verify correct handing, internal external application, compliance to fire rating requirements, if
applicable, and suitability of Hardware with the door type and door/frame construction, floor
levels, door swing limits for all Hardware items before commencing.
D. Include fixings, striker plates, shims, and escutcheons for a complete installation, whether
indicated or not.
Coordinate the work of this trade with the base-structure, services and adjacent work.
Coordinate with:
 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
 WOOD DOORS
 TEMPERED GLASS DOORS, SCREENS, PANELS AND BALUSTRADES
 ALUMINUM FRAMED INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR GLAZED AND
LOUVERED SCREENS, DOORS AND FRAMES.
 CURTAINS WALL, EXTERIOR ENTRANCES
 SLIDING DOORS
 SIGNAGE
 ELECTRICAL SERVICES for power and control wiring for electric, electromagnetic and
electronic strikes, locks, detectors, controllers and similar devices.
 SECURITY SERVICESDRAWINGS for locations and extent.
MATERIAL/PRODUCTS SCHEDULE for finishes selections.

DOOR SCHEDULE.
FIRE ENGINEERING REPORT for doors, if applicable.
ACOUSTIC REPORT for doors, if applicable.
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.4 REFERENCES
Comply with the current edition of all relevant standards to include:
No. of Doc. Title
EN 1670 Corrosion resistance
EN 12209 Mechanically operated locks, latches and locking plates.
EN 1303 Cylinders for locks
EN 1935 Single axis hinges
EN 1154 Controlled door closing devices
EN 1155 Elec. Powered hold open devices for swing doors
EN 1158 Door coordinator devices
EN 1906 Lever handles and knob furniture
EN 1125 Panic exit devices operated by a horizontal bar
EN 1527 Hardware for sliding doors and folding doors
EN 12365 Gaskets and weather stripping
EN 1634 Fire Testing of door and shutter assemblies.
The BHIF (Builders Hardware Industry Federation) code of practice for hardware for timber
fire and escape doors.
All fire and life safety codes shall be met as required by the authority having jurisdiction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare and supply 6 copies of a completely detailed hardware schedule. The schedule will
list all the doors by number, size, hand and degree of opening.
B. Indicate the handling of each door and the degree of swing. In case of pairs of doors,
indicate the active door. Schedule to indicate the material, finish, dimensions, and details of
fastenings for each hardware.
C. The schedule shall indicate the manufacturer’s name and the article numbers.
D. Submit samples as each hardware type is specified finish and the appropriate fasteners.
E. Provide with templates and hardware schedule, original catalogue cuts of all the hardware
scheduled.
F. Submit template information to the contractor for distribution to related trades.
G. Submit a key schedule for review with the consultant and the client.
H. Approved samples may be incorporated in the works unless otherwise instructed by the
architect.
I. Submit affidavits to verify that hardware in each case has been installed in the correct
location and that it is operating correctly.

A. The supplier of finishing hardware shall be regularly involved in the sale and distribution of
Builder’s Hardware for commercial projects of this nature.
_______________________________________________________________________________
B. The supplier shall employ a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant (A.H.C.) or Dip GAI
(Guild of Architectural Ironmongers) to supervise all the issues related to doors and doors
hardware. The Hardware consultant will be responsible for architectural submittals, samples
submission, to review Hardware sets in conjunction with Drawings, specifications, statuary
rules, international standards such as Life Safety code and Disability Act. The Hardware
consultant should also look after material deliveries to site, making sure right material is
delivered, marked and packed.

The supply shall ensure that deliver of proprietary packaged products in the manufacturer’s
original packages and containers with labels intact and legible, including installation
instructions, templates and detailed delivery dockets. Packaging of hardware shall be (in):
 Complete individual sets for each door.
 Separate dust and moisture proof packages.
 Clearly labelled to show intended locations.
 Complete with required fixings.
1.8 WARRANTY
All hardware shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of issue of
completion certificate. Lever handles to be guaranteed for a period of five years from the
date of issue of completion certificate. Material shall be covered against manufacturing
defects or breakage, will-full damage excluded.
The warranty shall include particular reference to failure of, or due to, the following:
 Correct selection for required location performance
 Correct functioning of moving parts.
 Structural adequacy.
 Chipping, fading, excessive wear or delamination or other deterioration of finishes.
 Fixing and connectors including stripped threads and damaged heads.
 Integrity of seals.
 Sagging, slackness or looseness of knobs and handles due to wear, relaxation of
springs, stripped threads, or any other cause.
The warranty shall include an undertaking that spare parts and replacement items will be
available for sale off-the-shelf, or with a lead time not exceeding four weeks from date of
order, for a period not less than the warranty period.
Warranty shall be accompanied by a current retail price list properly identified and dated.
The warranty shall include an undertaking with respect to price control for the following
items:
 Replacement keys.
 Replacement cylinders.
1.9 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Provide maintenance data, parts lists and manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
maintenance for each type of hardware including door closer, lock case, exit devices, etc.
_______________________________________________________________________________
B. Provide 3 nos. copies of catalogues for all hardware used for incorporation into the
maintenance manual. Only the original catalogue shall be used.
1.10 SELECTION
In as much as the items in the hardware schedule represent the Architect’s / Engineer’s
selection pertaining to weight, method of fixing, design, finish, and function, alternatives will
only be considered if, in their opinion, it equals or exceeds the set standard and quality of
the hardware.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Products listed in the hardware schedule are from the manufactures listed
as per attached approved Manufacture list.
2.2 HARDWARE ITEMS

A. HINGES
Hinges and screws shall be suitable approved types and sizes.
Submit product information, and Control Sample if directed.
Coordinate with door and frame manufacturer for correct location of hinge recesses and
screw holes.
Hinges shall be 5 knuckle ball bearing but hinges, template drilled, suitable for timber and
metal doors, to be tested for performance as per ANSI/BHMA Grade1. Unless otherwise
specified, hinge size shall be 4.5”x4”x3.4mm with hospital tip
Where specified for external outward opening doors, hinges shall be used.
Aluminium hinges are not acceptable.
For Aluminium doors use Dorma LM hinges type B22, 2 or 3 parts hinges as per weight and
size of door with Eccentric bearing bins with door clearance adjustment feature after
installation.
B. DOOR CLOSERS
Door closers shall be for the location and the intended function of the doors, including size
and weight of the door, door swings and wind pressure, in accordance with the product
information and relevant standards. All door closers to comply with EN 1154.
Submit product information, and Controlled Samples if required by the consultant.
Double rebated doors to have door closers with co-ordinators for sequential closing of
doors.
Door closer to be of EN size 2-4 for doors up to 1100mm wide and 80kg weight.
Door closer to be of EN size 2-5 for doors up to 1200mm wide and 120kg weight.
Door closer to be of EN size 2-6 for doors up to 1400mm wide and 120-150kg weight.
_______________________________________________________________________________
Where practicable, surface mounted closers shall be concealed from view by mounting
inside rooms and stairwells. Do not fix closer to the visible side of public corridors, foyers or
the like. In case it is desirable door closer not to be seen from both sides, Concealed type
door closer to be used which is installed inside the cut out on frame or door and the closer is
not visible from both sides of the door.
C. FLOOR CLOSERS
Floor closers and controllers shall be approved types, suitable for the location and the
intended function of the doors, including size and weight of the door, door swings and wind
pressure, in accordance with the product information and relevant standards. Floor closers
to conform to EN 1154.
Submit product information, and Controlled Samples if required.
Where need, the floor closer to be installed with Terrazzo pans and interchangeable
spindles to allow insertion of floor finish material in the pan to avoid sight of cover plates.
Sealing compound to be used where there is chance of water reaching to the door closer
body.
For door where floor closer is indicated or required, the floor closer to be Universal non-
handed floor spring. Floor closer to be suitable for single and double door up to 120kg of
door leaf weight. Floor closer to have adjustable closing speed, adjustable closing action,
back check and hold open feature.
The cover plate to be stainless steel, suitable for both left and right handed doors. Where
needed, the floor closer to be installed with Terrazzo pans and interchangeable spindles to
allow insertion of floor finish material in the pan to avoid sight of cover plates.
When used for fire rated doors, floor closer have to be tested and certified by accredited
internationally known fire testing laboratory. In case of hold open or free swing feature in
floor closer, the closer should close the door automatically in case of fire alarm or power
interruption.
Floor closers to be installed on fire rated doors are to be CE Marked.
D. LEVER HANDLE SETS

Where specified Lever handles with 8mm spindle with bolt through fixings for door
thicknesses ranging from 38mm to 54mm, spindle shall be captive on the outside lever
handle and fixed by ”Punch Through” set screw providing good security and appearance.
Tested as per EN1906:2010 grade-4 category and to be used also on wood doors rated up
to 2 hours and steel doors up to 4 hours.
E. PULL HANDLES
Pull handles shall be approved types, suitable for the location and the intended function of
the doors.
Pull handles with single side and back to back fixing as specified.
_______________________________________________________________________________
F. MORTISE LOCKS
Locks and latches suitable for the location and the intended function in accordance with the
relevant standards.
Locks and latches shall conform to EN 12209. Submit product information, and Control
Samples if directed.
Unless otherwise indicated, locksets and latch-sets shall be mortise type. Use only
proprietary strike plates nominated for the required locks or latches.
All latch-sets and locksets shall be from one manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
Lock case to be sealed and zinc plated, with Stainless steel Latch and Bolt. Total bolt
projection to be 20mm, 8mm square steel follower. Brass latches and bolts not allowed.
Springs and other moving parts not be fabricated from brass shall be corrosion-resistant
steel alloy or stainless steel. The forends to be 24mm width, square edges, of stainless steel
material in satin finish. Locks to be for euro profile cylinders with 55mm back set for wooden
doors and 35mm for aluminium doors. Latch should be Stainless steel material.
G. KEY AND CYLINDERS

Cylinders shall be approved types, suitable for the location and the intended function in
accordance with the relevant standards. Finish of cylinder to be as per the other hardware
on the door face.
Cylinders to conform to EN 1303
Submit product information, and Control Samples if directed.
Cylinders to be euro profile double cylinder, euro-profile knob/thumb turn cylinder, Euro
profile single cylinders & 3540T.K6BB euro-profile privacy cylinder.
Cylinders to be Euro-Profile under a non-master key system. Each cylinder to have 3
change keys. The cylinders should have protection against picking, scanning, and
manipulation. The cylinder should have a solid steel cam and special key way.
Master keying (Upon Request) to be done in factory and records maintained. Access to
additional keys to be through authorised representative of owner only. The master key
system should have 3 keys per cylinder and master keys based on key schedule approved
by the consultant. The system should have a capability of expansion of 50% for the future,
and be up to 4 levels of Master Keying.
Where specified, cylinders to have thumb-turn on one side. Exit devices which have a trim,
should have single cylinder.
Cylinders and keys shall be code stamped with an identification number in an approved
location. Verify identification numbers with the Principal before stamping.
H. FLUSH BOLTS
All double doors except those having exit devices, to have flush bolts on the inactive leaf.
The bottom bolt should go into dust proof strike, where specified manual and automatic flush
bolt shall be UL listed.
SPX101 for Wooden Doors, SPX100 for Metal Doors.
The finish for the flush bolts to be satin chrome plated respectively.
_______________________________________________________________________________
I. EXIT DEVICES
Exit Devices shall be approved proprietary types, suitable for the location and the intended
function, in accordance with the Product Information.
Exit devices to be rim type, Surface Vertical Rod for Double door with lever handle trim
outside, suitable for the location and the intended function. Exit Device to conform to EN
1125.
J. DOOR SEALS
Door seals to be LAS1046SI jamb and header weather seals for internal doors and for
external doors,
Door seals, including weather seals, smoke seals, acoustic seals and air seals, shall be
suitable for the location and the intended function in accordance with the Product
Information.
Include fixings, rebates, grooves, and clearances for correct installation and operation of
seals.
Coordinate with the door-frame manufacturer for required rebates to door-frames.
All external door to have suitable weather seals to protect against outside dust, wind and
cold.
Threshold type to be Saddle/Panic thresholds UL listed ADA complaint. Jamb and header
seals proprietary to the aluminium door and frames to be used subject to the approval of the
consultant. Jamb and header seals to be with pressure sensitive tape 6.4mm in charcoal
finish.
K. MOP PLATES, KICK PLATES AND PUSH PLATES

All protection plates custom made as per the door design.
Door protection plates shall be approved proprietary types, suitable for the location and the
intended function, in accordance with the Product Information.
Applied facings to doors and kick plates shall be approved types to match control samples.
Verify edge details on shop drawings before commencing.
Applied facings shall be factory bonded where practicable. Fully faced doors shall be factory
matched with door-frames to minimise requirement for site adjustment.
Use water-resistant adhesive or other suitable concealed methods. No mechanical fixings
shall be visible in the completed work. Finish exposed edges with smooth edges.
Unless otherwise indicated, width of applied facings shall be full width of door. Width may be
reduced to clear doorstops, if approved before commencing.
L. DOOR STOPS
Door stops shall be DSS35 for floor mounting in stain stainless steel for all types of doors.
If floor mounted door stop is not applicable, DSW wall mounted door stop shall be used.
_______________________________________________________________________________
Door stops shall be approved proprietary types, suitable for the location and the intended
Provide door stops to limit door swing where indicated or required to prevent damage to
adjacent work by uncontrolled door opening.
Verify floor or wall mounting locations before installation where not indicated. Do not mount
door stops to un-reinforced lightweight walls.
M. DOOR COORDINATORS
Door coordinators shall be approved types, suitable for the location and the intended
Where two number door closers are used for double doors, where possible the door closers
should have integral door coordinating system.
N. FASTENERS
Furnish all finish hardware with all necessary screw bolts and other fasteners as needed for
anchoring the hardware in position, for long life.
All fastenings shall harmonise with the hardware with respect to the material and finish.
On lead lined doors no screws shall be used to fix door guard, push plate, kick plate, armour
plate etc. use double-sided adhesive tape to fix the protection plates to prevent damage to
the lead lining.
1.11 FINISHES
FINISH
SSS - Satin Stainless Steel finish
SCP - Satin Chrome Plated
SNP - Satin Nickel Plated
CH - Charcoal (for weather seals etc.)
SB - Satin Brass
Silver - Silver finish
Mill - Aluminium finish.
1.12 KEY CONTROL

Provide an approved proprietary lockable key cabinet with adequate compartments, pockets
or hooks to accommodate all required keys
Each key shall be attached to an approved plastic key tag by a metal split ring, properly
labelled with the final room name or number.
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.13 APPROVED SUPPLIERS
As per approved List of Manufacturers.
PART 3: EXECUTION
1. INSTALLATION
Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders

Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except
as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as
may be otherwise directed by Architect.
Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into
surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal,
storage and reinstallation or application or surface protection with finishing work specified in
the Division –9 sections. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been
completed on the substrate.
Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and Countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. Set thresholds for exterior
doors in fully bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant.
2. PROTECTION
Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the
handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that
the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after
installation.
Contractor shall protect hardware as it is stored on the construction site in a covered and dry
place.
Contractor shall protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase.
3. ADJUST AND CLEAN
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper
operations or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate
freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installations is made more than one month prior to
acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to
acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in
such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and
finish of hardware and doors.
_______________________________________________________________________________
4. HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
BRAND ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT FINISH QTY PHOTO
Door Type: Single Leaf – FR60&FR90 (E-Access) Hardware Set # 1
SS hinge 102x89x3mm grade AISI 304, with

dull brushed concealed washer suitable for
1 No. 4
door up to 160Kg to CE EN1935 Grade 14,
supplied with wooden & metal type screws
Mortise Escape-Lock with Anti-thrust latch for
single-leaf fire-rated doors, Anti-Panic-
Function 'E'
Premium Class, galvanized and blue painted
body, 55mm backset, 72mm center distance
2 SS forend and strike, handed, bushed TENAX No. 1
clamp follower with triple latch-bolt sintered
steel nickel plated, anti-thrust latch and steel
deadbolt nickel plated 20mm double throw,
CE marked and tested to EN12209 / EN179 /
EN1125 & EN1634-1 under CF 5418
Protected single profile cylinder 61mm long,
SKG 3 star compliant to EN1303:2015, Inner
3 Code System with 5 tracks & 13 spring-loaded No. 1
locking mechanism, Nickel finish (Used as a
mechanical override)
Enabled escutcheon, one side access on long
plate with outside cylinder hole furnished with
4 Set 1
SS curved lever by SIEGER / OGRO tested to
EN15684, EN1906 & EN1634-1
Overhead door closer force 1-4 with sliding
arm rail, adjustable valve latching action &
closing speed. Patented eccentric rack &
5 No. 1
pinion design for ease of opening & intelligent
guide rail system, to EN1154 & Fire Tested to
EN1634-1
Automatic Door Bottom seal, Mortise Fixing
with parallel actuation and 20mm drop.
Removable Actuator button to deactivate
6 during construction phase, Silver with flame No. 1
retardant Grey insert, Acoustic tested upto
51B, BSEN1631-1, BS47631.1 & UL10C,
Positive Pressure
Self adhesive Smoke & Acoustic seal with
Flame retardant elastomeric fins and rigid PVC
7 base, flexible hinged base to reduce Bar 2
resistance. Tested to BSEN1634-1 and
acoustically tested upto 51dB
Low profile heavy grade Aluminium threshold
8 40mm wide x 5mm high, Silver Anodized Bar 1
finish, screw or glue fixing. 1000mm long
Intumescent Protection Kits precut to suit
Hinge blades, with self adhesive tape back to
9 Pack 4
ease installation, tested in accordance to
BS476:22, 2mm thick
Lock body & Strike Plate, with self adhesive
10 Pack 1
tape back to ease installation, tested in
accordance to BS476:22, 2mm thick
Auto Drop Seal with self adhesive tape back
11 Pack 1
to ease installation, tested in accordance to
BS476:22, 2mm thick
NO OF DOORS 42
_______________________________________________________________________________
Door Type: Double Leaf – FR60&FR90 (E-Access) Hardware Set # 2

SS hinge 102x89x3mm grade AISI 304, with
dull brushed concealed washer suitable for
1 No. 8
door up to 160Kg to CE EN1935 Grade 14,
supplied with wooden & metal type screws
Mortise Escape-Lock with Anti-thrust
latch for single-leaf fire-rated doors,
Anti-Panic-Function 'E'
Premium Class, galvanized and blue
painted body, 55mm backset, 72mm
center distance SS forend and strike,
2
handed, bushed TENAX clamp No. 1
follower with triple latch-bolt sintered
steel nickel plated, anti-thrust latch
and steel deadbolt nickel plated
20mm double throw, CE marked and
tested to EN12209 / EN179 /
EN1125 & EN1634-1 under CF 5418
Protected single profile cylinder

61mm long, SKG 3 star compliant to
EN1303:2015, Inner Code System
3 with 5 tracks & 13 spring-loaded No. 1
locking mechanism, Nickel finish
(Used as a mechanical override)
Enabled escutcheon, one side

access on long plate with outside
cylinder hole furnished with SS
4 curved lever by SIEGER / OGRO Set 1
tested to EN15684, EN1906 &
EN1634-1
Overhead door closer force 1-4 with

sliding arm rail, adjustable valve
latching action & closing speed.
Patented eccentric rack & pinion
5 No. 1
design for ease of opening &
intelligent guide rail system, to
EN1154 & Fire Tested to EN1634-1
Automatic Door Bottom seal, Mortise

Fixing with parallel actuation and
20mm drop. Removable Actuator
button to deactivate during
6 construction phase, Silver with flame No. 1
retardant Grey insert, Acoustic
tested upto 51B, BSEN1631-1,
BS47631.1 & UL10C, Positive
Pressure
Self adhesive Smoke & Acoustic

seal with Flame retardant
elastomeric fins and rigid PVC base,
7 flexible hinged base to reduce Bar 2
resistance. Tested to BSEN1634-1
and acoustically tested upto 51dB
_______________________________________________________________________________
Low profile heavy grade Aluminium

threshold 40mm wide x 5mm high,
8 Silver Anodized finish, screw or glue Bar 1
fixing. 1000mm long
Intumescent Protection Kits precut to

suit Hinge blades, with self adhesive
9
tape back to ease installation, tested Pack 4
in accordance to BS476:22, 2mm
thick

suit Lock body & Strike Plate, with
10
self adhesive tape back to ease Pack 1
installation, tested in accordance to
BS476:22, 2mm thick

suit Auto Drop Seal with self
11
adhesive tape back to ease Pack 1
BS476:22, 2mm thick
NO OF DOORS 2
Door Type: Single Leaf – FR60&FR90 (Mechanical) Hardware Set # 3
SS hinge 102x89x3mm grade AISI

304, with dull brushed concealed
1
washer suitable for door up to 160Kg No. 4
to CE EN1935 Grade 14, supplied
with wooden & metal type screws
Mortise night latch lock 60mm

backset, 72mm cc distance to
2 En12209 & En1634-1 Class 3 with No. 1
action of the cylinder on the lever
latch
3
SS curved lever on roses Set 1
4
Sign plate engraved as required No. 1

5 No. 1

6 No. 1
construction phase, Silver with flame
_______________________________________________________________________________

Pressure


fixing. 1000mm long

9 tape back to ease installation, tested Pack 4
thick

10
BS476:22, 2mm thick

11
BS476:22, 2mm thick
NO OF DOORS 6


1
to CE EN1935 Grade 14, supplied with
wooden & metal type screws
SS panic push bar 1150mm long to

2 No. 1
EN1125
Mortise anti-panic lock, change-over

3
function B, integrated "plug-in key No. 1
function" SS forend to EN1125 / RH
SS outside U shape lever on rose with

4 cylinder escutcheon Set 1
_______________________________________________________________________________
Protected single profile cylinder 36mm

long, SKG 3 star compliant to
5 EN1303:2015, Inner Code System No. 1
with 5 tracks & 13 spring-loaded
locking mechanism.
6 Split spindle No. 1

7 No. 1
8
Wall reader No. 1
On-line control unit including ethernet

9 adapter No. 1
Surface mounting Single mag lock;

10
545 KG; 12/24 V DC with hall sensor. No. 1
Without L and Z bracket
11 Exit button - Weather proof type IP65 No. 1
12 Break Glass Unit - Green color No. 1

retardant Grey insert, Acoustic tested
upto 51B, BSEN1631-1, BS47631.1 &
UL10C, Positive Pressure
Self adhesive Smoke & Acoustic seal

with Flame retardant elastomeric fins
and rigid PVC base, flexible hinged
14 base to reduce resistance. Tested to Bar 2
BSEN1634-1 and acoustically tested
upto 51dB

fixing. 1000mm long

in accordance to BS476:22, 2mm thick

17 Pack 1
suit Lock body & Strike Plate, with self
_______________________________________________________________________________
adhesive tape back to ease

BS476:22, 2mm thick

suit Auto Drop Seal with self adhesive
in accordance to BS476:22, 2mm thick
NO OF DOORS 26

Door Type: Single Over Leaf – FR60&FR90 (E-Access) Hardware Set # 5

1

handed, bushed TENAX clamp
2 No. 1
EN1125 & EN1634-1 under CF 5418

3
EN1303:2015, Inner Code System No. 1
locking mechanism.
Enabled escutcheon, one side access on long

plate with outside cylinder hole furnished with
4 Set 1
SS curved lever by SIEGER / OGRO tested to
EN15684, EN1906 & EN1634-1
5 No. 1

6 button to deactivate during No. 1
_______________________________________________________________________________

Pressure


fixing. 1000mm long
Intumescent Protection Kits precut

to suit Hinge blades, with self
9
BS476:22, 2mm thick

10
BS476:22, 2mm thick

11
BS476:22, 2mm thick
NO OF DOORS 2
SS hinge 4"x3"x3mm grade AISI

1
Mortise Premium Class deadlock

galvanized and blue painted body,
55mm backset, 72mm center
2 distance SS forend and strike, CE No. 1
marked and tested to EN12209 &
EN1634-1 under CF 5419
Protected double profile cylinder

3
locking mechanism.
_______________________________________________________________________________
SS bended puller 1000mm long x

4 32mm dia. With back-to-back fixation Set 1
5 SS cylinder escutcheon No. 2
6 XESAR wall reader No. 1
XESAR on-line control unit including

7 ethernet adapter No. 1

8 545 KG; 12/24 V DC with hall No. 1
sensor. Without L and Z bracket
Exit button - Weather proof type
9 IP65 No. 1
11 Sign plate engraved as required No. 1

12 No. 1

Pressure

fixing. 1000mm long

thick

16 self adhesive tape back to ease Pack 1
BS476:22, 2mm thick

17 adhesive tape back to ease Pack 1
BS476:22, 2mm thick
_______________________________________________________________________________

NO OF DOORS 10

Door Type: Double Leaf – FR60 (E-Access) Hardware Set # 7

1


3
locking mechanism.

4 Set 2
32mm dia. With back-to-back fixation
5
SS cylinder escutcheon No. 2
6 Wall reader No. 1
On-line control unit including

7 No. 1
ethernet adapter

8
545 KG; 12/24 V DC with hall No. 2

9 No. 1
IP65

_______________________________________________________________________________
11 Sign plate engraved as required No. 2

12 No. 2

13 No. 2
Pressure

14 Bar 1
Silver Anodized finish, screw or glue
fixing. 1000mm long
Intumescent Protection Kits pre-cut

to suit Hinge blades, with self
15
BS476:22, 2mm thick

to suit Lock body & Strike Plate, with
16
self adhesive tape back to ease Packs 1
BS476:22, 2mm thick

to suit Auto Drop Seal with self
17
BS476:22, 2mm thick

and acoustically tested up to 51dB
NO OF DOORS 10
_______________________________________________________________________________

Door Type: Double Leaf – FR60 (Mechanical) Hardware Set # 8
SS hinge 4"x3"x3mm grade AISI 304,

with dull brushed concealed washer
1
suitable for door up to 160Kg to CE No. 8
EN1935 Grade 14, supplied with

55mm backset, 72mm center distance
2 SS forend and strike, CE marked and No. 1
tested to EN12209 & EN1634-1 under
CF 5419

3
locking mechanism.

5
6

7 design for ease of opening & intelligent No. 2
guide rail system, to EN1154 & Fire
Tested to EN1634-1

upto 51B, BSEN1631-1, BS47631.1 &

fixing. 1000mm long
Intumescent Protection Kits pre-cut to

10 tape back to ease installation, tested in Pack 8
_______________________________________________________________________________

11
BS476:22, 2mm thick


upto 51dB
NO OF DOORS 4
Door Type: One and Half Leaf – FR60 (E-Access) Hardware Set # 9
1 washer suitable for door up to 160Kg No. 6

2 handed, bushed TENAX clamp No 1
and steel deadbolt nickel plated 20mm
double throw, CE marked and tested
to EN12209 / EN179 / EN1125 &

3
locking mechanism.
XESAR XVN enabled escutcheon, one

side access on long plate with outside
4
cylinder hole furnished with SS curved Set 1
lever by SIEGER / OGRO tested to
EN15684, EN1906 & EN1634-1
SS flush bolt with simultaneous double

5 action with up and down shooting bolts Set 1
200mm long x 25mm wide for wooden
_______________________________________________________________________________
doors
6 Floor mounted dust spring socket No. 1

Tested to EN1634-1

8
No. 1
upto 51B, BSEN1631-1, BS47631.1 &

upto 51dB

fixing. 1000mm long


12
BS476:22, 1mm thick

13
BS476:22, 1mm thick

NO OF DOORS 1
_______________________________________________________________________________

Door Type: One and Half Leaf – NFR (E-Access) Hardware Set # 10
SS hinge 102x89x3mm grade AISI 304,

1

latch for single-leaf fire-rated doors, Anti-
Panic-Function 'E'
2
handed, bushed TENAX clamp follower No. 1
with triple latch-bolt sintered steel nickel
plated, anti-thrust latch and steel
deadbolt nickel plated 20mm double
throw, CE marked and tested to
EN12209 / EN179 / EN1125 & EN1634-
1 under CF 5418

3
EN1303:2015, Inner Code System with No. 1
5 tracks & 13 spring-loaded locking
mechanism.
XESAR XVN enabled escutcheon, one

side access on long plate with outside
4
cylinder hole furnished with SS curved Set 1
lever by SIEGER / OGRO tested to
EN15684, EN1906 & EN1634-1

action with up and down shooting bolts
5 200mm long x 25mm wide for wooden Set 1
doors
6
Floor mounted dust spring socket No. 1

sliding arm rail, adjustable valve latching
action & closing speed. Patented
eccentric rack & pinion design for ease
7 of opening & intelligent guide rail No. 1
system, to EN1154 & Fire Tested to
EN1634-1

Fixing with parallel actuation and 20mm
8 No. 1
drop. Removable Actuator button to
deactivate during construction phase,
_______________________________________________________________________________
Silver with flame retardant Grey insert,

Acoustic tested upto 51B, BSEN1631-1,
BS47631.1 & UL10C, Positive Pressure

and rigid PVC base, flexible hinged base
9 to reduce resistance. Tested to Bar 2
upto 51dB

threshold 40mm wide x 5mm high, Silver
10 Anodized finish, screw or glue fixing. Bar 1
1000mm long


12
adhesive tape back to ease installation, Pack 1
tested in accordance to BS476:22, 1mm
thick

13
adhesive tape back to ease installation, Pack 1
tested in accordance to BS476:22, 1mm
thick

NO OF DOORS 23
Door Type: Single Leaf – NFR (E-Access) Hardware Set # 11

1

2 No. 1
SS forend and strike, CE marked and
CF 5419
Protected double profile cylinder 72mm
3 No. 1
_______________________________________________________________________________
EN1303:2015, Inner Code System with

mechanism.
SS bended puller 1000mm long x 32mm

4 dia. With back-to-back fixation Set 1
5 SS cylinder escutcheon No. 2
6
Wall reader No. 1

7 adapter No. 1
Surface mounting Single mag lock; 545

8
KG; 12/24 V DC with hall sensor. No. 1
9
Exit button - Weather proof type IP65 No. 1
10
Break Glass Unit - Green color No. 1
11

sliding arm rail, adjustable valve latching
action & closing speed. Patented
eccentric rack & pinion design for ease
12 of opening & intelligent guide rail No. 1
system, to EN1154 & Fire Tested to
EN1634-1
NO OF DOORS 4

Door Type: One and Half Leaf – NFR (E-Access) Hardware Set # 12

1

_______________________________________________________________________________

3
locking mechanism.

5
6
Wall reader No. 1


8

9 IP65 No. 1
10
11

12 design for ease of opening & No. 1
NO OF DOORS 10

Door Type: Single Leaf – NFR (Mechanical) Hardware Set # 13

1
Mortise sashlock Premium Class

distance SS AISI304 forend and
strike, handed, bushed clamp
2 follower with triple latch-bolt sintered No. 1
steel nickel plated with steel latch-
bolt nickel plated and steel deadbolt
nickel plated 20mm double throw,
CE marked and tested to EN12209
& EN1634-1 under CF 5419
_______________________________________________________________________________
SS curved lever by SIEGER on

roses with bathroom thumb turn &
3 emergency release indicator button Set 1
roses
SS floor mounted round door

4 stopper with buffer No. 1
NO OF DOORS 33

Door Type: Single Leaf – NFR (Mechanical) Hardware Set # 14
SS lift-off hinge 4"x3"x3mm grade

AISI 304, with dull brushed
concealed washer suitable for door
1 up to 160Kg to CE EN1935 Grade No. 3
14, supplied with wooden & metal
type screws
Mortise small deadlock prepared for

2
bathroom function 60mm backset, No. 1
00mm cc distance to EN12209
SS bathroom thumb turn &

3
emergency release indicator button Set 1
roses
SS bended puller 350mm long with

4 back fixing kit for wooden doors No. 1
SS push plate 400x100mm with

5
radius corners and 6 counter sunk No. 1
screws holes
SS floor mounted round door

6 stopper with buffer No. 1
NO OF DOORS 1

Door Type: Single Leaf – NFR (E-Access) Hardware Set # 15

1 washer suitable for door up to 160Kg No. 4
_______________________________________________________________________________

2
EN1125 & EN1634-1 under CF 5418

3
locking mechanism.
Enabled escutcheon, one side

access on long plate with outside
cylinder hole furnished with SS
4 curved lever by SIEGER / OGRO Set 1
tested to EN15684, EN1906 &
EN1634-1

NO OF DOORS 9

Door Type: Single Leaf – SR (E-Access) Hardware Set # 16

1

2 No. 1
distance SS forend and strike, CE
_______________________________________________________________________________

3
locking mechanism.

5
6
Wall reader No. 1


8

9 IP65 No. 1
10
11

12 No. 1

13
construction phase, Silver with flame No. 1
Pressure

fixing. 1000mm long

15 seal with Flame retardant Bar 2
_______________________________________________________________________________
flexible hinged base to reduce

NO OF DOORS 6

Door Type: Single Leaf – SR (E-Access) Hardware Set # 17

1

2
to EN12209 / EN179 / EN1125 &

3 EN1303:2015, Inner Code System No. 1
locking mechanism.
Enabled escutcheon, one side access

on long plate with outside cylinder hole
4
furnished with SS curved lever by Set 1
SIEGER / OGRO tested to EN15684,
EN1906 & EN1634-1

Tested to EN1634-1

6 button to deactivate during No. 1
upto 51B, BSEN1631-1, BS47631.1 &
_______________________________________________________________________________

upto 51dB

8 Bar 1
fixing. 1000mm long
NO OF DOORS 83

Door Type: One and Half Leaf – SR (E-Access) Hardware Set # 18

1

2
to EN12209 / EN179 / EN1125 &

3
locking mechanism.

4
EN1906 & EN1634-1

doors
_______________________________________________________________________________
6

Tested to EN1634-1

upto 51B, BSEN1631-1, BS47631.1 &

upto 51dB

fixing. 1000mm long
NO OF DOORS 16

Door Type: One and Half Leaf – SR (E-Access) Hardware Set # 19

1

2 SS forend and strike, CE marked and No. 1
CF 5419
Protected double profile cylinder 72mm

3
mechanism.
_______________________________________________________________________________

5
6
Wall reader No. 1

7 adapter No. 1
Surface mounting Single mag lock; 545

8
KG; 12/24 V DC with hall sensor. No. 2
9
Exit button - Weather proof type IP65 No. 1
10
11

Patented eccentric rack & pinion design
12 No. 2
for ease of opening & intelligent guide
rail system, to EN1154 & Fire Tested to
EN1634-1

Fixing with parallel actuation and 20mm
drop. Removable Actuator button to
deactivate during construction phase,
13 Silver with flame retardant Grey insert, No. 2
Acoustic tested upto 51B, BSEN1631-
1, BS47631.1 & UL10C, Positive
Pressure

14 Bar 1
fixing. 2000mm long
upto 51dB
NO OF DOORS 20
_______________________________________________________________________________
Door Type: Single Leaf – NFR (E-Access) Hardware Set # 20 (Aluminium Door)
SS wall (Frame) to aluminu-glass
narrow profile hinge radius type
1
corners, 20mm axel, weight load up to No. 3
120KG with 3D adjustable metal frame
receiver
Mortise narrow night latch lock 35mm

backset, 92mm cc distance to En12209
2 & En1634-1 Class 3 with action of the No. 1
cylinder on the lever latch

3
mechanism.

4
EN1906 & EN1634-1

Patented eccentric rack & pinion design
5 for ease of opening & intelligent guide No. 1
rail system, to EN1154 & Fire Tested to
EN1634-1
Glass astragal & weather seal by door

6 manufacturer Set 1
NO OF DOORS 7
Door Type: Double Leaf – NFR (E-Access) Hardware Set # 21 (Aluminium Door)

1 corners, 20mm axel, weight load up to No. 6
120KG with 3D adjustable metal frame
receiver
Mortise narrow night latch lock 35mm
backset, 92mm cc distance to
2 En12209 & En1634-1 Class 3 with No. 1
action of the cylinder on the lever latch
_______________________________________________________________________________

3
locking mechanism.

4
EN1906 & EN1634-1

doors
6

Tested to EN1634-1

NO OF DOORS 6
Door Type: Single Leaf – NFR (Auto E-Access) Hardware Set # 22 (Aluminium & Glass Door)
Heavy Duty Automatic heavy duty
1
sliding door operator inteface ready Set 1
with FA & E-Access Control
2
wall reader No. 1

3 adapter No. 1

NO OF DOORS 2
_______________________________________________________________________________
Door Type: Single Leaf – NFR (Mechanicals) Hardware Set # 23 (Aluminium & Glass Door)
1
corners, 20mm axel, weight load up No. 2
to 120KG with 3D adjustable metal
frame receiver
Mortise narrow roller latch lock

2
35mm backset, 92mm cc distance to No. 1
En12209 & En1634-1 Class 3

3
locking mechanism.

5
6

Glass astragal & weather seal by

8 door manufacturer Set 1
NO OF DOORS 4
Door Type: Double Leaf – NFR(Auto Mechanical) Hardware Set # 24 (Aluminium & Glass Door)
Heavy Duty Automatic heavy duty
1
sliding door operator inteface ready Set 2
with FA & E-Access Control
2
Wall reader No. 1
_______________________________________________________________________________
on-line control unit including ethernet

3 adapter No. 1
4
Glass astragal & weather seal Set. 1
s
NO OF DOORS 2
Door Type: Single Leaf FR90 (E-Access) Set # 25 (Aluminium & Glass Door)
1
frame receiver
SS panic push bar 1150mm long to

2 EN1125 No. 1
Mortise anti-panic lock, change-over

3
function B, integrated "plug-in key No. 1
function" SS forend to EN1125 / RH
SS outside U shape lever on rose

4 with cylinder escutcheon Set 1

5 EN1303:2015, Inner Code System No.
1
locking mechanism.
6
Split spindle No. 1

7 No. 1
8 Wall reader No. 1


10
_______________________________________________________________________________

11 No. 1
IP65

13 door manufacturer Set 1
NO OF DOORS 10
Door Type: Double Leaf NFR (Mechanical) Set # 26 (Aluminium & Glass Door)
1
frame receiver
Mortise narrow roller latch lock

2
35mm backset, 92mm cc distance to No. 1
En12209 & En1634-1 Class 3

3
locking mechanism,

5
6


8 door manufacturer Set 1s
NO OF DOORS 4
_______________________________________________________________________________
Door Type: Single Leaf FR60&FR90 Set # 27 (Steels Door)

Two Ball Bearing butt hinges
standard weight , template drill with
Size (Height x Width) 4" x 3" x 3mm .
1
Tested in accordance with the new No. 4
European specification EN 1935 BS
7352 Grade 13. Severe Duty 120 kg
Door Mass, CE Marked, Fire Rated
Mortise SASH LOCK, 55mm

backset, 72mm CTC distance, S.S.
deadbolt, latch, forend and strike
2
plates. According to DIN 18251, Set 1
Meets BS8300:2009 &
EN12209:2003, CE Marked, Fire
Rated
Euro Profile Double Cylinder, 70mm

3
length, 6-pin tumbler, . DIN No. 1
18252/EN 1303
Lever Handle on rose with cylinder

4 escutcheon. Antimicrobial Coating Set 1
Overhead door closer, with

adjustable closing force EN2-EN5,
with Regular Arm, for doors with up
5
to 1250mm leaf widths, Adjustable No. 1
closing and latching speed,
backcheck option, as per EN 1154,
CE Marked.
6
Cover for SDC25915 Door Closer No. 1
Cushion Wall Stop 80mm projection

7
x 54mmDia rose, with replaceable No. 1
black rubber.
NO OF DOORS 17
Door Type: Double Leaf FR60&FR90 Set # 28 (Steels Door)

Two Ball Bearing butt hinges
standard weight , template drill with
Size (Height x Width) 4" x 3" x 3mm .
1
Tested in accordance with the new No. 8
European specification EN 1935 BS
7352 Grade 13. Severe Duty 120 kg
Door Mass, CE Marked, Fire Rated
_______________________________________________________________________________
Mortise SASH LOCK, 55mm

backset, 72mm CTC distance, S.S.
deadbolt, latch, forend and strike
2
plates. According to DIN 18251, Set 1
Meets BS8300:2009 &
EN12209:2003, CE Marked, Fire
Rated

3
length, 6-pin tumbler, . DIN No. 1
18252/EN 1303
Lever Handle on rose with cylinder

4 escutcheon. Antimicrobial Coating Set 1
Overhead door closer, with

adjustable closing force EN2-EN5,
with Regular Arm, for doors with up
5
to 1250mm leaf widths, Adjustable No. 2
closing and latching speed,
backcheck option, as per EN 1154,
CE Marked.
6
Cushion Wall Stop 80mm projection

7
x 54mmDia rose, with replaceable No. 2s
black rubber.
NO OF DOORS 20
Door Type: Single Leaf FR60&FR90 Set # 29 (Steels Door)

Two Ball Bearing butt hinges standard
weight , template drill with Size (Height
x Width) 4" x 3" x 3mm . Tested in
1
accordance with the new European No. 4
specification EN 1935 BS 7352 Grade
13. Severe Duty 120 kg Door Mass,
CE Marked, Fire Rated

2
length, 6-pin tumbler, . DIN 18252/EN No. 1
1303
Modular Fire Rated Rim Exit Device

Single point locking, Complies with BS
3 EN1125, BS EN179 and CE Marked. Set 1
Antimicrobial Coatin
External Handle w/o Cylinder.

4 Antimicrobial Coating. Set 1
_______________________________________________________________________________
Overhead door closer, with adjustable

closing force EN2-EN5, with Regular
Arm, for doors with up to 1250mm leaf
5 widths, Adjustable closing and latching No. 1
speed, backcheck option, as per EN
1154, CE Marked.
6
NO OF DOORS 6
Door Type: Single Leaf NFR Set # 30 (Glass Door)

Door closer is the most powerful floor
spring, capable of controlling the motion
of doors weighing up to 300 kg.
» Classification EN1154: 1996 + A1:
2003
CTSU300SR:
3 8 3/6 1 1 4
» Reversible and suitable for single or
double action doors.
» Continuous size adjustment from
EN3 to EN6.
1 » Two independent valves for closing Set 1
speed and latching speed
adjustments.
» Internal backcheck for door
protection.
» Internal HO system. Two models
available: with HO at 90º
(R0) or 105º (R5).
» Interchangeable spindle.
» Closing speed is controlled from 175º
of opening.
2
Top Patch Fitting Set 1
3
Bottom Patch Fitting Set 1
4
Patch Lock for Euro Profile Cylinder Set 1

5
length, 6-pin tumbler, . DIN 18252/EN Set 1
1303. Keyed Alike
Solid Pull Handle, Back to back Fixing.

6 Antimicrobial Coating Set 1
_______________________________________________________________________________
Cushion Wall Stop 80mm projection x

7
54mmDia rose, with replaceable black Set 1s
rubber.
NO OF DOORS 2
Door Type: Double Leaf NFR Set # 31 (Glass Door)

Door closer is the most powerful floor
spring, capable of controlling the motion
of doors weighing up to 300 kg.
» Classification EN1154: 1996 + A1:
2003
CTSU300SR:
3 8 3/6 1 1 4
» Reversible and suitable for single or
double action doors.
» Continuous size adjustment from
EN3 to EN6.
1 » Two independent valves for closing Set 2
speed and latching speed
adjustments.
» Internal backcheck for door
protection.
» Internal HO system. Two models
available: with HO at 90º
(R0) or 105º (R5).
» Interchangeable spindle.
» Closing speed is controlled from 175º
of opening.
2
Top Patch Fitting Set 2
3
Bottom Patch Fitting Set 2
4
Patch Lock for Euro Profile Cylinder Set 2

5
length, 6-pin tumbler, . DIN 18252/EN Set 2
1303. Keyed Alike
Solid Pull Handle, Back to back Fixing.

6 Antimicrobial Coating Set 2
Cushion Wall Stop 80mm projection x

7
54mmDia rose, with replaceable black Set 2
rubber.
NO OF DOORS 1
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. GLAZING 08800-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1. The tender documents and Addenda thereto form an integral part of this

2. Section 08200: Wood & Plaster Doors
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1. Submit samples of materials if required by Engineer before commencing Work.

Samples shall be clearly labeled with manufacturer's name and type.
1. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: Conform to the requirements of

the latest British Standards.
2. All glazing work shall be installed by skilled workmen experienced in this work.
3. Glass shall be manufactured by a reputable international company specializing in

the manufacture of high quality glass including all the types required for glazing in
aluminum work, wood and steel. Provide all glazing requirements of the project as
and when required.
4. All glass shall be cut, coatings shall be applied, and sealed units constructed at the
shop.
1.5. MAINTENANCE DATA AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1. Upon completion of installation, supply instructions covering reglazing, adjustments

and other relevant maintenance data.
1.6. WARRANTY
1. Warrant the Work of this section against defects in materials and workmanship
in accordance with the General Conditions but for a period of five years, (except
as indicated below) and agree to promptly make good defects which become
evident during the warranty period without cost to the Client. Defects shall
include, but not be limited to, leaking, deformation of members, breakage of
glass caused by frame distortions and thermal forces, discoloration of
finishes and sealant.
2. Warrant the reflective coating for a period of ten years against peeling, crazing, or
other deterioration.
______________________________________________________________________________
3. Warrant the insulating glass units for a period of ten years against seal failure,
chemical fogging, or any other form of obscuration within the cavity of the unit.
1.7. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS OF GLASS AND GLAZING

SYSTEMS
1. The physical properties of the various types of glass represent the minimum
standards required for the project, but Contractors may submit alternatives which
possess properties which are similar (including but not limited to color,
performance, thickness, coatings, etc.) but not less than those indicated herein. All
such alternatives must be submitted and approved at the time of submitting the
tenders.
2. The sound and thermal insulation properties of glazing are of prime importance.
Certain sound reduction must be achieved which will provide a sound level of 34 db
inside.
3. Sound insulation values shall be measured in accordance with B.S. 2750
Measurement of Sound Insulation in Buildings and of Building elements and
methods of sound insulation and noise reduction shall comply with the requirements
of B.S. 8233.
4. Maximum permissible deflection of any member shall not exceed 1/200 of distance
between fixing points.
5. Fixing of glass panes, panels, etc. shall be carried out in accordance with B.S. 6262.
The glazing recommendations of the double glazing manufacturers shall be noted. If
the window construction plant is not carrying out the glazing, it shall immediately on
receipt of order, agree with the glazing company the exact type and procedure for
glazing before ordering the glass. Glazing company shall be informed about the type
of system chosen and the application.
6. Edge Clearance: The Contractor must check that all surrounds, rebates and other
surfaces are dimensionally true without distortion and fit for glazing before
measuring.
7. Tinted and Coated Glass: Check edge conditions of all units after they are fixed. All
edges which are shelled, dented or otherwise damaged shall be rejected. Full
specified clearance must be allowed in pane sizes. No edge nipping will be
permitted.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
A. GROUND FLOOR :
The Glass to be 34mm hermetically sealed structural silicone double glazed unit of
the following make up:
Outer lite : 8mm EmiCool SuperVision 70/40 on Clear (#2) treated with
Nano coating self-cleaning (#1) fully tempered or
equal approval.
Space : 20 mm Argon filling with Gas Retention Silicon
Inner lite : 6mm EFG Clear Glass Fully Tempered with HST
______________________________________________________________________________
The Optical and thermal data for the above item including the frames should
be as follows:
Visible Light Transmittance : 65% Visible Light Reflectance-In : 12%
Visible Light Reflectance-Out : 14% Center of the Glass U-value: 1.0 W/m²/k
Solar Energy Transmittance : 30% SHGC : 0.35
CURTAIN WALLS AND WINDOWS:
VISION GLASS:
The glass to be hermetically sealed structural silicone double glazed unit of the
following make up:
The Glass to be 34mm hermetically sealed structural silicone double glazed unit of
Outer lite : 8mm EmiCool Solite Oceana Bluegreen (#2) treated with
Nano-coating self-cleaning (#1) Heat Strengthened
Space : 20 mm Argon filling with Gas Retention silicon
Inner lite : 6mm EFG Clear Glass Fully Tempered with HST
The Optical and thermal data for the above item including the frames should be as
follows:
Visible Light Transmittance : 42% Visible Light Reflectance-In : 16%
Visible Light Reflectance-Out : 19% Center of the Glass U-value: 1.0 W/m²/k
Solar Energy Transmittance : 21% SHGC : 0.25
Vision Glass with Ceramic Design:

The glass to be 34mm hermetically sealed structural silicone double glazed unit of
Nano coating self-cleaning (#1) Heat Strengthened and
Ceramic Design applied on Surface (#2) before the coating
Space : 20 mm Argon filling with Gas retention silicon
Inner lite : 6mm EFG Clear Glass Fully Tempered
SPANDREL:
The glass to be 32mm hermetically sealed structural silicone double glazed unit of
Nano coating self cleaning (#1) Heat Strengthened
or equal approval.
Space : 20 mm Argon filling with Gas retention silicon
Inner lite : 6mm EFG Clear Glass Fully Tempered
Back Pane : Powder coated aluminum sheet as per recommendation of curtain

______________________________________________________________________________
wall Specialist, if required (colour, thickness, fixing) and as

approved by the Architect.
Insulation : 50mm thick rigid rockwool of density 50kg/m³
B. LIFT LOBBY ENTRANCES:
FOR HINGED DOORS:
FRG 90: 44mm pryrostop 90-100 integrity and insulation multilaminated with
intumescent interlayer fire rated glass for 90 minutes (average temperature on non
fire side not to exceed 140ºC above ambient temperature, as per BS 476- Part 22)
and meet NFPA requirements of passing hose stream test to be used with integrity
and insulation steel frames similar to forster fuego light steel el 90 or equal
approved system (finish up to the architects approval)
The above fire rated glass incorporates optiwhite low iron glass to achieve
maximum transparency (visible light transmittance: 76%) and has sound
perfotmance of 42 dB.
Independent fire test evidence form independent approved testing laboratory for the
full system confirming the specified rating duration and integrity and insulation
classification.
FOR FIXED SCREENS:
FRG 120: 52mm pryrostop 120-104 integrity and insulation multilaminated with
intumescent interlayer fire rated glass for 120 minutes (average temperature on non
fire side not exceed 140ºC above ambient temperature, as per BS 476- part 22) and
meet NFPA requirements of passing hose stream test to be used with integrity and
insulation steel frames similar to forster fuego classic steel ei 120 or equal approved
system (finish up to the architects approval)
The above fire rated glass incorporates optiwhite low iron glass to achieve
maximum transparency (visible light transmittance: 78% ) and has sound
performance STC of 42 dB.
Independent fire test evidence form independent approved testing laboratory for the
full system confirming the specified rating duration and integrity and insulation
classification.
PARTICULAR NOTES:
1. All mentioned glass thickness & strength are minimum and indicative only. The
final glass thickness and strength will be determined based on glass strength
analysis and system structural calculation by the curtain wall fabricated and as
approved by architect.
2. Approved glass suppliers:
a. Emirates Glass. U.A.E.
______________________________________________________________________________
b. Saudi American Glass. K.S.A.

c. Virakon U.S.A
3. Glass shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C1036, quality Q3 unless

otherwise specified. Heat treated glass shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM C1048. Tempered glass shall also conform to ANSI Z97.1-984. All heat
treating shall be by the horizontal process, and processed in such a manner as
installed on the building.
4. Glass should be processed in glass processor with experience more than 15
years and hold IGMA certificate
5. Single source of the glass where the raw glass, coating and double glazing
should happen in the same manufacture to secure the quality of the glass.
6. Insulating glass shall comply to the following Standards:
(1) E773 Test method for seal durability of sealed insulating glass units.
(2) E774 Specification for seal insulating glass units.
(3) E546 Test Method for frost point of sealed insulating glass units.
(4) E576 Test Method for dew/frost of sealed insulating glass units vertical
position.
7. Laminated glass shall comply to ASTM C1172
8. Glass should have 10 years warranty starting from the delivery date of the glass.
Warranty of the coated glass and the warranty of the double glazed unit should
be given from one single source. Warranty on the laminated glass, coating and
double glazed unit should be issued by the same manufacture.
9. Ceramic frit Design should not be applied on any low-e glass, it must be applied
on the glass before ceramic frit and then followed by the coating.
10. All the fully tempered glass to be Heat Soak Tested with Glass processor that
have over 20 years’ experience in doing that.
2.2 FIRE RATED GLASS
1. General Guidance
All glazing beads, glazing tapes, strips or channel, sealants and setting blocks should be
used as specified in the appropriate approval document for the particular system being
used.
2. Glazing
The glazing pressure on the glass edges should be low and glazing tapes should be non-
combustible and flexible.
Seal between glass and frame should be fully continuous without breaks, along the full
edge of the glass and frame.
Any direct contract between the glass and the frame material, or between glass and glass,
is not allowed under any circumstances.
Glass glaze should be clear multi0laminated fire-resistant glasses, composed of alternate
sheets of annealed glass and a special glassy interlayer which intumesces on expose to
fire. The glass pane facing the fire cracks and the first interlayer foams evenly to provide a
uniform barrier against fire, hot gases and heat. In products with more than one interlayer,
the interlayers intumesce progressively in turn as heat travels gradually through the
structure. The whole laminate bonds together to give a resilient, tough and opaque shield
against fire, hot gases and heat.
______________________________________________________________________________
Fire-resistant laminates, which differ in certain respects from other float glasses and
laminates, that attention needs to be given to certain basic guidelines in their handling and
use.
3. Edge Protection Tape

The edge tape is an integral part of the product as supplied. Insulating glass units also have
a second tape for further protection during handling.
4. Framing
Must only be used as part of an approved fire-resistant system, that is the glass in a
purpose-designed frame together with the associated glazing materials and fixings to the
surrounding structure. The system as a whole has to be approved as an integral fire-
resistant assembly, and the frame must be of the same equivalent fire rating as the glass,
as appropriate.
For insulating glass units the designed deflection of the unit in its frame under the maximum
potential design load should be no more than the span of the glass unit in mm divided by
300 or 8 mm, whichever of these two numbers is the lower.
2.3 SWITCHABLE PRIVACY GLASS
2.3.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
and specified.
2. Erection of the aluminum work and specialty glass system and component parts shall
be performed by workmen specially trained and experienced in this type of work.
Have a senior, qualified representative at the job to direct the various stages of
operations at all times.
these specifications to ensure that the work is complete. If errors, omissions
or inconsistencies are discovered, he shall so notify the Engineer in writing before
4. Switchable Privacy Glass panels comply with FGMA (Flat Glass Marketing
Association) and / or IGMA (Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association) ASTM
International (American Society for Testing and Materials) E90-83 (sound
transmission class), E90-87 (analysis)
2.3.2 PRODUCT HANDLING
Follow strict glass handling and storage recommendations of referenced standards, including
any special instructions from the specialty glass manufacturer.
2.3.3 WARRANTIES
A. Contractor shall warrant for one year the satisfactory performance of the window installation
which includes window, glass glazing, anchorage, and electrical work as detailed by the
Specifications and approved Shop Drawing.
B. The manufacturer of laminated glass assembly, single or double glazed, shall provide a 10-
year warranty against electrical failure and/or delamination in material and workmanship of
______________________________________________________________________________
the switchable privacy glass panel. The manufacturer may select either to replace the
panels at its cost or to refund the Client.
2.4.1 MATERIALS
A. Switchable Privacy Glass, Laminate Glass with two layers of transparent conductive films
sandwiched with PDLC material. The film is then laminated between two pieces of glass.
When electricity is applied to the film the liquid crystals line up and the window is clear.
When the power is turned off, the liquid crystals return to their normal scattering positions
and turn the glass from clear to a cloudy white translucent state. “Translucent Design and
Color to be as per Engineer and Client Satisfaction”
B. UPS, Back Up Power System “Industrial Type” for minimum 8 hours.
MANUFACTURING
A. The liquid crystal privacy film is sandwiched between the glass makeup in a way similar
to the construction of laminated glass. The outside skins are made up of glass (normally
5 or 6 mm annealed glass) each side, then a PVB interlayer is inserted on each side to
trap and hold the liquid crystal privacy film.
B. The liquid crystal privacy film is made up of electrically conductive coatings, a polymer
matrix and liquid crystals. This film has electrical wiring to be connected to a transformer
to supply power - UPS for the "on" (clear state) mode.
C. Laminate Glass 11 mm; Provide specialty clear and / or tinted consisting of an outer face
and an inner face of q5 float glass laminated under heat and pressure to a liquid crystal
film. All glass shall comply with ASTM C-1036-06. Shape and / or Size as per
Engineerural drawings or specified herein.
D. Switching Time; Approx. 100 milliseconds at room normal temperature.
E. Special Electrical Conditions
1. For all fixed panel installation, a separate Power Supply shall be provided for each 60
square feet or fraction thereof. Power source of 110 VAC, 60 Hz electricity must be
supplied from a GFI circuit. The power supply should be connected to an accessible
standard double junction box connected to ground continuity.
2. For all swing Panel installations, the power supply should be located near the hinge
side of door/window jamb and all installation is to conform to manufacturer’s instructions
PART 2.4.2 - EXECUTION
1.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
1. The contractor must examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section
will be performed. Correct conditions are detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of this work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
______________________________________________________________________________
2. After preparation of the glazing system, clean glazing channels, stops and rabbets to
receive the glazing materials, making free from obstructions and deleterious substances
which might impair the work.
3. Remove protective coating which might fall in adhesion or interfere with bond of
sealants.
2.4.3 INSTALLATION
A. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation.
1. Do not install items which are improperly sized, have damaged edges, or are
scratched, abraded, or deficient in any other manner.
2. Do not remove labels that were provided by the glass supplier from the glass until so
3. Adhere to all Manufacturer’s installation instructions and installation drawings.
B. Locate sill setting blocks of standard width and thickness at quarter points of all glass
lights unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer or supplier.
1. Use blocks of proper durometer, size and thickness to support the glass in
accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations.
2. Glass lap and edge clearances must be provided according to pertinent codes and
standards of manufacturers.
C. Set glass in a manner which produces the greatest possible degree of uniformity in
appearance.
1. Installations of the glass in dynamic frames such as operable windows or sliding doors
must meet Engine rural specifications.
2. Glazing to the exterior and wet interior conditions must be wet-sealed and impervious
to moisture with provisions to allow for weeping of condensation that may infiltrate the
system.
3. Glazier has to place electrical connections properly to allow access by an electrician.
4. Electrical connections must exit at the head condition of any framing system using
Manufacturer’s Switchable Privacy Glass panels in wet environment applications.
D. Cut and seal the joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with the manufacturers'
recommendations, provide watertight and airtight seal at corners and other locations where
joints are required.
______________________________________________________________________________
3.3 PROTECTION
Protect glass from breakage after installation by promptly installing streamers of ribbons,
suitably attached to the framing and held free from the glass. Do not apply warning
markings, streamers, ribbons, or other items directly to the glass except as specifically
Note: Windblown objects, welding sparks, or other material applied to the glass surface
during construction may cause irreversible damage.
3.4 CLEANING
Cleaning of the glass during the subsequent weathering period is necessary. Abrasive
cleaners should never be used, particularly when the surface to be cleaned has a reflective
coating. Clean the Panels with a mild soap or very weak acid (vinegar) applied with a soft,
clean, grit-free cloth.
The glass and framing should be rinsed immediately with water and the excess should be
squeezed away from the glass, taking care not to contact the glass with any metal parts.
The framing should be wiped dry.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. ALUMINUM - FRAMING, DOORS AND WINDOWS 08900-1
________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1. Section 03300: Concrete

2. Section 07500: Roofing
3. Section 07900: Sealants
4. Section 08800: Glass and glazing
5. Section 09200: Plaster
and specified.
2. Erection of the aluminum work and curtain wall system and component parts shall
be performed by workmen specially trained and experienced in this type of work.
Have a senior, qualified representative at the job to direct the various stages of
operations at all times.
3. Conform to the requirements of the local authorities, latest BSI and ASTM
standards.
these specifications to ensure that the work is complete. If errors, omissions or
inconsistencies are discovered, he shall so notify the Engineer in writing before
5. Only original profiles, fittings and accessories may be used for fabrication. The fittings
shall be selected by the fabricating plant to withstand anticipated stresses.
1.4. EXAMINATION
1. Make thorough examination of drawings and details, check anchorage, structural

deflections, size and shape of glass, system of sealing, interfacing with work of other
sections and other factors influencing design and performance of the glazing system,
and be fully cognizant of requirements.
1.5. EQUIPMENT
1. Provide safe and adequate equipment on the site to execute the work, tools, plant,
safety protection, and other equipment required for the completion of the work.
1.6. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1. Design aluminum work and glazing in strict accordance with the requirements
of the applicable Building Code requirements and applicable BSI and
ASTM standards specified.
________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Design components to size and profiles indicated, reinforcement flange and

web thickness of aluminum shall be as required for adequate rigidity and
strength. The unit when tested at a minimum pressure of 35 P.S.F. in a
positive (inward) direction in accordance with the method specified in ASTM
E330 shall show no permanent deformation of any member nor any glass
breakage. Maximum permissible deflection of any member shall not exceed
1/200 of distance between fixing points. Frames shall be thermally broken
extruded sections.
3. The method of assembly, reinforcing and anchorage of the aluminum work

and glazing as indicated on the drawings is schematic and shows general
intent only. Location and methods of providing same shall be this contractor's
responsibility, who shall design the assembly, reinforcing and anchorage to
suit each specific condition in an acceptable manner.
4. All component parts shall be fastened, connected or anchored together to

transmit wind loading and other stresses to the system or anchors. Provide
anchors which transmit wind loading to the anchorage system without
causing local over-stressing and distortion of the aluminum work at point of
attachment of anchor or to the anchor itself. Additionally, anchors shall
transmit uniformly distributed loads through structure.
5. All fastenings shall be concealed.
6. Provide and/or make allowances for free and noiseless vertical and horizontal
thermal movement, due to the contraction and expansion of any or all
component arts, for an ambient temperature range of from -25·C to +40·C.
Buckling, opening of joints, glass breakage, undue stress on fasteners,
failure of sealants or any other detrimental effects due to the thermal movement
of any or all component parts will not be permitted. Fabrication, assembly
and erection procedures shall take into account the ambient temperature range
at the time of the respective operation.
7. The design and installation of the aluminum work, including the glass, shall
accommodate all inherent building structure movements, expansion, creep and
deflections and the fabrication and installation tolerances of all related work not
included in this section, without the loss of, or detrimental effect to, the
performance requirements herein specified.
8. There shall be no water infiltration into the building through the aluminum work and
glazing under the design wind loads.
1.7. DESIGN CRITERIA

1. Design components to sizes and profiles indicated having reinforcement, flange and
web thicknesses as required for adequate rigidity and strength to limit deflection to
L/200 maximum under positive and negative peak wind design gust pressures.
Design wind load shall be calculated by reference to B.P. 3: Chapter V: Part 2.
The maximum wind speed to be allowed for in calculations is 150 km/hr.
2. If, with a window casement open, a transom can be subjected to load by persons
leaning out, the necessary additional vertical load shall be taken into account.
3. For visual reasons, deflection of glass shall be limited to L/1000.
________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Make allowance in the design for localized zones where increased wind loads and
reactions will occur due to the building location and configuration.
5. Resultant effects of structural elements on the indoor climate shall be taken into
account, particularly in regard to the type and arrangement of the air conditioning at
exterior wall surfaces and the solar radiation involved.
6. No water infiltration when subjected to water spray at rate of 23 liters per .093 m2
per hour maintained for 15 minutes with static pressure difference across the glass
of 1.2 kPa.
7. Air infiltration and exfiltration of 0.57 L/min/m2 for window areas and 0.57
L/min/m2 for spandrel and soffit areas, when subjected to static pressure of
0.075 kPa. Permissible air leakage shall not be cumulative between
windows, spandrels and soffits.
8. Difference in temperature between central and edge portions of any inner pane of
sealed units shall be less than the maximum permissible difference recommended
by the manufacturer of sealed glass units.
9. All sizes such as oversize, cutting sizes, glass sizes shall be established on the sole
responsibility of the fabricator, maintaining the design intent to the approval of the
Engineer. In all cases involving abnormal stresses, it is necessary to document
details, attachments, etc. in the form of drawings, and to carry out structural
calculations for stressed profiles and anchors and to have these checked and
approved by Professional Engineer licensed to work in place of work.
10. SYSTEM DRAINAGE: Provide complete system drainage for all water which has
penetrated.
11. All components must sustain the forces acting on them and be capable of
transmitting them to the load bearing part of the building structure, complying with
the requirements of B.S. 8200 and B.S. C.P. 118.
1.10. SUBMITTALS
1. Furnish complete shop and erection drawings required for the work of this section to
the Engineer for review prior to fabrication. Submit shop drawings in accordance
with General Conditions.
2. Co-ordinate shop drawings for work of this section with those for other sections to
ensure correct interface details required to provide a water-tight installation.
3. No work shall be fabricated until the shop drawings and all other related submittals,
documentation, certifications and samples as required by the specifications, have
been reviewed by the Engineer.
4. Shop drawings shall incorporate plans, elevations, sections and details for all work in
this section. The details shall be at full scale as far as practical and shall show and
specify the construction of all parts of the work including metal and glass thicknesses,
jointing details, field connections, anchoring, fastening, types and finishes; areas to be
sealed, sealing methods and sealant materials; gaskets; glazing methods; direction
and magnitude of thermal expansion; type of construction including joinery, fasteners
and welds and all other pertinent information.
________________________________________________________________________________________
5. All anchorage assemblies and components; the fabrication and erection tolerances
for the work in this section and the adjoining related work. Show connection details
of all work which is connected to or assimilated into the system.
6. Furnish prototype unit consisting of the sections necessary to make the typical
intersection of the split vertical and split horizontal mullion condition. Unit shall be
approximately 460 mm X 460 mm and be complete with glazing, gaskets, thermal
barriers, tapes and sealants.
7. On completion of work of this section, supply maintenance and glazing instructions

for insertion in maintenance manual.
8. The profile dimensions of frame, casement, transom and mullion shall be determined
in accordance with the structural analysis tables for profiles and fittings and in
accordance with the specifications and drawings. Cavity profiles shall be used in all
cases for inner and outer frames.
9. SAMPLES: Submit to Engineer for approval before fabrication of work, samples of all
materials, components and finishes to be used in the Work and typical frame jointing
method.
1.11. MOCK-UP
1. Supply and install to a location directed by the Engineer a mock-up panel, with
glazing, for approval prior to final production, consisting of one window units.
2. When approved by the Engineer the mock-up panel may remain as part of the
building system and become the standard by which the Work of this section is
judged.
1.12. WARRANTY
1. Warrant Work of this section against defects in materials and workmanship in
accordance with the General Conditions but for an extended period of five (5) years
and agree to promptly make good defects which become evident during warranty
period without cost to the Client. Defects shall include but not be limited to, leaking,
deformation of members, loss of seal in sealed glass units, frame distortions and
thermal forces, discoloration of finishes and failure of sealants.
1.13. STORAGE, DELIVERY, HANDLING & PROTECTION
1. Before shipment, coat exposed portions of aluminum with SPV blue colored film
coating.
2. Co-ordinate deliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange ahead for
strategic off the ground, under cover storage locations.
3. Provide safe and adequate equipment on the site to execute the work, scaffolding,
staging, safety protection equipment, tools, plant and other equipment required for
the completion of the work.
4. Protect the Work of other trades from soiling and damage during the execution of the
Work.
________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
1. ALUMINUM WINDOW: Shall be suitable for glazing with insulated sealed glass units.
The general size and profile of the window units shall be as indicated on the
drawings.
2. OPERABLE WINDOWS: All operable windows shall be hinged as indicated on

drawings.
3. EXTRUDED SHAPES: Aluminum 6063 (HEQ TF) with a minimum yield of 139
MPa/25mm2 anodizing quality, free from defects impairing appearance, strength
and durability. Stress induced in aluminum framing members and their fixings shall
not exceed the values in CP 118.
1. Aluminum extrusions shall be in accordance with B.S. 8200

and B.S. C.P. 118.
4. STEEL SECTIONS: BS 5950. All structural steelwork shall comply with the
requirements of the National Structural Steelwork Specification for building
Construction, publication No. 1/89 March 1989. All steel shall be hot dipped
galvanized. Welds shall be treated with "galvafroid" zinc rich paint.
5. PREFINISHED ALUMINUM SHEET: BS 1470. Aluminum sheet to match finish of

extrusions. Minimum 2.4 mm thick.
6. SETTING BLOCKS: Neoprene ASTM C542-69, 75 to 85 durometer A.
7. POLYETHYLENE ROPE: Closed cell foamed polyethylene, 50% larger than joint.
8. SEALANT: Silicone rubber type, conforming to BS 5889.
9. PAINT: Bituminous, conforming to BS 6949.
10. GLASS AND GLAZING: Refer to Section 08800.
11. AIR SEAL PANELS: Fabricated from zinc coated sheet steel having Z275 coating
class, 1.0 mm thick.
12. INSULATION: Rigid fiberglass insulation. Fiberglass - Corning AF 530 or approved

alternate, with black facing.
13. FLEXIBLE FLASHING: EPDM sheet, 1.6 mm thick.
14. SCREWS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, RIVETS AND OTHER FASTENING

DEVICES: Stainless steel with a chromium content of not less than 12%.
15. DOORS:
1. Glazed doors as per drawings. Fastening shall be as inconspicuous as

possible, and to Engineer's approval.
________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Hardware shall be offset pivot hinges and closers, provide a ms lock c/w
thumb turn. Provide aluminum thresholds and complete (4 sides)
weather stripping.
16. ALUMINUM FINISH: Surface treatment of aluminum components shall be carried

out in accordance with B.S. 1615 and B.S. 3987. Quality of film thickness and
subsequent densification shall be in accordance with B.S 1615. The surface with
respect to gloss, texture, hue and its uniformity and the necessary surface treatment
E6 shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All interior and exterior components
to be powder coated, to match color from standard color chart by 'Jotun Corro -
Coat', to later selection.
17. POWDER COATINGS: All components shall be chemically treated with a conversion
coating, and shall include a zinc chromate coat (for aluminum). The conversion coating
shall conform with ASTM D 1750 - 67, Method 7 (Amorphous Chromium Phosphate) or
method. Factory apply the polyester powder coat by electrostatic spraying to a dry film
thickness of 60 - 80 microns. As BS 6469, BS6497.
1. Composition: Polyester powder coating shall consist of a polyester resin, a

curing agent and the appropriate light and heat resistance pigments.
2. Processing: Electrostatic spraying of the powder, on a metallic substrate
subjected to heat, melts the powder to form a continuous film and a fully
cured coating.
3. Application: Due to outstanding weather resistance, PES54 grades used shall
be especially suited for outdoor use. Where applicable, grades used for
indoor use shall be suitable for exposure to ultra violet light.
4. Range: Color shall be selected from the full range of the shades on the
RAL color card. Sheen shall be selected by Engineer from high gloss (G)
with approximately 80-100% gloss and satin gloss (S) with approximately 60-
80% gloss.
5. Material: Fine powder with grain size less than 100 microns, with a solid
content of 100%.
6. SPECIFICATIONS
Supply form: Fine powder, grain size less than 100 microns
Solid content: 100
Specific Weight: 1.3 – 1.6 kg./liter
Shelf Life: At least 6 months in dry air and at temperature not exceeding 25%.
7. EQUIPMENT
IG polyester powder coatings PES 54 grades can be sprayed with any

commercial powder spraying equipment.
8. SUBSTRATE PRE-TREATMENT:
IG polyester powder coating PES 54 grades adhere direc. If applied for indoor
use, an iron phosphating on iron, zinc and aluminum or cleaning with trior
perchlorethylene. For outdoor use, a careful pre-treatment is essential.
Multigrade chromating is recommended on non-ferrous metal e.g aluminum,
________________________________________________________________________________________
magnesium zinc and the alloys thereof. Yellow – green – or transparent –

chromating by dipping or spraying may be applied.
9. CONTROL PROGRAMME:
Testing for water leakage should be done
Aluminum Sliding Doors
Supply and installation of Aluminum sliding doors, with 8mm tempered clear glass
Size 4.00 X 2.50 meters (wxh) Quantity 10 Nos.
Size 6.00 X 2.50 meters (wxh) Quantity 2 Nos.
Sliding Door Operator
Option 1: Corsa Operator manufacture by CAME S.P.A. Italy
Sliding door drive unit covering to be hinged up aluminum guide way profile. Drive unit with
direct current motor mains connection with plug 220 V, 50 Hz.
Motor max current : 6A.

Nominal current : (230V) 0.6A
Power Automation : 70 W
Drive System : HTD 8M toothed belt
Max force exerted : 5Kg.
Opening speed : 57 cm/sec. Double doors
: 102 cm/sec. Double doors
Opening Tempera : from -20 to +70c
PIR sensor for opening
Safety photocells
Aluminum Swing door
Aluminum Swing Door (1.80 x 2.50) (WxH) with 8mm tempered glass.
Operator
FLY-PB 2100 manufacture by CAME Italy

Max. weight 200 Kg. Per leaf, gear motor runs at 24V
Automatic closure, Obstacle detection stop the door movement.
Adjustment of the speeds of opening, closing and slowing down during closing.
Power supply 230/24 V.A.C.

Frequency 50/60 Hz.
Nominal input 0.6 A
Motor power 24 V.D.C.
Max. motor input 6A
Absorbed input Automation 276 W
Accessories 60 W
Max. torque 40 Nxm
Opening Time from 2 to 5 second
________________________________________________________________________________________
Closing Time from 1 to 6 second

Operation intermittence Continuous duty
Operating temperature from -20 to 70 C
Operated Steel Sliding Gate
Supply, installation of operated Steel Sliding Gates as per the specification given below
Steel Gates (5.00 x 3.00) (WxH) 2 Nos.
Sliding Gate Motor BY -3500
Model 'BY -3500T' from M/s CAME S.P.A., Italy
High performance, rack and pinion type, industrial/ heavy duty sliding gate motor.
A three phase, self-locking electro-mechanical gear motor.
In case of power failure, the locking lever can be released by key manual release system/
Motor pinion
Limit stops.
Operating Limit : Gate weight up to 3500 kg.

Operation : By push button
Technical Data:
Duty cycle : 50%
Speed : 10.5 m/min.
Nominal current : 2A
Power : 0.75 Kw
Power supply : 380/220 V
Reduction ratio : 1/30
Torque : 135 N.m
Maximum thrust : 3500 (adjustable)
Weight : 74 Kg.
2.2. FABRICATION
1. Measurements submitted and reviewed during shop drawing review may change
due to site conditions. It is this Subcontractors responsibility to coordinate and
verify, by measurement at the job site, all dimensions affecting the Work.
2. Workmanship shall be the best modern shop and field practice known to
recognized manufacturers specializing in this work. Joints and intersecting
members shall be accurately fitted to true planes, adequately and securely
fastened and made completely watertight. Cuts shall be machined and fitted to
form permanent hairline joints. Component fastenings shall be concealed of
adequate strength, fabricated from stainless steel or shall be concealed fusion
welds.
3. Fabricate units from extrusions of profile and size indicated having wall thickness
required by design criteria (minimum 3 mm thick) and complete with rabbets,
interlocks, miscellaneous angles, trim and filler sections, as required to interface
with work of other contracts.
________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Connecting mullions shall be of special formed extruded aluminum sections

designed to provide a functional split without having a seam joint on the exterior
weathered face of the mullion. The design of the mullion shall provide and
maintain positive air and vapor seals against infiltration and exfiltration, prevent
water entry into the system, permit necessary movement required by the
expansion and contraction contraction of the system and accommodate the
structural creep and deflections of the building structure.
5. The windows shall be accurately sized to suit the window openings.
6. Fabricate window sills from refinished sheet aluminum in color and finish to
match adjacent window framing. Accurately construct sills with mitered corners.
Construction of sills shall be to Engineer's approval. All fastenings shall be
concealed and stainless steel.
7. Form accurate extrusions with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles free
from any defects.
8. Joints between horizontal and vertical mullions shall be accurately cut and fitted.
Horizontal and vertical mullions shall be in true plane with interior and exterior
faces in line.
9. Frame members shall be assembled together by means of sealed mechanical
joints produced by fitting formed butyl gaskets of correct profile between the
members and secured by means of self-tapping screws through the wall of one
member into specially formed grooves of the adjoining member. Screws shall
be driven home with gauged force to ensure proper uniform compression of
sealing gaskets and permanent securement of the components in place.
10. Glazing shall be from the exterior.
11. Framing members shall have integrally formed keyed slots to receive and retain
performed gaskets, seals and thermal separators.
12. Pressure plates shall be designed with integrally formed keyed slots to receive seals
and they shall be of thickness necessary to provide permanent, uniform, sealing
pressures for the glazing units and spandrels, without deformation.
13. Vapour air seal panels of spandrel areas shall be fabricated from galvanized steel
formed and braced as required to resist specified forces and maintain the required
convector plenum. Tack weld impaling pins to panels for securement of insulation
by means of speed clips.
14. Fabricate all devices required for erection and adequate anchorage and attachment,
including but not limited to supplementary steel framing, brackets, inserts, clip angles,
anchors, straps, shims, stud bolts, nuts and washers. Attachments shall be designed
to provide for accurate adjustment and to compensate for structure tolerances and
permit unrestricted expansion and contraction of the framing members.
15. Provide inconspicuous, baffled weep holes to properly drain aluminum system
cavities to exterior.
16. Component fastenings, concealed throughout, of adequate strength, should be
stainless steel.
________________________________________________________________________________________
COMPOSITE ALUMINUM CLADDING:
1. PANEL FABRICATION
Composition: The Aluminum composite cladding shall have two sheets of aluminum,
sandwiching a core of extruded thermo plastic, formed in a continuous process, with no glues
(or) adhesives between dissimilar materials. The materials shall be “alucubond”.
2. GENERAL SPECIFICATION
Aluminum composite panels shall have thick aluminum on both the sides (PERALUMAN
100). The front shall be side stove lacquered with gloss approximately 30-35% according to
Gardner, with protective peel-off foil. The reverse side shall be mill finished.
3. PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
Overall panel thickness : 4mm

a. Rigidity of pane : 0.24 KN Sq. M/M
b. Section modulus : 1.57 Cub. M/M
c. Weight of panels : 5.5 Kg./Sq.M
d. Average airborne sound
Transmission loss : 25 dB
(for frequency range of 100-3200 Hz)
e. Linear thermal expansion : 2.4 MM/M/100 ºK
f. Temperature resistance : From -50ºC to +80ºC
4. FINISHES
1. Coil coated KYNAR based POLYVINYLDENE FLOURIDE (PVDF) resin.

2. Film thickness (E.C.C.A.T1) : 27mm
3. Specular Gloss (E.C.C.T2) : 30-35% according to Gardner
4. Pencil hardness: (E.C.C.T4 ): HB-F
5. Firm adhesion after identation is lesser (or) equal to 44 in. lb, no cracks and no
removal of skin occurs.
6. Firm adhesion after bending (E.C.C.T7) T=1
7. Resistance to cracking after bending (E.C.C.T7) T = 1.5
8. Salt spray resistance tests(E.C.C.T8, din 50021 SS): No creeps, no blisters after
1000 hrs of sample exposure.
9. Acid and alkali have no effect on the material.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION
1. Check structural elements and adjoining work on which work is dependent, verify
governing dimensions, floor elevations, floor to floor heights, minimum clearances
between aluminum work and structural frame. Confirm conditions satisfactory before
proceeding. Commencement of work shall be deemed to be acceptance of existing
conditions.
2. Anchor assemblies to structure, galvanized steel, adjustable to permit accurate

location of wall components, conforming to design criteria and fully detailed on shop
and erection drawings.
________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Backpaint aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with concrete, surfaces between
dissimilar metals, one coat of bitumastic paint. Touch up field welds in steel with two
coats of zinc chromate paint.
4. Joints and intersections shall be accurately fitted in true planes, free of distortion,
waves, twists, buckles or other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
Prevent damage to metal finish.
5. Fit flexible seals, tapes, formed neoprene deflectors and gaskets at locations required
to provide water, air, vapor and weathertight junction. Caulk junctions of system
components to themselves and other work with sealant to maintain effective vapour,
air and water barrier. Where joints are 12 mm deep or deeper, back with polyethylene
rope filler. Sealant bead depth shall be 1/2 width but not less than 6 mm. Apply
sealants with pressure gun. Caulk exterior junction of glass to mullion caps at sill and
100 mm up each jamb with neat bead of clear silicone sealant.
6. Fixing
1. Installation and anchoring shall be carried out in accordance with the highest
standards of safety and security.
2. In the case of elements with movable casements, transoms and mullions, the
outer frames shall be anchored in such a way that the forces from the hinges,
pivots, transoms and mullions are transmitted to the building structure.
3.2. CLEANING
1. At completion of work remove all labels from glass and clean inner and outer faces of
glass and all exposed aluminum surfaces at interior and exterior. Replace scratched
or broken glass and make good any damaged materials, including operating hardware.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H PLASTER & GYPSUM BOARD 09200-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL

1.3. GENERAL:
1. The Contractor shall perform all attendance upon other trades and protect all works
specified under this section from damage during subsequent operations, make good
any defects, clear away upon completion, clean throughout and leave all work in
perfect condition to the approval of the Engineer.
1.4. MOCK UP
1. Install a sample panel 2000 mm x 2000 mm in location directed by the Engineer.
2. Panel shall show complete construction and exterior finish. When approved by the
Engineer sample shall become the standard for the project.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
1. CEMENT:
1. Cement for plaster shall be ordinary Portland cement to BS 12, part 2 or
ASTM C150, type 1 or DIN 1164.
2. White (non stain) cement shall conform to the requirements of the Standard
Specification for Masonry Cement of the AASHO Designation: M-150
(ASTM: C91): Latest Edition.
2. WATER: Clean, potable, to meet requirements of B.S.3148.
3. CONTROL JOINTS, PLASTER STOPS, DRIPS: zinc sheet, minimum 25 gauge or
aluminum .
4. EXTERIOR FINISH: “Ceratone stone” finish by Caparol Japan, or approved
equivalent. Water based textured finish consisting of crushed inorganic colored
aggregates composed mainly of crushed stones bound with a synthetic resin binder.
5. PRIMER: “Stoneprime” by Caparol, Japan or approved equivalent – high quality

pigmented acrylic resin primer for exterior finish, with excellent adhesion to
______________________________________________________________________________
plastered surfaces.
6. TOPCOAT: “Capathane Polyurethane” Clear Topcoat by Caparol Japan or approved

equivalent over exterior finish.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1. PREPARATION ( PLASTER WORK )
1. All plaster work and the necessary substrate preparations shall comply with
the relevant BS, ASTM and DIN Standards.
2. All surfaces to be plastered shall be clean and free from dust, oil, grease, loose or
projecting mortar, and all traces of salts are to be thoroughly sprayed with water. All
water shall be allowed to dry and disappear from the surface before the plaster is
applied.
3. Plastering shall not be commenced until the background has been suitably prepared.
Blockwork joints shall be deeply raked out, efflorescence brushed off and all dust and
foreign matter removed. On all external surfaces and on all smooth internal surfaces
spatterdash of cement and sand which shall contain 500 kgs of cement per one meter
cube of sand shall be applied and allowed to dry before finishing commenced.
4. The contractor shall form vertical and horizontal guide screeds 25 mm wide. The
spacing shall not exceed 1500 mm, or as instructed by the Engineer.
5. The screeds shall be plumb and in the same plane with each other. The sides of the
screed shall be left rough to bond with plaster.
6. The finished surface shall be true to shape and angle even in all directions, with
straight arises free from cracks and towel marks and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
7. Cement Mortar:
Cement sand mortar shall consist of one part cement and 4 parts sand. The
ingredients of the mortar shall be mixed together dry on a clean wooden stage until
the mix is homogeneous in color. Water shall then be added through a hose in
sufficient quantity to give no more than stiff workability. The whole shall then be
turned until perfectly mixed.
Mortar shall be remixed or worked up again after it has stiffed. Any mortar that has
commenced to set shall not be used in the works.
Mortar shall comply with B.S. 4551 and P.D. 6472.
3.2. INSTALLATION ( PLASTER WORK )

1. Plaster shall be thoroughly mixed with the proper amount of water until uniform in
color and consistency. Retendering will not be permitted and all plaster which has
begun to stiffen shall be discarded. All plastering shall be executed in neat
workmanlike manner and internal and external angles shall be true, straight and
plumb. Plaster shall be made good adjacent to metal frames, skirting and around
pipes or other fittings.
______________________________________________________________________________
2. All surfaces shall be kept scrupulously clean at all times, and strict precautions shall
be taken to avoid the plaster or other materials from becoming contaminated by
pieces of partially set material which would tend to retard or accelerate the setting
time.
3. Provide 150 mm x 450 mm long strip of diamond mesh reinforcing diagonally at

corners of openings exceeding .19 m2.
4. At all junctions of dissimilar materials (i.e. concrete and blockwork) the joints shall be
covered by metal lath strip not less than 200 mm wide securely fixed to the surface.
5. All metal lath work shall be performed before the application of the spatter dash
coat.
6. Provide typical, closed control joints in soffit areas with insulation above, in areas
which are not covered by insulation use plaster stops back to back with 6 mm space
between. At perimeter use plaster stops 6 mm clear of surrounding materials to
allow air flow through soffits. Control joints shall be at least 4500 mm O.C. each
way unless otherwise shown on drawings.
7. Cement sand plastering shall be applied in two coats:
1. "Splatter Dash Coat":
1. A "Splatter Dash Coat" shall be first applied. The object of this coat is
to provide a firm surface on which the first coat of rendering can be
applied. The mix proportions for "Splatter Dash" shall be:
- 1 part ordinary Portland cement.
- 2 parts clean sharp sand. If a damp sand is used, allowance
shall be made for "bilking" up to 25%. The grading of sand shall
comply with table 1 of BS 1199 or with zones 2 or 3 of BS 882.
2. The cement and sand shall be mixed with sufficient water to give a
consistency of a thick slurry.
The "Splatter Dash" coat shall not be more than 3 mm thick and shall
be cured.
2. Final Coat:
1. The mix proportions for the final coat of rendering shall be:
- 1 part ordinary Portland cement.
- 3 parts clean dry sand to table 1 of BS 1199.
2. The final coat shall be 12 mm thick and shall be floated with a wood
float to give a dense level and even surface. A tolerance of 3mm
under a 3000mm straight edge shall be achieved.
3. It is important that the final coat shall be slightly weaker than the
preceding one. Otherwise, the former coat will tend to pull the lower
one off.
______________________________________________________________________________
4. The Contractor shall take full responsibility for rendering on concrete,

including hacking of concrete and the removal of dexterous
substances from concrete surface prior to plastering. The length of a
panel plastered in one operation shall not exceed 4500 mm.
5. All batching shall be done by weight to help ensure uniform quality of
the mixed material.
3.3 EXTERIOR FINISH

1. Preparation:
1. In order to avoid quality deterioration due to rise of temperature, store
materials indoors in cool dry surroundings, and not exposed to direct sunrays
or rainfall.
2. In places where penetration of water is anticipated such as roof top water
penetration, joints surrounding of drain etc. make adequate inspection and
proper water proofing.
3. Completely remove dust, stains, oil & flat, paints, powders, laitance etc.
sticking to base substrates.
4. Avoid applying work under a temperature below 5° , during rainfall, strong
wind, sand storms, and humidity above 85% or when such conditions are
forecast.
5. After a rain fall, wait till substrate surfaces are dried up uniformally and then
apply work, (Dampness to be totally avoided).
6. For surroundings of spray-applied faces, apply protection covering.
7. Before use of materials, adequately stir them in well ventilated areas, and use after
making them uniform.
8. A manufacturer’s representative must be present during the preparation and
application of this product, to monitor the entire operation. At the conclusion of the
operation, the representative must certify the same.
END OF SECTION
STH GYPSUM BOARD 09250-1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies.
2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing.
3. Cementitious backer units installed with gypsum board assemblies.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to

this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for load-bearing steel

framing.
2. Division 7 Section "Fire stopping" for fire stopping systems and fire
resistance-rated joint sealants.
3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for framing,

gypsum panels, and other components forming shaft wall assemblies.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505

for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this
Section or in other referenced standards.
1.3 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with

STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of
assemblies whose STC ratings were determined according to ASTM E 90
and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing
agency.
B. Fire Resistance: Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance

ratings indicated.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum

board assemblies are indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that
comply with the following requirements:
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600

"Fire Resistance Design Manual" or design designations in UL "Fire
Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Gypsum board Assemblies indicated are identical to assemblies tested

for fire resistance according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
_____________________________________________________________________
3. Deflection and Fire stop Track: Top runner provided in fire-resistance-

rated assemblies indicated is labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey,
or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work
includes.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions

indicated.
B. Cast-in-Place and Post-installed Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type

indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with holes or
loops for attaching hanger wires, and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1. Cast-in-place type designed for attachment to concrete forms.
2. Expansion anchor.
C. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for

application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips
or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by
ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
D. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.6 mm thick.
E. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 4.1 mm
diameter.
F. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.6 mm minimum thickness of base (uncoated)

metal and 11.1 mm wide flanges, and as follows:
1. Carrying Channels: 38.1 mm deep, 70 kg/ 100 m, unless otherwise

indicated.
2. Furring Channels: 19.1 mm deep, 45 kg/ 100 m, unless otherwise

indicated.
3. Finish: Rust-inhibitive paint, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Finish: ASTM A 653M, Z 180 hot-dip galvanized coating for framing

where indicated
_____________________________________________________________________
G. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs
bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 5 mm wide minimum lip
(return), and complying with the following requirements for minimum
thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth.
1. Thickness: 0.45 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Depth: 92.1 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653M, Z 90 hot-dip galvanized coating.
H. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth of 22.2 mm,
and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:
I. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, manufacturers

standard direct-hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and
cross-furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network.
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following

requirements:
B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back
90 degrees and doubled over to form 5-mm wide minimum lip (return), and
complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base
(uncoated) metal and for depth.
2. Thickness: 0.84 mm as follows:
a. For head runner, sill runner, jamb, and cripple studs at door and
other openings.
b. In locations to receive cementitious backer units.
3. Depth: 92.1 mm, unless otherwise indicated or required.
C. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's standard top runner designed to prevent

cracking of gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from
deflection of the structure above fabricated from steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653M or ASTM A 568 M. Thickness as indicated for studs, and
width to accommodate depth of studs, and of the following configuration:
1. Top runner with 63.5 mm deep flanges that either have V-shaped offsets
that compress when pressure is applied from construction above or have
_____________________________________________________________________
slots 25.4 mm o.c. that allow fasteners attached to studs through the slots
to accommodate structural movement by slipping.
D. Deflection and Fire stop Track: Top runner designed to allow partition heads
to expand and contract with movement of structure above while maintaining
continuity of the assembly. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 645 except
configuration, of thickness indicated for studs and width to accommodate
depth of studs indicated with flanges offset at midpoint to accommodate
depth of studs indicated with flanges offset at midpoint to accommodate
gypsum board thickness.
1. Offset Configuration: Shadow-line design with offset projecting out from

depth of stud.
2. Offset Configuration: Reveal design with offset recessing in from depth

of stud.
E. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth and minimum
thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:
2. Depth: 22.2 mm minimum.
F. Furring Brackets: Serrated-arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosion-

resistant steel sheet complying with ASTM C 645, minimum thickness of base
(uncoated) metal of 0.84 mm, designed for screw attachment to steel studs
and steel rigid furring channels used for furring.
G. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed

to reduce sound transmission, fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A
653 M or ASTM A 568 M to form 12.7 mm-deep channel of the following
configuration:
1. Single-or Doubled-Leg Configuration: Asymmetric-shaped channel with

face connected to a single flange by a single-slotted leg (web) or hat-
shaped channel, with 38.1 mm wide face connected to flanges by double-
slotted or expanded-metal legs (web).
H. Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard Z-shaped furring members with

slotted or non-slotted web, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM
A 653M or ASTM A 568M; with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness
of 0.45 mm, face flange of 31.8 mm, wall-attachment flange of 22.2 mm, and
of depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
I. Steel Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel, 1.5 mm minimum thickness of base

uncoated metal and 11.1 mm wide flanges, 38.1 mm deep, 45 kg/ 100 m,
unless otherwise indicated.
J. Steel Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing
complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653 M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568
M), length and width as indicated, and with a minimum base metal (uncoated)
thickness as follows:
1. Thickness: 0.84 mm where indicated.

_____________________________________________________________________
K. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size,

corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten
steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved;
complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for
applications indicated.
2.4 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths

available that will minimize end-to-end butt joints in each indicated to receive
gypsum board application.
1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 1200 mm,
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows:
1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Foil backed where indicated
3. Type: Type X where required for fire resistance-rated assemblies.
4. Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces.
5. Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for pre-filling.
6. Thickness: 15.9 mm unless otherwise indicated.
C. Gypsum Board Base Layer(s) for Multilayer Applications: Gypsum wallboard

ASTM C 36, and as follows:
1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Foil backed indicated or required for fire-resistance-rated

assemblies.
3. Type: Type X where indicated or required for fire-resistance rated

assemblies.
4. Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Edges: Manufacturer's standard.
6. Thickness: 12.7 mm, unless otherwise indicated, 15.9 mm where

indicated.
D. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630 and as follows:
1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and

where indicated.

_____________________________________________________________________
2.5 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS
A. Provide cementitious backer units complying with ANSI A118.9, of thickness

and width indicated below, and in maximum lengths available to minimize
end-to-end butt joints.
1. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 11.1 mm,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Width: Manufacturer's standard width, but not less than 800 mm.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cementitious

backer units that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
The Original Wonde rboard; Custom Building Products.

Wonder board Multi+Board; Custom Building Products.
DomCrete Cementitious Tile-Backer Board; Domtar Gypsum.
DUROCK Cement Board; United States Gypsum Co.
2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner-bead, edge trim, and control joints
complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:
1. Material: Formed metal, with metal complying with the following

requirement:
a. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig.1 designations in ASTM C

1047:
a. Corner-bead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
b. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to
receive joint compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim, unless
c. L-bead with flange only; face flange formed to receive joint

compound. Use L-bead where indicated.
d. U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left
without application of joint compound. Use U-bead where indicated.
e. One piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot and removable
strip covering slot opening.
2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and
the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and the
joint treatment materials for each application indicated.
_____________________________________________________________________
B. Joint Type for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Use pressure-sensitive or staple-attached, open-weave, glass-fiber

reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by
manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for
application indicated.
C. Joint tape for Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by cementitious

backer unit manufacturer.
D. Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged, job-

mixed, chemical-hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated.
1. Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound

only or for taping and filling only, use formulation that is compatible with
other joint compounds applied over it.
2. For pre-filling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by

gypsum board manufacturer.
3. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing

board behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by
gypsum board manufacturer.
4. For topping compound, use sandable formulation.
E. Joint Compound for Cementitious Backer Units: Material recommended by

cementitious backer unit manufacturer.
2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's

standard nonsag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM
C 834 and the following requirements:
1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through

perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by
testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical

sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
PL Acoustical Sealant; ChemRex, Inc.; Contech Brands.

AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.
SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that

comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturer.
_____________________________________________________________________
B. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting type joint compound recommended for
spot-grouting hollow metal door frames.
C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications:
1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.84 mm thick.
2. Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board.
D. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to
steel members from 0.84 to 2.84 mm thick.
E. Steel drill screws of size and type recommended by unit manufacturer for
fastening cementitious backer units.
F. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),

non-perforated.
G. Foam Gaskets: Closed-cell vinyl foam adhesive-backed strips that allow

fastener penetration without foam displacement, 3.2 mm thick, in width to suit
metal stud size indicated.
H. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Un-faced mineral-fiber blanket insulation

produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with
thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without
membrane facing).
1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock

wool.
I. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, thickness and maximum

permeance rating as follows:
1. 0.15 mm, 7.5 ng/ Pa x s x sq. m.
J. Vapor Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor

retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
3.1 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with

ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840requirements that apply to framing
installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in

gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy
trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturer or, if non available, with United States Gypsum Co.'s "Gypsum
Construction Handbook".
_____________________________________________________________________
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent

transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Comply with details
shown on Drawings.
1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling.
2. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure, except at floor.
a. Provide slip-or cushioned-type joints as detailed to attain lateral

support and avoid axial loading.
b. Install deflection track top runner to attain lateral support and avoid
axial loading.
c. Install deflection and fire stop track top runner at fire-resistance-rated

assemblies where indicated.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing of
furring members. Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or
furring members.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and Finish

gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. TILE 09300-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1) Section 03500: Cementitious Decks and Underlayment

2) Section 04200: Masonry Units
3) Section 07900: Joint Sealers
4) Section 09990: Painting and Coatings
5) Section 10800: Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Specialties
The Contractor executing Work of this section shall have a minimum of ten (10)
years continuous experience in successful supply and installation of work of type
and quality shown and specified. Submit proof of experience upon Engineer's
request.
Ensure proper use of proprietary materials in strict accordance with the material
manufacturer's directions. It shall be the responsibility of the material manufacturer
or supplier to furnish these directions to the contractor and to check periodically to
ensure that they are being carried out.
All additives, adhesives, thin set mortars, epoxy mortars, installation materials and
grouts shall be from the same manufacturer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. SAMPLES: Submit 610 mm x 610 mm sample panel of each tile, adhered to a

610 mm x 610 mm cement board with setting compound, grout and a dummy
control joint showing sealant as specified. Identify samples by project number, date,
name of sub-contractor and tile type. Tile and grout used in the building shall
correspond to appearance of approved samples in all respects. Do not install tile
until samples are approved.
2. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: Submit three (3) copies of maintenance
manual.
3. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS: Supply 2% extra tile of each color for future repair
and store in the original containers where directed by the Employer.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
1. Order tile in sufficient time to coordinate deliveries with construction schedule.

damage. Protect materials with suitable non-staining water-proof coverings.
S.T.H. TILE 09300-2
______________________________________________________________________________
3. Store material in original, undamaged containers or wrappings with

manufacturer's seals and labels intact.
4. Protect all additives, adhesives mortar mixes and grouts from moisture and
excessive heat during transportation and storage. Provide secure, dry storage
facilities on site.
5. Restrict traffic by other trades during installation.
6. Keep traffic off floors after installation. Provide adequate protection of completed
tiled surfaces to prevent damage by other trades until final completion of this project.
Minimum protection shall consist of 4 mil polyethylene sheets lapped 100 mm and
taped. Heavily traveled areas shall have 6 mm plywood sheet protection.
7. Protect exposed edges of floor tile with strip of plywood same thickness as tile x
100 mm wide nailed to floor until adjoining floor finish is installed.
8. Protect walls from impact vibration, heavy hammering on adjacent and opposite
walls after installation.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
1- CERAMIC FLOOR TILES ANTI ACID

Non-slips ceramic floor tiles be matt finish, vitrified plain clay manufactured in
accordance with B.S 1286: 1974
Complete with grout tilling and bedding of cement: sans nortar 1:3 to stiff plastic
consistency.
2- CERAMIC WALL TILES ANTI ACID
Wall tiles anti acid shall be vitrified plain clay manufactured in accordance with
B.S. 1286: 1974
Complete with grout tilling and bedding of cement: sand mortar 1:3 to stiff plastic
consist
4. Protect all additives, adhesives mortar mixes and grouts from moisture and
excessive heat during transportation and storage. Provide secure, dry storage
facilities on site.
Restrict traffic by other trades during installation.
Keep traffic off floors after installation. Provide adequate protection of completed
tiled surfaces to prevent damage by other trades unit final completion of this project.
Minimum protection shall consist of 4 mil polyethylene sheets lapped 100 mm and
taped. Heavily
traveled areas shall have 6mm plywood same thickness as tile x 100 mm wide
nailed to floor until adjoining floor finish is installed.
Protect exposed edges of floor tile with strip of plywood same thickness as tile x
100 mm wide nailed to floor finish is installed.
Protect walls from impact vibration, heavy hammering on adjacent and opposite
walls after Installation.
S.T.H. TILE 09300-3
______________________________________________________________________________
Manufacturer's, sizes and verification classifications are used herein to establish

minimum quality standards.
Refer to drawings, room finish schedule and Legend and Finish Schedule for
location of tiles.
Ceramic tiles shall be of a finish and size as approved by the Engineer, and
manufactured according to appropriate EN standards.
Glazed wall tiles shall conform to the requirements of appropriate EN standards.
3- CERAMIC COUNTER TOPS
All vanity / reception counters to be made of 12mm thick porcelain tiles, to be

matching with the appearance of surrounding areas.
4- CERAMIC TILES:
For location and type of tiles see Section 09990: Finish Schedule.
1) WET AREA PORCELAIN TILES

All tiles to be of first choice porcelain tiles manufactured by first grade Malaysian manufacturer to
meet or exceed the below given technical specifications. Recommended size for floor & wall to be
30x60cm. Colors & finishes to be from Mirage Glocal range.
All tiles to be dry pressed and fired at a temperature of not less than 1200oC.
All tiles to be of first choice rectified under the international standards.
Technical Specifications
Description Standard Requirement
Straightness of sides EN ISO 10545-2 + 0.3% Max
Water Absorption EN ISO 10545-3 + 5.0% Max
Modulus of Rupture EN ISO 10545-4 S ≥ 2,400 N
Flexion Resistance EN ISO 10545-4 R ≥ 48 N/mm2
Resistance to Shocks EN ISO 10545-5 > 0.8
Abrasion Resistance EN ISO 10545-6 < 150 mm3
Resistance to Thermal Shocks EN ISO 10545-9 Resistant
Stain Resistance EN ISO 10545-14 Class 4 or 5

S.T.H. TILE 09300-4
______________________________________________________________________________
2) ENTRANCE AND CORRIDOR PORCELAIN TILES
All tiles to be of first choice porcelain tiles manufactured by a first grade Italian manufacturer to
meet or exceed the below given technical specifications. Recommended size for floor & wall to be
80x80cm. Colors & finishes to be from Mirage Glocal range.
All tiles to be dry pressed and fired at a temperature of not less than 1200oC.
All tiles to be of first choice rectified under the international European standards.
Technical Specifications
Description Standard Requirement
Straightness of sides EN ISO 10545-2 + 0.3% Max
Water Absorption EN ISO 10545-3 + 5.0% Max
Modulus of Rupture EN ISO 10545-4 S ≥ 2,400 N
Flexion Resistance EN ISO 10545-4 R ≥ 48 N/mm2
Resistance to Shocks EN ISO 10545-5 > 0.8
Abrasion Resistance EN ISO 10545-6 < 150 mm3
Resistance to Thermal Shocks EN ISO 10545-9 Resistant
Stain Resistance EN ISO 10545-14 Class 4 or 5
4- MARBLE TILES:
1. All floor tiles to be as per Finish Schedule Section 09990 for location
and type.
2. All material shall be selected premium grade and come from same
quarry and same block or sequence of blocks.
3. Setting bed; shall consist of:

Layer of sand
Cement for leveling and setting bed: Non-staining Portland cement with
10% latex added to the water.
S.T.H. TILE 09300-5
______________________________________________________________________________
Sand: Shall consist of fine granular material composed of hard, strong,

durable mineral particles which shall be free from injurious amounts of
saline, alkaline, etc.
4. GROUT: Modified non-staining Portland cement grout with graded

quartz aggregate with organic oxide pigments added to achieve
approved color.
5. SEALANT: Multi component “Dymeric” by Tremco Manufacturing Co.

Ltd. or approved equal.
6. MARBLE SILLS AND THRESHOLDS: Provide 100mm wide x 19mm

thick white ‘carara’ with beveled edges. Submit samples for Engineer’s
approval.
7. TERAZZO TILES:
1. All Floor Tiles to be 30cm x 30cm x 2.8cm thick.
2.2. FLOOR TILE SETTING BED
1. ORDINARY - PORTLAND CEMENT BOND COAT: Shall consist of two parts. One
part shall be a dry mix of aggregates, additives and ordinary Portland cement.
2.3. WALL TILE SETTING BED
1. CEMENT MORTAR: Suitable for concrete backing shall consist of cement with
additives and Portland cement and the other part.
2.4. FLOOR GROUT
1. FLOOR GROUT: Shall consist of Portland cement, special additives and

aggregates.
2. LATEX ADDITIVE: To meet ANSI A118.4, B.S. 5385.
2.5. WALL GROUT

1. LATEX-PORTLAND CEMENT GROUT: Water-resistant, self-colored to B.S. 5980.
2.6. GROUT COLOURS (Floor and wall)

1. Grout colors for floors and walls shall be selected at a later date by the Engineer.
2.7. SEALANTS
1. SEALANT TYPE "B": Multi-component chemical curing or two components
sealant by Feb or approved equal. Colors to Engineer's later selection.
2 SEALANT TYPE "C": One component, silicone base, chemical curing. Colors to
Engineer's later selection.
S.T.H. TILE 09300-6
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1. CONDITION OF SURFACES
1. Examine carefully surfaces to which tile is to be installed and report any defects to
the Engineer.
2. Notify other sections if preparations are required to be made by them for properly
executing work.
3. Block masonry wall surfaces on which tile is to be applied shall be thoroughly
cleaned of extraneous matter and dust.
4. Commencement of installation shall signify complete acceptance of substrate.
5. Concrete:
1. All concrete surfaces shall be dry and fully cured for at least 28 days prior to
installation of ceramic tiles.
2. Where latex Portland thin set mortar is specified, concrete surfaces shall be
wood float or broom finished.
3. Before work commences, this Subcontractor shall examine the areas to be
covered and shall report any flaws or adverse conditions to the Contractor
and the Engineer. This Subcontractor shall coordinate with the masonry
and/or concrete contractors that all walls are true and level.
4. Concrete floor slabs on which tile is to be applied shall be thoroughly
cleaned of extraneous matter, dust and efflorescence, and free from
concrete sealers or curing compounds.
3.2. INSTALLATION (GENERAL)
1. Unless otherwise specified, execute tile work according to the most current British
Standards.
2. Neatly cut tile around fitments, fixtures, access panels, drains and the like. Splitting
of tile is expressly prohibited except where no alternative is possible. Form
intersections, corners and returns accurately.
3. Joints for tile installations shall be uniformly maximum 2 mm wide.
4. Joints in caps, trim and base shall match wall and floor patterns. Joints shall be
watertight without voids, cracks or excess grout.
5. Where saw cut joints occur in the concrete floor slab, tile joints must be at same
location directly above saw cut joints.
6. Lay out tile so that fields or patterns are centered on wall areas or architectural
features and so that no tile less than 1/2 size occurs.
7. Arrange and set recessed accessories in tile work so that they are evenly spaced,
centered with joints and set true with correct projection. Rigidly install accessories.
S.T.H. TILE 09300-7
______________________________________________________________________________
8. All internal angles shall be square, and external angles shall be bull nose. Bull
noses shall form integral part of a full sized tile.
9. Install wall tile full wall height unless otherwise shown. Where tiles extend full
height, they shall continue to 150 mm above finished ceiling.
10. Sound tile after setting and remove and replace tile not fully bedded.
11. Allow minimum 48 hours after setting prior to grouting.
12. The finished tile work shall be clean and free of tiles which are pitted, chipped,
cracked or scratched. All damaged tile shall be removed and replaced.
13. Back butter all tiles including those adjacent to expansion and control joints to
ensure that full adhesion is obtained.
3.3. FLOOR AND WALL CERAMIC TILE
1. Pour proper quantity of Portland cement into the latex additive and mix
proportionately while mixing in strict accordance with the manufacturer's mixing
instructions.
2. Where epoxy mortar and grout is used, mix full units in strict accordance to the
manufacturer's instructions. Do not part mix units.
3. Apply ordinary Portland cement in a thin pressured skim coat to substrate in the
area to be tiled and follow skim coat immediately with a double coat to form 5 mm to
6 mm thickness of mortar. Do not spread more mortar than can be covered before
skinning occurs. Just before placing tile, notch the mortar bed with a suitably
notched trowel, combing an area that can be covered within five minutes in dry
surroundings. Should skinning or setting occur, all bond coat shall be scraped of
and fresh bond coat applied.
3.4 MARBLE TILES
1. Mix and apply sealer to back of tiles. Set tiles and tamp into position and
maintain level surface, straight, true-to-line uniform joints. Joints shall be no
more than 1.6mm unless otherwise shown on drawings.
2. Set material level, plumb, square and true with uniform joints. Chipped,
broken or blemished units shall be rejected.
3. Mix and install grout in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Grout shall match marble in color.
3.5. GROUTING
1. When grouting a fresh laid floor protect floor by using kneeling boards.
2. Excess grout shall be removed from the surface of tiles using the edge of a rubber
float held at a 45ꞏ angle, moving it diagonally to the joints. Fill all gaps and air
holes.
S.T.H. TILE 09300-8
______________________________________________________________________________
3. Do not allow grout to harden on face of tile. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for
thorough removal.
4. Floors which require damp curing shall be cured for the required length of time using
heavy Kraft paper, not polyethylene sheets. Consult manufacturer for instructions.
5. Grout lines shall be clean and free from standing water, dust and deleterious
substances which could hamper proper curing or cause color contamination or
discoloration of grout.
3.6. CONTROL JOINTS AND SEALING
1. Control joints filled with silicone type sealant shall be placed every 4880 mm to 6000
mm apart. Control joints shall be placed around the floor perimeter at walls, around
columns, and where tile abuts other hard materials or vertical surfaces. Control
joints must always be placed directly over all slab expansion and control joints.
2. Joints around fixtures, pipes or other fittings shall be sealed with silicone type
sealant.
3. Insert an approved compressible bead and sealant to caulk expansion and

control joints following the sealant manufacturer's strict instructions.
4. Color of sealant shall match grout.
3.7. CLEANING
1. Clean tiled areas after grouting has cured, using compatible solutions and methods
as recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. STONE TILE 09310-1
__________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL

Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following applications of dimension stone:
1. Interior flooring.
2. Wall cladding.
3. Interior column cladding.
4. Bases (skirting).
5. Thresholds.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI, American National Standards Institute.
B. ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials.
C. ILI, Indiana Limestone Institute.
D. MIA, Marble Institute of America.
E. NBGQA, National Building Granite Quarries Association.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product/Technical Data:
1. For each variety of stone and for each type of product indicated.
2. Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standard,

characteristics, limitations and warranties.
3. Product transportation, storage, handling and installation requirements.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, sections, details and attachments to other work.
2. Provide shop.
__________________________________________________________________
C. Samples:
1. For each stone type indicated. Include three or more Samples in each set and
show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics expected in
expected in completed Work.
2. For each color of grout required.
D. Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificates stating that materials supplied are

in accordance with this specification.
E. Maintenance Data: For dimension stone tile to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that custom fabricates stone.
B. Mockups: Build mock-ups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality

standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical interior floor area as shown on Drawings.
2. Build mockup of typical wall cladding area as shown on Drawings.
3. Build mockup of typical column cladding area in area as indicated by

Architect.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time Substantial Completion.
A. Cold-Weather Requirements for Interior Stone Flooring:
1. Do not set stone when air or material temperature is below 50 deg F (10 deg
C).
2. Maintain temperature at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or above in installation areas

during installation and for 7 days after completion.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Stone Tile: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount

installed, for each type, composition color, pattern and size indicated.
__________________________________________________________________
1.08 WARRANTY
The manufacturer and installer of stone tiles, adhesives, grouts, accessories and
mortars shall provide a comprehensive written Ten (10) years warranty against
defective products which covers replacement materials and labour costs for
demolition, tiles and installation systems.
PART 2- PRODCUTS
2.01 STONE
A. Acceptable marble, stone tile, adhesive and grout suppliers shall be as per list
manufacturers.
B. Marble flooring (MAR): Conforming to ANSI/ASTM C503.
1. Marble wall cladding to be fired.
2. Finishes: Polished, honed.
3. Pattern: To be selected by Architect.
4. Colors: Allow for four colors to be selected by the Architect from

manufacturer’s full range.
5. Marble types as follows:
a. MAR1: To be selected by Architect.
b. MAR2: To be selected by Architect.
c. MAR3: To be selected by Architect.
d. MAR4: To be selected by Architect.
6. Technical data of marble (Compressive strength, water absorption .etc.) shall

be proposed by the specialist supplier and approved by Engineer/Client.
C. Granite floor (GRAN): Conforming to ASTM C615.
1. Pattern: To be selected by Architect.
2. Finishes: Polished, honed.
3. Colors: Allow for four colors to be selected by the Architects.
4. Granite tile types as follows:
a. GRAN1: To be selected by Architect.
b. GRAN2: To be selected by Architect.

__________________________________________________________________
c. GRAN3: To be selected by Architect.
d. GRAN4: To be selected by Architect.
5. Technical data of Granite (Compressive strength, water absorption, etc.) shall

be proposed by the specialist supplier and approved by Engineer/Client.
2.02 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition

between adjacent floor finishes.
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slopes, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor
finish. Limit height of bevel to 12.7 mm or less and finish bevel to match face
of threshold.
B. Stone Thresholds: Free of cracks, seams and starts impairing their structural
integrity of function, and are from a single quarry for each type, variety, color and
quantity of stone specified.
1. Size and Profile: As required to provide transition between finished surface of

tile and that of adjacent finished flooring.
2. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503.
3. Color and Finish: Unless otherwise directed by Engineer/ Client, color and
finish shall be white, honed marble classified Group A per definitions for
soundness classification in MIA “Dimension Stone Design Manual IV.”
2.03 BASE (SKIRTING)
A. Stone Base: Stone base tile to match floor or wall tile as indicated. Fabricate to
sizes and profiles indicated. Type, colors and styles to be selected by Architect.
Locations: As indicated in drawings.
2.04 MARBLE COLUMN AND WALL CLADDING
A. Provide marble as indicated to interior columns & walls as indicated on drawings.
B. Protect marble cladding for columns with wooden boards.
C. Provide all anchors, cramps, dowels, ties and other similar fastenings as required
for installation of interior marble cladding. All fixing, accessories shall be stainless
steel unless otherwise directed by Engineer/Client.
2.05 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color or white
cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
__________________________________________________________________
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested
according to ASTM C 114.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Aggregate: ASTM C 144; except for joints narrower than 6 mm, use aggregate
graded with 100 percent passing 1.18-mm (No.16) sieve.
1. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
2. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other

durable stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
D. Latex Additive: Manufacturer’s standard water emulsion, serving as replacement

for part or all gagging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive
manufacturer for us with field-mixed Portland cement mortar bed and not
containing a retarder.
E. Thin-Set Mortar:
1. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1.
2. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4.
F. Water: Potable.
2.06 GROUT
A. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
B. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10.
C. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A 118.6.
1. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 3 mm and narrower.
2. Sanded grout mixture for joints wider than 3 mm.
D. Polymer Modified Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7.
1. Unsanded grout mix for 3 mm and narrower.
2. Sanded grout mix for joints wider than 3 mm.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3.
B. Divider Strips and Edging: Metal or combination of metal and PVC as per
selection of Engineer/Client, designed specifically for flooring applications, in
longest lengths available, and as follows:
1. Exposed-Edge Material: Stainless steel; ASTM A 666, Type 316, unless

__________________________________________________________________
2. Cross-Section Profile: Angle or L-shape, T-shape, single or two part, or

Straight shape as indicated.
3. Height: Equal to stone thickness plus depth of setting bed.
4. Width: 3.2 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Control-Joint Filler: Neoprene.
C. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
D. Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes and
applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer and, if a sealer is
specified, by sealer manufacturer. Do not use cleaning compound containing
acids, caustics, harsh fillers or abrasives.
E. Floor Sealer: Colorless, slip- and stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color
or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for
application indicated.
2.08 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Mortar: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers written

instructions to produce mortar of uniform qualify and with optimum performance
characteristics.
1. Do not use admixtures unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium

chloride.
B. Portland Cement-Lime Setting Mortar: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification,

Type N.
C. Mortar-Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement and water to a creamy consistency.
D. Latex-modified Portland Cement Bond Coat: Proportion and mix Portland

cement, aggregate and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer’s
written instructions.
2.09 STONE FABRICATION
A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks,
seams and starts that could impair structural integrity or function.
B. Fabricate stone to comply with requirements indicated and with the following
references:
1. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA’s “Specifications for

Architectural Granite.”
2. For marble, comply with recommendations in MIA’s “Dimension Stone-

Design Manual.”
__________________________________________________________________
3. For stone not otherwise indicated, comply with recommendations in MI’s

“Dimension Stone- Design Manual.”
4. Cut stone to produce of thickness, size and shape indicated, including details
on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. Stone Edges: As indicated.
2. Joint Width: 1.5 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other
natural markings to comply with the following requirement:
1. Cut stone from one block or continuous, matched blocks in which natural
markings occur.
2. Arrange units in blend pattern.
D. Fabricate stone threshold in sizes and profiles as indicated or required to provide

transition between adjacent floor finishes.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris and loose
particles.
B. Remove substrates from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond.
C. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushed
and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds.
A. Install stones in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and TTMAC

Specification Guide 09300 Tile Installation Manual. Manufacturer’s installation
instructions govern over TTMA Installation Manual.
B. Do necessary filed cutting as stone is set. Cut lines straight and true and finish
field-cut edges to match shop-cut edges.
1. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone except for stone that is
specified to have rough-split edges.
C. Set stone to comply with Drawings and Shop Drawings.
D. Align floor, base and wall grout joints.
E. Scribe and field-cut stone as necessary to fit at obstructions. Produce neat joints
of size specified or indicated.
__________________________________________________________________
F. Expansion- and Control-Joint Installation: Locate and install according to

Drawings and Shop Drawings.
3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1.5 mm or ¼ of
nominal joint width, whichever is less.
B. Variation in Surface Plane: Do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6m or 10 mm

maximum from level or slope indicated.
C. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 0.8-mm

difference between planes of adjacent units.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF STONE DIRECTLY OVER CONCRETE
A. Saturate concrete with clean water several hours before placing setting bed.
Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply mortar-bed bond coat to damp concrete and broom to provide an even
coating that completely covers the concrete. Do not exceed 1.5- mm thickness.
Limit area of mortar-bed bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting
bed.
C. Apply mortar bed immediately after applying mortar-bed bond coat/ Spread,
tamp, and screed to uniform thickness at elevations required for setting stone to
finished elevations indicated.
D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with stone
before initial set. Cut back, bevel edge and discard material that has reached
initial set before stone can be places.
E. Place stone before initial set of mortar occurs. Immediately before placing stone
on setting bed, apply uniform 1.5-mm thick bond coat to bed or to back of each
stone unit.
F. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact
with setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set
each unit in a single operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas
already set and disturb stone for purposes of realigning finished surface or
adjusting joints.
G. Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout as units are set.
3.05 STONE THRESHOLD INSTALLATION
A. At locations adjacent to stone flooring, install stone thresholds in same type of

setting bed as abutting stone flooring unless otherwise indicated.
B. At locations not adjacent to stone flooring, install stone thresholds in water-

cleanable epoxy adhesive to comply with ANSI A108.4.
__________________________________________________________________
3.06 MARBLE COLUMN/WALL CLADDING INSTALLATION
A. Lay out work to reviewed shop drawings with marble units matched for grain,
color and shading.
B. All substrate shall treat with approved damp proofing bituminous primer as per
division 7.
C. Use dry fixed method for stone cladding.
D. Set marble units plumb, level and accurately in position with anchors securely in
place.
E. Make joints uniform.
F. Make joints water tight without voids, cracks, excess mortar or grout.
3.07 GROUTING
A. Grout stone joints to comply with ANSI A108.10 and with manufacturer’s written
instructions.
1. Do not use sanded grout for polished stone.
2. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into
joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining stone and other surfaces.
After initial set of grout, finish joints by tooling to produce a slightly concave
polished joint, free of drying cracks.
3. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days except as

otherwise recommended by manufacturer.
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stonework as work progresses. Remove mortar fins

and smears before tooling joints.
B. Clean stonework after setting and grouting are complete. Use procedures
recommended by stone fabricator for types of application.
C. Apply sealer to cleaned stonework according to sealer manufacturer’s written

instructions.
D. Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours.
E. Protect installed stonework during construction with non-staining craft paper.

Where adjoining areas require construction work access, cover stonework with a
minimum of 20-mm untreated plywood over non-staining craft paper.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. CEILINGS 09500-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL

Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
This Section includes mineral fiber, solid and perforated lay-in system acoustical
panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
A. ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials.
B. CISCA, Ceiling & Interior Systems Construction Association.
C. NAAMM, National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
D. NVLAP, National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. AC: Articulation Class.
B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.
C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design ceiling suspension systems in accordance with ASTM C636 and

manufacturer’s printed directions.
B. Design tile ceiling system in a way that allows adequate support of electrical fixtures as
required by the current bulletin of the Electrical Safety Authority. The acoustic panel
system is not designed to carry the weight of electrical equipment.
C. Design hanger anchor and entire suspension system static loading not to exceed 25%
of their ultimate capacity including lighting fixture dead loads. The acoustic panel
system is not designed to carry the weight of electrical equipment.
D. Design tile suspension system in a way to allow rotation/relocation of light fixtures.

Acoustic panel system is not designed to carry the weight of mechanical and electrical
equipment.
_____________________________________________________________________________
E. Design sub-framing as necessary to accommodate, to avoid conflicts and

interferences where ducts or equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Suspension system layout including hangers and supports for acoustic tile system.
2. Acoustic panel system including suspension system, hangers, supports and panel
sizes and locations.
3. Conditions at abutting, intersecting and penetrating construction.
4. Dimensioned locations of lighting fixtures, diffusers, sprinkler heads and other

items that pierce the ceiling plane.
C. Samples for verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish
required, prepared Samples of size are indicated below.
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of full-size samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings and Trim: Set of 300-mm long
Samples of each, finish and color.
D. Certificates: Submit written certification stating that the suspended ceiling system is
designed for adequate support of electrical fixtures as required by the current bulletin
of the Electrical Safety Authority.
E. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an

NVLAP-accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing
indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. NVLAP-accredited laboratories
must document accreditation, based on a “Certificate of Accreditation” and a “Scope of
Accreditation” listing the test methods specified.
B. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with

the following requirements:
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel with the following

surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials
as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
D. Mock-up:
1. Construct one 10 sq., m mock-up of each type of acoustical panel ceiling in a

location acceptable to the Consultant.
2. Arrange for Architect’s review and acceptance; allow 48 hours after acceptance
before proceeding with Work.
3. Mock-up may remain as part of Work if accepted by Architect. Remove and

dispose of mock-ups which do not form part of Work.
4. Upon acceptance, mock-up shall serve as a minimum standard of quality for the
balance of the work of this Section.
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project

site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned
space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity,
temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and
stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any
way.
1.09 PROTECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
ceilings is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained
at the level indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.10 COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system and partition assemblies.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
contents.
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
2. Suspension System Components: The quantity of each exposed component is

equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer and installer of Acoustical Panel Ceiling shall provide a

comprehensive non-pro-rated written Ten (10) years warranty against defective
products which covers replacement materials and labor costs for repair and
installation systems.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL CEILING ALUMINUM TILES
Square panel aluminum false ceiling 600x600 mm or 300x1200 mm or 600x1200, as

specified on the drawings having 0.7 mm thickness concealed system to close the gap
between the panels white color. Fire resistance class “0” (Concealed and lay-in)
Tiles will be installed on a steel spring tee every 60cm a steel primary channel on the top
of the spring tee will be connected by a steel wire clip. A bracket will hold the primary
channel with a wire rod 4.0mm to the ceiling having an adjustment clip. On the wall an
edge cover c shaped white color.
Fire resistance class “0”. Humidity proof for use in outdoor and indoor ceilings.
The perforation is 3mm dia. having eight holes’ horizontal and eight holes vertical to have
a square perforated shape. The square shape is 38mm.each ceiling panel is composed of
81 numbers of square perforated shapes. Between each square space of 17mm approx.
The panels will be with soundtex on the top of each panel to have sound protection.
Tiles will be installed on a steel spring tee every 60cm a steel primary channel on the top
of the spring tee will be connected by a steel wire clip. A bracket will hold the primary
channel with a wire rod 3mm to the ceiling having an adjustment clip. On the wall an edge
cover c shaped white color.
1. Panels to be refinished in white matt paint (similar to RAL

9010) to later selection of tile pattern.
3. Panels to be non - combustible as per Din 4102, part 1,

compact and impact resistant.
4. Panels to be sound - absorbent as per BS3638: 1987 with a

NRC=0.76, free from glare and humidity - resistant up to
70%.
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.02 MODULAR, GYPSUM / MINERAL FIBER PANELS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

B. Acoustic Gypsum tile :
1. Basis of design products: Specialist manufacturer for Acoustical gypsum tile.
2. Classification: ASTM E 1264 for type, form and pattern as follows:
a. Type and Form: as per design drawing details
b. Pattern: as per design drawing and selection form engineer from manufacture
selection.
3. Edge Detail: Square.
4. Thickness: 12 mm.
5. Size: 600 by 600 mm, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
C. Acoustic Mineral Fiber tile:
1. Basis of design product: Specialist manufacturer for Acoustical Mineral fiber tile.
2. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form and
pattern as follows:
a. Type and Form: as per design drawings
3. Description: Wet-formed mineral fiber with soil-resistant polyester film.
4. Edge Detail: Square.
5. Thickness: 19 mm.
6. Size: 600 by 600 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Location: Provide acoustic panel type in operating rooms and additional areas as
indicated.
2.03 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross

runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, pre-painted, electrolytically zinc
coated or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/653M, not less than G30(Z90)
coating designation with prefinished 15-mm wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.

_____________________________________________________________________________
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white.
2.04 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer’s standard “lay-in
metal suspension systems” of types, structural classifications and finished
indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes. Provide manufacturer’s standard factory-applied finish for
type of system indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635,
Table 1, “Direct hung” unless otherwise indicated.
1. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for

application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips
or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by
ceiling construction as determined by testing as per ASTM E 1190, conducted
by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following
requirements:
1. Zinc-coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating,

soft temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ADTM C 635, Table 1, “Direct Hung”) will be less than yield stress of wire, but
provide not less than 4.00-mm diameter wire.
E. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 22 mm wide: formed with 0.5-mm
thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90(Z275)
coating designations; with bolted connections and 8-mm diameter bolts.
G. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer’s standard compression struts designed to

accommodate seismic forces.
H. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer’s standard seismic clips designed and spaced to

secure acoustical panel in place.
I. Suspension system for metal panel ceiling to include the following:
1. Exposed Tee Grid system (Carrier rails): 15/24 mm

_____________________________________________________________________________
a. Grid system to consist 15/24 mm face dimension accurately punched

extruded aluminum tee bar, to form a 600 x 600 mm module with main
runners at 600 mm centers.
b. All cross members to form flush level hairline joints with the main runners.
c. Finish & color. Total grid system to be finished in baked enamel to match
the color of ceiling tile.
2. Hanger clips: Cold formed zinc coated steel secured to threaded rod hangers
with locking nuts and clip to carrier rails.
Suspended Ceiling Systems
All suspended ceiling systems comply with the requirements of BS EN 13964: 2004 section 4.5,
in relation to asbestos (no asbestos) and formaldehyde content (which must meet class E1 at a
minimum and be tested, classified and appropriately marked).
2.06 METAL EDGE MOLDING AND TRIM

B. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross

runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, pre-painted, electrolytically zinc
coated or hot-dip galvanized
2.04 METAL EDGE MOLDING AND TRIM

B. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if
not indicated, manufacturer’s standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit
acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet
of same material, finish and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension
system runners.
1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that
forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and
flange at exposed suspension member.
2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter

required to fit penetration exactly.
3. For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and

manufacturer’s standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of
exposed runners.
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, including structural framing to which

acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and
anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
Measure each ceiling are and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less than half-width panels at
borders and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic
requirements indicated, per manufacturer’s written instructions and CISCA’s “Ceiling
Systems Handbook.” The Acoustical tiles shall be applied in one level, so no
deformation in level will be allowed.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building’s structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other object within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or ceiling suspension
system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal
forces by bracing, counters playing, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within plenum products hanger
spacing’s that interfere with location of hangers at spankings required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members
and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads

within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceilings suspension members and hangers to support

above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to
structures or to inserts, eye screws or other devices that are secure and
appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age,
corrosion or elevated temperatures.
5. Secure flat, angle, channel and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate
framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws or other devices that are
secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type
of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to
deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion or elevated temperatures.
_____________________________________________________________________________
6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, post installed mechanical or adhesive
anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
9. Space hangers not more than 1200 mm. along each member supported directly
from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 200 mm
from ends of each member.
C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area
and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on molding and trim.
D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with
one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edged and fit accurately into suspension
system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and
penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.
1. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom
of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings
and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for
cleaning and minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that
cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of
damage.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. WALL COVERINGS 09710-1
__________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL

Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
This Section include the following:
1. Earth Friendly wall covering.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate
pattern placement, seams and termination points.
C. Samples: For each type of wall covering and for each color, texture and pattern
required.
D. Maintenance data.
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall covering and adhesives with

the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical
products applied with identical adhesives to substrates per test method indicated
below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84:
a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
2. Fire-Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings tested according to NFPA

265 and complying with Method A test protocol in IBC 2000, Section 803.5.1.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and
to demonstrate appearance and aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
installation.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time of Substantial Completion.
__________________________________________________________________
A. Furnish extra material described below, before installation begins, that match
products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with labels describing contents.
1. Rolls of Wall-Covering Material: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount

of each type installed.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide certificate for warranty of the following from the manufacturer: 5 years
against defect in material and workmanship from the Date of Handling over.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

2.02 WALL-COVERINGS PPRODUCTS
A. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from the same run number or
dye lot.
B. Material: Wall covering, shall combines the innovative use of textural, natural
fibrous polyester cellulose substrate (new non-woven) with clean, contemporary
colors and designs and shall combining aesthetics performance and earth
friendly.
Wall covering shall have environmentally friendly attributes as follows:
1. Free from PVC’s.
2. Free from VOC’s.
3. No heavy metals.
4. Printed with water based inks.
5. Free from harmful substances recycled content.
6. Renewable content.
7. Low waste factor during installation.
C. Type of Wall Covering: Provide the following wall covering for selection of
Engineer/Client:
__________________________________________________________________
1. WC-1 (Rice Paper Portfolio Collection) Shall emulates a simple and clean rice
paper effect with wide rang of colors, shall meets type II category V of ASTM
F793-98 and shall have the following durability characteristics:
a. Tear Resistance: 56.8 * 38
b. Tensile Strength: 76.8* 81.7
c. Fire Rating: Flame 25, Smoke 15
d. Permeability Rating: 68.36
2. WC-2 (Micro Fiber Portfolio Collection): Shall emulates a fibrous effect and
feature with wide range of colors & a suitable luster, shall meets type II
category of IV of ASTM F793-98 and shall have the following durability
characteristics:
a. Tear Resistance : 39 * 36
b. Tensile Strength: 62.5 * 58.6
3. WC-3 (Portfolio Collection) : Shall meets type II category V of ASTM F793-

98 and shall have the following durability characteristics:
a. Tear Resistance: 36.8 * 36.8
e. Color:
1. Group I
a. Potanical
b. Harmony
c. Crinkled Paper
d. Damask
2. Group II
a. Chelsea
b. Strip
c. Chelsea Companion
__________________________________________________________________
d. Swirl
4. WC- 4 (Portfolio Collection): Shall meet type I category IV of ASTM F793-98

and shall have the following durability characteristics:
a. Tear Resistance: 27.2 * 25.6
e. Color:
1. Metalic Glaze
2. Metalic Travertine
3. Deco Fleur
D. Colors, Textures and Patterns:
1. Colors, textures and patterns: To the later selection of the Engineer/Client

selected from manufacturer’s full range.
2. Allow for minimum four colors.
E. Location: Unless otherwise indicated at the drawings, shall be applied at V.I.P.

Lounge/Dining areas.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wall

covering and substrate application as recommended in writing by wall-covering
manufacturer.
B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer complying with require ements in

Division 09 Section “Painting” and recommended in writing by wall-covering
manufacturer for intended substrate.
C. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacture.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free
of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks and defects.
1. All plastered, concrete, gypsum board substrate of vinyl wall covering shall be
coated with two coat of putty in accordance with section 099100 painting.
__________________________________________________________________
2. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss and
eggshell finish with fine sandpaper.
3. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on substrate when tested with an

electronic moisture meter.
4. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply metal primer.
B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light
fixture trims and similar items.
C. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the

installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Don’t commence any wall covering works unless HVAC working for period not less
than 48 hours.
B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change rolls numbers at

partition breaks and corners.
C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll.
D. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges and no
visible shrinkage.
E. No horizontal seams are permitted.
F. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters and
other defects.
G. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match and tight closure. Butt
seams without any overlay or spacing between strips.
H. The installation shall compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendation of installation.
A. During progress of Work, clean off surplus adhesive using cleaners recommended
by manufacturer. Do not damage adjacent finished surfaces with adhesives and
cleaning agents.
B. Make adjustment within one month of time of Substantial Completion to finish area
at no additional cost to Client, including re-cementing, straightening, repairing
open joints, eliminating unevenness and replacement as required to conform
these Specifications.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. COMPOSITE ALUMINUM WALL AND CEILING PANELS 09720-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL

Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes factory-formed and assembled, composite aluminum panels for
wall & soffit assemblies, exterior percales and canopy work as indicated at the
drawings.
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design exterior metal wall panel system to withstand live, dead, lateral, wind, seismic,
handling, transportation and erection loads, imposed and other loads.
B. Prevent rain penetration through wall system. Incorporate means of draining to the
exterior.
C. Design exterior metal wall panel system to support weight and the wind load, positive
and negative, prevalent for the location of the building, but no less than windgust
pressure calculated from the International Building Code. To minimize the potential for
“dished” panels after loading, permanent set of the panel, measured normal to the
panel surface after application and removal of the design load, must not exceeding
L/800 of distance between supported edges of panel or distance between stiffeners
where stiffeners are used. Stiffeners, where used, must not deflect more than L/90 of
span under load.
D. Design exterior metal wall panel system to accommodate thermal movements of the
components and structural movements to provide and installation free of oil canning,
buckling, delamination, and failure of joint seals, excessive stress on fasteners or any
other detrimental effects.
E. Design composite panel system to prevent rattling and vibration of panels,

overstressing of fasteners and clips and other detrimental effects on the system.
F. Panel removal: System design to allow removal of individual panels within wall
system.
G. Design miscellaneous, additional structural framing members as required to complete

composite panel system, where not indicated on Contract Drawings.
H. The attachment face of subgirls supporting the panel system must not deflect
vertically more than 3 mm due to the dead load of the panel system.
I. Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses, based on testing according to ASTM E 330:
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. Wind Loads: Minimum design wind pressure as indicated on Drawings, acting

inward or outward and conforming to the requirements of the International
Building Code.
2. Deflection Limits: Withstand test pressures with deflection no greater than 1/240
of the span and no evidence of material failure, structural distress or permanent
deformation exceeding 0.2 percent of the clear span.
J. Thermal Performance: Provide insulated aluminum wall and ceiling panel assemblies
with thermal-resistance value (R-value) indicated when tested according to ASTM C
236 or ASTM C 518.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of composite panels and canopies, including plans,
elevations, sections, details and attachment to other work.
1. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages,

attachment system, trim, flashings, closures and accessories.
2. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
3. Submit shop drawings for sunshades indicating elevations, sections, details,

dimensions, materials, gauges and finishes. Shop drawings and design
calculations shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed to practice in
the Place of Work.
B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating composite panel installation

with penetrations and wall-mounted items.
C. Samples: Submit two 300 x 300 mm samples panels in the selected colors and finish
for approval.
D. Reports: Submit written flied inspection and test report results after each inspection.
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by

manufacturer.
1. Installer’s responsibilities include fabricating and installing composite panel

assemblies and providing professional engineering services needed to assume
engineering responsibility and perform the following:
1. Design of the composite metal panel system.
2. Review, stamp and sign shop drawings.
3. Conduct shop and field inspections and prepare and submit inspection
reports.
_____________________________________________________________________________
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide aluminum composite panels having

insulation-core materials with the following surface-burning characteristics as
determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
C. Mock-up:
1. Fabricate, deliver and erect a 1200 mm wide x 1800 mm high mock-up panel of
composite panel system in location acceptable to Consultant.
2. Demonstrate finish, anchoring devices, air/vapor retarded sealing and quality of

workmanship.
3. Mock-up may from part of final Work, if acceptable to Consultant. Remove and
dispose of mock-ups which do not form part of Work.
D. Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Handle aluminum Work in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B. Protect aluminum surfaces with strippable coating. Do not use adhesive papers or
sprayed coating which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
C. Do not remove before final cleaning of building.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
contents.
1. Composite aluminum cladding: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal 2 percent

of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern and size indicated.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form which manufacturer agrees to repair

or replace components of composite panel assemblies that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking or puncturing.
2) Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal

weathering.
_____________________________________________________________________________
2. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer’s standard form in which

manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace composite panels that show evidence
of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Composite Material:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Composite Aluminum Panel.
2. Two sheets of 0.51 mm thick aluminum 3003, sandwiching a core of extruded

thermoplastic formed in a continuous process without the use of glues or
adhesives between dissimilar materials. Panel thickness: 4 mm. Bond integrity
testing to adhere to ASTM D1781.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended
by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. All aluminum sheet to come from
the same patch.
C. Finish:
1. Exposed to view:
1) Anodized Coating System: Manufacturer’s standard shall performance

requirements of AAMA 2605.
2) Color: Unless otherwise directed by Engineer/Client, color to match color

Titanium C310.
2. Concealed Aluminum finish: Mill finish
D. Panel Sealant:
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape

with release-paper backing; 13 mm wide and 3 mm thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by aluminum composite

panel manufacturer.
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

_____________________________________________________________________________
2.03 THERMAL INSULATION FOR FACTORY-ASSEMBLED COMPOSITE PANELS
A. Isocyanurate Insulation: Modified isocyanurate foam using a non-CFC blowing agent,

board or formed-in-place type as indicated, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of 25 and 45, respectively.
1. Closed-Cell Content: 90 percent when tested according to ASTM D 2856.
2.04 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Glass-Matt Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M; Type X, 16 mm thick.
B. Substrate-Board Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates

complying corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening
substrate board with substrate.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
A. Steel Sheet Components, General: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for
metal and with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
B. Subgirts: C- or Z-shaped sections fabricated from 1.5 mm bare steel thickness, shop-
painted, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet.
C. Base or Sill Channels: 2.0-mm bare steel thickness, cold-formed, galvanized steel
sheet.
D. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.79 mm.
2. Depth: 22 mm.
E. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 1.37- mm bare steel thickness, with minimum 13-mm-
wide flange.
1. Depth: 19 mm.
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum

bare steel thickness of 0.79 mm.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.59- mm –
diameter wire, or double strand of 1.21-mm diameter wire.
F. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flanged of 32 mm, wall
attachment flange of 22 mm, minimum bare metal thickness of 0.45 mm, and depth
required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
_____________________________________________________________________________
A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts,, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded
studs and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide
exposed fasteners with heads matching color of composite panels by means of plastic
caps of factory-applied coating.
1. Fasteners for Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping 410 stainless or zinc-alloy steel

hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing
on weather side of composite panels.
2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex
washer head.
3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for

15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive
compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components and other deleterious impurities.
2.07 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANELS FOR SOFFITS
A. General: Provide factory-formed aluminum composite soffit panels designed to be

field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and
mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and
factory- applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weather tight
installation.
B. Aluminum Composite Soffit Panels: Match profile and material composite wall panels.
1. Finish: Match finish and color of wall panels.
2. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint.
2.08 ACCESSORIES
A. Composite Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete

composite panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner
units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
Match material and finish of composite panels unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as

composite panels.
2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-

foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 25-mm-thick, flexible
closure strips; cut or premolded top match aluminum panel profile. Provide
closures strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weather construction.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.45-mm thick, metallic –coated steel sheet. Provide
flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished
appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs,
_____________________________________________________________________________
corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals and
fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent composite panels.
C. Downspouts: Formed from 0.45-mm-thick, metallic-coated steel sheet; in 3-m long

sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. Finish downspouts to match
composite panels.
2.09 CANOPIES & PERCALES
A. Provide all require framing in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings for exterior
canopies & percales consisting of composite panels, glazing and sun shades.
B. Canopy & percale support framing to include the following:
1. Structural channel, rod and angle framing continuously welded and securely
anchored back to structure.
2. System to incorporate steel rod tie- backs in diameter to support required loads
secured with yoke and fork connections.
3. Design framing and anchorage to support assembly dead loads and live loads
and lateral loads.
4. Finish: Prime painted unless otherwise directed by Engineer/Client.
C. Fritted glass: In accordance with Section 08 80 00.
D. Sun shades (S1): In accordance with Section 10 99 90 – Miscellaneous Specialties.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish aluminum composite panels and accessories at the
factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer’s standard procedures and
processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated
by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and
structural requirements.
1. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners as required to maintain fabrication

tolerances and to withstand design loads.
B. Fabricate composite panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side

of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weather tight seals.
C. Where indicated, fabricate panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or

separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a
manner that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.
D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with

recommendations in SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” that apply to the
design, dimensions, metal and other characteristics of item indicated.
_____________________________________________________________________________
E. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by

applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
F. Maximum allowable tolerances shall be as follows:
1. Panel bow 0.8% panel dimension width and length.
2. Panel flatness:
1) Rises and falls across the panel, (local bumps and depressions) will not be
accepted.
2) 1.5 mm in a concave/convex direction, measured perpendicular to the normal

plane.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in
Division 07 Section “Section Metal Flashing and Trim.”
B. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring and other
miscellaneous panel support members and anchorage according to ASTM C 754 and
composite manufacturer’s written recommendations.
3.02 COMPOSITE PANELS INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install composite panels in orientation, sizes and locations indicated on

Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girls and subgirts, unless otherwise
indicated. Anchor composite panels and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provision for thermal and structural movement.
1. Field cutting of composite panels by torch is not permitted.
2. Rigidly fasten base end of composite panels and allow eave end free movement
due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels.
3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
4. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel
splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
5. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle)
and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated as necessary for
waterproofing.
6. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
_____________________________________________________________________________
B. Fasteners:
1. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces

exposed to the exterior and aluminum or galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces
exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive,
substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating, by applying rubberizes-asphalt underlayment to each contact
surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by composite panel
manufacturer.
1. Coat back side of aluminum wall panels with bituminous coating where wall
panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementations construction.
D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers and sealant where indicated and where
required for weatherproof performance of panel assemblies.
1. Seal panel end laps with double beads of type or sealant, full width of panel. Seal
side joints where recommended by composite panel manufacturer.
3.03 EXTERIOR CANOPIES & PERCALES
A. Install canopies and percales in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. Composite
panels and glazing shall be 1 piece full length.
B. Coordinate work of this Section with Section 08 44 13- Curtain wall for the
securement of structural steel canopy & percale framing to vertical curtain wall
mullions as indicated in drawings.
C. Prime surfaces and apply sealant around joints between materials in accordance with
manufacturer’s printed directions for a weatherproof assembly. Tool caulked joints
and remove excess sealant.
3.04 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight

mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings
and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete composite panel assembly including

trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure
strips and similar items.
2. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer’s written installation

instructions, and SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”. Provide
concealed fasteners where possible and set units true to line and level as
indicated. Install work with laps, joints and seams that will be permanently
watertight and weather resistant.
3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.

_____________________________________________________________________________
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as composite

panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer’s written installation
instructions. On completion of composite panel installation, clean finished surfaces as
recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during
construction.
B. After composite panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of
obstructions, dirt and sealant.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. PAINTING AND COATINGS 09900-1
PART 1: GENERAL
The tender documents and Addenda thereto form an integral part of this specification

Read carefully all other sections of specifications to determine extent of prime and finish
coats applied by others.
1. Section 07900: Sealants

2. Section 08200: Wood Doors
3. Section 09200: Plaster & Gypsum
4. Division 15: Mechanical
5. Division 16: Electrical
1. QUALIFICATION OF MANUFACTURER: The paint products shall be the .manufacturers

premium grade.
2. QUALIFICATIONS OF APPLICATORS: Contractor shall have minimum of ten (10) years

proven satisfactory painting experience of projects of similar size and nature.
3. Paints shall be factory manufactured and delivered to the site in unbroken containers
which show the designated name, formula, colour, manufacturer’s directions and name
of manufacturer all of which shall be plainly legible at the time of use. All paints shall be
products that have a minimum of 5 years satisfactory field service.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1. COLORS:
1. Paint colors will be selected by Engineer, from manufacturer's full color range
including light and dark tones.
2. SAMPLES:
1. Submit samples of various finishes for Engineer's approval, at least thirty days
before materials are required. Submit samples in triplicate for approval.
1. Deliver materials to site in sealed original containers with labels intact. Keep stored
materials covered at all times. The presence of any unauthorized material or containers
for such on the site shall be sufficient cause for rejection of all paint materials on the site
at that time.
2. Exercise extreme caution in the storage of materials to prevent fire or which may create
fire hazards. Thinners and solvents shall be stored in safety containers in accordance
with local requirements and governing fire and safety regulations.
1.6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1. All areas shall be clean and dust free before painting is commenced.
2. In all areas where interior painting and decorating work is proceeding, provide a
minimum of 269 lux lighting on the surfaces to be painted.
3. In all areas where interior painting and decorating work is proceeding, provide adequate
continuous ventilation. Relative humidity shall be below 85%.
4. Make thorough examination of drawings, details and schedules, determine the intent,
extent, materials, types of surfaces, locations and be fully cognizant of requirements.
5. Use sufficient clean drop cloths and protective coverings for full protection of floors,
furnishings and work not being painted. Protect components of building which do not
require painting from paint spotting and other soiling during painting process. Mask
adjoining work adjacent to work being painted or carefully cut in without overlaps.
6. Be responsible for damage to the Work of this section until the contract is complete and
accepted by the Client.
1.7. EXTRA MATERIAL
1. Provide five sealed cans, one litre capacity of each paint product in each colour used in
the work for maintenance use. Containers shall be new, clearly labelled with
manufacturer's name, type of paint, colour and colour number.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
1. Paint, varnish, stain, water & Fire Proof and fillers shall be of type and brand herein
specified, and shall be manufacturer’s premium grade products.
2. Provide safe and adequate equipment, scaffolding, ladders, plant, tools, brushes, rollers,
clean drop cloths and other items required for the completion of the Work.
3. Ensure the proper use of proprietary materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's
directions.
4. Undercoating and primers shall be made for the purpose by the manufacturer of the
finishing materials being used.
5. Paint shall dry to uniform, smooth, appearance. There shall be no laps, skips, high-
lighted spot or brush marks.
6. Stopping: (Putty filler): Cement based putty consistency proprietary filler product
obtained from an approved supplier, with compatible acrylic based topcoat.
2.2. PAINTING FORMULA SCHEDULE

1. Interior Paint Finish:
1.1 Acrylic Anti carbonation – 100% pure silicone acrylic water based product.
Area of use: For Parking Area Walls & Ceilings.
Surface: Internal & External Concrete, Cement Plaster and Wood Works.
Application Method: Roller, Spray, Brush
1. Primer: One coat of Acrylic Primer is based on a flexible Acrylic copolymer with excellent
binding properties and alkaline resistant.
Solid content: 42% ± by volume. Film Thickness: 55 microns DFT per coat.
Theoretical Spreading rate: 7.6 m2/liter, Dry to touch: 1 hour
VOC in g/l: <0.1 Test method Based on USEPA 24
2. Smoothening: One coat of Acrylic Texture is based on acrylic copolymer dispersion

product which specially formulated to be applied by spray to give a textured design. It is
easy to use with a very good adhesion for surfaces. It contains anti-fungal and anti-
bacterial additives.
Solid content: 60% ± by volume. Film Thickness: 650 microns DFT per coat
Theoretical Spreading rate: 0.9 m2/liter, Dry to touch: 4 hours
VOC in g/l: 10.3 Test Method Based on GC-FID
3. Topcoats: Two coats of Shield "Hard Top"are based on 100 % pure silicone acrylic water
based product. Designed to withstand the harassment of gulf weather. It provides fungi
and algae growth resistance, anti-carbonation properties, water repellant, low dirt pick
up, crack bridging ability up to 0.75mm, UV resistance, durable and long lasting coat.
Finish: Silky / Eggshell

Theoretical Spreading Rate: 11.4 m2/liter
Viscosity: 9-11 poises @ 25°C, Specific Gravity: 1.20 ± 0.05 gm/cm³
Dry to touch: 2 hours
VOC in g/l: 8.9 Test Method Based on USEPA 24
Independently tested for the following properties.
S/n Test Result

1. Moisture Vapour Transmission DH20 (Cm²S-¹)  8.68*10-5
Air Thickness Layer SD = 0.2
Optimum Breathing of Surface when SD ≤ 0.2
SD for Anti-carbonation Coating SD ≤ 4m
2. Chloride Ion Diffusion Coefficient 2.82 * 10-10 (Cm2/S)
3. Diffusion Resistance Coefficient  4.83 * 10-6
DC02 (Cm2S-1)  3.09 * 10-8
4. Kloper Criterion effective Anti-
carbonation when R greater than 50
5. Liquid Water Transmission 0.03 ≤ C0.1
6. Reduction in Water Absorption 99%
CONTINUED:
S/n Test Standard

1. Reduction in water absorption BS 1881 Part 122
(measured against a control concrete
sample)
2. Dry Film Thickness (two coats) on ISO 2808/ASTM D6132
concrete substrate
3. Adhesion (On concrete substrate) BS 1881 Part 207
4. Adhesion after exposure to salinated ASTM B117/ BS 1884 Part
fog (300 hours) 207
5. Resistance to humidity and heat BS 3900 F2
6. Resistance to impact ASTM D2794
7. Resistance to abrasion ASTM D4060
8. Resistance to salinated Fog (300 ASTM B117

hours)
9. Re radiating % of solar infra-red rays – ASTM E903/EN 673

(IR Re radiation)
10. Re radiating % of ultra violet rays – ASTM E903/ASTM G154

(IR Re radiation)
2. Steel Paint
General Purpose Epoxy with two component Polyurethane, UV Resistance

topcoat.
Surface: Internal & External – Concrete, Plaster Gypsum Board, Wood and Steel Works
1. Primer: One coat of General Purpose Epoxy Primeris a two pack based on a high
molecular weight epoxy resin. It provides Anti-corrosive primer for epoxy paints systems.
Theoretical Spreading rate: 10 m2/liter, Specific Gravity: 1.35 ± 0.05 gm/cm³
2. Intermediate: One coat of General Purpose Epoxyis a two pack based on a high
molecular weight epoxy resin. It provides high resistance to solvents, mineral oils, salt
solution, mild acids, alkalis, heavy duty and hard coat.
Solid content: 44% ± by volume.FilmThickness: 55 microns DFT per coat
3. Finishing: One coat of Polyurethane is a two component polyurethane (base + hardener)

top coat with excellent gloss, durability and gloss retention. It is highly chemical, water,
mechanical, dust & UV resistance.
Finish: Smooth, Glossy, Semi Gloss or Matt

Dry to touch: 1 hour
Physical Properties
• Gloss retention, Flexibility, Abrasion resistance and Water resistant are very
good.
• Solvent resistance and Chemical resistance are good.
VOC in g/l: 300 Test Method Based on USEPA 24

Solar Reflective Test
Test Method Unit Result
Solar Reflectance EN 410:1998 % 58.0

Corrected Normal Emissivity EN 673:1997 % 0.92
SRI for low wind condition ASTM E 1980:01 % 69.17
SRI for medium wind condition ASTM E 1980:01 % 68.60
SRI for high wind condition ASTM E 1980:01 % 67.96
Test method variation: Solar Reflectance was calculated by EN 410:1998,

Emissivity was calculated by EN 673: 1997
3. Exterior Paint System
Full Epoxy
Surface: Internal & External – Concrete, Plaster Gypsum Board, Wood and Steel Works
1. Primer: One coat of High Build Primer is a two pack high build primer based on a high
molecular weight epoxy resin. It provides water, abrasion, solvent and chemical
resistant.
Solid content: 54% ± by volume.FilmThickness: 90 microns DFT per coat
2. Intermediate: One coat of Epoxy Spray Texture is a two pack epoxy based product
specially formulated for decorative purpose & to be applied by special spray equipment
to give an attractive textured finish.
Solid content: 65% ± by volume.FilmThickness: 433 microns DFT per coat,
Theoretical Spreading rate: 1.5 m2/liter
3. Finishing: Two coats of Polyurethane is a two component polyurethane (base +

hardener) top coat with excellent gloss, durability and gloss retention. It is highly
chemical, water, mechanical, dust & UV resistance.
Finish: Smooth, Glossy, Semi Gloss or Matt

Dry to touch: 1 hour
Physical Properties
• Gloss retention, Flexibility, Abrasion resistance and Water resistant are very
good.
• Solvent resistance and Chemical resistance are good.
VOC in g/l: 300 Test Method Based on USEPA 24

Solar Reflective Test
Test Method Unit Result
Solar Reflectance EN 410:1998 % 58.0

Corrected Normal Emissivity EN 673:1997 % 0.92
SRI for low wind condition ASTM E 1980:01 % 69.17
SRI for medium wind condition ASTM E 1980:01 % 68.60
SRI for high wind condition ASTM E 1980:01 % 67.96
Test method variation: Solar Reflectance was calculated by EN 410:1998,

Emissivity was calculated by EN 673: 1997
4 Floor Coating System
Epoxy Floor Paint “Solvent Free” – pure epoxy two pack high performance self
leveling solvent free product.
Area of Use: For Concrete Floor and Parking.
Surface: Concrete Flooring

1. Primer: One coat of Epoxy Sealer is a two component pure epoxy clear composed of
high molecular weight epoxy resin and an aromatic polyamide hardener. It is
characterized by its high penetration and bonding properties. It provides water,
chemical and solvent resistance. Solid content 42% ± by volume. Film Thickness 40
microns DFT per coat.
VOC in g/kg: 107 Test Method Based on EPA 24A.
2. Finishing: Two coats of Epoxy Floor Paint "Solvent Free" is based on 100% pure epoxy
two pack high performance self leveling solvent free product, designed to resist
aggressive chemicals, water, mineral oils, most of diluted acids and alkalis. It provides a
hard impact and abrasion resistance with an excellent coating for floors which exposed
to different temperatures range were high is up to 60 0C and low is -25 0C.
Finish: Smooth, Glossy

Solid content: 100% ± by volume. Film Thickness: 250 microns DFT per coat.
VOC in g/L: 1.05 Test Method Based on USEPA 8260/5035–GC Method.
Independently tested for the following properties.
S/n Test Result Standard
1. Water Permeability Nil BS EN12390-8:2000
2. Adhesion Strength after 500 0.7 N/mm² ASTM D4541-09

hours in Salt Water
3. Adhesion Strength 0.8 N/mm² ASTM D4541-09
4. Chemical Resistance No characteristic changes ASTM D1308

5. Abrasion Resistance 74.7 mg ASTM D 4060-10
6. Bond Strength 2.9 N/mm² ASTM D 4060-10

7. Shore ‘A’ Hardness A/97/1 ASTM D2240-05 (2010)
8. Impact Resistance No crack or loss ASTM D2794-93
(2010)
9. Crack Bridging No cracking or loss ASTM C836/C836M-12

Ability@0.3mm
10. Salt Spray Test (300hrs) No cracking, blistering, ASTM B117-11
flacking or loss
11. Rapid Chloride Permeability Very Low ASTM C1202-Cl.10
5 Interior Gypsum Board, Cementitious Substrates, Internal Walls and

Ceilings & Above False Ceilings
Silicon Protective Paint (Hygiene) based on 100% pure Acrylic water based modified
with silicon binder Low VOC product.
Surface: Concrete, Plastered Wall, bricks and wood surfaces.
Application: Roller/Spray/Brush
1 Primer: One coat of Penetrating Primer (S.B) is based on special type of resin solvent
base product, specially selected to provide maximum penetrating properties with
excellent alkali resistance.
Solid content: 35% ± by volume, Film Thickness: 40 microns DFT per coat,
Theoretical Spreading rate: 8.75 m2/liter, Specific Gravity: 1.05 ± 0.05 gm/cm³
2 Finishing: Two coats of Silicon Protective (Hygiene) is based on 100% pure Acrylic water
based modified with silicon binder Low VOC product. It provides smooth finish film
containing special additive to give long term protection against deterioration of the dried
paint film due to the growth of bacteria, fungi and algae which they grow in hospital
atmosphere. It is a seamless, low sheen with inherent hydrophobic properties which
providing excellent resistance against water, oil, salt, detergents, petrol and diluted
acids. It has Crack bridging ability, UV Resistance, Anti-carbonation, durable and long
lasting coat.
Finish: Silky / Eggshell

Solid content: 40% ± by volume, Film Thickness: 35 microns DFT per coat
Theoretical Spreading Rate: 11.4 m2/liter Viscosity: 9-11 poises @ 25°C,
Specific Gravity: 1.20 ± 0.05 gm/cm³
Bacteriastatic&fungistatic protection of paint
Growth of Bacteria
Escherichia coli: Not observed

Staphylococcus aureus: Not observed
Candida albicans: Not observed
Rhodotorulamucilajinosa: Not observed
Aspergillus's Niger: Not observed
VOC in g/l: 2.16 Test Method Based on GC-FID.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1. CONDITIONS OF SURFACES
1. Prior to commencement of work of this section, thoroughly examine all surfaces
scheduled to be painted. Check all surfaces with electric moisture meter and do not
proceed if reading is higher than 12-15%.
2. Inspect surfaces to be coated for gouges, marks, nibs, and other defects and properly
prepare by patching, filling, smoothing or other surface preparation necessary to ensure
satisfactory finish.
3. Report in writing any condition adversely affecting this work.
4. Proceed with work only when surfaces and conditions are satisfactory for production of
first-class job. Remove dust, grease, rust, scale and extraneous matter, tool and
machine marks from all surfaces which could be detrimental to a satisfactory and
acceptable finish.
3.2. PREPARATION
1. Equipment adjacent to or against walls shall be disconnected by workmen skilled in

these trades and moved to permit the wall surfaces to be painted. Following completion
of painting the equipment shall be replaced and reconnected.
2. Prepare surfaces in accordance with current British Standards.
1. MILLWORK: Inspect millwork to assure surfaces are smooth and free from
machine marks and that nailheads have been countersunk. Seal all knots and
sapwood in surfaces to receive paint with a sealer compatible with the finish
specified. Sand smooth all woodwork which is to be finished and clean surfaces
free of dust before applying first coat. Fill nail holes, splits and scratches with non-
shrinking filler after first coat is dry. Where these occur on a transparent surface,
stain filler to match finish.
2. METAL: Clean unpainted and shop primed metal to provide satisfactory surfaces
to receive overcoats and provide permanent adhesion of coatings. Clean metal
surfaces with a mordant solution which shall be slightly acidic in nature and
containing solvents to remove grease, organic soaps and to provide a physical key
to new smooth metallic surfaces.
3. PLASTER:
Ensure that plaster is clean and free of extraneous matter.
3.3. APPLICATION
1. After the Contractor receives approval to a brand of paint, he shall use the primers,
undercoats, etc. manufactured or recommended by the manufacturers of that brand and
carry out the work in accordance with the manufacturers specification to give the best
result.
2. Mixing and application of paint shall be in accordance with the specifications of the
manufacturers concerned and to the approval of the Engineer.
3. The mixing of paints or paint related products of different brands before or during
application shall not be permitted.
4. Apply interior finishes to all surfaces scheduled to be finished. Finishes shall be free of
defects in materials and workmanship affecting appearance and performance.
5. Apply materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions and specifications

and be familiar with those directions and specifications.
6. Permit paint to dry before applying succeeding coats, touch up suction spots and sand
between coats with No. 00 sandpaper, Remove dust of sanding.
7. Finishes and number of coats specified are intended to cover surfaces completely. If
they do not, apply further coats until complete coverage is achieved as required, Paint
entire plane of areas exhibiting incomplete or unsatisfactory coverage. Patching will not
be acceptable.
8. Prime woodwork designed for painting as soon as possible after woodwork is delivered
to site.
9. Prime wood doors, reseal all cut edges of wood to be painted or finished, if material -
was cut subsequent to initial sealing, Seal or prime tops and bottoms of wood .doors.
10. Apply primer coats to ferrous metal surfaces that have not received shop coat of primer.
11. Touch up shop primed metal work after loose paint and scale have been removed.
12. Painting shall be three coat work throughout. Priming coat shall be colour toned lighter
than second coat; second lighter than finish coat; finish coat shall be approved colour.
Each coat shall be inspected by the Engineer.
3.4. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK

1. Finish paint primed mechanical and electrical equipment, electrical cabinets, louvers,
grilles, diffusers and other items with two coats of paint.
2. Prime and paint insulated pipes and ducts.
3. Co-ordinate the painting of pipes, ducts and coverings with mechanical contractor to
ensure that he does not install pipe colour banding, flow arrows and pipe identification
until the painting of the pipes, coverings and ducts has been done.
4. Remove grilles, covers, access panels for mechanical and electrical systems from
installed locations and paint separately, if these items are not factory finished.
5. Paint metal access panels while open and keep open until dry.
3.5. PATCHING
1. Do all retouching to ensure that the Work is handed over to the Employer in perfect
condition, free of runs, spatter, finger marks, rust, watermarks, scratches, blemishes or
other disfiguration.
3.6. CLEANING
1. Promptly as the Work proceeds and on completion of the Work, remove all paint where
spilled, splashed or spattered; during the progress of the Work keep the premises free
from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris; at
the conclusion of the work leave the premises neat and clean to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. COMPARTMENTS & CUBICLES 10150-1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes stock, manufactured toilet compartments.
B. Type and style includes metal, baked enamel finish, ceiling-hung toilet
compartments.
C. Style of screens includes wall-hung type.
D. Supports for attaching compartments to overhead structural system are

specified in a Division 5 Section.
E. Toilet Accessories, such as toilet paper holders, grab bars, and purse
shelves, are specified in another Division 10 Section.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work
include.
1. Steel – Baked Enamel Finish:
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness
and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stain, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other
imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
B. Steel sheets for Baked Enamel Finish: ASTM A 591, Class C, galvanized-
bonderized, of the following minimum thicknesses:
1. Pilasters (un-braced): 1.3 mm.
2. Panels and Screens: 1.0 mm.
3. Doors: 0.85 mm.
C. Concealed Anchorage Reinforcement: Minimum 2.8 mm, galvanized steel

sheet.
D. Concealed Tapping Reinforcement: Minimum 2.0 mm, galvanized steel

sheet.
E. Core Material for Metal Partitions: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening

honeycomb of impregnated Kraft paper in thickness to provide finished
dimension of 25 mm minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 31 mm
minimum for pilasters.
F. Pilasters Shoes and Caps: ASTM A 167, Type 302/ 304 stainless steel, not
less than 76 mm high, 1.0 mm, finished to matched hardware.
_____________________________________________________________________
G. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturers standard design, for attaching panels to

walls and pilasters, either chromium-plated, nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac")
or anodized aluminum.
H. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy duty

operating hardware and accessories of chromium-plated, nonferrous cast
alloy ("Zamac").
I. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of

stainless steel, chromium-plated steel, or brass, finished to match hardware,
with theft-resistant type heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip
galvanized, cadmium-plated, or other rust-resistant protective-coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated

for compartment system. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and
internal reinforcement to receive partition-mounted hardware, accessories,
and grab bars; as indicated.
B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 600 mm wide in-

swinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 800 mm wide (clear opening) out-
swinging doors for stalls equipped for use by handicapped.
C. Metal Toilet Compartments and Screens: Pressure laminate seamless face

sheets to core material and seal edges. Weld edges and corners with
exposed welds ground smooth.
D. Ceiling-Hung Compartments: Furnish galvanized steel anchorage devices

complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at
pilasters for connection to structural support above finished ceiling. Furnish
devices which are designed to support pilasters from structure without
transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide 76 mm high stainless steel trim
piece, finished ceiling. Finished to match hardware, at each pilaster.
E. Wall-Hung Screens: Furnish panel units of same construction and finish as

partition system panels.
F. Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment to comply with ANSI

A117.1 for handicapped accessibility and as follows:
1. Hinges: Cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up
to 90 degrees. Provide gravity type, spring-action cam type, or concealed
torsion rod type to suit manufacturer's standards.
2. Latch and Keeper: Recessed latch unit, designed for emergency

access, with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard unit, combination hook and

rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door hitting mounted
accessories.
_____________________________________________________________________
4. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit for out-swinging doors.

Provide pulls on both faces of handicapped compartment doors.
2.4 FINISH
Color: Custom color to match Employer Representative's sample.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. KITCHEN CABINET 10200 -1
____________________________________________________________________________
1 KITCHEN CABINETS
1.1 GENERAL
Kitchen cabinet as specified in the manufacturer list including all assembling

including porcelain counter top, Stainless steel sink, taps, traps, stop valves,
bedding waste fittings connecting to and supplying necessary hot and cold water,
services pipes & waste pipes.
1.2 SPECIFICATIONS
1.2.1 STRUCTURE
18 mm thick chipboard panels, white or gray anthracite non-toxic exterior melamine,

according E1 European norms on formaldehyde emission; Linen soft melamine
finish according CARB2 U.S.A. norms. All 4 edges have 0.8 mm PVC color
matching edge band with polyurethane glue, front edges have a rubber seal. Base
and column cabinets are 56.5 cm deep and built with an 8 mm hard back panel
which is recessed by 50 mm to allow electric wires and piping to be passed behind
without problems. Base units and columns 63.5 cm deep are built with a back panel
which is recessed by100 mm. Base units for sinks and for cooking hobs have a front
aluminum rail, all other cabinets have MDF coated rail. Wall cabinets are supplied
with hanging rail by default. Bottom of sink cabinets is lined with embossed
aluminum to protect it from water leaks.
1.2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A) SHELVES
Cabinet shelves are edge banded on 4 sides with front edge thick. 0.8 mm. They
can be positioned at different heights via standard pre-made holes. Shelves of
cabinets with glass doors are supplied as a standard with thick glass shelves. All
laminate shelves are provided with an anti-tipping locking device which is hidden in
the shelf thickness.
B) DOORS
All doors are 22 mm thickness natural veneered wood, except Factory metal tray
support that are 25 mm thickness.
C) DRAWERS AND BASKETS

Standard drawers and baskets are in metal coated grey full extraction "BLUM" with
soft closing system "Blumotion", deep 50 cm., they can be adjusted horizontally
and vertically, they slide softly and silently along stainless steel runners, built to
support dynamic heavy loads (30 Kgs - 65 kgs for elements 120 cm wide) with an
automatic closing system and they are guaranteed for over 100.000
opening/shutting cycles.
D) HINGES AND OPENING DEVICES

Blum soft-closing system 95° /155° opening. They can be adjusted along three
axes and have an automatic and rapid clip-on system. Tested for 100.000
opening/shutting cycles, realized to resist against steam and chemicals. Push-pull
opening is available for every hinge. Wall cabinets with lift-up doors (vasistas) are
equipped with the opening system Aventos by Blum.
E) CORNER UNITS
The dimensions of our corner units are increased by 4,3 cm (for example corner
base instead of being 105x60 cm. is 109,3x64,3 cm. or the corner wall cabinet
instead of 60x60 cm. is 64,3x64,3 cm.). This important innovation allows designer
S.T.H. KITCHEN CABINET 10200 -2
____________________________________________________________________________
to design a kitchen layout where he puts a corner unit and, beside it, units such as
base units with drawers, baskets, dishwashers etc. without having care of problems
of door opening.
F) PLATE DRAINERS
Plate drainers are supplied as a standard with an aluminum frame with chrome wire
grids with inox drop-saver basins. The possibility of changing the position of the
grid for dishes with the one for glasses gives the maximum flexibility in the
optimization of the internal space of the cabinet.
Upon request, the plate drainer can also be ordered with stainless steel coated side
panels and back panels for further water resistance and simpler maintenance.
G) ADJUSTABLE HANGING BRACKETS

The wall cabinet hanging brackets supplied with chrome plated cover as a
standard, are adjustable from the inside in the three different axes and are tested
for a maximum carrying capacity of 140 kg for each pair. They can also be used as
an anti-tipping fastening device on all cabinets.
H) FEET AND FRIDGE SPECIAL BOTTOM

Feet of base and column units are made of ABS (thermoplastic) with a weight
capacity of 400 kg, available in 8,10,12,15 or 18 cm with adjustable height.
The bottom of refrigerator column is made of performed techno-polymer which
withstands the dampness caused by the presence of any condensation water and
guarantees the correct airing of the electric appliance.
PLINTHS. Standard plinths are 8 to 15 cm high, made in PVC coated with a

protecting film in different colors or in aluminum with the lower rubber strip hidden
in the plinth to improve the aesthetical final result.
I) HANDLES AND HANDLESS CHANNEL

Handles shall be supplied with horizontal and vertical handless channel installed on
the structure of the base units, in this case with reduced doors to allow its opening.
The channel shall be metal finish.
Wall cabinets are supplied with a small g-bar installed in the front edge of the
bottom cabinet, with standard height doors.
1.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A) Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding verify that integral
locking devices are operating properly.
B) Touch-up marred finishes, but replace units which cannot be restored to factory-
finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or
furnished by manufacturer.
END SECTION
S.T.H. CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACKS 10210-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL

Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cubicle curtains, tracks and accessories.
1. Intravenous cubicle curtains, tracks and accessories.

2. Curtains
3. Curtain Tracks
A. NFPA, National Fire Protection Agency.

B. BS, British Standards.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit copies of manufacturer’s detailed technical data

for materials, fabrication and installation of cubicle curtain tracks specified
herein. Include catalog cuts of fittings, anchors, fastenings and accessories.
B. Samples:
1. Submit samples of cubicle curtains and tracks complete with rollers,

hooks, slides, end caps and gate for the approval of the Architect.
2. Submit 500 mm (width) by 1800mm (height) sample of patient cubicle
curtain of approval by Architect for selection of patterns and colors.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of cubicle tracks in each room, anchoring to

structure and required structural backing above ceiling.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery cubicle curtains and tracks in manufacturer’s original unopened

protective packaging.
B. Store to prevent soiling and physical damage.
C. Maintain protective covers on units until installation is complete.

_____________________________________________________________________________
1.06 COORDINATION
A. All work under this Section shall be closely coordinated with framing and
mechanical and electrical work and other work that affects or is affected by
work included herein.
A. Fabricator/Installer Qualification: Firm experienced in producing curtains similar

to those indicated for this Project that have a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Provide curtains that are certified to be anti-

microbial and flame resistant according to requirements of NFPA 701.
Permanently attach label to each curtain indicating whether curtain is
permanently and inherently flame resistant, or whether it will require re-
treatment after dry cleaning.
C. Mock-up:
1. Provide mock-up work for each type and color in accordance with
requirements specified in Contract Documents.
1.08 MEASUREMENTS
A. Take all necessary measurements to assure proper fitting and fabrication of

work. Variations of adjacent construction shall be taken into account and
properly provided for. All work under this Section shall be closely coordinated
with that of other trades whose work affects or is affected by the work included
herein to assure complete assemblies and installations.
A. Furnish 2 additional sets of curtains for each set installed. Provide each
additional set of curtains in a separate package, labeled describing contents.
B. Furnish additional curtain carriers equal to 5-percent of the number provided for
the first complete set of curtains.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provided a written warranty, signed and issued in the name of the Owner,
stating that the curtain and tracks is warranted against defects and failure
under normal usage for a period of five (5) years from date of Certificate of
Substantial Completion.
_____________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the manufacturers listed at the list of manufacturers.
2.02 CUBICLE CURTAIN ASSEMBLIES
A. Curtains and Curtain Tracks:
1. Cubicle curtain track assembly shall meet or exceed to items listed at the
list of manufacturers.
2. Curtain tracks shall be fabricated from 5 micron satin finish extruded

aluminum as indicated in drawings and as approved by Architect.
3. Cubicle Curtain Tracks and glider hooks (C8):

a. Tracks with P.V.C. dust covers and glider hooks at rate of 10 per meter,
complete with connecting bridge and end covers. Tracks, dust covers,
glider hooks, connecting bridge and end covers to be provided as
indicated in drawings.
b. Location: Refer to the drawings.
4. Patient Cubicle Curtains:
a. Curtain fabric shall be 100% flame retardant fibers or filament in

accordance with NFPA No.701. Fabric to have inherent anti-bacterial
properties.
b. Stitching and tailoring shall be of a high quality, suitable for heavy duty
applications and done by a reputable firm subject to approval.
c. Fabric Weight: Fabric weight to be not less than 200 g/m. Fabric to be
of stable dimensions and shrinkage shall not exceed 3% in each
dimension when repeatedly washed with hospital grade detergent.
d. Fabric Color: Fabric shall be either woven or printed in color patterns

decreasing upward. Color and pattern of fabric to be selected by
Architect from manufacturer’s full color range. Patient cubicles curtain
types as follows:
1) C1: To be selected by Architect.

e. Curtain track to be fixed at ceiling at height of 300 mm floor finish level.
f. Length of curtain in to be 20% more than the length of track hem.

_____________________________________________________________________________
g. Curtain shall be double folded 200 mm and heading to include triple

pocket heavy duty flame retardant tape. Each curtain to be one piece in
height.
h. Curtain length: To be actual dimensions on site, unless otherwise

indicated.
i. Netting Material: Mesh fabric fabricated from 100% polyester inherently

flame resistant with 50 mm same fabric banc along the top of the mesh,
complete with 13 mm stainless steel, two-piece, rolled-edge, rustproof,
gromments every 150mm machined into top hem.
1) Height: 450 mm of mesh on top of curtain.

2) Color: To match curtain color.
5. Full coordination between track and curtain in detailing, heading tape,

stitching and tailoring to be Contractor’s responsibility.
2.03 INTRAVENOUS ASSEMBLY
A. Track: Surface mounted, anodized extruded aluminum track with nylon glider.
B. Bottle-Holding Pendant: Adjustable shaft with vertical height adjustment,

equipped with not less than 4 stainless-steel arms.
C. Carriers: Ball bearing with chrome-plated steel hook.
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install tracks, curtains, and intravenous bottle-holding pendant and track in

accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. SIGNAGE 10400-1
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.0 SIGNAGE
Room directional, code required, egress and other signage, with hardware and other components as
required for a complete installation, appropriate for the project-specific conditions. The complete
system shall be fabricated with materials compatible with adjacent construction which satisfy the e-
performance requirement and life expectancy.
REQUIREMENTS
A. Standards:
1. Accessibility: ICC/ANSIA117.1.
2. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: NFPA 70, Article 100.
B. Materials:
1. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26M.
2. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 5005-H32.
3. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5.
4. Bronze Plate: ASTM B 36M.
5. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240M orASTM A 666, Type 316Lor alloy 2205.
6. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV
absorbing).
7. Polycarbonate Sheet: of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process,
coated on both surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating.
8. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 0.076 mm
with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior applications.
C. Plaques:
1. Cast Plaques: Provide castings free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects.
2. Etched Plaques: Provide metal sheet or plate foretching.
D. Dimensional Characters:
1. Cast Characters: Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded
mounting studs.
2. Illuminated Characters: LED lighting.
3. Cut-out characters: Provide characters with square-cut, smooth, ease edges. Comply
with the following requirements.
E. Panel Signs:
1. Interior Panel Signs.
2. Exterior Panel Signs.
3. Panel Sign Frames:
a. PVC Frames:Extruded, high-impact PVC plastic.
b. Extruded-Aluminum Frames: Mitered with concealedanchors and welded.
F. Changeable Message Inserts: Slide-in inserts or changeable panel inserts for use infixed
frames.
G. Tactile and Braille Sign: Text shall be accompanied by Grace 2 Braille, produce precisely
formed characters with square.
H. Cut edges free from burrs and cut marks: Braille dots with domed rounded shape.
I. Engraved Copy: Machine engrave letters, numbers, symbols and other graphic device into
panels sign on face indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth.
J. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 0.076 mm with
pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. Apply copy to exposed face of panel sign or finished
substrate.
K. Anchor and Insert: Provide hot-dip-galvanized or stainless steel anchor and inserts for
______________________________________________________________________________
exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work.
L. Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mountedsigns from extruded aluminum.
M. Finishes:
1. Aluminum: Baked Enamelor PowderCoat; AAMA 2603.
2. Bronze: Sheet or Plate: Medium satin(directionally textured) finish.
N. Stainless Steel: No. 4 Directional SatinFinish.
2.0 POST, PYLON AND PANEL SIGNAGE

Provide post, pylon and panel signs, with hardware and other components as required for
complete installation, appropriate for the project-specifications. The complete system shall be
fabricated with materials compatible with adjacent constructions which satisfy the performance
requirement and life expectancy.
REQUIREMENTS
A. Performance:
1. Wind Loads: 1436Pa.
2. Seismic: SEI/ASCE 7.
3. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.
4. Accessibility: ICC/ANSIA117.1.
5. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: NFPA 70, Article 100.
B. Aluminum:
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 5005-H32.
2. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5.
C. Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip and Bars: ASTM B 36M, alloy UNS No.C28000 (muntz metal, 60
percent copper).
D. Steel:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653M, Z275 coating.
2. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled, ASTMA 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed or
electrolyticzinc-coated, ASTM A 879M.
3. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316 oralloy 2205.
4. Steel Tubingor Pipe: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
5. Steel Members Fabricated from Plate or Bar Stock: ASTMA529M or ASTMA572M, 290-
MPa minimum yield strength.
E. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).
F. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 0.076mm with
pressure-sensitive adhesive backing.
G. Panel Signs:
1. Message Panel Materials:
a. Aluminum Sheet.
b. AcrylicSheet.
2. Panel Sign Frames:
a. Extruded-Aluminum Frames: Mitered with concealedanchors and welded.
b. Steel Sheet: Painted.
c. Stainless-Steel Sheet.
d. CornerCondition: Squareor rounded.
e. Frame Type: Stationary frame, hinged frame or mounted on posts.
______________________________________________________________________________
H. Hollow-Box-Type Panel Signs: Frame message panel with formed aluminum sheet or
extruded hollow-box-type frame with ends flanged to engage slots in posts or attached to
posts with extruded-aluminum fittings.
1. Message Panel Materials:

a. Aluminum Sheet.
b. AcrylicSheet.
2. Corner Condition: Square or rounded corners.
3. Mounting: Between or around posts.
4. Illuminated-Sign Units: LED lighting.
5. Multiple-Message-Bar-Type Inserts: Changeable messages in the form of slide-in
aluminum or acrylic sheet changeable inserts for use in-fixed frames.
I. Posts: Fabricated for direct-burial or baseplate mounting
1. Aluminum Posts: Extruded-aluminum tubing, with vertical slots to engage sign panels.
Include post caps, fillers, spacers, junction boxes, access panels and related
accessories required for complete installation.
2. Steel Posts: Square steel tubing. Include post caps, fillers, spacers, junction boxes,
access panels and related accessories required for complete installation. Hot-dip-
galvanize post assemblies after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 123M.
J. Pylon Structure:
1. Base: Provide pylon signs with integral base consisting of channels, angles, plates or
other fittings. Drill holes in members for anchor-bolt connection.
2. Internal Frames: Hot-dip galvanize steel; ASTM A 123M.
3. External Frames: Externalaluminum framing system, with squareor rounded corners.
K. Anchors and Inserts: Provide non ferrous- metal or hot- dip galvanized anchors and inserts for
exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled -in- place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be
set into concrete or masonry work.
L. Finishes:
1. Aluminum:
a. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3- coat fluoropolymer finish, AAMA2605;
containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear
top coat. Prepare, pre-treat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply
with coating and resin manufacturers 'written instructions.
b. Baked-Enamel Finish: AAMA 2603.
2. Bronze: Medium- Satin Finish, Lacquered finish, M32-O6x directionally textured,
medium satin, with clear organic coating.
3. Steel:
a. Galvanized.
b. Baked-Enamel Finish: AAMA 2603.
4. Stainless Steel: No. 4 finish.
***END OF SECTION***
S.T.H. FIRE EXTIGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10522-1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Fire extinguishers.
2. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
3. Fire hose valve cabinets.
4. Combination fire extinguisher/ fire hose valve cabinets.
5. Mounting brackets.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work
includes.
B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets for this project are based upon the #7225-F-HB (-
7902) cabinet for extinguishers as manufactured by Potter-Roemer, Inc.
C. Fire Hose Valve Cabinets for this project are based upon the #8220-F-B-HB
(7915) cabinet for valves as manufactured by Potter-Roemer, Inc.
D. Combination Fire Extinguisher/ Hose Valve Cabinets for this project are
based upon the #8225-F-B-HB (-7901-7915) cabinet for valves and
extinguishers as manufactured by Potter-Roemer, Inc. Naming of
manufacturer is not intended to limit selection. Other equipment similar in
appearance as described below and meeting specification may be proposed
for use on this project.
All gaseous fire suppression system to be installed within the project site
boundary have an ozone depletion potential (ODP) of zero
2.2 FIRE EXTIGUISHERS
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet, each

combination extinguisher/ hose valve cabinet, and other locations indicated,
in colors and finishes selected by the Employer Representative from
manufacturer's standard, which comply with requirements of governing
authorities.
1. Abbreviations indicated below identify extinguisher types related to UL

classification and rating system and not necessarily to type and amount of
extinguishing material contained in extinguisher.
B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A:10: B:C, 2.3 kg. Nominal
capacity in enameled steel container. Provide for all locations except kitchen
areas, as noted below.
_____________________________________________________________________
C. Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 10B:C, 2.3 kg. Nominal capacity, in enameled
steel container. Provide for kitchen areas only.
2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Provide brackets designed to prevent accidental dislodgement of extinguisher,

of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in plated
finish.
1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets and for those
located in cabinets, where indicated or required.
2.4 FIRE EXTIGUISHER CABINETS, FIRE HOSE VALVE CABINETS, AND

COMBINATION EXTINGUISHER/ HOSE VALVE CABINETS:
A. General: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets and combination extinguisher/

hose valve cabinets where indicated, of suitable size for housing fire
extinguishers of types and capacities indicated, plus fire hose valves
specified in Division 15 where applicable.
B. Construction: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel box (tub), with trim,

frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style
indicated. Weld all and joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter
door frames.
C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for mounting conditions indicated, of the following

type:
1. Recessed: Cabinet box (tub) fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth to

suit style of trim indicated.
D. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and
ground smooth.
1. "Trim-less": One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame

recessed in surrounding wall surface with frame face covered by
overlapping door, with finished door surface flush with finished wall
surface.
E. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard finish, unglazed,

hollow steel flush panel door construction, coordinated with cabinet types and
trim styles selected.
F. Identify extinguisher cabinets and combination extinguisher/ hose valve

cabinets with horizontally arranged, black, adhesive backed vinyl die cut
lettering spelling "FIRE EXTIGUISHER" applied to door. Provide additional
line of lettering spelling "FIRE DEPT. VALVE" for boxes containing only fire
hose valves. Provide lettering to comply with requirements indicated for letter
style, color, size, spacing, and location or, if not otherwise indicated, as
selected by the Employer Representative from manufacturer's standard
arrangements.
G. Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with black letter decals spelling 'FIRE

EXTIGUISHER" applied to wall surface. Letter size, style, and location as
selected by the Employer Representative.
_____________________________________________________________________
H. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design, hollow metal flush door panel
without glazed opening.
I. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of

proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
Provide either lever handle with cam action latch, or door pull, exposed or
concealed, and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge
permitting door to open 180 deg.
2.5 STEEL FIRE DISTINGUISHER AND VALVE CABINET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces in compliance with SSPS-SP 1

to remove dirt oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint
bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel in
compliance with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8
(Picking).
B. Factory-Priming for Finish Painting: Apply shop primer specified below

immediately following surface preparation and pretreatment.
1. Shop Priming for Finish Painting: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's

standard, fast-curing, lead-free, "universal" primer, selected for
resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with
substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated, and for
capability to provide a sound foundation for applied topcoats despite
prolonged exposure.
C. Baked Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply

manufacturer's standard 2-coat baked enamel finish consisting of prime coat
and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's instructions for
application and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
1. Color and Gloss: Manufacturer's standard color and gloss for interior
and exterior of cabinet, white color.
END OF SECTION
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY SPECIALTIES 10800-1
_________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL

5. Sections 09900: Painting and Coatings
1. The Contractor executing work of this section shall have a minimum of five (5) years
continuous experience in successful manufacture/fabrication and installation of
work of type and quality shown and specified.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions. Show and describe in
detail, materials, finishes, dimensions, details of connections and fastenings,
elevations, plans, sections, and any other pertinent information.
1.5 STORAGE, DELIVERY, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
1. Coordinate deliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange ahead for
off the ground, under cover storage location. Do not load any area beyond the
design limit.

damage. Protect materials with suitable non-staining waterproof coverings.
3. Store material in original, undamaged containers or wrappings with manufacturer's

seals and labels intact.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
1. Products are listed as a standard of quality. Manufacturers are required to certify to

meet the intent of the specifications in terms of design, function, quality of
materials and workmanship.
2. All Sanitary wares shall comply with Estidama requirements with regard to flow and
pressure for all mixers and dual flushing for all water closets, contractor has to
comply with the following sanitary ware performance:
3. Vitreous China shall conform to BS 3402: 1969 (high grade ceramic ware used for
sanitary appliances).
4. Stainless Steel Fixture Shall Confirm :

_________________________________________________________________________
Material : Stainless steel - chrome/nickel V2A

Material-No.:1.4301
DIN-Designation : X 5 CrNi 189
AISI : 304
Composition : 18 Cr/10 Ni
Characteristics:very good level of corrosion-resistance
8 - 10 % addition of nickel improves the corrosion-resistancenon-magnetic
Materials thickness: Depend on the items 0.8 - 2 mm.
5. All fittings and accessories are to be to the approval of the Hospital Authority and
the Engineer.
Quality Standards
Above all a functional and economic use of water, hence, developed a number of water
saving closet plans and w.c. suits, that flush with only 6 litres of water.
Guarantee
Sanitary guarantee a durable and reliable quality of all vitreous-china sanitary ware that is
manufactured and sold by our company.
SANITARY UNITS ACCESSORIES
a – cistern for wall hung WC

Rapid SL flushing cistern for Wall Hung WC GD 2 with small maintenance access 1.13 m installation
height for on-the-wall installations or studded walls powder coated steel frame, self for dry-
cladding, completely with fixed connections for single or rail installation quick adjustment, lockable
fixing material TÜV approved 2 WC fixing bolts fixing device for ceramic distance of fixing bolts
180/230 mm outlet bend Ø 80 mm, depth adjustable reducer Ø 80/100 mm inlet and outlet
connecting set flushing cistern GD 2, 6 - 9 l adjustment ex factory 6 l and 3 l pneumatic discharge
valve offering modes of operation: dual flush start/stop or non-interruptible water supply from
left/right or back low noise (group I acc. To German Noise Specification) DIN approved insulated
against condensation ½" water supply connection including integrated angle valve and push fit
flexible hose union no tools required for the installation of the inspection shaft incl. protection
during construction phase for vertical or horizontal use without accessories for on-the installation
self-supporting pre-assembled (6/3l)orcl. Water consumption shall be 6.0/4.0 liters/flush cycle
(full/low) as part of PW-R1 Minimum interior water use reduction in Abu Dhabi Urban Planning
Council's Estidama Pearl Rating System.
_________________________________________________________________________
b - Lever basin mixer

Infra-red electronic basin mixer battery supply6V lithium-battery, type CR-P2 single hole
installationrapid installation systemexternal batterysafety stop after 60 sec.multistage
battery status displayfunctions to activate with remote control 36 206 and with IR sensor:
3 min temporary off-function (cleaning mode)automatic flushing after 1 or 3 days without
usethermal disinfection for 3.5 or 11 minbattery capacity request possible mixing device
with temperature limiteradjustableflow limiter 6 l/minflexible connection hoses with
non-return valve 3/8"dirt strainersCE approvedtype of protection IP 56technology for less
water and perfect flow chrome finish.
Water consumption shall be 6.0 liters/minute at 413.7 KPa as part of PW-R1: Minimum
interior water reduction in Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council's Estidama Pearl rating
system.
C - Ablution - Electronic wall tap mixer

Electronic wall Spout with Integrated sensor, vandal proof aerator to be combined with
electronic boxes or thermostat kit. Water flow regulator shall be 6.0 liters/minute at 413.7
KPa as part of PW-R1: Minimum interior water reduction in Abu Dhabi Urban Planning
Council's Estidama Pearl rating system.
_________________________________________________________________________
TOILET ACCESSORIES
The chrome finish on the entire range does not alter overtime and is granted certificate.
Articles not made of brass are AISI 304 Stainless Steel, a guarantee of strength and
durability should be cover. Also consider the excellent quality of mirrors which silvering
has a 10 years guarantee.
a – Mirror :
size = 60 x 80 x 0.6 cm.
Complete with stainless steel hunger & screw with adjustable top lock.
b – Wall bracket :
constructed of brass chrome.Complete with all screw & nuts.
c – Grab – bar: Grab rail for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin finished, rough
polishing for better surface feel, 32 mm pipe diameter, material thickness 1.2 mm,
inspected and certified product, with two stainless steel covers for hidden mounting, incl.
stainless steel screws and dowels.Size – 60cmxØ32mm in diameter
d – Cloth wall bracket:Double hook for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin
finished, 18 mm pipe diameter, drilled hole on bottom for fixation, incl. stainless steel
screws and dowels.Material thickness: 18.00 mm
Surface finish: satin finished
Gross weight: 0.1 kg
Net weight: 0.1 kg
Type of fixing: screw
Type of mounting: wall mounting
Number of hooks: 2
Overall width: 69 mm
Overall height: 18 mm
Overall depth: 60 mm
e – Soap holder : Soap dish for wall mounting, 304 stainless steel, round covers with
drilled hole on bottom for fixation, incl. stainless steel screws and dowelsSurface finish:
satin finished
Net weight: 0.5 kg
_________________________________________________________________________
f – Soap dispenser :Soap dispenser for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin
finished, material thickness 0.8 mm, folded front cover, cylinder lock with Franke standard
key, suitable for liquid soaps and lotions, 1 liter soap tank, push button on front, incl.
stainless steel screws and dowels.
Filling quantity: 1.00 liter
Material thickness: 0.80 mm
Net weight: 1 kg
g – Tissue dispenser : Jumbo roll holder for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin
finished, material thickness 0.8 mm, cylinder lock with Franke standard key, closed round
casing with inspection window, paper withdrawal over two tear-off edges, for 1 roll with
max. Ø 260 mm, incl. stainless steel screws and dowels.
Filling quantity: 1.00 rolls
Maximum depth/diameter of consumable: 260 mm
Maximum width of consumable: 105 mm
Spindle: yesMaterial thickness: 0.80 mm
h – Paper holder : Toilet roll holder for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin
finished, material thickness 0.8 mm, folding cover, for 1 roll with max. Ø 130 mm, incl.
stainless steel screws and dowels
Filling quantity: 1.00 rolls
Maximum depth/diameter of consumable: 150 mm
Maximum width of consumable: 130 mm
Spindle: yes
_________________________________________________________________________
o – Waste receptacle :Waste bin for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin finished,
material thickness 0.8 mm, selfclosing lid, folding bag holder, cylinder lock with Franke
standard key, approx. 30 liter capacity, incl. stainless steel screws and dowels.
Net weight: 4.8 kg
Type of mounting: wall mounting
Lock: key-lock
Filling volume: 30.000 liter
Lid: yes
Bag holder: integrated
p – Multi support arm with folded projection:Foldable grab rail without toilet roll holder
for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin finished, rough polishing for better surface
feel, 32 mm pipe diameter, material thickness 1.2 mm, prevention against unmeant
folding, gum rubber stop absorber, inspected and certified product, 4 mm thick mounting
plate with three fixing holes, incl. stainless steel screws and dowels.(600mm)
Bending angle: 180.00
q – Safe hand grips support : Grab rail for wall mounting, stainless steel, surface satin
finished, rough polishing for better surface feel, 32 mm pipe diameter, material thickness
1.2 mm, inspected and certified product, with two stainless steel covers for hidden
mounting, incl. stainless steel screws and dowels.
Pipe diameter: 32
Hidden fixing: yes
1.) Wall hung closet-part type:

Wash-down WC without Flushing Rim, 6 Liter Wall Hung for concealed cistern or
concealed pressure flush including hidden wall fixing an extended outlet connector is
required for installation. Combination with prewall element. CE,EN 997-CL1-6A-6C, EN33
_________________________________________________________________________
Water consumption shall be 6.0/4.0 liter/flush cycle (full/low) as part of PW-R1 Minimum interior
water use reduction in Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council's Estidama Pearl Rating System.
2.) Wall hung Bidet :

Wall hung Bidet only for single-hole taps with flexible connection pipes
CE, DIN EN 14528-CL25 –EN36
Water consumption shall be 6.0 liters/minute at 413.7 KPa as part of PW-R1: Minimum
interior water reduction in Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council's Estidama Pearl rating
system.
3.) Wall hung Wash Basin Type 1:

Hand Rinse Washbasin Wall Hung with Semi-pedestal with Tap Hole without Overflow
500x380mm. Water consumption shall be 1.9 liters/minute at 417.7 KPa as part of PW-R1:
Minimum interior water reduction in Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council's Estidama Pearl
rating system.
_________________________________________________________________________
4.) Under Counter Washbasin:

Plan Under counter washbasin without tap-hole bench, with over flow
500x380mm. Water consumption shall be 1.9 liters/minute at 417.7 KPa as part of PW-R1:
Minimum interior water reduction in Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council's Estidama Pearl
rating system.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. MIRROR UNITS 10810-1
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Type of mirror units required include frameless mirrors.
B. Toilet Accessories are specified in Division 10 "Toilet Room Accessories"

section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Mirror Glass: 6.4 MM thick, Type 1, Quality q2, conforming to FS DD-G-451,

with silvering, copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with
FS DD-M-411.
B. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 386, hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Edge Protection: Fabricate mounting devices for glass mirrors to

accommodate wood, felt, plastic, or other glass edge protection material.
B. Backing: Provide mirror backing and support system which will permit rigid,
temper-proof glass installation and prevent accumulation of moisture, as
follows:
1. Air space backing provided by resilient pads or grommets attached to

hanger assembly.
C. Hangers: Provide system of mounting mirror units which will permit rigid,
temper-proof and theft-proof installation, as follows:
1. One-piece galvanized steel wall hanger device with spring action locking
mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
END OF SECTION
S.T.H SHEDS 10900-1
________________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1. General
Shading System for Car Sheds and around the building cover shall be glass reinforced
plastic units consisting of single homogeneous laminate of glass fiber reinforced polyester
resin, with a uniform gel finish on the exposed surfaces, to sizes, shapes, colors and textures
as detailed on drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
The support structure shall be of galvanized steel pipe columns with "I" beams and tubular
welded sections, welded to each other as detailed on drawings. The galvanized steel support
structure shall be prepared, primed and painted with epoxy paint to a DFT of minimum 290
microns as specified under painting to ferrous surfaces.
2. Quality Assurance
The manufacture and assembly of all GRP elements shall be executed by a specialist firm
having at least 5 years’ experience in the manufacture and installation of materials described
herein. The specialist shall provide evidence of successful completion of similar works for the
approval of the Engineer before commencing any work.
All laminating shall be carried out in a well ventilated, temperature and humidity controlled
environment.
Full quality control records are to be kept and full records made available on request. The
structural steel support structural shall be as specified under Structural Steel Work.
3. Submittals
The Contractors shall submit the following for the approval of the Engineer.
Large scale shop drawings.
Sample of all materials and minimum 60 x 60 size of finished product.
Shop drawings and design calculation as applicable.
4. Materials
The materials for the GRP units shall be as follows:
Gelcoat: Gelcoat shall be a thixotropic isophthalic polyester gelcoat resin ultra violet
stabilized with excellent durability and resistant to water and chemicals and conforming to BS
3532:1962. All covers elements shall be in compliance with ASTM E1980 - 01 (Standard
Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces)
and all shed shall have a minimum Solar Reflective Index (SRI) of 29.
Laminating Resin: Laminating resin shall be a pre-accelerated, general purpose polyester

resin, conforming to BS 3532:1962 to suit the requirements of the spaces they are used in, to
meet the Authorities requirements and to meet the relevant codes and standards.
Glass Reinforcement: Glass reinforcement shall be Chopped strand mat of continuous

filament E glass manufactured to BS 3496:1973. 450 gm/m2 piles.
5. Product
GRP Elements: GRP Elements shall consist wholly of glass reinforced polyester of minimum
6 mm thickness with a tolerance of ± 1 mm. It shall contain a minimum of 30% glass fibre
reinforcement with the remaining 70% comprising of polyester resin and an external gel coats
of minimum 0.4 mm thickness. The actual thickness shall be designed to meet the wind
loads, spans to be covered, fixing details, thermal expansion and other relevant requirements
in accordance with the relevant codes and standards and local authorities dictates. It shall be
S.T.H SHEDS 10900-2
________________________________________________________________________
the Contractors responsibility to submit design details and calculations to the approval of the
Engineer.
Tolerances: All panels shall be manufactured in accordance with the following tolerances
All resin shall be stored in the dark in the containers in which they are supplied. Storage
temperature shall be as per the resin manufacturers' recommendations. The containers shall
not be opened until required.
Colour: Colour shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The light
fastness to be 6 or 7 in accordance with BS 1006:1961 on a 2-7 scale. All gel coat used for
the Contract shall be manufactured and pigmented in one batch.
The colour shall not only be uniform throughout the gel coat and polyester resin layers in
each element, but also between all interchangeable components or elements.
6. Manufacture
The elements shall be factory produced using conventional hand lay and shall be cured to
give a dimensionaly stable and stress-free product. The mould shall be so designed as to
enable production of a flat element of uniform thickness without any surface blemishes such
as blowholes, air inclusions, voids and surface undulations.
The element-design shall be based on the modular principle of construction, whereby

common components are interchangeable and flexibility in assembly of the components at
site is assured.
Fixing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer.
Surface Characteristics: The GRP element surface shall be pore-free with a light textured
stain finish and without irregularities, cracks, entrapped air bubbles, flow-marks, visible joints,
parting lines and high spots. The surface shall be perfectly flat and plain when tested with
500 mm straight edge. When tested in accordance with the requirements of ASTM-D2583
(hardness test for glass fibre reinforced polyester by means of the Borcol impresser), it shall
S.T.H SHEDS 10900-3
________________________________________________________________________
exhibit a punch resistance of minimum 35 Borcol hardness corresponding to a rock well

hardness of D85.
Draining The element shall be fixed to provide proper draining of water through PVC spots
provided at suitable location as per the approved shop drawing
TENSIONED FABRIC STRUCTURE
1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1 This Section includes PVC coated polyester-fabric covering for Shaded areas of
Walkways and Public open space as indicated on drawings.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
.1 Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

.2 Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing
.3 Section 09 90 00 - Painting
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.4.1 Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4.2 Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for fabric covered panels,
including plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. Include
attachment devices; and details at head, base, joints, corners, and intersections with
other components. Indicate panel edge and core materials.
1.4.3 Samples: For the following products. Prepare Samples from the same material to be
used for the Work.
.1 Material:
a. Fabric: Full-width 1000-mm-long Sample to be used for the Work, with
specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of fabric.
.2 Fabric Panel Edge: 300-mm-long Sample showing edge profile.
.3 Attachment Device: Full-size Sample.
.4 Sample Panels: No larger than 1000 by 1000 mm. Show joints and attachment
methods.
1.4.4 Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures.
1.5.1 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in-service performance.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.6.1 Store materials inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and
masonry, and protected from moisture, soiling and abrasion.
S.T.H SHEDS 10900-4
________________________________________________________________________
1.7.1 Field Measurements: Where items of work are indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delayning of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Refer to approved List of Manufacturers.
2.2 FABRIC MEMBRANE
2.2.1 MATERIAL
Fabric panels shall be constructed out of Valmex FR1000 Mehatop F fabric,

manufactured by MEHLER of Germany or equal approved. This is a type III PVC-coated
Polyester fabric with PVDF lacquer finish on both faces. Its main properties are:
Tensile strength : Warp/Weft 6000/5500 N per 5cm strip as per DIN 53354.
Tear strength : Warp/Weft 900/800 N per 5 cm strip as per DIN 53363.
Total Weight : 1050 g/m2 as per DIN 53352.
Finish : PVDF lacquer on both sides.
Colour : Off white
All covers elements shall be in compliance with ASTM E1980 - 01 (Standard Practice for
Calculating Solar Reflectance of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces) and
shall have a minimum Solar Reflective Index (SRI) of 29.
2.2.2 DESIGN
The stresses in the fabric due to initial tension (pre-stress), self weight and wind loads
(140km/hr gust wind speed) shall be checked by a structural engineer experienced in
the design of fabric structures using a suitable finite element design analysis package.
The fabric stresses shall be checked, and reinforcing added where required keeping
fabric stresses to allowable values. The supporting cables, hardware and steel structure
shall be designed for the loads calculated by the analysis.
2.2.3 DETAILING
Fabric shall be reinforced at corner plates, bale rings and other locations as specified by
the patterning engineer, so as to avoid over-stressing the fabric during erection and
service.
2.2.4 FABRICATION
The fabric seams, pockets and reinforcing shall be welded with special RF (Radio
Frequency) welding machines operated by experienced operators, and working under a
quality assurance system. Seam welds shall develop a minimum of 90% of the tensile
strength of the fabric. Welding shall produce a smooth uniform surface, with a minimum
of wrinkles and abrasions.
S.T.H SHEDS 10900-5
________________________________________________________________________
2.3 STEEL CABLES
2.3.1 MATERIAL
Steel cables shall be made of 1x19 galvanized strand, to AS2841-1986, with a breaking
strength of 1570 MPa. Cable end fittings to be in Grade 316L stainless steel.
2.3.2 FABRICATION AND ERECTION
Cable terminations shall be hydraulically swaged by experienced operators, working

under a quality assurance system. Cable terminations shall be able to develop 90% of
the strength of the connected cable. Cables and terminations shall not be damaged
during erection. Any cable with a permanent kink shall be replaced.
2.4 STRUCTURAL STEEL
2.4.1 GENERAL
Structural steelwork shall comply with BS5950.
2.4.2 MATERIAL
Steel sections shall be Grade 43, with yield strength = 275MPa, complying with BS4848,
unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
Bolts and nuts shall be Grade 8.8, complying with BS4190 or BS3692, unless noted
otherwise on the drawings.
2.4.3 FABRICATION
Unless noted otherwise on the drawings:-

.1 Join all components with 6mm continuous fillet weld.
.2 Plates are 10mm thick.
.3 Cap plates for hollow sections shall be 6mm thick.
.4 Exposed edges and corners shall be ground to a radius of approximately 2mm.
2.4.4 CORROSION PROTECTION
Below is the proposed corrosion protection system for all structural steel components:
.1 Sandblast all steel surfaces to SA2½ .
.2 Apply one coat of inorganic zinc-rich primer to 60µ DFT.
.3 Apply two coats of high-build epoxy to 160µ DFT.
.4 Apply one topcoat of polyurethane to 50µ DFT.
.5 Total protection cover to be minimum 260µ DFT.
2.5 STRUCTURAL STEEL WELDING
2.5.1 MATERIALS
Welding electrodes shall be Grade E51 to BS639.
2.5.2 WORKMANSHIP
Welding shall comply with BS5950 and BS5135.
Welding shall be carried out by qualified welders with evidence of having been trained
and assessed for competence by a recognized authority.
S.T.H SHEDS 10900-6
________________________________________________________________________
2.5.3 INSPECTION
All welds shall be visually inspected. 10% of full strength butt welds shall be
ultrasonically tested to BS3923. Weld inspection shall be carried out by qualified
operators with evidence of having been trained and assessed for competence by a
recognized authority.
2.6 WARRANTY
2.6.1 The whole structure will be covered by a Ten years warranty covering its structural
integrity.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 Examine fabric, substrates with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fabric systems.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 The installation procedure shall be designed to avoid damaging the fabric, damaging the
steelwork, damaging the steel paint system, or putting workers in unsafe situations. The
fabric shall be tensioned and adjusted to produce a taut, smooth surface, as free of
wrinkles as possible. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to leave the fabric clean of
stains or marks.
3.3 CLEANING
3.3.1 Clean panels on completion of installation according to fabric manufacturer's written

instructions.
3.3.2 Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation, on completion
of the Work, and leave areas of installation in a neat and clean condition.
3.4 PROTECTION
3.4.1 Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner approved by
Engineer, before time of Substantial Completion.
PEND OF SECTION
S.T.H. WINDOW WASHING EQUIPMENT 11014-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This section includes supply, installation, testing, commissioning, training of operators and one-
year warranty period for the maintenance of the Façade Cleaning Equipment.
The primary purpose of the facade cleaning equipment is to regularly clean the facades of the
building.

Facade cleaning system shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
Horizontal Face Mounted Monorails

Monorail trolleys
Powered cradle with a safe working load of 200kg or two persons
SUBMITTALS:
Upon awarding the Order, the contractor shall submit a complete technical proposal for approval
by the Consultant, which shall include the following:
Scaled shop drawings for the proposed system including:

Proposed system layout
Bracket spacing and maximum loads
Reactions at point of support
Location of the power supply points
Services to be provided by the other related subcontractors.
Upon completion of works, the operational and Maintenance manual in English shall he submitted
along with As Build Drawings for the system in 3 copies
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENT

Design the system such that the cradle is clear of the face of the building. Fenders to allow the
cradle to rest lightly against the facades at the time of cleaning
All assemblies and components shall be designed with a safety factor of 4 to 1 against failure as a
minimum.
Wire Ropes shall be completely capable of supporting the intended loads and have a factor of
safety of at least 10.
Each piece of equipment shall be completely pre-assembled and thoroughly tested in the factory
prior to dispatch for final installation.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
General:
Construct all components of heat treated aluminium alloy or stainless steel or hot dip galvanised
structural steel. Dissimilar metals, when used, shall be protected against electrolytic action.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Consider the material size and thickness shown on the drawings as for conceptual design
purposes. The facade access system contractor is to provide the final design and detailing of the
equipment and all connections.
Welding:
All welding shall comply with BS requirements and shall be performed by welders qualified in
accordance with BS procedures.
Bolting:
Comply with the relevant codes and standards requirements.
Materials:
All work including bolts and fasteners shall be fabricated from structural steel, structural
aluminium or structural stainless steel.
1 .5 WARRANTY
The warranty signed by the supplier/ installer to be provided for the following.
• Repair and replacement of defects in materials and workmanship - 1 year.

• Structural warranty - 10 years.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATION – GENERAL

Quality of work shall be best trade modern shop and field practice known to recognised
manufacturers specialising in this type of work. Accurately fit joints and intersecting members in
true planes with adequate fastening.
Fit and assemble work in shop where possible. Execute according to details and review shop
drawings. Where shop fabrication is not possible, make trial assembly in the shop.
Fabricate finished work free from distortion, weld spatter and defects detrimental to appearance
and performance.
Weld all connections unless otherwise permitted.
Where welding is not possible use approved bolted connections. Fastenings shall be at adequate
spacing. Exposed fastenings shall be of the same materials, colour and finish of the base metal
on which they occur.
3. SYSTEMS:
3.1 MONORAIL SYSTEM:

The monorail shall be provided with a horizontal access system, fixed around the perimeter of the
building structure. The traversing trolleys, from which the cradle is suspended, shall travel along
the monorail to reach the various parts of the building. The effort required to traverse the trolleys
should be as minimum as possible so that it is possible to move by hand. The trolleys are
equipped with separate connection shackles for primary and secondary hoist ropes. The rail is
Aluminium profile. The brackets shall be galvanised steel and fixed to the building structure by 3
mounting bolts.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Specifications:
Track section Type : Face mounted type extruded track
Track material : Aluminium
Support bracket : Hot dip galvanised steel
Mounting of Track : Horizontal support from the parapet wall
Design load for the track support : To be confirmed during shop drawings.
Support spacing of track : 2000 mm typically and 250mm at corners and bends
Monorail trolley type : Manually traverse
Suspended height : To suit the building height
Monorail surface finish : Powder coated (standard RAL colour)
Support bracket surface finish : Hot dip galvanised and epoxy Painted (standard RAL
colour)
MONORAIL BRACKET GENERAL PARAMETERS

Material Mild steel plates/sections
Dimension As per project shop drawing
Quantity As per project shop drawing
Surface treatment Hot dip Galvanized.
Finish: Epoxy painted to standard RAL color.
MONORAIL GENERAL PARAMETERS
Material Aluminum
Alloy 6082.
Temper T6
Weight of the Monorail 6.4 Kg/ mtr.
External Dimension 6000 mm x 45.4 mm x 131.4 mm
UTS 220 N/mm²
Elongation % in50 mm 8
Finish: Powder coated to standard RAL color.
3.2 BMU CRADLE

The Cradle to be constructed from fully welded mild steel sections, Galvanised. Aluminium alloy
cladding is to be fitted to the outside of the Cradle to give a good appearance & protection for the
operator. The cradle to have power operated steel wire climbing winch. The winch to be push
button operated & to have comprehensive safety devices.
In the event of a break down or power failure provision should be there for manual operation. One
secondary safety wire is to be provided in addition to the winch wire of the cradle with Safety
device.
_____________________________________________________________________________
BMU CRADLE SPECIFICATIONS

Model: TRANSWILL-TW-C
Unladen Weight of the Cradle: 280 Kg(Excluding wire ropes & power cables)
Carrying capacity (SWL): 200 Kg
Carrying capacity-Number of persons 2 Persons
External Dimension: 2250 mm x 950 mm x 1680 (Overall)
Total Power Consumption : 3 Kw
Hoisting Speed 8.5 m/min
HOISTING SYSTEM
Make/ Model POWER CLIMBER,BELGIUM
Number of Winches 2
Motor Type TEFC Brake Motor
Rated Power 0.75 KW
Phase 3
Rated Voltage 380-415 V
Motor 1400 rpm
Insulation Class F
Method of starting Direct On line
Enclosure IP 55
Wire Rope Diameter 8.4 mm
WIRE ROPE REELER MOTOR

Make/ Model GHIRRI MOTORS, ITALY
Type Power Operated
Number of reeler Motors 2
Rated Power 0.18 Kw
Phase 3
Rated Voltage 380-415 V
Motor 1360 rpm
Insulation Class F
Method of Starting Direct on line
Enclosure IP 55
Reduction Gear Ratio 1:80
REELER DRUM & WIRE ROPE

Number of drums 2
Diameter 400 mm
Width 120 mm
_____________________________________________________________________________
Number of Ropes 4 (2 Suspension 2 Safety)

Wire rope diameter 8.40 mm
Wire rope construction 5X26 RH cross lay, Light Performed
Material of Wire rope Galvanized Steel
Weight of Rope 0.255 Kg/mt
Breaking Load 47 KN
Rope Factor of safety 10:1
POWER SUPPLY
Supply 380-415V, 3ph, 5 Pin, 50 Hz, 16 Amp 4Core 1.5
Sq.mm Insulated Trailing Cable
CONTROL SYSTEM
Control Control voltage 24 V/48V controlled Via power
cable
POWERED OPERATED CRADLE FEATURES:

The Cradle to be equipped with:
- Twin traction hoist
- two power operated wire rope realer drum
- four galvanised steel wire ropes stored on powered reefers
- four castor wheels are to be provided at the bottom.
- aluminium cladding all over
- rubber beading at front and sides
- two fenders to allow cradle to rest lightly against the facade
- anti-collision bar to detect obstructions while lowering the Cradle
- control box complete with emergency stop
- emergency descent facility
SAFETY FEATURES:
The following safety features shall be installed on the cradle.
Emergency Stop
Lower limit safety device
Upper limit safety device
Emergency manual descent
Overload safety device
Safety harness points
Anti-collision bar
WORKS PROVIDED BY OTHER SECTIONS

• Power supply for the system including power sockets
• Support structure for the monorail brackets
• Casting of all cast in anchors
• Crane for Unloading, loading of material, assembly and installation of the equipment’s at
the site.
• Temporary power supply during installation works
• All civil works as and when required.
_____________________________________________________________________________
• Readily erected Scaffolding/Access for the installation works

• Safe Storage of the materials at site
CRADLE RESTRIANT SYSTEM ON EXTERNAL FACADES (WHEREVER APPLICABLE)

• For lateral restraining of the cradle while in operation, provide required nos. of Restraint
sockets and Restraint Lanyards in accordance with the EN 1808. For location and spacing
co-ordinate with the façade sub contractor. Restraint sockets shall be provided to the
façade sub contractor for incorporating the same in to building façade by them.
• Type of sockets : Plate type stainless steel grade 316

• Vertical spacing : First level +40m and thereafter every 20 m max.
4. EXECUTION
Window washing equipment shall be installed by the manufacturer of the equipment or his
authorized representative. Erect work true to dimensions, square, plumb, level, free from
distortion or defects detrimental to appearance and performance and tightly fitted, flush and level
to adjacent surfaces.
Window washing equipment shall be installed to serve all elevation and number of High Parking
Davits should be determined to serve the full accessibility of all elevations at all levels.
Isolate metals as required to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals.
Supply and install equipment and all necessary electrical work from power outlets provided by
other trade.
4.1 INSTALLATION
1. 0 Window washing equipment shall be installed by the manufacturer of the equipment or his
authorized representative.
2. Erect work true to dimensions, square, plumb, level, free from distortion or defects detrimental
to appearance and performance and tightly fitted, flush and level to adjacent surfaces.
3 Isolate metals as required to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals.
4 Supply and install all equipment and all necessary electrical work from power outlets provided
by other trade.
4.2 ADJUSTMENT, TESTING, TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATION
1. When requested, run tests on machinery and safety devices to show their proper operation for
design specified and/or shown. Upon completion of the work, leave all apparatus in proper
adjustment and operation.
2. Provide competent instructors to train employees of the Owner, or others as directed, who will
be responsible for the care, adjustment and operation of the equipment. Forward a statement to
_____________________________________________________________________________
Engineer designating the personnel given the instructions and certifying that the instructions were
furnished.
4.3 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Furnish full warranty period maintenance and call back service on equipment for a period of one
(1) year from the date of handing over of the equipment. Service shall include regular
examinations by a competent and trained mechanic to clean, oil and adjust the apparatus, making
repairs, as may be required and replacing worn parts when necessary, except such parts
necessitated by misuse, accidents or negligence not caused by those doing the work of this
section in which case cost of such parts shall be paid for by the Owner.
Carry out maintenance services including emergency calls back during regular working hours and
days. Firm performing work in this section shall be able to show successful experience in the
complete maintenance of such equipment and that it employs competent personnel to handle this
service. Perform all maintenance by personnel under the supervision and in the direct employ of
the firm doing work of this section.
External shading Elements
• Aluminum Mesh Shades:
-Powder coating aluminium mesh shade actual covering of 60%, the shading elements
must have a minimum solar reflectance index (SRI) of 29.
• Tension Shades
-p.v.c. tensioned membrane with a minimum solar reflectance index (SRI) of 29.
-all catenary cable and fittings shall be hot dipped galvanized
-structural steel bolts shall be hot dipped galvanized grade (8.8)
Extended Warranty
• No chromate copper arsenate (CCA)-treated timber is used on the project where there is
END OF SECTION
S.T.H. MATERIALS/SUPPLIERS SCHEDULES 11950-1
_______________________________________________________________________
PART 1: GENERAL
1. The tender documents and/or addenda thereto form an integral part of this
1.2. SCHEDULES
1. The following schedules have been prepared for the guidance of the Contractor,
and generally indicate three choices. The Contractor is required to use these
schedules in conjunction with all the Drawings, Specifications and Bills of
Quantities.
Kyung Hee University Al Ain
APPROVED MATERIALS
PROPOSED MANUFACTURERS/ SUPPLIERS
SR NO. ITEM MATERIALS REMARKS
SUPPLIER
BRAND COUNTRY
CIVIL WORKS
HITEK UAE
1 PLASTER MATERIALS CONMIX UAE
SODAMCO UAE
UNITECH UAE ISSAM KABANI
2 Block Work Accessories TMI UAE TMI
EXPAMET Dublin, Dubai Emirates Specialty Co.
UNITECH UAE ISSAM KABANI
3 Plaster Accessories TMI UAE TMI
EXPAMET Dublin, Dubai Emirates Specialty Co.
AWAZEL SAUDI ARABIA
4 PROTECTION BOARD POLYBIT U.A.E.
DUPROOF U.A.E.
AQUAPLAN FR. ATAB BELGIUM PROTECT M.E.
5 WET AREAS C.K.K. HOLLAND C.K.K.
WESTERN INSULATION FRANCE WESTERN INSUL.
HYDROTECH MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE USA PROTECT M.E.
6 COVERED ROOFING AXTER FRANCE BEAM
TREMCO OHIO TREMCO
HYDROTECH MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE USA PROTECT M.E.
7 GROUND ROOF OR PODIUM LEVEL AXTER FRANCE BEAM
TREMCO OHIO TREMCO
ROOF MASTER U.A.E.
8 HEAT INSULATION ROOFMATE U.A.E.
WESTERN INSULATION U.A.E.
IKO HYDRO BARRIER FLEXIGUM BELGIUM PROTECT M.E.
9 FLOWER BOXES AND PLANTS AXTER FRANCE BEAM
BITUFA NETHERLANDS WESTERN INSUL.
JOTUN UAE
10 PAINT GULF PAINT UAE
SIGMA UAE
NANOPHOS GREECE CREAZURE
11 ANTI BACTERIALPAINT MIG-ESP EUROPE MATERIAL INNOVATION GLOBAL COATING
AL DIYAR UAE
12 CARPENTRY & JOINERAY WORK AL JAZEERA DECOR UAE
JOTUN UAE
MIRAGE ITALY LEVER B.M PORCELAIN
13 PORCELAIN TILES FIANDRE EUROPE ABU DHABI BUILDING MATERIALS PORCELAIN
FLORIM ITALY DIMENSIONS SOURCING PORCELAIN
MIRAGE ITALY LEVER B.M PORCELAIN
14 POLISHED PORCELAIN TILES PORCELANOSA EUROPE ABU DHABI BUILDING MATERIALS PORCELAIN
FLORIM ITALY DIMENSIONS SOURCING PORCELAIN
LUXALON HOLLAND AL-SHIRAWI
15 METAL CEILING DURLUM GERMANY TRADE LINE
MAIS METALS GERMANY MAIS
AMF GERMANY MAIS
16 ACOUSTICAL CEILING ECOPHON USA TRADE LINE
ROCKFON DENMARK AL-SHIRAWI
KNAUFF UAE
17 GYPSUM BOARD FALSE CEILING & GYPSEMNA UAE
BORAL UAE
TECHNAL BAHRAIN
18 ALUMINIUM SECTIONS SCHUCO BAHRAIN
AL JABER UAE
TECHNAL FRANCE
19 ALUMINIUM ACCESSORIES SCHUCO BAHRAIN
AL JABER UK
Viracon USA
20 GLASS EMIRATES GLASS UAE
Cardinal USA
WILKA GERMANY MEKATRON CO.
21 ALUMINUM IRONMONGRY MODRIC ALLGOOD UK SILVER SHORE
FSB GERMANY
India, Germany, HABIB TRADING
Contraflam Switzerland, USA White Aluminium Enterprise, Abu Dhabi
Fire Rated Glass EI 60 ,EI90 , EI 120)
22 Pyrostop Germany and USA Intraco, Dubai
Enternal &External
Pyranova Germany Shott Glass, Middle East
Coremetal UAE Coremetal
Aluminum sheet (2mm thick) for curtain wall
23 TECHNAL INTERNATIONAL
back pane
ALUCOBOND INTERNATIONAL
List of Proposed Materials Page 1

APPROVED MATERIALS
SUPPLIER
BRAND COUNTRY
SPEED WELL DECORE UAE
24 KITCHEN CABINETS FINMAT UAE
JAZIRA DÉCOR UAE
LG HI-MACS KOREA PURE ACRYLIC
25 KITCHEN TOP AVONITE USA
CORIAN USA
TEKA SPAIN BUILT-IN
26 KITCHEN SINKS CM ITALY
BLANCO GERMANY
NOBILI ITALY TAWAM BUILD.MATERIALS
27 KITCHEN MIXER GROHE GERMANY A.D. BUILDING MAT.
FRANKE GERMANY SARIEDDINE
Laufen Europe SENSI TRADING
28 SANITARY WARE AZZURRA ITALY TAWAM BUILD.MATERIALS
VALADARES PORTUGAL TAWAM BUILD.MATERIALS
NOBILI ITALY TAWAM BUILD.MATERIALS
29 BATH & TOILETS MIXERS GROHE Europe A.D. BUILDING MAT.
HANSA GERMANY SEMI TRADING
FRANKE EUROPE SARIEDDNE
30 BATHROOM ACCESSORIES GEDY ITALY TAWAM BUILD.MATERIALS
NOFER SPAIN TAWAM BUILD.MATERIALS
TECHNAL FRANCE
31 COMPOSITE ALUMINIUM CLADDING ALUCOBOND GERMANY
REYNOBOND FRANCE
MANTION FRANCE METALLIC EQUIPMENT
32 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR DORMA GERMANY BIN BROOK
GEZE GERMANY HABIB TRADING
NULLFIER UK
33 FIRE STOPPING SEALANT 3M UK
HILTI LEICHENSTEIN
SIMPLEX GERMANY METALLIC EQUIPMENT
34 JOINERY IRONMONGRY CES-WILKA GERMANY MEATRON GENERAL TRADING
GEZE GERMANY MEATRON GENERAL TRADING
SIMPLEX GERMANY METALLIC EQUIPMENT
35 JOINERY ACCESSORIES CES-WILKA GERMANY MEATRON GENERAL TRADING
CES-WILKA GERMANY MEATRON GENERAL TRADING
GERFLOR EUROPE
36 VINYL FLOORING AMSTRONG USA
AMTICO U.K.
GERFLOR EUROPE PROTECT M.E.
37 WALL PROTECTION + HAND RAILS PAWLING EUROPE PERSTIGE ENG.
DINAC U.K
TAJ AL EMAATES CO. U.A.E.
38 NATURAL STONE & MARBLE STONEX U.A.E.
MUSABAH AL HAMELI U.A.E.
KONE EUROPE OR JAPAN
39 ELEVATORS METSUBISHI EUROPE OR JAPAN
HITACHI EUROPE OR JAPAN
MECHANICAL
CARRIER FRANCE
1 AIR COOLED CHILLER YORK USA
DAIKIN Europe
2 AIR HANDLING UNIT CARRIER KSA
YORK TURKEY / KSA
DAIKIN Europe
EUROCLIMA ITALY/UAE
3 FAN COIL UNIT CARRIER FRANCE
YORK USA
DAIKIN Europe
EUROCLIMA ITALY/UAE
4 DX SPLIT UNITS DAIKIN ITALY
MITSUBISHI JAPAN
SAMSUNG KOREA
5 VRV UNITS DAIKIN ITALY
MITSUBISHI JAPAN
SAMSUNG KOREA
LG USA
6 VAV & CAV BETA UAE
AIRMASTER UAE
FLOWTECH UAE
7 DUCTED FANS S&P Spain
Dynair ITALY
Greenheck U.S.A
8 WINDOW / WALL MOUNTED S&P Spain
EXHAUST FANS Dynair ITALY
Greenheck U.S.A
APPROVED MATERIALS
SUPPLIER
BRAND COUNTRY
9 ROOF EXTRACT FANS S&P Spain
Dynair ITALY
Greenheck U.S.A
10 SMOKE FANS S&P Spain ADCD APPROVED
Dynair ITALY ADCD APPROVED
Greenheck U.S.A ADCD APPROVED
11 HEAT PIPE SYSTEM SPC U.K
KOOLAX SWITZERLAND
HPT USA
12 AIR CURTAINS NIVA TURKY
PANASONIC MALAYSIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MALAYSIA
13 DAMPERS (VCD) BETA UAE
& DUCT ACCESS DOORS AIRMASTER UAE
FLOWTECH UAE
14 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS BETA UAE
POWDER COATED AIRMASTER UAE
FLOWTECH UAE
15 SOUND ATTENUATORS & ACOUSTIC BETA UAE
AIRMASTER UAE
FLOWTECH UAE
16 CHILLED WATER PUMPS KSB GERMANY
GRUNDFOS EROUPE
XYLEM EUROPE
17 HEAT EXCHANGER SONDEX DENMARK
CLEVER BROOK USA
RYCRAFT UK
18 PRESSURISATION UNIT PILLINGER UK
REFLEX GERMANY
XYLEM EROUPE
19 EXPANSION VESSELS ARMSTRONG CANADA
PILLINGER UK
HOLDEN & BROOK UK
20 CHILLED WATER DOSING PLANT CULLIGAN UAE
CORODEX USA
WATER BIRD UAE
21 CHILLED WATER VALVES HATTERSLEY UK
CRANE USA
PEGLER UK
22 TEST POINTS OVENTROP GERMANY
KITZ JAPAN
VIR ITALY
23 CHEMICAL TREATMENT CULLIGAN UAE
HOUSEMAN UAE
WATER BIRD UAE
24 FIRE DAMPER BETA UAE
AIRMASTER UAE
FLOWTECH UAE
25 PI DUCT KINGSPAN UAE UL 181 Listed
ALPHADUCT UAE UL 181 Listed
AERODUCT UAE UL 181 Listed
26 G I DUCT NIPPON UAE
AGIS UAE
DURASTEEL INDIA
27 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES DUCTMATE UAE
DURODYNE USA
ALIBABA UAE
28 XLPE CROSSLINKED THERMOBREAK THALIAND
FOAM INSUILATION AEROFOAM UAE
AIRMASTER UAE
29 ELASTOMERIC AEROFOAM UAE
RUBBER INSULATION THERMAIRE UAE
ARMAFLEX BAHRAIN
ARMACELL BAHRAIN
30 VAPOR BARRIERS CANVAS IDENDEN USA
& ADHESIVES AEROFOAM UAE
FAVICAL INDIA
31 CIRCULAR FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK THERMAFLEX USA
SUPAFLEX USA
ATCO USA
32 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTOR DURODYNE USA
& ACCESSORIES CLIMATECH CHINA
CAIN USA
33 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS NAFFCO UAE
AFICO KSA
ARABIAN FIBERGLASS KSA
34 CHILLED WATER PIPES NIPPON STEEL JAPAN
& FITTINGS SHIELD UK/ RUS
Swagelok Parke EUROPE
35 PIPES FITTINGS NIPPON STEEL JAPAN
SHIELD UK/ RUS
Swagelok Parke EUROPE
36 DUCT AND PIPE SUPPORTS WEICCO INDIA
SHIELD UK
List of Proposed Materials FLAMCO EUROPE Page 3
APPROVED MATERIALS
SUPPLIER
BRAND COUNTRY
37 GAUGES & THERMOMETER WINTERS CANADA
TAYLOR USA
JOHNSON USA
38 AIR VENTS WEICCO INDIA
CRANE USA
FISCHER UK
39 CONTROLS SCHNEIDER FRANCE
KIEBACK & PETER GERMANY
HONEYWELL USA/EUROPE
40 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE GUEST & CHRIMES UK
SHIELD UK
WATTS / HONEYWELL USA
41 PRE-INSULATED PIPES IC MULLER UAE
PERMAPIPE CHINA
URECON CANADA
42 COPPER PIPE & FITTINGS IMI YORKSHIRE UK
MUELLER EUROPE
CRANE ENFIELD CHINA
43 AIR CLEANING SYSTEM CARROL ENVIRON AIR CHINA
PURIFIED AIR USA
44 DUST COLLECTOR CAMFIL MALAYSIA
AAF MALAYSIA
45 SAND TRAP LOUVER AIRMASTER UAE
(INERTIAL AIR CLEANER) FLOWTECH UAE
BETA UAE
46 STRAINERS VIR ITALY
KITZ JAPAN
OVENTROP GERMANY
47 VIBRATION ISOLATORS MASON USA
KINETICS UK
WEICCO INDIA
PICV & DYNAMIC VALVES FRESE DENMARK
Tour&Anderson Sweden
Tecofe France
HOT AND COLD WATER
1 PLUMBING PUMPS KSB GERMANY
WILO GERMANY
XYLEM EUROPE
2 SOLAR WATER HEATER SYSTEM NOVASUN GREECE
RYCROFT UK
RADIANT GREECE
3 HEAT PUMP ORYX TURKEY
DIMPLEX USA
TRANE USA
4 WATER HEATERS THERMAX EUROPE
VIESMAN EUROPE
BRADFORD USA
5 GRP SECTIONAL WATER TANKS SEKISUI JAPAN
SOLICO KOREA
BRAITHWAITE U.K.
6 WATER FILTERATION SYSTEM/ AMEUROP USA
COPPER SILVER IRONIZER/ AQUAGEN USA
UV STRELIZER CULLIGAN GERMANY
7 WATER METERS KENT UK
WEIR UK
BRUNER USA
8 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE TYCO USA
BACKFLOW PREVENTOR, FLOAT SHIELD UK
VALVES, AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES ZURN USA
10 WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR WADE USA
CALEFFI ITALY
JURN USA
11 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORT WEICCO INDIA
SHIELD UK
FLAMCO EUROPE
12 PP-R Pipes & Fittings FRITHERM GERMANY
NOVATHERM GERMANY
VIALLI GERMANY
BQ GERMANY
13 uPVC Pipes & Fittings POLYFAB UAE
COSMOPLAST UAE
MINCOM DRAIN UAE
14 PEX PIPES & FITTINGS VIALLI GERMANY
UPONOR SWEDEN
GECOMINI ITALY
PLATHERM TURKEY
15 MOTORIZED DAMPER SAFEED UAE
NAFFCO UAE
FLOWTECH UAE
KFLEX UAE
16 PIPE SUPPORT WEICCO INDIA
SHIELD UK
FLAMCO EUROPE
17 EXPANSION VESSEL ARMSTRONG UK
APPROVED MATERIALS
SUPPLIER
BRAND COUNTRY
PILLINGER UK
HOLDEN & BROOK AUSTRALIA
18 AIR VENTS WEICCO INDIA
CRANE USA
FISCHER UK
19 Flexible Connectors Tozen Japan
Durodyne Canada
Terrain U.K
20 PLUMBING VALVES HATTERSLEY UK
CRANE USA
PEGLER
21 Float Switches Pegler UK
EBCO UK
Nibco USA
22 Flow Meter KROHNE GERMANY
DANFASS DENMARK
SMITH METER INE. USA
23 VIBRATION ISOLATORS MASON USA
KINETICS UK
WEICCO INDIA
DRAINAGE
1 SUMP PUMPS KSB GERMANY
WILO GERMANY
XYLEM EUROPE
2 CAST IRON PIPES & FITTINGS CHARLOTTE --
SAINT GOBAIN --
3 THERMOBREAK THALIAND
ACOUSTIC INSULATION ARMACELL BAHRAIN
AEROFOAM UAE
4 Manhole Cover & Catch Basin Cover CRESCENT UAE
Clarck UAE
HI CAST UAE
RSI UAE
5 POLYFAB UAE
HDPE Pipes & Fittings TERRAIN UAE
COSMOPLAST UAE
6 UPVC & PVC Pipes & Fittings POLYFAB UAE
TERRAIN UAE
COSMOPLAST UAE
7 POLYFAB UAE
Floor Drains, Roof Drains,
TERRAIN UAE
Balcony Drains, Floor Traps
COSMOPLAST UAE
8 GREASE TRAP HUNTER UK
HEPWORTH UK
FROST UK
WADE UK
9 Trench Drains & Channel Draining System WADE
ZURN
MIFAB --
10 RAIN WATER OUTLET POLYFAB UAE
TERRAIN UAE
COSMOPLAST UAE
11 WASTE WATER TREATMENT CULLIGAN UAE
WATER BIRD --
METITO --
12 PIPE SUPPORT WEICCO INDIA
SHIELD UK
FLAMCO EUROPE
FIRE PROTECTION
1 FIRE FIGHTING PUMPS (UL LISTED) Xylem A-C USA
SPP UK
PEERLESS USA
2 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS BETA UAE
AIRMASTER UAE
FLOWTECH UAE
3 FIRE STOP MATERIAL 3M UK
LAMATHERM UK
NULLIFIRE UK
4 FIRE SLEEVES & NULLIFIRE UK
INTUMESCENT MATERIALS HILTI --
FIRESTOPIT --
5 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER NAFFCO UAE
CHUBB UK
ANGUS USA
6 FIRE HORSE REEL (S. STEEL) NAFFCO UAE APPROVED BY CDA
CHUBB UK APPROVED BY CDA
ANGUS USA APPROVED BY CDA
7 VALVES FOR FIRE FIGHTNG CRANE UK
SYSTEM TYCO USA
SHIELD UK
8 GI PIPES & FITTINGS FOR FIRE SUMITOMO JAPAN
FIGHTING SURYA INDIA
APPROVED MATERIALS
SUPPLIER
BRAND COUNTRY
SHIELD RUISSA
9 SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHIELD UK
TYCO USA
CENTRAL USA
10 DIESEL ENGINE CATTERPILLAR USA
FIRE DRIVER UAE
CRANE UK
11 FM 200 (FIRE FIGHTING) NAFFCO UAE
CHEMTRON USA
FIKE USA
12 CLEAN AGENT NAFFCO UAE
CHEMTRON USA
FIKE USA
13 FIRE PIPES & FITTINGS SHIELD UK
SUMITOMO JAPAN
SURYA INDIA
14 FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT VIKING GERMANY
& ANCILLARIES GRINNELL KSA
SHIELD UAE
15 VORTEX INHIBITOR & ANSUL --
FOOT VALVES WORMOLD --
SHIELD UK
ELECTRICAL
TRANSFORMER FEDERAL UAE
1 EMIRATES UAE APPROVED BY ADDC
GLOBAL UAE
H.V.PANEL SCHNEIDER EUROPE
AUTHORIZED PANEL BUILDER &
2 ABB EUROPE
ADDC APPROVED
EATON EUROPE
MDB, SMDB, FDB, MCCC,ATS SCHNEIDER EUROPE AUTHORIZED PANEL BUILDER
3 (ACB's , MCCB's , MCB's AND RCD's) ABB EUROPE (FRANCHISED) & ADDC
EATON EUROPE APPROVED
4 MDB, SMDB, FDB, MCC,ATS SCHNEIDER
(ENCLOUSER) ABB
EATON
5 CAPACITOR BANK SCHNEIDER EUROPE
CIRCUTOR SPAIN
EATON USA
6 DUCAB UAE
Electrical Cables & Wires NCI UAE
AD CABLE UAE
7 THORN EUROPE ALS LIGHTING
LIGHTING FITTINGS LUXELED AUSTRALIA ALS LIGHTING
IKIZLER TURKEY ALS LIGHTING
PVC CONDUITS & FITTINGS MULTIPLAST UAE
8 EGA MK KSA
DECODUCT UAE
9 Gi Conduits & Accessories Barton UK
MK UK
Kopex/Adaptaflex UK
SWITCHES & SOCKETS LEGRAND UK
10 (MATT CHROME FINISH) MK UK
ABB GERMANY
ISOLATORS SCAME ITALY
11 ABB EUROPE
SCHNEIDER JAPAN
GI BOX AND STEEL CONDUITS BARTON UK
12 APPLE BY UK
VOLEX UK
EARTHING SYSTEM & WALLIS UK
13 LIGHTING PROTECTION HELITA FRANCE
FURSE UK
CABLE TRAYS & TRUNKING Index UAE
14 Legrand UAE HEAVY DUTY
TMI UAE
15 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM AWEX POLAND
AND EMERGENCY , EXIT LIGHTING INOTEC GERMANY APPROVED BY ADCD
TEKNOWARE FINLAND
16 SMATV / IPTV TELEVES SPAIN
ALCAD SPAIN
BLUSENS SPAIN
17 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SIMPLEX MEXICO
VOICE EVACUATION NOTIFIER USA APPROVED BY ADCD
FIRE TELEPHONE EDWARD USA
18 CO DETECTORS SIMPLEX MEXICO
NOTIFIER USA APPROVED BY ADCD
EDWARD USA
19 CCTV SYSTEM PELCO USA
SAMSUNG KOREA APPROVED BY ADMCC
AXIS EUROPE
20 VIDEO INTERCOM ALCAD SPIAN
FERMAX SPAIN
ABB EUROPE
21 GATE BARRIER SYSTEM FEDERAPD UK
APPROVED MATERIALS
SUPPLIER
BRAND COUNTRY
NEWGATE UK
PARKING PRODUCTS USA
22 GENERATOR SET CATERPILLER USA
FJWILSON UK
CUMMINS UK
23 STRUCTURED CABLING LEGRAND FRANCE
SCHNEIDER FRANCE APPROVED BY ETISALAT
ABB EUROPE
24 ACCESS CONTROL ABB EUROPE
MIDITEC GERMANY
TYCO USA
SIEMENS GERMANY
25 FIRE ALARM CABLE DONCASTER UK
SOLARITY CZECH
RAMCRO ITALY
26 DONCASTER UK
CENTRAL BATTERY CABLES
SOLARITY CZECH
RAMCRO ITALY
27 VFD SIEMENS - STAEFA EU
(VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE) ABB EU
SCHNEIDER EUROPE
28 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM INTERRA TURKY
SCHNEIDER EUROPE
HONEYWELL EUROPE
UPS SCHNEIDER EUROPE
29 GE EUROPE
ABB EUROPE
Bus Bar Trunking System ( Bus Duct) Eaton USA
30 Zucchini Italy
Mega Bar Italy

S.T.H. LABORATORY FURNITURE 12700-1
____________________________________________________________________________
General Furniture and Services Specifications:
Benches Specifications:
• To be designed and tested for long service life.

• To be confirm with international standards like EN standards.
• To be modular, easy to adjust, easy to reconstruct, easy to dismantle, shift and
reassemble.
• Work tops: Worktops shall be made according to below description. All joints shall be
executed in compliance with the color concept of the project.
Workbench borders shall be equipped with a rim on all sides and attach securely and
hygienically with the work bench in case of need where expectation of liquid spillage the
rim/ edge height should be in height from the top to contain average of 5- 7 liter in 1 m²
area of the bench.
• Table top for Electronics Lab use and regardless of the core, the surface should be
covered with an electrically conductive laminate. This cover is non-abrasive and scratch
resistant and also resistant against chemicals and soldering pewter. The underside is
covered with counteracting material. All edges are protected by an impact resistant edge
band.
• Table top for General Lab use (Trespa) is Laboratory Grade SGL (Solid Grade
Laminate). Average top sheet length of 2.4 to 3 meters to minimize joints edges.
• Table top for Wet and Washing Lab area is Stainless Steel. Average top sheet
length of 2.4 to 3 meters to minimize joints edges.
• Table top for Corrosive/ heavy Acids and Bases Lab use is Polypropylene. Average top
sheet length of 2.4 to 3 meters to minimize joints edges.
• Table top for Heat/ Heavily use Lab use is Epoxy Resin/ Ceramic. Average top
sheet length of 1.8 meters for Ceramic and 2.4 to 3 meters for Epoxy to minimize
joints edges.
• All furniture structure ‘C- frame, A- frame, U-frame, or Pedestal’ should be made of steel
structure, the same for the under bench cabinets, tall cabinets, hanging cabinets,
shelves and all other furniture parts. It must be made of Galvanized steel with
Polyurethane powder coating to resist corrosion, avoiding wood structure or cabinets.
Below you can find the important reasons why going to steel furniture rather than the
wood furniture are listed below:
1. Steel is Easy to Clean:

Steel can be cleaned by various types of disinfectants and cleaning agents,
which is a must in case of any spillage.
2. Contaminate Free
____________________________________________________________________________
Steel do not absorb liquids or odors, once it is cleaned or disinfected then the
surface can be considered contaminant free and prevent any cross
contamination risks. That is very important to certain applications.
3. Steel Does not burn
Some applications require the usage of fire, excessive heat or flammable
materials. In case of fire, steel does not burn or promote the spread of fire. That
contributes heavily toward the worker’s safety.
4. Extremely Durable
Steel is a very durable material and would allow the usage of harsh materials.
Also, the steel furniture has very long life spam and can be moved,
disassembled, repositioned without having any effect on its performance or
quality.
5. Long Lasting
Steel can be guaranteed for much more life than wood.
6. Fully Recyclable
In today’s demand and promotion of green buildings and environmental friendly
practices, steel furniture is fully recyclable.
• Structures can be selected as follows:

1. C-frame, for normal use of bench, and in-average equipment weight. It provides
flexibility for the user leg space and movement. Relocating under bench cabinets
with this option is easy.
2. A-frame, for heavily use of the bench, and heavy equipment. It provides higher
stability for the bench, resists bending and vibration. But the user leg space or
relocating under-bench cabinets will be limited with this option.
3. U-frame, for maximum flexibility to adjust the bench height between 720 mm to
910 mm at the installation time, and also to change the system from C into A
frame and vice versa. For more flexibility and freedom in future changes. Better
to use it with mobile under bench cabinets.
4. Pedestal, for closed under bench area, related to hygiene reasons, fair as load
carrying on bench, very limited/ difficult for any future changes.
• Steel Sheet: Cold rolled steel electrostatically coated. 0.7 mm to 1.0 mm.
• Handles, the cabinets doors, drawers shall be executed with metal handles and
preferable to be labeled.
• All metal supports shall be made either as a C-frame or as a A-frame on four stands,
self-supporting of cold drawn rectangular precision steel tubes or of steel profiles
average (50/25/1.6 mm).
• The stand elements shall be adjustable in height. Range of adjustment +/- 20 mm with
spanner dog point and ball head with plastic base plate.
• Average load bearing capacity: 250 kg per m² on table top.
• All the cabinets are made of steel structure, of Galvanized steel with polyurethane
powder coating.
Doors: Sound proof with double skin construction. Hinge to open at angle of 270°
____________________________________________________________________________
• All the drawers are made of steel structure, of Galvanized steel with polyurethane
powder coating. Drawers to have hydraulic system for shock absorbent and self-closing
system.
• Shelves on cabinets: to have adjustable height option.
• Load bearing capacity: 30- 50- 70 kg per shelve according to size.
• PVC-free electrical components and cables.
• Sinks and bowels should be available in all types, sizes, and material. Top mounted
(drop on), flush (welded), or underslung (under mounted).
• Drip cups, all drip cups are mounted to the top, service modules or to the fume cupboard
in a Top mounted (drop on) way (with a rim). Drip cups, approx. size 100 x 290 x 120
mm complete with extract air spigot and siphon. Material according to the description in
the position either of ceramic, SS or PP. In exceptional cases, according to the
description in the position, drip cups will be incorporated into the worktop. In such a case
these drip cups will not be equipped with a rim.
• Water, gas fittings:
Laboratory fittings for gas and water shall be executed of brass according to DIN 12 918
– part 1 and part 2. The surface protection of the fittings shall be made in either epoxy
resin powder coating or with a plastic casing. Water and gas fittings shall be offered with
ceramically sealed top. Fittings for processed water shall be made of plastic.
• Electrical sockets (13A) should be BS with cover, label and switch.
• All the mobile benches to have heavy duty wheels with locks.
For the C- frame or A- frame:
1. Material: Frames and shelves: Galvanized and polyurethane powder coated steel
2. Leg frames with 4 castors (2 or 4 of which lockable)
3. Load capacity: Free standing table, stationary: 225 kg
4. Free standing table, mobile: 150 kg
5. Heavy duty trolley: 450 kg
• Balance tables:
The design of these tables shall guarantee a contact and damping protection for the
weighing plate. Supports are made of a steel frame with 4 stands with vibration
absorbing damping elements Contact protection by lining on all sides. Worktops
according to specification, like glass or SGL.
Service Systems Specifications:

• Service Systems to be made of galvanized steel with polyurethane powder coating, with
removable cassettes to add utilities easily.
1. Service Column: floor/ Bench mounted to deliver utilities, hold shelves in-
between columns, and hold hanging cabinets.
Also column can be extended to the ceiling to bring services from above the
ceiling to the bench.
2. Service Block: same of the service column, but bigger in size. For more space
and big utility.
____________________________________________________________________________
3. Service Cell: provide an independent unit to contain the utilities in case you need
to separate the bench (mobile bench) so all the utilities and columns will be fixed
on the cell.
4. Service Boom: is a suspended system to provide the services from the ceiling to
above the bench providing free workspace for the user and freedom in case of
using multiple mobile equipment or benches.
Safety Cabinets Specifications:

• Gas cabinet specs:
1. Double walled cabinet made of polyurethane powder coated galvanized steel
2. Thermally insulation is Class A1 Non-combustible Insulated pass through for gas
ducts.
3. Door edges and all joints are fitted with heat sensitive, intumescent strips that
seal gaps with foam in the event of fire.
4. Ventilation spigots (50_ 75) close automatically in the event of fire
5. Suitable for connection to on site fume extract system.
6. Design in compliance with DIN 12925 Part 2
7. Door remain open, and close automatically only in event of fire.
8. Must be G90 Standard
• Flammable safety cabinet specs: Not suitable for storing highly corrosive materials (acids)
1. Double walled cabinet made of polyurethane powder coated galvanized steel
2. Hydraulically operated self-closing and locking doors with high security lock
3. Thermal insulation is Class A1 non combustible
4. Door edges and all joints are fitted with heat sensitive intumescent strips that
seal gaps with foam in the event of fire.
5. Ventilation spigots (50- 75) are closed automatically by disk valves in event of fire
6. Suitable for connection to on site fume extract system
7. Design in compliance with DIN 12925 Part 1
8. Can be under bench/ standalone tall model.
9. Door remain open, and close automatically only in event of fire.
10. Must be FWF90 Standard.
• Chemical cabinet specs: Not suitable for storing highly corrosive materials (acids)
1. Galvanized and polyurethane powder coated steel
2. Fittings: Lockable doors
3. 3- 5 shelves, pull out trays, weight bearing capacity 30- 50 kg
4. Extract spigot 50- 75
5. Suitable for connection to on site fume extract system or includes built-in fan.
6. For cabinets with fan: Enclosed fan with clearly visible on/off indicator; 230 V
plug with earth
• Acid and Base cabinet specs: suitable for storing highly corrosive materials (acids)
____________________________________________________________________________
1. Acid resistant polypropylene (PP)

2. Fittings: 4 drawers, weight bearing capacity 30 kg
3. Tall cabinets: plus 1 compartment for accessories
4. Drawer guides of acid resistant polypropylene
5. Extract spigot 75
6. Suitable for connection to on site fume extract system
Fume Hood Specifications:
o Fume hood at least should match the following standards for chemical
laboratories fume hoods:
o German DIN 12924
o English BS 7258
o French AFNOR XP X 15-203
o American ASHRAE 15-1995
o The new EN 14175
o All types and sizes should be available, such as: ‘size varies between 1,200 mm
up to 2,100 mm’ width.
1. Table top/ general purpose
2. Walk-in
3. Open hood with height adjustable table
4. High Performance
5. Radionuclide
6. Green (low energy) lowest air consumption with maximum user protection
o Fume hood to be made completely of Galvanized steel material with
polyurethane powder coating “inner and outer wall”.no wood structure...
o Easy/ safe control, the fume hood should have easy interface touch and control
panel to display parameters, readings, to control, and adjust user requirements
such as flow rate, timers, turn the socket on and off, record errors and alarms
logs. It should be able to integrate with additional items such as chemical
containers below the hood and show if the container is full in order for the user to
replace it.
o Table top should be of any material matching the application, SGL, Ceramic,
Stainless steel, Epoxy, PP and so.
o Inner walls can be furnished with additional layer such as Ceramic, SS, PP, for
certain applications.
o PVC-free electrical components and cables.
o All the electrical and mechanical parts are placed on the top font side of the
hood, nothing in the back side, which allows easy service and maintenance work
to be performed.
o Sash glass is made of laminated safety glass
o Automatic sash open/ closing (Auto-Protect) system. By many ways like:
1. Open/close button.
____________________________________________________________________________
2. Soft touch to the sash to open or close

3. Foot switch to open/ close the sash.
o Zone area sensor. If the sash is opened for time 2-3 minutes, and the sensor
detects no motion in front of the fume hood during this period, it will automatically
close the sash for safety purpose.
o Closing Guard:
1. Pressure sensor, in case the sash is closing and any object is in the sash
closing way, once the sash touches the object, it will stop the movement
automatically to prevent damaging that item.
2. Using IR light to prevent closing the sash once any object cut the IR light
even without having the sash touching it, for extra and more safety.
o Air monitoring system with audio/light alarm to alert the user if the air flow
exceeds the maximum flow limit or goes below the minimum limit. Or if the air
temperature goes above certain level.
o Air flow controller to reduce the volume of extracted air when no need for high
extraction air volume ‘sleep mode’. To save cold air inside the lab and save
electricity too. And meets the green labs and buildings standards.
o Exhaust Motor should match IP 55 standard, if applicable.
o The under hood space should be compatible with lab user needs. To have it as
leg space, or storage area. Or to be mixed storage units
END OF SECTION
S.T. H. Medical Gas System 13100-1
__________________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
This section includes the following systems

1. Medical gas Piping distribution
2. Terminal Units
3. Medical Gas Line Ball Valve Assemblies,
4. Area Valve Service Units Modules
5. Medical Gas Alarm Panels
6. Automatic Manifold Supply System & Manifold Control Panels
7. Medical oxygen manifold system
8. Nitrous oxide manifold system
9. Surgical air manifold system
1.3 MEDICAL AIR MANIFOLD SYSTEM

1. Combined Medical Air and Surgical Air Plant
2. Medical Vacuum Plant
3. Anaesthetic Gas Scavenging Disposal System
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of special valve indicated. Include flow and pressure drop
curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings, calibrated balancing valves, and
automatic flow-control valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies,
alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building structure.
Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the
following:
1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.-to be done by 3rd party
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
4. All tests must be conducted by an approved 3rd party. Approval must be gained from the
engineer & client prior to testing.
__________________________________________________________________________________
A. The piped medical gas system shall comply with the requirements of the UK HTM 02-01 and
ISO 7396-1 standards unless specific changes are requested by the client.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. The Contractor shall, at his cost, appoint a Specialist Sub-contractor for Medical gas
pipe systems. The Specialist Medical gas pipe systems Sub-Contractor shall be from
one of approved installer listed elsewhere in the specification and shall be approved by
the client engineers and subject to the Engineers approval. The Specialist Medical gas
pipe systems Specialist Sub-contractor shall be fully responsible for the Design, Supply,
Installation, Testing and Commissioning of the Medical gas pipe systems in line with the
Specification, the drawings and to the client and consultant engineers’ approval. After
preparation of Shop Drawings and their approval by the Engineer, the Specialist Fire
Protection System Sub-contractor shall obtain their final approval from the consultant
and client engineer.
2. After installation, testing and commissioning of the various systems, the Specialist
Medical gas pipe systems Sub-contractor shall arrange inspection by the consultant and
client and obtain their approval / acceptance of the installation.
3. Installer responsibilities includes designing, fabricating, installing, testing and

commissioning a complete Medical gas pipe systems required by the consultant and
client that includes in providing professional engineering services needed to assume
design and engineering responsibility to the Medical gas pipe systems.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of all MEP services and suspension system components
with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system
components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are as per project specification.
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor
assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for fire stopping as per project specifications.
1.7 TESTS
A. The Contractor shall carry out all tests specified and all defects must be corrected before any
pipe work or other parts of the installation are concealed. This will require tests to be carried
out in sections as the building work proceeds. The Contractor shall provide all labour,
materials, instruments and equipment required to test and commission the installation. If
__________________________________________________________________________________
there is any reason to doubt the accuracy of the instruments the Contractor shall, as his
own expense, take the necessary steps to prove their accuracy. Acceptance Test, carried out
on completed installations or systems and except for final tests, before the date for practical
completion, to demonstrate that the installation or system, including components, controls
and equipment, operates correctly, safely and efficiently and meets performance and other
requirements. Final Test, Acceptance tests carried out before completion of the maintenance
period.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period: not less than one year (1) from date of Handing Over to Client.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MEDICAL GAS PIPING DISTRIBUTION

A. complete piping of the medical gas distribution shall be compliance with HTM 02-01.
The piped distribution system shall use copper pipes manufactured from phosphorous de-
oxidized non arsenical copper to BS EN 1412:1996 grade CW024A (Cu-DHP), manufactured
to metric outside diameters and having mechanical properties in accordance with BS EN
13348:2001-R250 ( hard) for sizes up to 54mm or BS EN 13348:2001 -R290 for larger sizes.
Pipes shall be degreased suitable for oxygen use and cleanliness is to be maintained by filling
each pipe with dry, clean, oil and oxygen free nitrogen, fitting suitable end caps and
protectively wrapping. All pipe work materials shall be manufactured by BS EN ISO 9001:2001
registered companies marking for sizes up to 54mm, copper pipes shall be permanently and
durably marked at regular intervals along its length with the following information:
a) The harmonized standard number EN 13348;
b) BSI kite mark/statement/equivalent approval;
b) Nominal dimensions, diameter x wall thickness;
c) Temper designation to EN 1173;
d) Manufacturer's identification;
e) Date of production: year and month (1 to 12)
f) Confirmation of degreasing for oxygen;
Example: BS EN 13348 22x 1.2 R250 MANUFACTURE NAME

__________________________________________________________________________________
KITEMARKED DEG/MEDICAL 05 01
Following installation, pipelines shall be clearly identified with 150mm wide adhesive labels.
Labels shall be fitted near walls, risers, valves and junctions. Color coding and labeling shall
be in accordance with BS 1710:1984. Arrows to identify the direction of gas flow shall be fitted
adjacent to each identification label.
Medical Gas Pipeline Fittings shall be end feed type, manufactured from the same grade of
copper as the pipes and be in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 1254-1:1998 Part
1. Fittings shall be degreased suitable for oxygen use and be supplied individually sealed in
protective polythene bags. Component Cleanliness Degreasing of pipe shall be such that there
is less than 20mg/m2 (0.002mg/cm2) of hydrocarbons on the degreased surface when tested
by the method specified in EN 723. The degreasing of fittings shall be such that there is less
than 100mg/m2 (0.01mg/cm2) of hydrocarbons on the degreased surface when tested by the
aforementioned method. All pipeline components shall also be free of any visible liquid
detergent washing or solvent degreasing. Other methods may be used if they are proven and
can be guaranteed to achieve acceptable results without degradation of the component or the
environment.
Brazed Pipeline Joints Copper to copper joints shall be made on site using a silver-copper-
phosphorous brazing alloy type CP1 or CP4 to BS 1845 using a dry, clean, oil and oxygen free
nitrogen inert gas shield with no flux. Copper to brass or gunmetal joints shall not be made on-
site. Copper to brass or gunmetal joints made off-site shall utilize silver brazing material type
AG13 to AG18 to BS 1845 with a flux. Such joints shall be subsequently cleaned and degreased
prior to use. Where pipes are cut on site they shall be cut clean and square with the pipe axis,
using wheel cutters where possible and debarred, re-rounded and cleaned off. Expanded joints
shall only be used for straight pipe joints and shall not be used for pipes sizes greater than
28mm outside diameter. Expansion joints shall only be made using apparatus specifically
designed for the purpose.
B. Pipeline Supports:
Pipelines shall be supported at the intervals specified in HTM 02-01 using a suitable metallic,
non-ferrous material or a ferrous material suitably treated to prevent Corrosion and electrolytic
action. Plastic supports shall only be used for support of drops to terminal units.
Maximum intervals between pipe supports as specified in HTM 02-01:
C. Copper Pipe and Fittings:
1.Materials for pipes shall be phosphorous, de-oxidized, non-arsenical copper. Dimensions

shall be in accordance with BSEN 1057, Part 1, and Table X Materials for fittings shall be
phosphorous, de-oxidized, non-arsenical copper and shall be of the end feed capillary type to
BS 864. All pipes and fittings shall be cleaned and degreased for oxygen service and shall be
free of particulate matter and toxic residues. Pipes shall be individually capped at both ends.
__________________________________________________________________________________
All fittings shall be sealed in bags or boxes. All materials shall be delivered to site
identified as medical gas pipe or fittings.
2. Installation
Generally, medical gas pipelines shall be kept away from areas where they may be
subjected to mechanical damage, chemical damage, excessive heat and any contact with
oil, grease, bituminous compounds or electrical sparks. Pipelines should not be installed
in lift shafts, kitchens, laundries, boiler houses, generator rooms, incinerator rooms or in
any other fire risk areas. Where this is unavoidable, pipelines should be enclosed in non-
combustible materials. Service ducts or voids containing medical gas pipes should have
adequate ventilation to prevent gas concentrations in the event of any leakage occurring.
Pipelines need not be laid with falls. In the case of vacuum, the sub-atmospheric
pressure will result in the evaporation of any moisture entering the system. It is, however,
possible for vacuum jars to overflow and thus for the system to require flushing through.
Each vacuum riser should have a double valve arrangement to permit drainage when the
system is under vacuum. One of the valves should be lockable in the closed position. No
other sloping or drainage arrangements are necessary. Pipelines passing through walls
or floors shall be fitted with copper sleeves. Pipelines shall not come into contact with
timber treated with fire resistant compounds. This contact shall be avoided where
necessary with the use of impermeable non-metallic materials such as adhesive PVC
tape. Such precautions are not necessary if the timber is untreated or effectively sealed
with varnish or paint. Pipelines shall be adequately supported at sufficient intervals as
specified in table 15, HTM 02-01. Supports shall be of suitable materials to minimize
corrosion and prevent electrolytic reaction between the supports and pipes. Wherever
possible, a clearance of 25mm should be the separation distance between each service
and 150mm should be the separation distance between the medical gases and heating,
hot water services and steam pipelines. Pipes shall be cut using wheel pipe cutters and
cleaned of identification of pipelines shall be identified in accordance with BS 1710 and
color banding for the pipelines shall be used outside of plant rooms. Color band
identification should be applied at 6m intervals and at valves, junctions, walls, etc. The
painting of pipelines is not required. The direction of flow shall be indicated.
3. Pipeline Jointing.
All copper to copper joints shall be made using flux less brazing rods and in the presence
of nitrogen, which will be blown through the pipeline during the brazing procedure to
prevent the formation of oxides. This method eliminates the formation of oxide within the
pipe, leaving a clean bore. Some slight burnishing may occasionally be observed on
sectioned joints and is acceptable. The use of a purge gas may be waived on joints such
as break-ins to existing systems. All brazed copper to copper joints shall be made using
a silver-copper-phosphorous alloy with a silver content of at least 5%. The nitrogen shall
be supplied to the inside of the pre-assembled, un brazed pipeline through a regulator
and flow controlling device. The pipeline should first be flushed to remove the air followed
by a continuous flow of nitrogen to prevent the ingress of air. Particular attention shall be
paid to T-joints to ensure inert gas shielding. Nitrogen should be used internally whenever
annealing or hot forming of pipe work is carried out. A sample joint may be taken prior to
pressure testing to establish the quality of the brazing and the internal cleanliness. Due to
tolerances on the pipes and fittings, full penetration of the brazing alloy may not occur
__________________________________________________________________________________
and is not necessary. The minimum penetration must be three times the wall thickness of
the pipe or 3mm, whichever is the greater. The pipeline shall then be made good if the
sample joint is satisfactory.
2.2 MEDICAL GAS LINE BALL VALVE ASSEMBLIES
A. Medical gas line ball valve assemblies shall be constructed of a nickel plated brass body, PTFE
seats/seals and a brass chrome plated ball. The valve shall operate by a manual operating lever
selected through 90Deg. All Medical gas line ball valves shall provide a full bore and shall be
cleaned for oxygen service and fully tested prior to despatch. Each Medical gas line ball valve
assembly shall terminate in copper stub pipes to enable brazing direct into the distribution
system using the flux less brazing technique. A locking device shall be provided and enable the
valve to be locked in either the fully open or the fully closed position.
B. Medical gas line ball valves comply with, and fully satisfy, the pressure drop requirements of the
United Kingdom Health Technical Memorandum HTM 02-01 and C11 and the European
standard ISO 7396-1.
C. Medical Gas Line Ball Valve assemblies are 'CE' marked under the Medical Devices Directive
93/42/EEC with approval from notified body.
2.3 TERMINAL UNITS
A. General The unit is used to withdraw compressed gases or vacuum from a central medical gas
supply system according to British standard BS EN 737-1:1998; integration of plugs and
medical appliances with plug-in nipples according to British standard BS 5682:1998.
B. Structure / function
1. The terminal unit should consists of a gas-specific basic block, which is firmly linked to the
pipe system, a cartridge, which contains all O-ring seals, and a socket unit, which are screwed
to each other.
2. The base block contains a spring-mounted non return and servicing valve which seals off
the cartridge and which is pressed down by the plug. A valve screw prevents the valve from
jumping out of the basic block during the dismounting of the socket unit. At the same time,
the valve can be screwed on to the connecting thread in the basic block in case of
compressed gases, on account of which the gas passage of the terminal unit is completely
blocked. The plug in the socket unit is locked in the operating position. The lock is released
by means of the actuator.
C. Type of construction
1. Three-part nickel-coated all-metal construction; unlocking by means of the

actuator; single-hand operation for de/coupling
2. Operating pressure:
Compressed gas 400…500 kPa (4…5 bar), max. 1000 kPa (max. 10bar)Vacuum ¡Ü -40
kPa (-0,40 bar)
3. Test pressure:
__________________________________________________________________________________
Compressed gas 1500 kPa (15 bar) Vacuum 500 kPa (5 bar)
4. Marking: Marking in English; color marking in keeping with ISO 32
Type of gas ISO 32
Oxygen (O2) white
Compressed air (MA4) black-white
Surgical air (SA7)
Nitrous oxide (N2O) blue
Vacuum (VAC) yellow
Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System (AGSS) blue-yellow
Types of installation: Concealed / hollow wall, surface, rail systems, wall channels, ceiling-
mounted supply systems.
2.4 AREA VALVE SERVICE UNITS MODULES
A. The area valve zone Service Unit (AVSU) shall provide a zone isolation facility, for use either in
an emergency or for maintenance purposes. It shall also be a physical breakpoint to allow work
to be safely carried out on the pipeline.
The AVSU shall be fully gas specific and labelled to identify the medical gas service. Gas
specific NIST connections to BS EN 739:1998 shall be incorporated on the line valve. Pressure
gas services (not vacuum) NIST connections shall incorporate 100% self-sealing valves which
are normally held closed by gas pressure and shall have pressure gauges and electronic
pressure sensors as integral feature of the valve group. The units shall be possible for
Customer-specific equipping with units for up to 5 gases
The line valve shall be brass ball valve with PTFE seals/seats, operated by a quarter turn
handle with pin to prevent over travel in both directions. The ball valve shall connect by stub
pipes to the distribution system by top, bottom, side or rear entry pipes.
The assemblies shall be housed in a valve box, which shall be capable of both surface and
concealed installation. The valve box hinged cover shall open through 180° to provide maximum
access.
Wall frame and door made of shockproof plastic.
Display unit integrated in the upper part of valve box with pressure gauge and clearly identifiable
light displays for displaying the normal status (green) and alarms for too high and too low of
pressure (red) and audible alarm. Gas-types can be individually labelled in distinct letter size
(min. size 12).
Ergonomically access button can only be reinserted with a key, for opening the valve box in
emergency cases.
__________________________________________________________________________________
The AVSU assembly shall provide for natural ventilation to prevent build-up of gas within the
valve box.
The Zone Service Units is 'CE' marked under the Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC with
approval from notified body. Under this directive, the specified products are classified as
Class II a Medical Devices.
Integrated system for the area wise measuring of the medical gas consumption shall be
available for the department AVSU catering an area.
Gas amount measuring system for 1 to 5 gases for measuring after the area shut-off valve.
System power supply and alarm management integrated in the valve box of the areas shut-off
valve unit for measuring and indication of the actual flow and the added up consumption value
of (all 4 bar pressurised medical gases) the unit in the single areas of the hospital. Used for the
consumption-bound invoicing of gas costs for rented out OR onwards and the comparison and
eventually optimization of the area wise gas consumption.
Flow-rate measurement directly in the tube behind the shut-off valve using a gas sensor
according to the principle of the constant temperature anemometric. Measurement independent
of the line pressure and without pressure drop in the line. Precision of the measuring +5%
according to the calculated consumption value illuminated display inside the valve box of the
unit. Indication of the actual flow and consumption measurement of the gasses on a two-line
display. Switching between the gas position indication and settings can be done via a foil button
keyboard on the display unit.
Gas type and measurement range adjustable via the display unit. Possibility to reset the
consumption counter to zero and to set user-defined flow alarm thresholds.
Display and control unit protected from an unauthorized admission. Alarms for malfunction or
communication errors readable for the station staff as a visual signal outside of the valve box.
2.5 MEDICAL GAS CENTRAL ALARM
The medical gas central alarms shall be capable of monitoring a medical gas services by means
of input sensors from the specific plant or point alarms. The medical gas central alarms shall
fully satisfy the HTM 02-01/ISO 7396-1.
Each medical gas alarm panel is programmable on-site. Thus allowing the hospital to hold an
economic level of spares and allowing the system to be easily expanded to accommodate future
requirements.
Each gas service shall be displayed by coloured LED's to show 'Normal' (green), and '4 stage'
alarm conditions (yellow/red). Medical vacuum systems shall be displayed in the 'Normal'
(green) and '3 stage' alarm conditions (yellow/red) only. Failure indicators shall be displayed by
flashing lights and normal indications shall be steady.
An audible warning shall sound simultaneously with any failure indication and a mute facility
shall be provided. Following a mute selection the audible will resound after approximately 15
minutes, or shall operate simultaneously should a further alarm condition occur. A maintenance
'Mute' switch shall be provided internally to the panel for use during maintenance which results
in prolonged pipeline or plant shutdown. This facility shall automatically reset when the gas
service returns to normal.
The alarm panel shall have a 'test' facility to prove the integrity of the internal circuits, LED's and
audible warning. The alarm panel shall incorporate a volt free normally closed relay to allow for
__________________________________________________________________________________
interconnection to either a medical gas central alarm system or an event recording circuit of a
building management system.
Each alarm shall provide a green LED to indicate that electrical power is available at the panel
and a red LED to indicate 'System alarm'. In the event of an electrical power supply failure the
'System alarm' LED shall illuminate (flashing) and the audible warning shall be delayed for 20
seconds to enable standby generator tests.
Line contact monitoring circuits shall be provided to constantly monitor the integrity of the input
sensors and interconnecting wiring. In the event of any fault the line contact monitoring circuits
shall initiate the specific gas service failure indication, a 'System alarm' indication and an
audible warning. Further aids to fault diagnosis shall be provided by means of varying flashing
rates whilst operating the 'Test' switch.
.
Alarm panels must be stored in their packaging at between 00C and +400C, with the relative
humidity between 10 and 95% non-condensing. Alarm panel enclosures provide protection to
IP54. A comprehensive Operating and Maintenance Manual shall be available.
Medical Gas Central Alarm Systems are 'CE' marked under the Medical Devices Directive
NOTE: REPEATER SLAVE ALARM PANEL TO BE PROVIDED IN MANIFOLD ROOM
2.6 AUTOMATIC MANIFOLD SUPPLY SYSTEM & MANIFOLD CONTROL PANEL (for
O2, N2O, A4, A7)
The Modular Manifold Supply Systems are used to provide any of the following medical gases
to a piped distribution system. All manifolds shall fully comply with HTM02-01/ ISO 7396-1.
Modular Manifold Headers and Emergency Standby Manifolds are 'CE' marked under the
Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC with approval from notified body.
The header shall always be connected to the left and right hand inlets of the Control Panel. The
header rack shall be used to make up the required size of manifold for either an odd or even
number of cylinders as indicated on the drawings.
Flexible copper tailpipes shall be used to connect the gas cylinders to the header assemblies.
Tailpipes shall be fully gas specific for all gases.
Non-return valves shall be incorporated into the header assembly to protect the system in the
event of a tailpipe fracture.
The Control System shall supply medical gas from both left and right hand manifold banks.
All regulators shall be protected from over-pressurisation by relief valves which are vented to
atmosphere.
The Control Panel shall be housed in a single panel having a solid construction using a
reinforced polymer moulding for high strength, high chemical and corrosion resistance..
__________________________________________________________________________________
For added safety the voltage inside the panel shall be DC voltage.
There shall be a failsafe system in the event of power failure and there is full continuity of supply
pressure and flow.
The manifold control systems are 'CE' marked under the Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC
with approval from notified body.
Number of cylinders in each bank of the respective gas manifolds shall be as per BOQ
provided.
The Emergency Supply Manifold (ESM) is used to support the main Manifold and connected
downstream of the Manifold control panel and shall be as indicated on the
drawings.
2.7 COMBINED AIR PLANT WITH PRESSURE REDUCING STATION
The Contractor shall provide as shown on the drawings packaged Medical Air reticulation
system. The system shall be designed to provide reticulated medical compressed air service to
all points of usage at 400 kPa & 700kPa after passing through pressure reducing valves. The
system shall comprise of dual identical sets of compressors, after coolers, filters, receivers,
desiccant dryers, pressure reducing sets and shall be complete with all necessary piping,
valves, fittings, controls, control panels, safety devices and electrical supplies in accordance
with the requirements of HTM 02-01.
The compressed air plant and all components and accessories shall be supplied by a single
proprietary manufacturer who has made compressed air plant of similar duties for the last five
years. The final air quality delivered to the reticulation system shall be oil free, dust free and dry
in accordance with the standards specified in HTM 02-01.
1. Compressors
Compressors shall be oil injected rotary triplex screw compressors suitable for continuous
operation at a nominal outlet pressure of 10 bar.
Motors with lower efficiency rating are not acceptable. Each screw compressor shall
be supplied with an intelligent user interface to digitally display service and warning
indications, working pressure, operating temperatures, number of motor starts, on-
load running hours and total running hours. Compressors are to be individually hard-
piped to the receiver manifold as standard.
2. Dryer / Filter / Regulator System

The filter and dryer module shall incorporate high efficiency water separators, oil filters,
heatless regenerative desiccant dryer, dust / activated carbon filters and bacterial filters
.Contaminants in the delivered air downstream of the bacterial filters shall be maintained at
levels below those shown in the following table.
Containment Threshold
H2O 67 ppm v/v
Dry particulates Free from visible particulates in a
75 liter sample
Oil (droplet or mist) 0.1 mg / m 3
__________________________________________________________________________________
CO 5 ppm v/v
CO2 500 ppm v/v
The dryer control system shall incorporate an Energy Management system that shuts off purge
air when no compressor is running.
3. Control Panel
The central control panel shall operate at extra low voltage. A mechanical back-up facility shall
ensure continued operation in the event of malfunction. The control system shall normally
employ automatic rotation of lead compressor to maximize compressor life and ensure wear.
4. Receiver Assembly
Air receivers shall comply with BS 5169: 1992 Class 2 Grade C (>10,000 bars liters)
or BS EN 286-1:1998 Class 1 ( <10,000 bar liters), supplied with relevant test
Certificates. Receiver volume shall be atleast 50% of the plant capacity in 1 minute in
terms of free air delivered at normal working pressure. Receivers shall be fitted with
an electronic automatic drain valve. Single receivers shall only be fitted to plant with a flow
rate less than 400 l/min. The receiver assembly shall be fitted with
a pressure safety valve capable of passing the maximum flow output of all compressors
at 10% receiver overpressure. The receiver shall be further protected by
a fusible plug and include a pressure gauge.
5. Dew Point Monitoring

The dryer shall incorporate a ceramic dew point hygrometer with an accuracy of
±1 0 C in the range -20 to -80 0 C atmospheric dew point and 4-20 `A analog output.
An alarm condition shall trigger on the dryer control panel if the dew point exceeds a -46 0 C
atmospheric set point. The plant control unit shall incorporate a multifunction LCD
displaying amongst other things, the dew point of the delivered air to enable monitoring of the
air quality by the hospital estates department.
2.8 MEDICAL VACUUM PLANT

The system for generating vacuum for medical use in hospitals and shall be according to EN
ISO 7396-1/HTM 02-01. The systems shall consist of 3 rotary vane vacuum pumps of the same
size and 2 upright storage tanks. A control panel controls the whole system and guarantees
load balance of all pump units. Adequate secretion trap(s) and bacteria filter(s) protect the
system and the environment from impurities and germs.
The system shall be designed in a way that all of its components can be serviced without
interruption of operation. Vacuum Plant is 'CE' marked under the Medical Devices Directive
Rotary vane vacuum pumps, oil lubricated

Rotary vane vacuum pumps shall be directly driven, oil-lubricated, air cooled, of low noise and
vibration free. For a rated power of 5.5 kW or bigger the start-up is done in star delta in
combination with an internal vacuum bypass system. All offered vacuum pumps are designed
for a vacuum of up to 98 %. When stopped, the pumps are automatically vented. An internal
non-return valve protects the vacuum system. The oil mist separator prevents environmental
pollution and loss of oil.
The vacuum pumps fully comply with HTM standard.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Vacuum tank
Welded steel receiver vessel shall be provided with inspection access panel and manual drain.
Vacuum Control Panels

Vacuum control panels for the fully automatic operation and monitoring of vacuum plants with 3
vacuum pumps.
The control panel shall incorporate all necessary switch and control elements for the reliable
operation of the vacuum plant.
There shall be separate control circuits for each vacuum pump, so that in case of the failure of
the electrical supply and control of one pump, another pump is automatically set into operation.
Each vacuum pump shall have its own selection switch (hand-O-automatic), hour-counter,
lamp for operation and for malfunction and follow-up control for limitation of switching cycle.
Housing shall be made of sheet steel, lockable, for wall mounting. Complete with in and outlet
terminals, safety facilities, spare fuses, spare part list and wiring diagram.
The control panels shall fully comply with the standards EN 60204 and EN 292.
Bacterial Filter Assemblies
Twin bacterial filters shall be fitted, each containing a replaceable filter element and shall have
secretion traps. The pressure drop through a clean filter passing total design flow rate shall not
exceed 25mmHg at a vacuum of 475mmHg.
2.9 ANAESTHETIC GAS SCAVENGING DISPOSAL SYSTEM
The Anaesthetic Gas Scavenging disposal system shall be a dedicated, specifically designed
active extraction and disposal system for waste anaesthetic gas. The system shall conform to
the requirements of British Standard 6834:1987 and shall be capable of providing a flow rate
between a maximum of 130 L/min. with a 1 kPa resistance to flow and a minimum of 80 L/min.
with a 4 kPa resistance to flow at each terminal unit, irrespective of the number of terminal units
in use.
To ensure that maximum patient safety is achieved the terminal unit shall be designed with a
choked-orifice to prevent a flow rate exceeding 150 L/min.
The AGS plant shall be skid mounted and included on the skid shall be exhauster units, a motor
control unit with starter/isolator, moisture drain flask and flexible connectors to connect the plant
to the pipeline. Exhauster units are electrically driven with a three-phase motor.
The AGSS Plant shall have two exhauster units (Duplex System) with net flow of 520l/min for
other araes and 130 l/min for 1 Operating room.
All remote start switch panels shall incorporate a green indicator light, which illuminates when
the exhauster unit is selected and operating.
The system shall be activated by remote switches that indicate the system is running and the
system shall be static when not in use.
__________________________________________________________________________________
AGS disposal systems and terminal units shall be 'CE' marked under the Medical Devices
Directive 93/42/EEC with approval from notified body.
3.0 Area Alarm Panel
Area alarm provided to inform the staff by visual and audible alarms that abnormal conditions
have occurred, which may require urgent action. Signals are introduced into the alarm panel via
the pressure switches located in the AVSU’s. The panel will display up to two conditions per
gas, high and low pressure plus normal for each gas. The panel will sound an audible alarm
when an alarm condition occurs. “Normal” conditions are displayed by green, steady LED’s and
all fault conditions are displayed by red, flashing LED’s. If any signal contact opens, the
appropriate “normal” light goes out, the appropriate red fault light will flash and the audible alarm
will sound. When the fault condition returns to normal, the alarm panel automatically resets. If
an alarm condition will be in a fault condition for a prolonged period, due to maintenance for
example, the panel incorporates a permanent mute button internally. 220-240V, 50Hz, single-
phase essential supply via an unswitched fused spur, provided by others, will be required to
power the alarm panel.
END OF THE SECTION

STH Bed Head Units and Pendants 13300- 1
___________________________________________________________________________
15302 – BED HEAD UNITS
100 GENERAL MEDICAL SUPPLY UNIT
A. TECHNICAL REMARKS
Medical supply units (MSU) are factory produced Bed Head Services for the
application in medical wards and medical treatment areas. The MSU will comply with:
- The European Union Directive EU-93/42 EEC respectively the Medical Product
Law (MPG).
- The European Standard EN 60601-1, respectively the International Standard IEC
601, medical electrical apparatus; general requirements for safety.
- The European Standard EN ISO 11197, Medical supply units.
- Relevant country standards with regard to medical gases installation and
products.
- The medical product classification IIB.
According to the before mentioned standards a MSU has to be tested individually. The
conformity of the MSU with the above standards has to be confirmed by the
manufacturer of the MSU by means of the CE-mark for medical products. (CE-mark
plus notified body number).
B. CONSTRUCTION OF MSU
The horizontally mounted MSU shall consist of an installation duct for one- or multiple
bed-places. The incoming supply of the mains, communications and medical gas
components shall be a via a rear side or head side entry into the MSU. For each bed
a lighting component shall be a foreseen which is horizontally moveable by +/-30 cm to
the left and the right side. This movement possibility shall secure a free selection of
the bed-position, respectively free chosen axial dimensions between the beds within a
scope of +/-30 cm.
The installation duct shall consist of an extruded aluminum profile with a maximum
length of 7.000 mm in one piece. The endings of the profile have to be closed by die-
cast metal end caps, respectively plastic, color RAL 7036. The surface of the MSU to
be natural anodized aluminum.
The luminaries component for indirect- and reading/examination lighting shall

completely be wired and installable, ready for connection. The electrical connection to
the through wiring of the installation duct has to be executed by a multiple plug-in
connection. For safety reasons, the electrical connection shall not be accessible. The
luminaire component shall consist of extruded aluminum profile, with end-caps made
of die cast metal. Color of the luminaire to be free chosen by the architect according to
the RAL color chart, or in natural anodized aluminum finish. Light distribution opening
for the reading-/examination lighting to be flush, covered by Plexiglas diffuser and
inside fixed louver for glare limitation.
___________________________________________________________________________
1) Lighting:
The illumination in the hospital ward has to comply with the standard EN 12464
part 1. Lighting components with fluorescent tubes have to be integrated for
indirect lighting resp. general lighting and reading-/ examination lighting. These
fluorescent tubes should exclusively operate at digital electronic ballasts. For
maintenance purposes the lighting components should be exchangeable, without
interrupting the power supply of the neighbored bed-places. For observation
purposes, respectively night lighting, an indirect TC 7 W fluorescent compact
tube has to be foreseen.
Possible lighting solutions:
- Ex. 1: Indirect lighting for 2 nos. fluorescent tubes T5, 39W and reading
lighting for 1 no. fluorescent tube T5, 24W, operating at electronic ballasts.
- Ex. 2: Indirect lighting for 2 nos. fluorescent compact tubes TC36W and
reading lighting for 1 no. fluorescent compact tube TC36 W.
- Electronic current impulse relay with integrated transformer 230-240 V/24V,
for switching reading light by patient hand set.
- Night-/observation light for fluorescent compact tubes TC 7 W, to be
installed in the bottom of the installation duct. With cover for individual, non
glaring light distribution towards the rear side wall.
2) Main components:
The following components are:-
- Earthed power sockets, Type, Voltage- and Hertz ratings according to the
requirements of the destination country, not switchable according to EN
793, preferably flush mounted into the profile.
- Switches, push buttons or dimmer switches for lighting components.
- Potential equalization sockets, according to DIN 42801.
- Through wiring in a separated wiring duct, according to EN793. Cable
sizes for power sockets, earth and potential equalization wiring according
to the specific requirements of the destination of the destination country.
3) Communication components:
All common low voltage combinations and plug-in devices for communication
purposes can be installed, as there are f.e.:
- Nurse call, Emergency - / crash-call, diagnostic-call.

- Radio- TV- transmission.
- Sockets for telephone and data-transmission.
- Internal wiring can be executed according to the existing valid standards,
up to an integrated services connection point, preferably with a multiple –
flat ribbon cable pathway is provided within the MSU for routing of the
cables plus final connections to the components by the specialist supplier.
___________________________________________________________________________
4) Medical Gases:
Medical Gas outlets are positioned in boxes which are connected to the MSU
directly below the supply duct. Piping for medical gas is segregated by means of
a separate duct within the MSU, the piping used will be medical grade copper
tube according to EN737-3. The MSU is delivered in a pre-piped configuration,
including the CE-marked medical gas outlets of which all common brand types.
101 WALL-MOUNTED SYSTEM FOR DELIVERY ROOMS
A. PRELIMINARY TECHNICAL NOTES
Medical supply units are manufactured appliances for medical bed areas and
functional areas. The products on offer must comply with:
 The European Standard EN ISO 11197, Medical supply units”.

 The EU guideline 93/42 EU-directive for medical products”.-put into effect
through the national Medical Products Law (MPL), and
 EN 60601-1 ff., or IEC 601 ff. “Medical electrical equipment; General
requirements for safety.
The appliances need to have been checked individually according to the specifications
of these standards and must correspond to the Iib classification. The conformity to
these standards should be certified with the CE mark for medical products (CE mark
with number of the listed authority) by the manufacturer of the MSU.
B. CONSTRUCTION
1) Housing:
The MSU consists of extruded light alloy profiles with a maximum delivery length
of 2 m, made in one piece. Light metal front panel in RAL colors chosen by the
architect. The system is to be set up with different individual profiles for variable
system solutions to realize 1-, 2-, 0r 3-track variants as horizontal, wall-mounted
supply system. The system is to be delivered with one lower medical rail 25 x 10
mm.
As an option, the system has to be suitable for mechanical and formal

combination with a supplementary profile for indirect room and direct examination
lighting.
2) Lighting:
Preferably tubular T5 fluorescent lamps with electronic control gear are to be

used for room and reading/examination lighting.
 General lighting – depending on the total length – one or more luminaire

inserts for one or two T5 fluorescent lamps 39 W, 49 W or 54 W;
___________________________________________________________________________
 Reading/examination lighting: per bed space one T5 fluorescent lamp 24

W (with continuous light emission opening) or 54 W (with interrupted light
emission opening);
For maintenance purposes, the lighting components of the bed units must be
exchangeable without interrupting the supply of adjacent bed units. If desired, it
must be possible to integrate a direct or indirect observation/orientation lighting
TC 7W. Surface –mounted ore recessed luminaries or luminaire components
have to comply with EN 60598-2-25.
3) Mains component:
 Earthed power sockets, Type, Voltage- and Hertz ratings according to the
requirements of the destination country, not switched able according to EN
793, preferably flush mounted into the profile.
 Switches, push buttons, dimmers for 24 V or 230 W, flush-mounted in the
profile, with flush-integrated label for on-site legend, label cover protected
against unintentional loosening while cleaning the MSU.
 Potential equalization pin according to DIN 42801.
Wiring in separate duct. Minimum line cross-section of 0.75 mm² for lighting
components, 1.5 mm² for sockets, 2.5 mm² for earthed conductors and 4 mm² for
potential equalization lines, earthed conductors individually removals.
4) Communication components:
It has to be possible to install all common low voltage and plug-in devices for
communication purposes:
• Nurse call, emergency/diagnostic call

• Radio/TV transmission
• Telephone
• Data transmission (on-site wiring, uncut, up to connection socket)
Wiring according to the existing valid regulations/standards, up to central

connection point, preferably with flat-band cable.
5) Medical Gases:
Medical gas outlets and wiring in closed channel for a minimum of 6 pipes up to
central connection and, if necessary, the cables for anesthetic gas suction. MSU
must be delivered ready for operation, including mounting of CE-marked medical
gas outlets for all common brand types.
C. MSU FOR DELIVERY
-MSU for wake-up room, three-track version according to the statements mentioned
above, total length: 2,000 mm/ 1 bed units, connection as an option at the back or
front, right, right or left, medical rails 25 x 10 mm situated on upper or lower edge.
___________________________________________________________________________
Equipment of MSU per Bed Units
 General lighting – depending on the total length – one or more luminaire inserts
for one or two T5 fluorescent lamps 39 W, 49 W or 54 W.
Reading/examination lighting: per bed space one T5 fluorescent lamp 24 W.
8 earthed sockets 230 V, type 16 A, flush-mounted in the profile, integrated child

protection, uniformity in white, with tension control lamp and flush-integrated
white, orange or green label for on-site legend, transparent label cover protected
against unintentional loosening while cleaning the MSU. Through-wiring for 4
circuits per bed unit.
4 potential equalization sockets, recessed mounted, according to DIN 42801
1 push-button for 24/230 V, flush-mounted in the profile, with flush integrated

label “Examination lighting”, label cover protected against unintentional loosening
while cleaning the MSU.
Night light TC 7W, installed at the front, with fully continual cover for individual
luminous intensity control, with 230 V switch.
1 Free space for the integration of on-site connected connection plate for
monitoring, incl. transmission wire up to the central connection point.
Installation and wiring of low-voltage combination, 40-pole flat-band cable wiring

and optionally additional communication cable in shielded version.
Installation and wiring of low-voltage combination, 40 pole flat-band cable wiring

Telephone socket UAE 8/8 per bed unit, shielded version, delivery and
installation, incl. transmission wire, for on-site wiring with cable, category 5.
2 perforations per bed unit, with blanking cover for retrofitting with components
for 230 V supply voltage.
1 CEE-socket, 230 V, 16 A, 3-pole, through-wiring for 1 circuit per MSU.
Medical Gases
1 x Oxygen
1 x Nitrous Oxide
1 x Entonox
1 x Medical Air
1 x Vacuum
1 x AGSS
___________________________________________________________________________
102 WALL-MOUNTED SYSTEM FOR RECOVERY ROOMS
functional areas. The products on offer must comply with:
 The European Standard EN ISO 11197, Medical supply units”.

 The EU guidelines 93/42 EU-directive for medical products”-put into effect
 EN 60601-1 ff., or EIC 601 ff. “Medical electrical equipment; General
of these standards and must correspond to the IIb classification. The conformity to
with number of the listed and authority) by the manufacturer of the MSU.
B. CONSTRUCTION
1) Housing
The MSU consists of extruded light alloy profiles with a maximum delivery length
of 2 m, made in one piece. Light metal front panels in RAL colors chosen by the
architect. The system is to be set up with different individual profiles for variable
system solutions to realize 1-, 2-, 0r 3-track variants as horizontal, wall-mounted
supply system. The system is to be delivered with one lower medical rail 25 x 10
mm.

combination with a supplementary profile for indirect room and direct examination
lighting.
2) Lighting

used for room and reading/ examination lighting.

inserts for one or two T5 fluorescent lamps 39 W, 49 W or 54 W;
 Reading/examination lighting: per bed space one T5 fluorescent lamp 24 W
(with continuous light emission opening) or 54 (with interrupted light
emission opening);
TC 7W. Surface-mounted or recessed luminaries components have to comply
with EN 60598-2-25.
___________________________________________________________________________
3) Main components
 Earthed power sockets, Type, Voltage- and Hertz-ratings according to the

requirements of the destination country, not switch able according to EN
793, preferably flush mounted into the profile,
 Switches, push-buttons, dimmers for 24 V or 230 W, flush-mounted in the
against unintentional loosening while cleaning the MSU,
 Potential equalization pin according to DIN 42801
components, 1.5 mm² for earthed conductors and 4 mm² for potential
equalization lines, earthed conductors individually removable.
4) Communication components
It has to be possible to install all common low voltage and plug-in-devices for
communication purposes.

• Telephone

5) Medical Gases:
C. EXAMINATION SHORT TEXT MSU FOR RECOVERY
MSU for wake-up room, three-track version according to the statements mentioned
above, total length: 2,000 mm / 1 bed units, connection as an option at the back or
front, right or left, medical rails 25 x 10 mm situated on upper or lower edge.
Equipment of MSU per bed unit:
 General lighting – depending on the total length – one or more luminaire inserts
for one or two T5 fluorescent lamps 39 W, 49 W, 54 W.
Reading/examination lighting: per bed space one T5 fluorescent lamp 24 W.

___________________________________________________________________________
8 earthed sockets 230 V, type 16 A, flush-mounted in the profile, integrated label

“Examination lighting”., label cover protected against unintentional loosening
while cleaning the MSU. Through-wiring for 4 circuits per bed unit.
4 potential equalization sockets, recessed mounted, according to DIN 42801
1 push-button for 24/230 V, flush-mounted in the profile, with flush-integrated

label “Examination lighting”, label cover protected against unintentional loosening
while cleaning the MSU.
Night light TC 7W, installed at the front, with fully continual cover for individual
luminous intensity control, with 230 V switch,
1 Free space for the integration of on site-connected connection plate for

monitoring incl. transmission wire up to the central connection point.
Installation and wiring of low-voltage combination, 40-pole flat-band cable wiring

Telephone socket UAE 8/8 per bed unit, shielded version, delivery and
installation, incl. transmission wire, for on-site wiring with cable, category 5.
2 perforations per bed unit, with blanking cover for retrofitting with components
for 230 V supply voltage,
1 CEE-socket, 230 V, 16 A, 3-pole, through-wiring for 1 circuit per MSU.
Medical Gases
1 x Oxygen
1 x Medical Air
1 x Vacuum
103 WALL-MOUNTED SYSTEM FOR INTENSIVE CARE AREAS
functional areas. They products on offer must comply with:
 The European Standard EN ISO 11197, Medical Supply Units.

 The EU guideline 93/42 EU-directive for medical products” – put into effect
 EN 60601-1 ff., or IEC 601 ff. “Medical electrical equipment; General
of these standards and must correspond to the IIb classification. The conformity to
with number of the listed authority) by the manufacturer of the MSU.
___________________________________________________________________________
B. CONSTRUCTION
1) Housing
The MSU consists of extruded light alloy and profiles with a maximum delivery
length of 7m, made in one piece. Light metal front panels in RAL colors chosen
by the architect. The system is to be set up with different individual profiles for
variable system solutions to realize 1-, 2-, 3-track variant as horizontal, wall-
mounted supply system. The system is to be delivered with one lower medical
rail 25 x 10 mm.

combination with supplementary profile for indirect room and direct examination
lighting.
2) Lighting

used for room and reading/examination lighting.
Available components:

inserts for one or two T5 fluorescent lamps, 39 W, 49 W or 54 W;
 Reading/examination lighting: per bed space one T5 fluorescent lamp 24 W
(with continuous light emission opening) or 54 W (with interrupted light
emission opening);
TC 7W. Surface-mounted or recessed luminaries or luminaire components have
to comply with EN 60598-2-25.
3) Main components
Available components:
 Earthed power sockets, Type, Voltage- and Hertz-ratings according to the

requirements of the destination country, not switchable according to EN
793, preferably flush-mounted into the profile,
 Switches, push-buttons, dimmers for 24 V or 230 W, flush-mounted in the
against unintentional loosening while cleaning the MSU.
 Potential equalization pin according to DIN 42801
components, 1.5 mm² for sockets, 2.5 mm² for earthed conductors and 4 mm² for
potential equalization lines, earthed conductors individually removable.
___________________________________________________________________________
4) Communication components
It has to be possible to install all common low voltage and plug-in-devices for
communication purposes.

• Telephone

5) Medical Gases:
C. EXAMPLE SHORT TEXT MSU – CARE AREA
MSU for hospital ward in the care area, according to the preliminary notes, total length:
approx.2000 mm, connection at the back or front, left or right from the profile,
Equipment:
Indirect room lighting per bed for a T5 fluorescent lamp, 80 W, 49 W or 35 W, with

Multi-Lamp electronic control gear, switching via external switch at the door
combination.
1 reading luminaire with specular reflector for a T5 fluorescent lamp, 24 W,
1 observation lighting per MSU for fluorescent lamp TC 5 W, indirect, switching via
external switch at the door combination,
1 electronic pulse relay per bed 24 V, 1-pole, for switching the reading luminaire on/off,
with integrated transformer, 230/24 V.
8 earthed sockets 230 V per bed, 16 A, installed flush with the profile, 2 separate
electric AV circuits per MSU, installed at the front bottom,
1 potential connection device per bed, flush, according to DIN 42801, installed at the
front or bottom,
For each bed; installation and wiring of a telecommunications combination type; UAE 8
(RJ45/12/11) and eventually additional shielded voice line version,
___________________________________________________________________________
For each bed one telephone and data socket RJ45, shielded version, deliver and
install, for onsite wiring with cat. 5 cable.
2 openings per bed, with blanking cover for retrofitting components for 230 V supply
voltage,
Medical Gases
1 x Oxygen
1 x Air 4 bar
1 x Vacuum
104 MEDICAL SUPPLY UNIT (MSU) for Normal – VIP/ROYAL ROOMS
A. TECHNICAL REMARKS
Medical supply units (MSU) are factory produced Bed Head Services for application in
medical wards – and medical treatment areas The MSU will comply with:
- The European Union Directive EU-93/42 EEC respectively the Medical Product
Law (MPG)
- The European Standard EN 60601-1, respectively the International Standard IEC
601, medical electrical apparatus; general requirements for safety.”
- The European Standard EN ISO 11197, medical supply units.
- Relevant country standards with regard to medical gases installation and
products.
- The medical product classification IIB.
According to the above mentioned standards a MSU shall be tested individually. The
conformity of the MSU with the above standards shall be confirmed by the
manufacturer of the MSU by means of the CE-mark for medical products. (CE-mark
plus notified body number).
B. CONSTRUCTION OF MSU
The MSU and illumination can consist of separate components, which are electrically
and functionally connected by means of factory produced and tested cables trees.
a) Medical Supply Unit.

b) Lighting components, either connected to the Medical Supply Unit, or mounted
separately.
The MSU-system shall be orientated vertically against the wall. The incoming supply
of the mains, communications and medical gas components shall be routed via top
entry direct from the ceiling void, or by means of a horizontally fixed plasterboard-bulk
head which is to be constructed at site, or via rear entry into MSU. The system, as a
medical supply unit, is suitable for the supply or one or two bed places. The product
shall consist of anodized aluminum side profiles with top and bottom covers. The front
panel, which is used as a doctor, shall consist of a medium density chipboard,
___________________________________________________________________________
thickness 18 mm, covered by a high pressure laminate (HPL). The door is hinged on
one side and fitted with a lock to exclude access by unauthorized personnel.
INTEGRATED LUMINAR COMPONENTS:
Night/observation light for fluorescent compact tubes TC 7 W, Light distribution

through an opal cover. Optionally integrated switch on/off.
Main components:
The following components are available:
- Earthed power sockets, Type, Voltage- and Hertz-ratings according to the

requirements of the destination country, not switchable according to EN 793,
preferably flush mounted into the profile.
- Switches, push-buttons or dimmer switches for lighting components.
- Potential equalization sockets, according to DIN 42801.
- Through wiring in a separated wiring duct, according to EN793. Cable sizes for
power sockets, earthed and potential equalization wiring according to the specific
requirements of the destination country.
Communication components
All common low voltage combinations and plug-in-devices for communication

purposes can be installed as there are f.e.:
- Nurse call, Emergency- / crash-call, diagnostic-call.

- Radio-TV-transmission
- Sockets for telephone and data-transmission.
- Internal wiring can be executed according to the existing valid standards, up to
an integrated services connection point, preferably with a multiple-flat ribbon
cable. Alternatively to avoid additional wiring connections a cable pathway is
provided within the MSU for routing of the cables plus final connections to the
components by the specialist supplier.
Medical Gases:
Medical gas outlets are positioned into the front door but mounted onto an internal
sub-frame.
Piping for medical gases is segregated by means of a separate duct within the MSU,
the piping used will be medical grade copper tube according to EN 737-3. The MSU is
delivered in a pre-piped configuration, including the CE0marked medical gas outlets of
which all common brand types are available
C. SHORT TEXT FOR MSU FOR NORMAL CARE AREAS - EXAMPLE
MSU for normal care areas, vertical wall mounting, according to the statements
mentioned above. Front door covered by HPL, décor, light beech”. System
manufactured for the supply of 1 bed (corner panel), with mains, low voltage-
communication and medical gas-supply as per specification mentioned hereunder:
___________________________________________________________________________
Choice of , left or right orientation. Supply side 30°C inclined side profile, corner, or
window side, 90°C angled.
Dimensions: Height……………………..approx 2.100 mm

Rear width…………………………..520 mm.
Front width………………………….420 mm.
Depth……………………………… 150 mm.
Equipment per MSU
1 no. electronic current impulse relay 24V, 1-pole, for switching on/off of the externally
mounted reading light.
1 no. night/observation light for TC 7 W, installed into the side profile.
2 no. individual, unswitchable earthed power sockets for standard power supply.
2 no. individual, unswitchable earthed power sockets for emergency power supply.
2 nos. potential equalization sockets, recessed mounted, specification according to

DIN 42801.
Installation and wiring of a 40-pole nurse call system. Nurse call system itself to be
free issued by the contractor to the manufacturer of the MSU, for installation and wiring
in manufacturers works.
Delivery, installation and wiring of 1 no. Telephone socket, Type…………..
Medical Gas outlets oxygen ad vacuum. Brand to be determined. Including complete

through piping by medical grade copper pipes. Including installation of free issued
medical gas outlets positioned on the front door of the system.
Medical Gases:
1 x Oxygen
1 x Vacuum
END OF SECTION
STH Electric Traction Elevators 14200-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
Scope of Work
A. These specifications shall complete the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
various Electric traction passenger elevators and service elevators specified in the elevators
schedule to be used in this project as manufactured by an approved manufacturer (referred to
as “Sub-contractor”)
B. The work as detailed in this specification shall include all labor, materials, plant, fabrication,
equipment, engineering, design, shop drawings and elevator related works for design,
procurement, fabrication, delivery to site, offloading, setting out, placing into position and to
complete the lift work referred below and as required by the Drawings and Specification in
accordance with the Contract Documents and safety code regulations.
1. General
A. The Sub-contractor shall supply, install, test, commission and hand over the complete
elevator installations as specified in accordance with Quality Assurance defined in section 4
B. The general requirements of the elevators and particular specifications are given in the
Technical Specification Schedules (Appendix 1) and reference tender drawings for detailed
requirements and information.
C. The elevator system shall be equipped with traction machinery and associated traction
equipment, elevator cars, solid state control systems and all other equipment and
accessories required to provide a complete, modern, durable and efficient vertical
transportation system.
D. All the electrical equipment shall be compatible with the available electrical systems of the
building, as specified under the electrical section.
E. All the components shall selected to provide satisfactory operation under prevailing
environmental conditions at the site.
F. Coordinate the work with all other trades affecting work for the installation of all Vertical
Transportation system.
2. Submittal and Samples
The Sub-Contractor shall submit elevator equipment details, brochures, cabin, entrance, and
signal fixture finishes proposed along with a full technical specification for the equipment provided
and highlighting any deviations from this tender specification as part of tender submittal. The
Sub-contractor shall provide scheduled proposal for following submittals.
_____________________________________________________________________________
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted in paper format size A1 with following scale: for plan - 1:20,
1:25, 1:30, For section – 1:25, 1:30, 1:35 to 1:10 and for signalization- 1:10, 1:15, 1:25, 1:30
B. Design Information: Indicate pit, overhead and machine room reaction loads, structural
supports, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on guide rails requiring transfer to
building structure at points of support, load on hoisting beams and stacking plan, heat
emissions.
C. Power Confirmation Details: Include (kW), code letter, acceleration and deceleration
currents, full load running current, demand factor and regenerative loads for applicable
motors and power conversion units.
D. Finish Material: Submit material samples of the finishes exposed to view including but not
limited to;
Entrances / Cabin interior / Signal fixtures
2.1. Qualification Data: Sub-contractor will provide proposed organization chart dedicated for the
project together with qualification details of key personnel.
2.2. Maintenance Manuals: For each elevator, including operation and maintenance instructions,
parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory listing, emergency
instructions. Include all diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and
Installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for the Employer's information at project closeout.
2.3. Where standard EN 81-70:2003 applies requirements for persons with disabilities,
declaration/ certificate of Conformity to EN 81-70 shall be provided to the Employer.
2.4. Warranties: Warranties specified in Section 8.
2.5. Third party organization shall provide Inspection and acceptance certificates and operating
permits as required by governing authorities for normal, unrestricted elevator use. Submit to
Employer at project closeout.
2.6. As-Built Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed elevators, in
accordance with requirements of the Project Documents.
2.7. All above submittals including software programs shall be in English Language only
_____________________________________________________________________________
3. Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications (referred as “Sub-contractor”): Minimum 20 years of experience

in elevator manufacturing.
B. Regulatory and Safety Requirements: Elevator Sub-contractor to indicate compliance to the
code requirements during tendering phase. In addition to local governing regulations, comply
with the applicable provisions of the latest edition of the following standards:
i. EN 81-20:2014 (all parts): "Safety Rules for the Construction and Installation of Lifts –
Lifts for transport of persons and goods – Part 20: Passenger and goods passenger lifts"
and its related derivatives and EN 81-50:2014 "Safety Rules for the Construction and
Installation of Lifts – Examinations and tests – Part 50: Design rules, calculations, examinations
and tests of lift components.
ii. Power supply and electrical installations shall conform to the local power authority
practices.
iii. EN 12015:2014 Electromagnetic compatibility. Product family standard for lifts,
escalators and moving walks. Emission
iv. EN 12016:2013 Electromagnetic compatibility. Product family standard for lifts,
escalators and moving walks. Immunity
v. Nominal characteristics of all equipment forming part of the electrical works shall
specified to conform to the relevant International Electro-technical Commission (IEC)
Standards and the International Standards Organization (ISO).
vi. “Accessibility to lifts for persons including persons with Disability” EN 81-70:2003
regarding the use of elevators by persons with disabilities if applicable in Elevator
schedule (appendix 1).
vii. EN 81-73:2016 - Part 73: Behavior of lifts in the event of fire. Lifts shall follow Safety
rules for the construction and installation of lifts - particular applications for passenger
and goods passenger lifts
C. Conformity to Standards: Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of a complete

installation in total conformity with the EN Standards stipulated in this specification.
Coordinate with the Engineer on the issues related to the safety of the installations.
D. In the event of a conflict between any of the above applicable or reference Standards and
requirements, sub-contractor is to clearly indicate to which standards offer is based on and
to clearly highlight conflicting requirements.
E. Quality Management System ISO - Elevators shall follow the design and manufacturing to
supply, delivery, installation, maintenance and modernization of elevators and escalators and
_____________________________________________________________________________
Supply of related spare parts in accordance with ISO 9001:2008 to meet product and service
requirements for quality assurance for new products. Submit a copy of the valid certificate
among the tender.
F. The Environmental Management system ISO 14001:2004 is applicable to the design and
manufacture of lifts. Elevator Sub-contractor shall provide an Environmental Product
Declaration, where is the focus on energy consumption and environmental requirements.
Submit a copy of the valid certificate among the tender.
G. OHSAS Management system is applicable to the supply, delivery, installation, maintenance

and modernization of elevators and escalators and Supply of related spare parts in
accordance with international OHSAS 18001:2007 standard requirements. Submit a copy of
valid certificate among the tender.
4. Builder’s work and attendance
The following represents a list of the Main Contractor related work provisions, that are not
provided by the Elevator Sub-contractor, but should be coordinated with them. As such, it shall
be the Main Contractor’s (or Construction Manager) responsibility to ensure that these items,
along with any other requirements are included as part of their overall scope.
5. Related Works
A. Power of necessary characteristics during installation of all devices to provide illumination,

operation of required tools, hoists and power for starting, testing and adjusting of equipment.
a. Provide a temporary power supply
b. Provide a permanent power supply
c. The Elevator Sub-Contractor is to give full details of requirement and rating
B. Elevator shafts will be constructed without projections or recesses on the inside of the shaft.
Steel work includes also divider beams or vertical beams if the slab-to-slab distance is more than
bracket span.
C. Supports in concrete or steel elevator shafts to carry all structural reaction, impact and uplift
loads imposed by the equipment. Where the shaft are constructed as blockwork, the
concrete beams shall be provided in location as per elevator sub-contractor requirements.
D. Masonry and grouting of elevator shaft entrances and landing sills.
E. Hoist beams, lifting hook beams and vertical beams as required. Design and installation
shall be provided by others.
F. Waterproofing to keep pits dry.
_____________________________________________________________________________
G. Elevator machine room, controller room and pit access doors for lifts. Doors shall be fire-
resistive, self-closing, self-locking and permit the door to be opened from inside without a
key as per EN81 requirements.
H. Finishing coat of paint on all prime coat entrance frames and door panels as provided by
Elevator Sub-Contractor.
I. Finished flooring in elevators’ cabin, unless otherwise specified as in elevator schedule. This
Section shall be responsible for engineering the equipment to accommodate the weight of
the finished flooring, ensuring that hoist machines and sub-flooring are adequately
constructed.
J. Permanent heating, ventilation, air conditioning necessary to keep Machine Room / Lift
Shaft and Controller Room ambient temperature between ≥5°C to ≤ 40°C.
K. Installation of drains in elevator pits to ensure pits remain dry.
L. Proper electric feeder wires to lift as determined by supplier, including mainline switches,
circuit breakers or fuses, and supplementary disconnect switches at remote locations
(where required). Required outlets or feeder wires to controllers as for signal circuit, car
lights, fans and in pit for pit and shaft lighting.
M. Routing design for wiring outside the elevator shaft
N. Provision of conduit and wiring between the elevator shafts, elevator machine rooms and
BMS room (Building Management System)
O. Provide lighting and receptacle outlets within machine and controller rooms, elevator pits.
Minimum light level of 200 lux at machine and controller room floor levels and in front of
each controller and 100 lux at lift pit floor level. Locate light switch inside machine (or
controller) room, adjacent to access door, and within pit adjacent to access ladder or pit
access door.
P. Provide shaft lighting including wiring, conduit, fixtures and control switches required for
same. Coordinate installation of these fixtures with the elevator sub-contractor including
carrying of costs to have lift contractor operate lift where electrical contractor proposes to
install these devices from the elevator car top (or platform).
Q. Building lightning protection terminal in the elevator machine room and pit.
R. For all elevators, provide 3-Phase and single-phase emergency power to all feeders within
the machine room and controller rooms. While it is not anticipated to have all lifts operate
on emergency power, final sequencing to establish the number of lifts operating on
emergency power remains to be confirmed.
S. Two (2) advance warning transfer signals from the emergency power transfer switch to the
elevator machine room in accordance with the following:
_____________________________________________________________________________
• Signals will warn of impending transfer from normal to emergency power (under test
conditions) for signal 1, and from emergency power to normal power (at all times) for signal
2.
• Signals will consist of a set of contacts which open at the start of the time delay and return
to the closed position once the time has expired, and transfer of power sources has
occurred.
• Allow for a pre-transfer warning signal of 20 seconds although time will be adjustable in
increments of 5 seconds between 0 sec and 120 seconds.
• Signal wires are to be brought to the lift controllers for termination.
T. Elevator emergency power transfer switch will be provided with an in-phase monitoring
device to ensure available power sources (emergency and normal) are in phase prior to
switch transferring.
U. Three (3) sets of individual fire alarm signals to each Lift Machine Room. These signals
include:
• Primary Recall Signal, generated by all Building fire alarm sensors and devices, except
those located at the main recall lobby.
• Alternative Recall Level Signal, from a designated smoke detector in the main lift lobby
which will initiate recall of lifts to the nearest adjacent floor to primary recall level.
• Machine Room/ Controller Room/ Hoistway Fire, from smoke detectors within both
elevator controller rooms along with fire sensing devices in the hoistway and pits.
Controller room smoke detector must be provided with a set of dry (auxiliary) contacts,
wired directly to elevator
V. This Section shall coordinate the following with other contractor as per elevator schedule
(appendix 1) controller features:
• Which elevator controller the signal wiring for the fire alarm and emergency power are to
be run.
• Security card reader and CCTV camera wiring interconnections with the elevator machine
rooms and elevator cars.
W. If required by Employer, Main contractor shall provide within each elevator Machine Room
or controller room, two Local Area Network (LAN) 10BaseT Ethernet ports, to allow
interconnection of the elevator and escalator monitoring system to the LAN. Locate these
Ethernet ports adjacent to the main logic controller in each machine room in co-ordination
with elevator sub-contractor. Install additional Ethernet ports in areas equipped with
dedicated vertical transportation monitoring terminals. For all Ethernet ports associated
_____________________________________________________________________________
with this remote monitoring system, issue static IP addresses for each port. For vertical
transportation provide one Category 5 cable which runs from the respective unit’s main
logic controller (in the upper machinery space) to the nearest lift machine (or controller)
room. In each machine (or controller) room, and rooms containing a monitoring terminal,
provide one single phase 15 Amp outlet dedicated to the monitoring equipment. This circuit
must be fed from an emergency power supply.
X. Other Than the Above-mentioned general items; The Main Contractor Shall Provide the
following particular requirements such as:
a. Architraves of landings as per design
b. Wire mesh partition and rail guard/mesh/safety chain in the machine room.
c. Provide ladder and handrail for two level machine room
d. Permanent 3 phase 415V 50 Hz and 1 PH 240V 50Hz TPN + SPN circuit breakers of
required capacity etc. at the head of the shaft (MRL elevators) or in the elevator
machine room as applicable.
e. Hoisting beam/ hooks in the machine room roof slab.
f. Provision of conduits with draw wire between elevator shaft and security room /
reception for elevator intercom supervisory panel.
g. Sufficient weatherproof lockable storage accommodation to store the elevator
materials at ground floor near elevator shaft.
h. Normally open free sensing contacts with wiring from fire alarm panel to elevator
shaft, if automatic recalling of elevators during fire is required.
i. Supply and installation of tubular free-standing scaffolding in pit area as required by
the Elevator Sub-contractor to set up the installation inside the elevator shafts with
working platform and removal thereof.
j. Carnage facility for unloading lifts materials from containers and shifting the same to
various floors and machine room.
k. Temporary power supply for installation and testing purposes up to shaft and machine
room with breakers.
l. Elevator Entrance Safety Protection During construction
6. Project Conditions
A. The project requires all equipment’s shall be capable of operating in indoor environment and
shall follow EN 81-20:2014 requirements for:
_____________________________________________________________________________
B. Ambient temperature in the machinery space(s) shall be maintained between ≥5°C to ≤ 40°C
C. Minimum Ventilation area should be one (1) percent of the cross-sectional area of the shaft
D. Humidity max. 95% (at + 40°C)
7. Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials, components and equipment in original protective
shipping containers with labels intact and legible.
B. Delivery on Site: Do not deliver materials, components and equipment on site until adequate
protected storage facilities are available or for direct installation.
C. Storage and Protection: Store materials, components and equipment above ground, under
cover and in a well-ventilated protected area, which shall be provided by main contractor.
8. Warranty
A. Elevator Sub-contractor Warranty: Provide a written warranty signed by the elevator

manufacturer (called as “sub-contractor”) agreeing to repair, restore, or replace defective
elevator work within the specified warranty period. Spare parts required under related
Article hereunder are not part of this requirement.
(a) Warranty Period: twelve (12) months warranty from date of project handing over.
9. Maintenance Service
A. The Elevator Sub-contractor shall be responsible for the complete maintenance of the
elevators for a period of 12 months from the date of acceptance by the Engineer
(“Employer”) of the complete elevator installation and shall include for cleaning, oiling and
inspection of the elevator and all the associated equipment at periods of one month and to
include for all emergency calls throughout the 24 hours of the day through the failure of the
elevator to operate normally.
After installation, the elevator system should have a cloud-based monitoring system for
maintenance (24/7 monitoring system) purposes. This system must be able to analyze and
monitor the essential parameters of the lifts and compare it with the ideal parameters of
the same configuration lift system, if any un-usual performance or deviations are detected,
it will notify maintenance team to take the appropriate action. Facility management and/or
owner should have online access to web- based system to follow up the lifts system health
status include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.
_____________________________________________________________________________
10. Product
A. Components are to be designed, manufactured, and supplied in accordance EN 81-20:2014

code requirements for engineering, design calculation and failure situations. These are to
be of sound mechanical and electrical construction and made of materials, free of defects,
with adequate strength and of suitable quality. Materials classified as harmful (such as
asbestos) are not to be used.
B. Components are to be selected and installed to suit the environmental conditions and
influences in order not to affect the safe operation of the system.
10.1. Capacity
Each elevator shall have a safe carrying load inclusive of weight of complete car, cables and
ropes and in accordance with the attached Elevator schedule (Appendix 1).
10.2. Speed
The rated speed of the elevators shall be as specified in the Elevator schedule (Appendix 1).
10.3. Traction Machine
A. The motor shall be permanent magnet synchronous motor to provide highest possible
efficiency. The system shall combine VVVF control utilizing vector control and IGBT
transistors. The traction sheave shall be made of suitable material to provide good wearing
properties of both ropes and sheaves.
B. The DC operated electromagnetic double independent brakes shall be provided. The brake
shoes being electrically held off the brake drum and mechanically applied by compression
springs. A manual break release shall be provided to facilitate movement of the elevator.
C. The permanent magnet synchronous motor efficiency shall be 92 - 95% and have a zero-
slip factor.
D. Motor protection for the hoisting motor against overheating and burning. If the hoisting motor
starts to overheat, the elevator car is driven to the nearest possible floor where the doors
will be opened to let the passenger out of the car. After the motor cools down the elevator
will resume normal operation.
E. The machine should be fixed to the rail at the upper part of the shaft, isolated by isolation
pads in case of machine room less type and on the machine room when a machine room is
used.
_____________________________________________________________________________
F. The winding insulation levels of the motors shall be of insulation Class ‘F’ (operated in class
B), protection class IP21 and motors shall meet the requirements of EN 81.
10.4. Motor Drive
A. The variable voltage, variable frequency motor drive (VVVF) unit will control the motor speed
using a microprocessor.
B. The VVVF system will be provided with a converter, which performs AC – to – DC conversion
and an inverter, which is designed to invert DC to three-phase variable frequency AC. The
inverter will give an output of sinusoidal current by application of pulse width modulation
technology. The inverter will control voltage and frequency continuously and accurately in
accordance with the speed command signal, which is performed by a microprocessor in the
elevator controller.
C. The VVVF drive unit will be capable of keeping the elevator service under the following
condition.
Supply Line Voltage Fluctuation: - 10% + 5 % from the rated voltage
Frequency Variation - + 1% from the rated frequency
D. The VVVF drive unit will be provided with contractors for removing the power from the motor
of the traction machine. The Contractors will open each time the car stops. The brake of the
traction machine will be applied while the contact drops out.
E. A pulse rotary encoder will detect the actual speed of the car. The difference between the
speed command signal and the actual speed measured by the pulse rotary encoder will
control the motor speed while the car is accelerating, decelerating and landing.
F. Protective devices will ensure to open the main circuit between the VVVF unit and the motor
of the traction machine to stop the elevator when one of the following conditions occurs:
G. Phase reversal; phase failure, failure of supply voltage, over current, overheating of thyristor
and transistor, operation of any safety device.
H. Leveling must be within ± 5 mm of landing threshold with load range of 0-100%. Accuracy
is to be maintained regardless of change of rope stretch and, in both directions,
10.5. Hoist Way
Minimally complying with the following:

_____________________________________________________________________________
A. Top of each hoist way to be passively vented to the outside.

B. Polyurethane (PU) buffers to be provided where speed is less than or equal 1m/s otherwise
Oil buffers are to be used.
C. Brake: Non-asbestos lining (spring loaded closed and open electrically).
D. Hoist way Operating Devices: Redundant series wired terminal stopping devices to slow
down and stop the car automatically at the terminal landings
E. Pit Switch: Emergency stop switch to be located in the pit accessible from the pit access
door, which when operated should stop the car regardless of position in the hoist way.
F. Limit Switches: Mechanical limit switches are to be provided at top and bottom end of the
guide rails.
G. Guides: Rubber tired coil spring tension adjusted roller guides to be provided for lifts with
speeds of 2.5 m/sec or greater, If speed is less than 2,5m/s sliding guide shoes will be
provided. Guide shoes are mounted on top and bottom of the car frame, and on top and
bottom of the counterweight frame.
H. Rope Anchor: Anchor ropes to the frame by means of an equalizing device to insure
uniform cable loading.
I. Interlocks: Electro-mechanical locks are required.
J. Hoist way Entrances:
(a) Doors fire rated for not less than 2.0 hours (E120 min), with exception for glass doors.
(b) For each landing served, furnish and install a complete passenger elevator hoistway
entrances
10.6. Elevator Car
A. Construction: The size of the car, interior design and decorations, ceiling and lighting and
other facilities shall be as called for in the Elevator schedule (Appendix 1). The car shall be
of rigid steel framework with sound isolation design and manufactured in accordance with
relevant sections of EN 81-20:2014 code.
B. Cabin interior: Provide Satin finish stainless steel grade 304 for all elevators, if not otherwise
specified in the Elevator schedule (Appendix 1).
C. Provide catalog specifying the offered finishes and signalizations as part of tender package
for further client / engineer approval.
D. Provide trap door opening size at least 400 x 500 mm as defined in EN 81-20:2014, opening
outward and capable of being opened from one side. Opening of trap is to activate electrical
_____________________________________________________________________________
interlock preventing operation of elevator. In case of EN81-72 applicable, trap door shall be
provided with dimension 500x700mm.
E. Air Purifier in Elevator Cabin:
Elevator supplier to include an air purifier, inside the ceiling structure (not visible to elevator
user) to improve the air quality in the elevator cabin without using any chemicals to enhance
the comfort & safety of the passenger using high rise buildings.
The system to include the catalyzer UV light combined with a photocatalysis reaction creates
oxidizers, which significantly reduce odors, air pollutants, VOC’s (chemical odors), smoke,
mold and normal bacteria in the air.
*Display Sticker in cabin to communicate elevator is equipped with air purifier – by

Elevator supplier
F. Audio Visual “Information Screen” with Sound:

(if applicable as called for it in the Elevator schedule (Appendix 1):
Each passenger elevator car shall have fitted information display screen. The Elevator
Subcontractor shall provide the screen size that can fit into the return with the highest
quality,resolution and sound. Elevator Sub-Contractor shall provide and install a co-axial or
a minimum six core single mode fiber optic bend insensitive travelling cable or other suitable
types of travelling cable, to enable the digital signage (if applicable) and speaker (if
applicable) to be connected by others at both ends.
• The cable and equipment shall be capable of connection by Ethernet protocol to enable live
streaming from the internet “Online version”, or
• Media contents to be updated by connection of USB media storage device “Offline version”.
The Audio Visual Sub-Contractor (AV) shall connect the digital signage (if applicable) and
speaker (if applicable) within the elevator car, under supervision of the Elevator Contractor.
The Audio Visual Sub-Contractor (AV) shall provide any necessary equipment’s as video
servers, media players, etc. for livestreaming over the Online Version screen if applicable.
G. Platform: Should be manufactured from heavy duty steel sheets. Sill is to be anti-slip, with
provision for car doors. Sill shall be of the type reducing the number of call-backs related to
entrance problems.
H. Load Weighing Device: installed in car is to prevent car from starting in either direction if
maximum loading (110% of rated load with a minimum of 75 kg) is exceeded. Buzzer is to
sound and an 'overweight' light is to be illuminated until car is below maximum load. Excess
load is to cause car to by-pass landing calls if car is loaded above normal but within an
acceptable load limit.
_____________________________________________________________________________
I. Top station: Constant pressure up/down buttons on each lift.

J. Isolating Cushion: Rubber pads supported on auxiliary steel frame fastened to car frame are
to form isolating cushion between car and car frame.
K. Guide Devices: Adjustable and renewable, and fastened to top and bottom of car frame.
L. Ventilation and Lighting: Provide each car with necessary lighting (illumination level of
100Lux as per EN 81-20:2014 and adequately rated, silent running, properly padded and
rigidly fixed exhaust fan of approved type and manufacture.
M. Automatic Operation of Ventilation and Lighting: Fan and lights are to switch on
automatically when car is called or when landing doors are opened, remain switched on
whilst car is in operation, and switch off by time at least 300 seconds (5 min) after car has
stopped. Automatic operation is to be field adjustable.
N. Natural ventilation is to be provided for each car irrespective of provision of forced ventilation
or air conditioning if applicable, refer to Elevator Schedule (Appendix 1). Design and visibility
of ventilation holes shall be submitted for engineer approval.
O. Inspection lamp sockets are to be provided on top of the car.
P. Equipment on top of the car is to be provided in accordance with EN81 code. A rigid
balustrade shall be provided on top of the car to ensure safety of maintenance personnel
on top of car.
Q. Intercom Set: Provide 3-way intercom set integrated in car control panel. Communication
shall be established between lift car, the lift machine room and the building reception or
security room. All external wirings must be supplied and installed by other respective trades
as per the elevator supplier requirement.
10.7. Auxiliaries
A. Guide Rails: Highest quality steel T-sections, suitable for travel, car weight and support
locations at structural floors and connected with steel splice plates used on car side. Guide
surfaces are to be accurately machined and polished. On counterweight side cold-drawn
hollow T-section guide rails are allowed to be used in cases, where counterweight safety
gear is not required and in where EN81 code requirements for strength and deformation
are met. Guide rail fixings are to be heavy steel brackets with clips that allow guide rail
movement. Guide rail and fixings are to withstand sudden application of safety gear under
maximum load. It is the Elevator Sub-Contractor's responsibility to provide exact / suitable
support system, fixing accessories and distances.
_____________________________________________________________________________
B. Guide shoes shall be provided and mounted to the top and bottom of both the car and
counterweight frame. Each guide shoe assembly shall be arranged to maintain constant
contact on the rail surfaces.
Both the car and counterweight shall be fitted as minimum with correctly sized slipper or
eventually roller type guide shoes if applicable as per Elevator schedule (Appendix 1).
C. Counterweight: Structural steel frame fitted with cast iron sub-weights secured with tie rods
or steel sub-weights secured with clamps to prevent movement. Weight is to equal total car
weight plus 40 to 50% of contract load. Counterweight is to be screened to a height of 2.5
m from bottom of pit and fitted with renewable guide shoes at top and bottom.
D. Suspension Ropes: Special acid quality steel or high-grade traction steel with safety factor.
Ropes are to be securely attached to car and counterweight and are to have independent
means of adjustment. The number and size of ropes shall comply with the factor of safety
requirements of EN 81-20:2014. Provide test certificates of compliance with appropriate
Code and/or Standard prior to shipment.
E. Safety Gear and Governor: Mechanical safety gear is to be mounted on and securely
fastened to car frame and actuated by a governor mounted in machine room. Governor is
to be directly driven by steel cable or chain. In machine room less applications, the governor
shall be mounted in the overhead area of the hoistway.
F. Safety gear is to hold car securely under maximum load and governor tripping speed
conditions. Jaws of gear are to engage guide rails through self-aligning shoes with surfaces
carefully machined parallel to guide rail face. Pressure of jaws on the two guides is to be
equal. Safety gear is to bring car to stop from governor tripping speed. Method of stopping
is to be instantaneous or progressive as specified in Elevator Schedule and is to be
accordance EN 81 requirements.
G. Governor is to be accurately adjusted and sealed to electrically trip safety gear at a speed
at least equal to 115% of car's specified speed. The maximum allowable tripping speed
shall be as specified in EN 81-20:2014. Operation of governor on over speed is also to
open a switch disconnecting power from motor and brake control circuits, which are to be
open before safety gear is applied. Restoration of power is not to be possible until safety
gear has been manually re-set. Mechanical tripping will appear at about 1.2 to 1.3 times
the rated speed. Double trip (downward and upward) protection to be in accordance with
EN 81-20:2014. Required related type tests certificates are to be submitted.
H. Counterweight safety gear: In case of accessible space available under counterweight,
elevators shall be provided by counterweight safety gear.
_____________________________________________________________________________
I. Buffers: specified in Elevators Schedule (Appendix 1) and shall comply EN code

requirement. Installed under each car and counterweight.
J. All safety factors are to be applied in accordance with the EN81-20:2014 Standards
recommendations.
K. Above auxiliaries shall be designed and coordinated with the Engineer in order to provide
an aesthetically pleasant appearance.
10.8. Elevator Doors
A. Opening Sizes: Landing and car door openings are to be same size and defined in Elevator
Schedule
B. Car and landing doors shall be made of stainless-steel finish 304 grades if is not specified
in Elevator Schedule.
C. Door sills at all floors are defined in Elevator Schedule (Appendix 1).
D. Door Operator Equipment:
(a) Door Operator: Automatic operated door operator with or without reduction gear shall
be provided to open and close the car and hoistway doors simultaneously. Door
movement shall be cushioned at both limits of travel. An electro-mechanical interlock
shall be provided at each hoistway entrance to prevent operation of the elevator unless
all doors are closed and locked. An electric contact shall be provided on the car at each
car entrance to prevent the operation of the elevator unless the car door is closed.
(b) The door operator shall be arranged so that, in case of interruption or failure of electric
power, the doors can be readily opened by hand from within the car, in accordance with
applicable code. Emergency devices and keys for opening doors from the landing shall
be provided as required by the local code.
(c) Doors shall open automatically when the car has arrived at or is leveling at the respective
landings. Doors shall close after a predetermined time interval or immediately upon
pressing of a car button. A door open button shall be provided in the car. Momentary
pressing of this button shall reopen the doors and reset the time interval.
(d) The car door shall be provided with a protective curtain of light from which the active
part extends at least 2.0 m above the floor. This device shall be designed to sense an
obstruction in its path while the doors are closing and automatically cause the car and
hoistway door to return to the open position before touching the obstruction.
(e) Doors should remain open for a time period sufficient to meet handicapped requirements
as per EN81-70 with a minimum time of 5 seconds in response to a car call.
_____________________________________________________________________________
(f) Door hangers and tracks shall be provided for each car and hoistway door. Tracks shall
be contoured to match the hanger sheaves. The hangers shall be designed for power
operation with provisions for vertical and lateral adjustment. Hanger sheaves shall have
polyurethane tires and pre-lubricated and sealed-for-life bearings.
(g) The maximum kinetic energy shall be in accordance with EN 81-20:2014
recommendations.
E. Door Frames and Sills: Door support units, fitted at landing entrance, are to be self-
contained, comprising sill, two angle uprights and head. Non-slip sill is to be fitted at each
landing and car entrance. Sills must have slots to allow debris to fall out in order to prevent
jamming of the doors.
F. Elevator Sub Contractor is to coordinate with the Engineer regarding landing door
installation details.
G. Doors are to be fire rated as per EN81-58:2003 or other applicable codes and standards
subject to approval of the Engineer with a minimum of 120 minutes except glass doors.
Test certificates, from an international laboratory, are to be submitted.
10.9. Controller
A. Enclosure: Vertical, totally enclosed cubicle type, constructed from sheet steel, sealed
according IP21 with hinged doors at front and ventilation louvers or other approved method
to ensure that inside temperature does not exceed safe limit for equipment.
B. Components are to include all contactors, relays, logic circuits, selectors, timing devices,
control transformers and apparatus associated with control of elevator in machine room.
Disconnecting devices may be wall mounted outside controller cubicle, next to main supply
feeder.
C. Contactors: Power contactors are to be electro-magnetically operated and are to have
carbon to copper contacts. Control circuits are to have silver contacts. Contactors are to
close with wiping, self-cleaning action. Reversing contactors are to be mechanically
interlocked to prevent contacts for one direction closing whilst contacts for other direction
are closed.
D. Insulation for coils and other insulated components is to be Class F or better, suitable for
ambient temperatures at location.
E. Control Voltage to be equal or less than 50 V AC.
F. Protection: Controller is to provide protection, by cutting-off power supply, applying brake
and bringing car to rest, in the event of any of the following failures:
(a) No voltage or sustained under voltage.
_____________________________________________________________________________
(b) Over-current in any component.

(c) Phase reversal of power supply.
(d) Overload.
(e) Operation of any safety device.
(f) Overheating of electronic components.
(g) Any other protection required by the applicable standards.
G. Overload feature:
(a) All Lifts to be fitted with the load-weighing feature to illuminate “overload” fixture and
defeat the car’s operating circuits when carload reaches 110% or more of rated load
(b) Car platform may require stiffening to minimize margin of error resulting from
excessive deflection
(c) Overload fixture and/or circuit defeat for passenger lifts to conform to governing code
10.10. Electrical Equipment
A. Emergency Power Automatic Landing System: System operates to rescue passengers at

the time of unexpected power failure. System controls the elevator car to land at the nearest
floor and opens doors immediately in order to evacuate passengers. Operation shall be
automatic. All safety features shall remain operational during system operation. After
passengers’ evacuation doors will remain closed and elevator stopped.
B. In case of emergency generator is available, elevator sub-contractor shall provide
sequential operation to call elevator to predefined floor.
C. General:
(a) Provide all wiring for proper operation and control of equipment in accordance with EN
81-20:2014. Provide wiring within the elevator hoistway. Wiring / conduit outside the
elevator hoistway as necessary are to be provided by the electrical contractor.
Coordinate for quantity and specifications of wires requirement.
(b) Machine room and pit shall be equipped in accordance with EN 81-20:2014.
D. Electrical Wiring Characteristics:
(a) Equipment generally is to be in accordance with the requirements of the relevant local
and international Codes and Standards. Equipment is to operate satisfactorily if voltage
varies +/-10% and/or frequency varies +/-5% from nominal.
(b) Electric installations and appliances are to satisfy of EN 81-1:1998+A3:2010,
(c) Protection against electric faults shall be provided in accordance with the requirements
of EN 81-1:1998+A3:2010 and local codes.
_____________________________________________________________________________
(d) Stopping Devices shall be provided in accordance with Clause 14.2.2 of EN 81-
1:1998+A3:2010.
(e) Conduits and Wire ways: wiring and unarmored cables, except those moving with car,
are to be enclosed in heavy PVC trunking.
(f) Wiring is to be arranged neatly and clearly in conduits and terminated on shrouded
terminal blocks.
(g) Grounding: metal frames of lift installations are to be earthed in accordance with the
relevant Codes and Standards.
E. Travelling cable: The traveling cables shall be 450/750V grade multi – core with stranded
high conductivity copper conductors, especially designed for elevator duty and
manufactured to EN 81. These cables shall be properly supported by retaining straps and
individual cable clamps. Extra wire of 10% are requested for all wiring.
F. Other provision: Elevator Sub-contractor shall provide provision for CCTV and Card Reader
wiring interface as per Elevator Schedule (appendix 1).
10.11. API Control System
The controller should be designed to have the capability to connect with other medical
center facility (e.g., Automated Guided Vehicles AGV, Robots, or remote mobile calling
system) Via (Application Programing interface API). API interface should be part of the
controller and should have the capability to work either via building ethernet or GSM
network.
10.12. Control Accessories
A. General: Provide all necessary cars; landing and other control accessories as required by
specified control system and in accordance with the standards requirements and especially
those related to handicapped, if applicable as per Elevator Schedule (Appendix 1).
B. Car Operating panel: A minimum of one Car operating panel should be provided in cabin
wall as per available and approved by the Engineer position for each elevator.
(a) Display unit located within or adjacent to each car operating panel for travel direction and
floor level indication
(b) Up and down illuminated arrows.
(c) Alarm push button.
(d) Illuminated floor push buttons.
(e) Attendant/passenger priority key operated switch.
_____________________________________________________________________________
(f) Door open and door close pushes.

(g) Overload light and buzzer.
(h) 3-way hands free intercom station (interconnected to the security room, lift machine room,
and building reception).
(i) Braille tags or relief marking included at all buttons on the car control panel, and as per
EN 81-70:2003.
C. Car Position Indicator: A car position indicator(s) consisting of LED display shall be provided
in the car. The position of the car shall be indicated by single or dual numeral and/or letter
floor designations along with an arrow indicating direction of car travel. The position indicator
shall be located above the Car Control Panel. A voice announcer, in English language shall
be provided to indicate operation of the doors and the floors where the elevator stops and
the direction of the elevator.
D. Hall Push Buttons Stations: Comprise up and down pushes and associated illuminated
arrows to indicate registered call. Terminal landings are to have one push and one arrow.
Illuminated arrow is to switch off when call is answered. Push buttons are to be most up-to-
date, mechanical, soft touch, metallic fitting in face panel.
E. Hall Position Indicator: Hall position indicator shall be provided to indicate the position of the
car in the hoistway with single or dual numeral and/or letter floor designations along with an
arrow corresponding to the direction of car travel. This shall be located in the elevator lobby
at landing floors combined with the hall push button station.
F. At Main Lobby hall push button station shall be provided with illuminated push buttons. On
top of each landing door a hall position indicator shall be provided. Characteristics are
similar to above.
G. Push buttons characteristics are also to satisfy the recommendations of EN 81-70 latest
edition related to the requirements for disabled people. In addition, all devices operable by
the general public shall be identified with Braille and/or tactile symbols. The car control
panel(s) and hall pushbutton stations shall be located in accordance with code requirements
to assist the handicapped if applicable.
H. Gong (gong sounds) shall be provided when car arrives at the landing and a hall call is being
served at that landing.
I. Alarm bell shall be provided in or adjacent to the elevator hoistway. This bell shall be
connected to the alarm button in the car control panel and location in main floor.
J. Emergency key to open all landing doors is to be handed to the Employer.
K. Car control station is to project outside car platform, at an approved location. Trailing control
cable is to terminate at terminal block on control station.
_____________________________________________________________________________
L. Car control station is to project above car roof and is to contain necessary control pushes
for maintenance, lamp with switch and convenience power socket as per code requirement.
M. Fireman switch, installed in a locked cabinet with break glass feature, is to be provided for
each elevator bank and elevator dedicated for fire fighters’ use. Cabinets are to be located
at main landing floor, in an approved easily accessible position. Identification and inscription
are to be engraved on the faceplate. Refer to "Control Systems" Article for description of
operation.
N. The characteristics of all above equipment and accessories shall be coordinated with the
Engineer and subject to his approval.
10.13. Control Systems
A. Interlock: No car is to be able to move unless car and corresponding landing doors are fully
closed and interlocked. It is not to be possible to open landing door, except that at which car
is stopped, and any other door without the use of special tamperproof key.
B. Fire Emergency Operation: Elevators with control system to recall “Phase 1” cars in case of
fire. Floor of recall to be determined based on fire conditions, obtained from the main Fire
Alarm System. In case recall floor is on fire, elevators are to be directed to alternate floor.
Designated fireman’s access elevators are to be equipped with “Phase 2” operation
C. Limit Switches shall be provided and set to function as close as possible to the terminal floors,
without risk of accidental operation. They shall be located at top and bottom of well.
D. Operation from Stand-by / Emergency Supply: In the event of normal power supply failure all
elevators are to stop. The “Emergency Power Automatic Landing System” will bring all the
cars to the nearest landing and evacuate passengers. Upon receiving signal that emergency
a.c. power supply is off, control system is to return elevators one at a time, in sequence,
directly to main floor and elevators are then to be operational, and to respond to car and
landing calls, and as indicated on the drawings. After restoration of normal power supply all
elevators are to resume normal service automatically.
E. Fireman Switch: Operation of switch is to separate elevator control, cancel all car and landing
calls, prevent operation of door protective devices if provided and bring all cars to stop at
main landing, with automatic doors open. Resetting of switch manually is not to be possible.
Car is to resume operation manually from car push buttons.
F. Control of Elevator Operation under Fire or Other Emergency Conditions
_____________________________________________________________________________
G. EN81-73:2016 (Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts – Particular
applications for passenger and goods passenger lifts: Part 73 Behavior of lifts in the event
of fire)
H. For cars standing at a floor other than the main floor with doors open, the doors shall close
immediately, and the car shall proceed to the main floor.
I. Door reopening devices for power-operated doors, which are sensitive to smoke, heat or
flame shall be rendered inoperative.
J. Selective Collective Control:
Pressure upon one or more car buttons shall send the car to the designated landings in the
order in which the landings are reached by the car, irrespective of the sequence in which
the buttons are pressed, provided the hoistway door interlock and car door switch circuits
are completed. During this operation, the car shall also answer calls from the landings, which
are in the prevailing direction of travel. Each landing call shall be cancelled when answered.
(a) Pressure upon a hall button at a floor above the car location shall cause the car to start
up and answer any up calls, as they are reached by the car; irrespective of the sequence
the buttons have been pressed. The car shall not stop at floors where down buttons only
had been pressed. If no further car or up hall calls are registered, the car shall reverse its
direction preference to response to car calls or down hall calls.
(b) The car shall start down to answer calls below the car and shall not stop where only up
calls are registered. When travelling up, the car shall reverse at the highest call and
proceed to answer calls below it. When travelling down, the car shall reverse at the lowest
call and answer calls above it.
(c) Should both an up and a down call be registered at an intermediate landing, only the call
responding to the direction in which the car is travelling shall be cancelled upon the
stopping of the car at the landing. Terminal limit switches shall be provided in the hoistway
designed to automatically stop the car at or near the closest terminal landing.
K. Group Operation:
(a) Individual Car Controller: shall be intelligent, solid state with high efficiency processors
and have closed loop velocity and positioning. Individual car controllers will incorporate
processors in a distributed scheme to provide maximum flexibility and computing power.
A pre-selected controller (in addition to controlling its individual car), or an additional
group controller (depending on the adopted configuration), shall be assigned as the
system control manager. System redundancy in the group system shall be accomplished.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Hall pushbutton risers shall be attached to the main group controller as well as the backup
controllers. In the event that the main group controller can’t perform its duties, the system
shall automatically switch to the next backup car controller. Communication between
individual car controllers shall be accomplished through a serial link as well as concurrent
communication through a secondary serial link.
(b) For each individual car controller, provide a serial card rack and main CPU board
containing a non-erasable EPROM and operating system firmware. Variable field
parameters and adjustments shall be contained in a non-volatile memory module. Serial
ports shall be provided for connection to monitoring devices / diagnostic tools.
(c) Each elevator machine shall be provided with a tachometer or an encoder in order to
provide accurate feedback to the controller as to car position.
(d) All individual elevator control adjustment parameters shall be stored in nonvolatile
memory within the computer control system.
(e) At each landing, a vane shall be installed to provide the code required floor zone
detection. The vane shall also serve as a method for referencing absolute building points
for the controller.
(f) In the event of power loss, the elevator shall emergency brake to a stop. When normal
power is restored, the elevator shall automatically restart. If power is restored under
Emergency Power Conditions, the elevator shall operate as described in this specification
under the separate heading, “Operation from Stand-by / Emergency Supply”.
10.14. Elevator 24/7 Connected Service
Supplier will install a remote monitoring and diagnostics service that operates round-the-clock
improving the operational reliability and safety of the equipment.
(a) Supplier will use advanced technology to analyze the data gathered by the service and
apply it to make intelligent and proactive decisions on how to solve any potential problems
with the equipment.
(b) Supplier will predict, maintain, and take action to prevent breakages of the equipment in
advance.
(c) Supplier will provide access to an online portal through which the customer can follow
the service provided by Supplier, including service visits, service requests, repair
services, the condition of equipment and any maintenance activities carried out by the
Supplier.
_____________________________________________________________________________
(d) Supplier will provide access to a mobile application through which the customer will
receive real-time updates on the go, including information of ongoing service works and
the current status of the equipment
10.15. Building Management Systems (BMS):
Where specified in the Elevator schedule (Appendix 1), the Elevator Contractor is to provide
information for input to a Building Management System through voltage free contacts
11. Execution
11.1 Examination and Testing
A. Examine elevator areas, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of elevator work. Examine
hoist ways, hoist way openings, pits, and machine rooms, as constructed; verify critical
dimensions; and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work
is to be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B. Testing
On completion, a thorough test of the elevators under the working conditions shall be carried
out in the presence of and to the approval of the engineer.
All materials used must be of the highest quality and best of their respective kinds and must
comply with the relevant EN 81. All weights necessary to carry out the full load and overload
tests must be provided by the contractor and removed after use.
The tests will include the following:
No load current and voltage readings both on “UP and “DOWN” circuits.
Full load current and voltage readings both on ‘UP’ and ‘DOWN’ circuits.
Stalling current and voltage and time taken to operate overload.
Overload protection.
Gate sequence relays, if provided and installed.
All interlocks.
Collective control and priority sequences, if installed.
Safety gear mechanism.
Speeds on up and down travel with loading and empty.
Door contacts.
Final terminal stopping device.
Normal terminal stopping device.
Insulation and earth continuity
_____________________________________________________________________________
11.2. Installation
General:
A. Install equipment in accordance with approved shop drawings, referenced codes and
specifications.
B. Install equipment with clearances complying with referenced standards and Specification.
C. Install equipment to afford maximum safety and continuity of operation in event of seismic
activity.
D. Adjust motors, brakes, controllers, limit switches, stopping switches, levelling switches, door
operators, interlocks and safety devices in order to achieve required performance levels.
E. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
F. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades for proper time and sequence
to avoid construction delays. Use established benchmarks, lines, and levels to ensure
dimensional coordination of the Work. Coordinate equipment installations with the building
construction to prevent alteration to structure and cutting of holes and chases after equipment
installation has started. Ensure provision of pit screen separators between adjacent elevators
and for screening of counterweight to a height of 2.5 m from bottom of pit for safety of
maintenance personnel.
G. Assembly: Equipment is, as far as possible, to be factory assembled, wired and tested. Site
work is to be limited to installation and assembly of parts dismantled at factory for
transportation, or otherwise to work not possible at factory.
H. Workmanship: Carry out work in a neat, workmanlike and efficient manner in accordance with
specified requirements. Installation is to be performed by skilled personnel, specialized in
elevator installation, who are in the permanent employment of the manufacturer or
manufacturer's authorized dealer.
I. Accessibility:
J. Install equipment so that it is readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair.
K. Equipment layout should allow easy removal by portable hoists or other means for
maintenance or repair.
L. Builder's Work: Carry out all builders’ work necessarily required in connection with installation
of elevators, including but not limited to, forming or cutting chases, rebates, etc., grouting,
supports, steelwork, scaffolding, etc. Provide convenience power, lighting and other services
required, from assigned terminal points, to carry out construction work.
_____________________________________________________________________________
M. Fixing Elevator Guide Rails: Keep rails in proper alignment using steel splice plates of
adequate strength. Verticality of rail is to be within 0.2% tolerance. Space fixing brackets to
minimize rail vibration during operation, and at not more than 2,5 m centers.
N. Painting: Protect unfinished metalwork by painting, unless technically undesirable. Painting is
to include thorough cleaning of metal, application of rust inhibiting prime coat and two finishing
coats of approved enamel.
O. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts
designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby, eliminate
sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system. Refer to Acoustics report requirements.
P. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers.
Q. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoist way entrances with installation of elevator guide rails
for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills
and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable
dimension at each landing.
R. Levelling Tolerance: +/- 5 mm up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.
S. All concrete works related including reservations, shafts, door openings and embedded
accessories & items are to be coordinated by the General Contractor and his appointed
specialists on the job. The General Contractor shall present all necessary shop drawings, data
sheets, brochures, documents and materials’ samples for review, check of design drawings (if
necessary) and approval by Engineer before commencing any concrete works related to these
items on site.
11.3. Field Quality Control
A. GENERAL
(a) Provide all labor, materials and instruments required for the tests.
(b) Advise the Employer, Engineer and Authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and
times tests are to be performed on.
B. TESTS
(a) Test’s certificate
(b) Field Quality Tests:
After installation is complete and before hand-over, carry out acceptance tests as required
and recommended by the standards governing regulations and authorities. Carry out any
other tests the Engineer may require to check safety and compliance of installation with the
_____________________________________________________________________________
Specification. Tests are to be witnessed by the Engineer, the approved testing agency and, if
required, by the concerned Authority.
(c) Final Acceptance Test: Final acceptance of installation shall be carried out, as required and
recommended by the "Code" and governing regulations (local and international) and
agencies, only after all field quality tests are complete and all submittals and required
certificates approved by the Engineer. Above Field quality tests are to be repeated, in front of
same attendees. Compliance of workmanship and equipment with specification is to be
checked.
11.4. Cleaning
A. During work progress, always keep work areas clean and free from debris
B. Keep machine room, hoistway, car, fixtures, etc. always clean
11.5. Demonstration
A. Make a final check of each elevator operation, with Employer's maintenance personnel present,
just prior to Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are
functioning correctly.
B. Engage an authorized Elevator Sub-contractor to train Employer’s maintenance personnel to

operate the elevators and perform rescue of entrapped passengers in the event of an
emergency.
11.6. Protection
A. Temporary Use: Do not use elevators for construction purposes unless otherwise approved in
writing by the Engineer and cars are provided with temporary enclosures, either within finished
cars or in place of finished cars, to protect finishes from damage.
If applicable, comply with the following requirements for elevator used for construction
purposes:
(a) Provide full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the elevator Installer
for elevators used for construction purposes. Include preventive maintenance, repair or
replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as
required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies
as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
(b) Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect
elevators. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator
Installer to restore damaged work so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return
_____________________________________________________________________________
items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish
entire unit, or provide new units as required.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to elevator
manufacturer and Installer, hat ensure elevators are without damage or deterioration at the time
of Substantial Completion.
- END OF SPECIFICATIONS -
_____________________________________________________________________________
APPENDIX 1
SECTION 14200
ELEVATOR SCHEDULE
Lifts L1 – L3
MAIN
Number of Elevators 3
Elevator type
(passenger, goods, firefighting, scenic, vehicle, Passenger
bed)
Load (kgs) 1600
Load (Persons) 21
Speed (m/s) 1.75
Elevator code EN 81-20:2014
LIFT MACHINERY / CONTROLLER
Machine Location Machine Room less
Machine Type Gearless Traction

Drive System VVVF
Control system Microprocessor
Operation (Simplex , Duplex , Triplex , Four Car
Triplex
Group… etc.)
Number of stops and openings 6/6
Floors Served Front B, G, 1 - 4
Floors Served Rear N/A
Travel (m) 19.75
Hoistway size [ Width (W) x Depth (D) ] (mm) 7950 x 3600 for three lifts
Pit Depth (mm) 1500
Overhead Height (mm) 4600
Machine Room Height (mm) N/A
Steel divider beams (if required) By Main contractor
Steel divider beams adaptors (if required) By Main contractor
Car sling Bolted
Counterweight safety gear N/A
_____________________________________________________________________________
Pit ladder By Elevator sub-contractor

Counterweight screen By Elevator sub-contractor
Lift pit dividing screen By Main contractor
Shaft lights & sockets By Main contractor
Shaft trunking (Galvanized trunking or PVC) PVC
LIFT CAR
Car: Width (W) X Depth (D) X Height (H) (mm) 1500 x 2300 x 2400
Silver Brushed stainless steel with Anti fingerprint

Front wall material
(Grade 304)
Side wall finishes
(Grade 304)
Rear wall finishes
(Grade 304)
25 mm recess to accept Flooring by Main contractor
Floor finishes (weight of flooring is included in maximum load
allowance scope)
Suspended ceiling. LED Round Spotlights In Silver
Brushed Stainless steel, Ventilation by means of
Car Ceiling model / finish
electric blower. To be selected from manufacturer
Standard Range
Top Car trap door
Emergency exit (trapdoor)
(400 x 500mm)
Fan Out Blowing Electric type
Skirting Brushed Stainless steel (304Grade)
Mirror Full width / Partial Height, Clear Mirror on the rear side
Handrail One row of round shape rear side
Buffer rail Not required

CCTV Provision Wire Provision to be provided
Speaker Provision Yes
Maximum load allowance (for local finishes) (kg) 150
Protective Pads and Hooks Not required
DOORS
Door type (Centre opening or Side opening) Power operated 2 panel Centre Opening
Door size (Width x Height) (mm) 1200 x 2200
AC motor with electronic VVVF control

Door operation
_____________________________________________________________________________
LANDING DOOR FINISHES

Main floor
(Grade 304)
Other’s floor
(Grade 304)
LANDING DOORS FRAME (SHAPE AND FINISH):
Narrow Frame in Brushed Stainless Steel (Anti
Main floor - Narrow frame
fingerprint) as per manufacturer standard range

Typical floors - Narrow frame
Architraves as per design By Main Contractor
LANDING SILL MATERIAL

Main Extruded hard Aluminum
Others Extruded hard Aluminum
CAR DOORS
Door finishes
(Grade 304)
Door protection Curtain of Light Full door length
Sill material Extruded hard Aluminum
Fire rating Not Required
LANDING SIGNALISATION
LANDING CALL STATIONS
Micro movement push button with call accepted light, to

Main floor model
be placed in the center area between two Elevators

Typical floor model
Faceplate material Brushed Stainless steel Anti fingerprint

Faceplate shape Rectangle
Button type St/St Square or Round, Surface Mounted
Call registered buzzer Yes
Colour White Lighting
Handicapped requirements Yes
_____________________________________________________________________________
HALL LANTERNS / INDICATORS

Dot Matrix / LCD position Indicator with Directional
Main floor model
Arrows on top of the Landing Door
Faceplate material Brushed Stainless steel
Position Top of the Landing door

Other floor model
Faceplate material Brushed Stainless steel,

CAR SIGNALISATION
One Car operating panel to the full cabin height, with

call buttons of micro stroke click type, which will
Car operating panel
illuminate In White color on registration of a call.
Faceplate will be in Brushed steel finishes.
Car operating panel location Side or Front Wall

Number of car operation panels (each car) 1
Position indicator (Lcd or dot matrix ) Dot matrix with Directional arrows
Overload indication by
Yes
flashing light/buzzer
Color White Lighting
Intercom Hands free
_____________________________________________________________________________
Lifts SL1
MAIN
Number of Elevators 1
Elevator type
(passenger, goods, firefighting, scenic, vehicle, Passenger
bed)
Load (kgs) 1600
Load (Persons) 21
Speed (m/s) 1.75
Elevator code EN 81-20:2014
LIFT MACHINERY / CONTROLLER
Machine Location Machine Room less
Machine Type Gearless Traction

Drive System VVVF
Control system Microprocessor
Operation (Simplex , Duplex , Triplex , Four Car
Simplex
Group… etc.)
Number of stops and openings 6/6
Floors Served Front B, G, 1 - 4
Floors Served Rear N/A
Travel (m) 19.75
Hoistway size [ Width (W) x Depth (D) ] (mm) 3450 x 2300 for three lifts
Pit Depth (mm) 1500
Overhead Height (mm) 4600
Machine Room Height (mm) N/A
Steel divider beams (if required) By Main contractor
Steel divider beams adaptors (if required) By Main contractor
Car sling Bolted
Counterweight safety gear N/A
Pit ladder By Elevator sub-contractor
Counterweight screen By Elevator sub-contractor
Lift pit dividing screen By Main contractor
Shaft lights & sockets By Main contractor
_____________________________________________________________________________
Shaft trunking (Galvanized trunking or PVC) PVC

LIFT CAR
Car: Width (W) X Depth (D) X Height (H) (mm) 2300 x 1500 x 2600

Front wall material
(Grade 304)
Side wall finishes
(Grade 304)
Rear wall finishes
(Grade 304)
25 mm recess to accept Flooring by Main contractor
Floor finishes (weight of flooring is included in maximum load
allowance scope)
Suspended ceiling. LED Round Spotlights In Silver
Brushed Stainless steel, Ventilation by means of
Car Ceiling model / finish
electric blower. To be selected from manufacturer
Standard Range
Top Car trap door
Emergency exit (trapdoor)
(400 x 500mm)
Fan Out Blowing Electric type
Skirting Brushed Stainless steel (304Grade)
Mirror N/A
Handrail N/A
Buffer rail (Rear & Side walls) Three row, flat Buffer rails on all 3 side
CCTV Provision Wire Provision to be provided
Speaker Provision Yes
Maximum load allowance (for local finishes) (kg) 150
Protective Pads and Hooks Not required
DOORS
Door type (Centre opening or Side opening) Power operated 2 panel Side Opening
Door size (Width x Height) (mm) 1200 x 2200
Door operation AC motor with electronic VVVF control
LANDING DOOR FINISHES

Main floor
(Grade 304)
Other’s floor (Grade 304)
_____________________________________________________________________________
LANDING DOORS FRAME (SHAPE AND FINISH):

Main floor - Narrow frame

Typical floors - Narrow frame
Architraves as per design By Main Contractor
LANDING SILL MATERIAL

Main Extruded hard Aluminum
Others Extruded hard Aluminum
CAR DOORS
Door finishes
(Grade 304)
Door protection Curtain of Light Full door length
Sill material Extruded hard Aluminum
Fire rating Not Required
LANDING SIGNALISATION
LANDING CALL STATIONS

Main floor model

Typical floor model

Handicapped requirements Yes
HALL LANTERNS / INDICATORS
Main floor model
Faceplate material Brushed Stainless steel
_____________________________________________________________________________

Other floor model
Faceplate material Brushed Stainless steel,

CAR SIGNALISATION
One Car operating panel to the full cabin height, with

call buttons of micro stroke click type, which will
Car operating panel
illuminate In White color on registration of a call.
Faceplate will be in Brushed steel finishes.
Car operating panel location Side or Front Wall

Number of car operation panels (each car) 1
Position indicator (Lcd or dot matrix ) Dot matrix with Directional arrows
Overload indication by
Yes
flashing light/buzzer
Color White Lighting
Intercom Hands free
CONTROLLER FEATURES
24/7 Cloud based connected service YES
Lift announcer, English Language YES
YES
Information screen (Audio Visual with Sound) – Online
(Passenger lifts only)
EAQ 1 with Sensor YES
Estidama YES
Connection to BMS Volt-free contact YES
Emergency battery drive, Automatic YES
Fireman’s drive Key Switch, to operate the lifts during Fire YES
Fire detection, whole building, alternative return floor, doors open YES
_____________________________________________________________________________
Emergency intercom car-machine room -control room YES
Door close button YES
Accurate relevelling, automatic YES
Two touch car call cancels YES
Operation of car light, Automatic YES
Operation of car ventilation, Automatic YES
Provision for loudspeaker in car YES
Out of service switch in car, doors open, lights on, indication YES
Parking at pre-defined floor, doors closed YES (G)
Car call registered buzzer YES
CCTV Camera in the Car, (Cable Provision Only) YES
Bypass load function YES
Card Reader provision YES
Advance door opening YES
Nudging service, by measuring load YES
Emergency stop switch on car roof YES
Emergency stop switch in well, one switch YES
Car calls from machine room YES
Buttons to operate car doors for service purposes on car roof YES
Alarm bell at main floor YES
Car emergency lighting, separate light YES
Emergency exit contact in car YES
Buffer switch YES
Correction drive feature YES
Car roof blocking device switch YES
Motor protection, thermistors with automatic reset YES
- END OF SECTION -
STH Commercial Escalators 14310-1
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. GENERAL
1.1. Scope
These specifications shall detail the complete supply, installation, testing and commissioning
of escalators to be used in this project as manufactured by an approved supplier.
The work as detailed in this specification shall include all labors, materials, plant, fabrication,
equipment, engineering, design, shop drawings and all everything required for design,
procurement, fabrication, delivery to site, offloading, setting out, placing into position, to
complete the escalators work referred to below and as required by the Drawings and
Specification in accordance with the Contract Documents and safety code regulations.
1.2. Submittals
A. Certificate of Conformity
The Escalator Contractor shall provide certificates of conformity to the EN115-1:2017,

EN12015 and EN12016 and other standards mentioned in Section 1.3 of this specification.
B. Compliance Statement
As part of their offer submission, the Escalator Contractor shall provide a detailed statement
of conformity to the technical requirements and regulatory standards detailed in this
specification. Any deviations the Escalator Contractor has made against this specification
shall be clearly highlighted.
C. Shop Drawings
Within ten days of notification of award, the Escalator Contractor shall submit electrical
power requirements, including voltage, fuse ratings, sizes and types, starting and running
current.
Within five working days of notification of award, the Escalator Contractor shall submit shop
drawings for each escalator with all information required by regulations.
In addition to the above requirements, shop drawings shall include the following:
i. Drawing of the full escalator installation in first angle projection, including truss,
balustrade and mountings.
ii. Escalator equipment dimensions including width, rise, truss depth, inclination and span.
iii. Escalator mounting dimensions including span between mountings and pit. (span
between mountings shall have a tolerance of -0/+20mm).
iv. Annotated reaction loads at the upper, lower and intermediate mountings of the
escalators at full (live) load.
v. Dimensioned reference to the building gridline.
vi. Dimensioned EN115 passenger circulation area and headroom requirements.
vii. Annotated clear indication of required work by other trades.
viii. Annotated location of required electrical connections by others in upper escalator head.
ix. Annotated and dimensioned lifting hole location required for the hoisting of the escalators
(where slab is available above the escalator in the architectural drawing).
_____________________________________________________________________________
D. Warranty
The Escalator Contractor shall provide a copy of the manufacturer’s proposed warranty,
stating obligations, remedies, limitations and exclusions.
E. References & Experience

The Escalator Contractor shall provide a list of reference projects they have installed
including at least one still under their maintenance at the time of offer submission.
F. Samples
On award of the project, the Escalator Contractor shall submit manufacturer standard sized
finishes material for approval. The samples should include:
i. Cladding
ii. Handrail
iii. Balustrade
iv. Step
v. Comb
vi. Landing Cover
G. Quality Assurance
In addition to the requirements of Section 1.2 of this specification, the Escalator Contractor
shall comply with all submittal requirements detailed in other parts of this specification, for
the purpose of quality assurance
1.3. Quality Assurance
The Escalator Contractor shall submit evidence of the following quality assurance
requirements at the time of offer submission. Non-compliance with the requirements
stipulated in this section shall not be accepted.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 50 years of experience in manufacturing and

minimum 15 years in installing escalator equipment.
B. Regulation Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, the Escalator

Contractor shall comply with the applicable provisions of the latest edition of the
following standards.
i. EN115-1:2008 + A1:2017
ii. EN12015 “Electromagnetic Compatibility”
iii. EN13015 “Maintenance for Lifts and Escalators. Rules for Maintenance
Instructions.”
iv. The International Standards Organization (ISO) ISO 90001:2008, ISO 14040-44
v. OHSAS 18001:2007
The Escalator Contractor shall be responsible for the complete installation in total
conformity with the standards stipulated in this specification. Any issues related to the
safety of the installation, including local authority requirements, shall be coordinated with
the Engineer
_____________________________________________________________________________
Escalators shall follow design and manufacturing procedures certified in accordance

with ISO 9001:2008, to meet product and service requirements for quality assurance of
new products.
The Escalator Contractor shall provide an Environmental Product Declaration focused

on energy consumptions and environmental requirements, based on a product life cycle
assessment. The Escalator Contractor shall conform to the ISO 14040-44 standard.
The Escalator Contractor shall provide a safety certificate to show compliance with the
international OHSAS 18001:2007 standard requirements.
C. The Escalator Contractor shall provide a schedule of motor capacities, step chain pin
diameters, step chain breaking loads and step chain pin pressures for each escalator
intended for the project.
D. With each escalator unit delivery, the Escalator Contractor shall provide a certified third
party document related to the escalator code requirements and technical requirements
applicable to this specification. It shall consist of the following:
i. Stress analysis of the truss or equivalent certificate by a stress analyst.

ii. Proof by calculation of sufficient breakage resistance of the parts directly driving
the steps.
iii. Calculation of the stopping distances for loaded escalators together with
adjustment data.
iv. Proof testing of steps.
v. Proof of the breaking strength of the belt.
vi. Proof of sliding coefficients for the skirting.
vii. Proof of anti-slip properties of tread surfaces (steps, steps, floor and comb plates).
viii. Proof of stopping distances and deceleration values.
ix. Proof of electromagnetic compatibility.
1.4. Manufacturer's Warranty
Provide a written warranty signed by the Escalator Contractor agreeing to repair, restore,
or replace defective escalator work within the specified warranty period. Spare parts
required under related Article hereunder are not part of this requirement.
Warranty Period: twelve (12) months warranty from date of project handing over.
1.5. Maintenance Service
To include:
i. Initial maintenance service for each escalator, twelve (12) months included.
The Escalator Contractor shall provide a list of the spare parts immediately available locally
and a delivery lead-time for the replacement of major components including the motor,
gearbox, drive chain, sprockets, brakes, handrail drive friction wheel and step chain.
_____________________________________________________________________________
1.6. Related Works & Provisions (Outside the Escalator Contractor Scope)
Shall be designed and built in accordance with The Escalator

Contractor requirement. Adequate truss support mountings shall be
provided at upper, lower and intermediate levels where required to
withstand the reaction loads indicated by The Escalator Contractor.
The top surface of the supports shall be smooth and free from any
Structural
A obstruction along the full width. If steel structural support mountings
Mountings & Pit
are to be provided, they shall have a minimum width of 200mm. It is
the Escalator Contractor’s responsibility to provide an escalator which
spans precisely between the finish floor levels shown in the
architectural drawing at the time of offer submission.
Where the distance between upper and lower end supports exceeds
16.1m, additional intermediate structural support(s) shall be required
along the span of the escalator to achieve the regulatory required
Intermediate
B truss deflection. The support structures beneath these intermediate
Supports
supports shall be the responsibility of the Main Contractor and shall
be designed in accordance with the Escalator Contractor requirement
highlighted in the shop drawings.
Passenger Shall be provided around each escalator landing in accordance with
D
Circulation Area the EN115-1:2008+A1:2017 standard.
Shall be provided throughout the passenger circulation area in

E Headroom
accordance with the EN115-1:2008+A1:2017 standard.
Shall be provided in accordance with the EN115-1:2008+A1:2010
standard. The Escalator Contractor shall be responsible for supplying
F Head Guards
the head guard equipment, installation shall be the responsibility of
the Main Contractor prior to handover inspection.
Permanent static railing shall be installed adjacent to escalator

G Static Balustrades
landings in accordance with EN115-1:2008+A1:2017
Permanent static bollards shall be provided around the edge of the

Anti-Trolley
H passenger circulation areas at escalator landings to deter passengers
Barriers
with shopping trolleys / wheelchairs from using the escalator.
Shall be made up to the escalator access covers with an expansion
joint buffer after the escalator installation period and prior to handover
I Floor Finishing inspection. Finish floor levels shall be confirmed through drawing
approval and shall be marked at escalator landings before escalator
installation.
The operating climate shall be controlled, with temperatures
J Climate
remaining between 4-40°c and humidity below 95%.
The Escalator Contractor shall be provided suitable offloading space
Installation Route in close proximity of the final installation location. Proper
K
– Offload Area arrangements shall be made for any required road closures / public
traffic management measures.
The Escalator Contractor shall be provided a clear envelope size of
Installation Route 3100x3100mm throughout the installation route, from the point of
L
– Size offloading to the final install location. The route shall be arranged to
minimize distance and maneuvering.
_____________________________________________________________________________
All walls and flooring throughout the installation route shall be kept
unfinished until after escalator installation. Where this requirement is
Installation Route
M not possible, any nearby finishes shall be protected, and the flooring
- Protection
shall be capable of receiving the point loads of the escalator without
causing damage.
The installation route shall be made clear of obstruction at time of
Installation Route installation. Any permanent intermediate support structures required
N
- Obstruction shall be omitted until time of installation and placed beneath the
escalator as it is hoisted onto the mountings.
Escalator mountings shall be clearly marked with finish floor levels
Centerline and and centerlines to allow the proper levelling and alignment of the
O
FFL Marking escalator at the time of installation, without the need for later
adjustment.
Measures shall be taken to ensure the installed escalator is protected

Escalator
P from damage by other works throughout the site period. Where there
Protection
is a prolonged site period, special measures shall be taken to protect
the escalators from the ingress of dust and water.
The escalator shall not be used as a staircase or used to support
scaffolding by other works. Any scaffolding installed close to the
Q Escalator Misuse escalators shall be appropriately coordinated with The Escalator
Contractor to ensure measures are taken to protect the escalator from
damage.
Suitable on-site welfare facilities shall be provided for the use of the
Escalator Contractor. The facilities shall include changing facilities,
R Welfare Facilities sanitation, drinking water and on-site canteen. Suitable on-site first
aid facilities and trained first aider shall be present on site at all times
during site working hours.
Storage for escalator equipment and tools shall be provided within
20m of escalator installation location throughout the site period. The
S On-site Storage
size of the storage area shall be coordinated with the Escalator
Contractor.
Suitable facilities shall be provided for the removal of waste in
T Waste Disposal accordance with the waste management regulations adhered to in this
specification.
Fall protection shall be provided around landings and voids which
present a fall risk within the Escalator Contractor working area, prior
U Fall Protection to the escalator commissioning period. Where necessary to facilitate
the installation of the escalator and prevent obstruction, at the time of
escalator hoisting, fall protection shall be temporarily omitted.
Scaffolding shall be constructed and dismantled where required to the
sides and soffit of escalators with a representative of The Escalator
Access
V Contractor in attendance. The scaffolding shall allow the completion
Scaffolding
of external trim/cladding finishes at high level. No scaffolding shall be
supported by the escalator.
Permanent, three phase escalator power supply and single phase
lighting power supply shall be provided to the upper head of the
W Power Supply escalator as per The Escalator Contractor requirement, prior to the
start of commissioning. Provision of temporary power supply shall be
unacceptable for final escalator testing and handover acceptance.
_____________________________________________________________________________
1.7 Installation Methodology
A. The Escalator Contractor shall consider in their offer a clear logistic and installation method
appropriate for the conditions of this specification and the layout of the site shown in the
latest issued architectural drawings. Compliance to this clause shall be outlined through the
submission of installation method statements, diagrams of the lifting method, etc. at the time
of offer.
The Escalator Contractor shall not consider lifting holes provided by the Main Contractor
where slab is not clearly available in the architectural drawings.
Aside from the offloading operation from the container on delivery of the escalator. No
provision of lifting equipment by the Main Contractor shall be considered until prior
agreement and written approval.
2. PRODUCT
2.1. Escalator Mechanical Technical Requirements
2.1.1 Truss
A. The supporting truss structure of the escalator shall consist of a welded frame of hollow
and angle steel profiles. The main truss chords shall be made from hollow section steel
profile for maximum rigidity, connected by angle steel profile cross members and
diagonal beams.
B. The design of the truss shall consider a 5000N/m² live load along the length of the
escalator. The deflection of the fully loaded (live) truss shall be no more than 1/750mm
over the distance between supports.
C. Where the distance between the upper and lower support mountings spans over 16.1m,
the Escalator Contractor shall provide an additional truss support mount at intermediate
level, to achieve the regulatory required truss deflection. Bolted to the underside of the
escalator truss, the intermediate support shall become an additional mounting point
beneath the escalator for which the Main Contractor shall provide a supporting structure.
D. The truss shall arrive on site in modular sections and shall be joined into one piece on
installation of the escalator.
E. The Escalator Contractor shall additionally apply sealant to the mating surfaces of each
truss section, ensuring maximum grip and an oil tight soffit.
F. Isolation pads shall be fitted beneath the mounting supports of the truss to prevent
vibration transferral to the building structure.
2.1.2 Track System
A. The step chains and steps shall be guided by a track system along the length of the
escalator.
_____________________________________________________________________________
B. The incline chain guides shall be bolted to the truss at intervals of 1200 mm, to
ensure they give the safe rigid support required to guarantee the ride comfort and
stability of the steps.
C. The guides should be made from 2mm thick drawn steel profiles with a galvanised
surface finish to protect from corrosion.
2.1.3 Step Chains
A. The steps shall be moved along the track system by step chains and rollers.
B. The step chains shall be precision roller type with heat-treated links pitched at 133.5
mm.
C. Step chain connectors shall connect the steps with the chains at a pitch of 400 mm.
The step chain connectors shall be seamless steel tube axles with oil resistant
synthetic bushings.
D. The step chain rollers shall be located inside the chain links, made from
polyurethane and shall be 75mm in diameter, 23.5mm in width.
E. The step chains shall be precision lubricated by automatic oilers to minimise oil
consumption.
2.1.4 Chain Tensioning Device
A. The chain-tensioning device shall be easily accessible at the lower end of the
escalator, after removing the bottom access cover.
B. The tensioning shaft shall be kept parallel by a ball-prismatic guide.
C. Adjustable disc springs ensure uniform tension of the step chains.
2.1.5 Step
A. Each step shall be designed to receive a load of 120kg in accordance with EN115-
1:2008+A1:2017.
B. The steps shall have a torsion resistant design, made of single piece die cast
aluminium or a carbon steel assembly with stainless steel tread. The tread plates
shall have very narrow grooves.
C. Each step shall be provided with two polyurethane rollers, diameter 75mm, with
encased sealed-for-life deep groove ball bearings.
D. The steps shall be interchangeable against each other.
E. The steps shall be easily replaced without the removal of skirt panels.
F. Irrespective of the minimum requirements of EN115-1:2008+A1:2017, all escalators

shall include three horizontal running steps per landing to allow more time and space
for the safe entry and exit of passengers in a busy public transportation environment.
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.1.6 Comb Plate and Landing Covers
A. The comb plates shall be made of steel, mounted by a plate which shall match the
surface finish of the landing covers.
B. Yellow powder coated aluminium comb segments shall be securely mounted on the
comb plate with teeth to mesh precisely with the tread grooves of the steps.
C. Plastic comb segments shall not be acceptable. The combs must have high shear
strength to ensure they can face possible collisions with debris carried on the steps
without easily snapping.
D. The landing covers shall be made of 35mm thick ribbed aluminium profile with
sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand required passenger loads under the
EN115-1:2008+A1:2017 standard.
E. The landing covers shall not include thin surface paint layers in their make-up, to
ensure a more durable, long-lasting finish against shopping trolley use.
F. It shall be possible for a single person to safely remove the landing covers manually
with a maximum lift of 25kg.
G. It shall only be possible to remove the landing covers with a special tool from the
manufacturer.
2.1.7 Drive System
A. The drive system shall be located outside the step band, inside the upper (drive)
head of the escalator.
B. In sequence, the drive system shall consist of:
i. Electric AC squirrel cage motor

ii. Gear Box (worm)
iii. Duplex drive chain
iv. Main shaft with duplex drive chain, step chain and handrail drive chain
sprockets
v. Handrail drive chain
vi. Handrail drive shaft with friction wheels.
vii. Step chains
C. The factor of safety throughout the system shall be a minimum of 5 and shall be
proven by the Escalator Contractor through calculation.
D. The electric AC squirrel cage motor shall be IP55 rated and operate at 960rpm, with
three-phase, 6-pole induction and class F insulation.
E. The upper output of the motor running shaft shall include a flywheel hand winding
device to move the step band manually when the escalator is stopped and isolated.
F. The motor shall be mounted onto the gearbox, which utilizes worm gear.
_____________________________________________________________________________
G. The motor shall connect to the gearbox through the lower output of the motor running
shaft, via a coupling kit. Belt connection between the motor and gearbox shall not
be accepted.
H. The gearbox shall use high precision, self-aligned deep groove ball bearings, sealed
for life with a minimum lifetime of 70,000 hours.
I. The main shaft shall be driven by the gearbox output sprocket via a duplex drive
chain.
J. The duplex drive chain shall be precisely lubricated by an automatic oiler to minimise
oil consumption.
K. The main shaft shall rotate to drive the step band and handrails.
L. The duplex drive chain sprocket, handrail drive chain sprocket and step chain
sprockets shall be mounted on the main shaft.
M. The step chain sprockets shall precisely interlock with the step chain rollers.
N. The handrails shall be driven by friction wheels connected to the main shaft via a
handrail drive chain.
O. A handrail tension adjustment device shall be installed in the bottom station of the
escalator.
2.1.8 Braking System
A. The main brake shall operate on the drive system through a brake drum connected
directly to the motor running shaft. It shall consist of two separate fail-safe shoe
brakes, which shall be spring operated and released by a direct current brake
magnet.
B. The system shall also include a step band lock, which is a mechanical interlock
(monitored by an electrical limit switch) designed to hold the escalator step band in
the event that maintenance to the brake system is required.
C. Where applicable in accordance with EN115-1:2008+A1:2017, an additional electro-

mechanical safety brake (auxiliary brake) shall be located on the side of the main
shaft and it’s operation shall be co-ordinated with the main brake.
D. Power failure, the activation of an emergency stop or tripping of any other safety
device will result in the initiation of the braking procedure.
E. The braking procedure shall begin with the control board interrupting the voltage
supply to the braking system; the direct current brake magnet, which is responsible
for releasing the brake, shall thus be switched off and the brake lever actuated by a
compression spring. Braking shall become effective according to the friction principle
through shoe brakes.
F. The braking under friction shall result in deceleration and stopping distances
compliant to the EN115-1:2008 + A1:2017 standard.
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.1.9 Handrail
A. The handrails shall be between 70 and 100mm wide and made of black synthetic
rubber, with internal steel cord layers to ensure proper traction.
B. The minimum breaking load of the handrails shall be 25kN.
C. For quality assurance, the handrails shall be vulcanised by an experienced person

in the handrail supplier factory and arrive on site as an endless loop ready for
installation.
2.1.10 Balustrade
A. The balustrades shall be made from 10mm thick clear tempered glass panels.
B. The glass panels shall be neatly arranged with 2mm gaps in between to allow
expansion due to heat. No cover strips shall be required.
C. The joints shall be arranged to align perpendicular to the escalator truss.
2.1.11 Decking and Skirting
A. Both decking and skirting finishes shall be matching 240 grit. brushed stainless steel
(grade #304).
B. The skirting shall be rigid and made from 2mm 240 grit. brushed stainless steel
(grade #304) plate, coated in a clear anti-friction compound.
C. The decking shall match the finish of the skirting and be made from 1.5mm 240 grit.
brushed stainless steel (grade #304).
D. As recommended by EN115-1:2008 + A1:2017, 40mm wide skirt brush shall be

provided in the skirting along the step band run. The brush shall act as a deflector,
to further protect the skirt/step boundary from foreign objects and long passenger
clothing.
2.2. Escalator Electrical Technical Requirements
2.2.1 General
A. Escalator electrical equipment shall be designed to operate at +/-10% variation of

voltage supply and +/-3% variation of frequency, without affecting the safe performance
or operation of the escalator equipment.
2.2.2 Electric Motor
A. The specially manufactured squirrel cage electric motor shall be IP55 rated and operate
at maximum 960rpm, with three-phase, 6-pole induction and class F insulation.
2.2.3 VVVF Inverter
A. A variable voltage, variable frequency inverter shall be provided, located in the upper
head of the escalator alongside the control cabinet.
_____________________________________________________________________________
B. The escalator shall start at contract 0.5m/s running speed when passengers are
detected 1.3m from the comb intersection point. After a pre-determined time of 10
seconds during which the escalator is not in use, the escalator shall automatically switch
to 0.2m/s standby mode. After a further 10 seconds of inactivity, the escalator shall come
to a complete stop. The cycle shall repeat when the next passenger passes the sensor.
C. To optimize inverter service life and further increase efficiency, the motor shall draw
power directly from the grid at contract 0.5m/s running speed, and shall only switch to
inverter power when the escalator enters standby mode.
2.2.4 Traffic Indicators
A. To supplement the automatic start/stop feature, traffic indicators shall be provided to

guide passengers when the steps are stationary.
B. For high visibility, one indicator per landing shall be mounted to the glass balustrade
newel, on the right-hand side of passenger entry.
C. Indicators shall use LED 16x16 dot display, showing green moving arrows or red no-
entry signs depending on the direction of operation.
D. When the escalator is stopped due to fault or emergency, both traffic indicators shall
flash red no entry signs until the fault or emergency is resolved.
2.2.5 Control Cabinet and Control System
A. All control equipment shall be enclosed within an IP54 rated steel cabinet.
B. The control cabinet shall be located within the upper (drive) head of the escalator inside
the truss.
C. The escalator control system shall manage the general operation of the escalator and
monitor all safety devices.
D. The control system shall incorporate microprocessor technology and shall have a PCB
(Printed Circuit Board) single circuit board construction.
E. The control system shall translate all detected faults to unique fault codes and
communicate them through the building management system and fault indication panel
(located inside the control cabinet).
F. To assist the maintenance engineer, a two-digit LED fault / event indicator shall be
integrated into the control cabinet and this shall incorporate a minimum 200-event fault
storage facility.
G. A lockable main supply isolator shall be located at the top of the control cabinet.
H. An hour counter device shall be provided in the door of the control cabinet, which can
record escalator running time for customers and maintenance personnel. It shall not
only record total running time but also up and down running times respectively.
_____________________________________________________________________________
I. During routine maintenance it shall be possible for the cabinet to be lifted from the
escalator and supported at finished floor level by cabinet stand legs, to allow the
maintenance technician to work safely within the escalator.
J. To ensure there is no interference with other electrical systems within the building, the
escalator shall be designed to comply with European Standards EN 12015 and EN
12016 EMC Product Family Standard for Lifts, Escalators and Passenger Conveyors.
K. The escalator shall be switched on by a key switch arranged in the skirting panel at the
bottom landing of the escalator on the right hand side of passenger entry, the switch
shall be provided with up and down functions.
L. Red emergency stop buttons shall be located in the skirt panel on the right hand side of
passenger entry at both landings. The buttons shall be provided with momentary
pressure actuation.
M. For inspection and maintenance purposes, special plug sockets shall be provided in
both the upper and lower pits for handheld operation pendants.
N. When connected, the hand-held pendant control shall override all other controls and
allow the step band to be safely moved by the maintenance technician. Permanent
thumb-applied pressure on the operating buttons shall be required to move the step
band, thus ensuring the engineer can quickly stop the escalator by simply releasing the
pressure on the button.
O. Each pendant shall be supplied with a cable. The length of the cable shall be a minimum
of 8 metres. Inspection outlets shall be located in such a way that any point of the unit
can be reached with the cable.
P. When the handheld pendant is operational, the escalator shall enter maintenance mode;
limiting step speed to 0.1m/s for the safety of the maintenance technician.
2.2.6 Monitoring System
A. The Escalator Contractor shall offer a full-featured building management tool that
monitors any escalator and elevator by a personal computer located within the building.
It shall be possible to monitor any escalator or elevator in the building via an interface
to the building management system. The system shall use a CAN (Controller Area
Network) bus electrical installation.
B. Each escalator shall be fitted with an RS485 interface to allow flexible connection and
send signals to the building management system with the following information:
i. Escalator stop due to emergency

ii. Escalator stop due to fault (with unique fault code number)
iii. Escalator running upward duration
iv. Escalator running downward duration
v. Escalator stationary duration
vi. Escalator operating hour counter
C. Where a building management system is not in place, the escalator shall include a LCD
fault indication panel within the inner deck at upper landing level.
_____________________________________________________________________________
2.2.7 Lighting
A. LED comb lights shall be provided at comb intersection points to highlight the step band
entry to passengers. The comb lights shall be provided in white colour, two per landing.
B. All permanent escalator lighting shall be provided as LED for eco-efficiency.
C. Each escalator shall be supplied with a handheld lamp for use as temporary task lighting
by installation personnel.
2.2.8 Cable Harness
A. The power and control cables shall be laid in the escalator truss as a modular harness.
B. At each truss joint, the cable harness shall be connected by a plug, there shall be no
cable splicing in the installation of the electrical harness.
C. The cable harness shall be IP33 rated.
D. The main power supply, 3 phase 400 V, 50 HZ with neutral and earth connection shall
be provided by others and fed to the top escalator head prior to the installation of the
escalator.
2.3. Mandatory Safety Features
2.3.1 General
A. The safety control system of the escalator shall consist of electrical safety devices
connected along a safety circuit, which continuously communicate with diagnostic
processors in the control cabinet to ensure the safe operation of the escalator. Should
a safety device trip, a signal shall be sent to the control system which will interrupt
current to the motor and brake magnet. The braking procedure shall subsequently be
initiated.
B. It shall not be possible to start the escalator unless the safety circuit is complete and a
safe condition is detected.
C. The safety circuit shall communicate with the control cabinet through photo-isolators.
Hardwiring to the control cabinet shall not be accepted, this is to ensure any short circuit
in the safety circuit shall not lead to the destruction of the printed circuit boards.
2.3.2 Mandatory Safety Devices
The following features and devices shall be included, in accordance with the EN115-
1:2008 + A1:2017 standard requirements and recommendations.
A. Brake Lift Monitor
Sends a signal to the control board if the brake is applied.
B. Brake Wear Monitor
Sends a signal to the control board if the brake lining is worn or requires readjustment.
_____________________________________________________________________________
C. Mechanical Step Band Lock
A mechanical interlock (monitored by an electrical limit switch) for holding the escalator
step band in the event that maintenance to the brake system is required. This device
also prevents unintentional reversal of the escalator, and enables it to be stopped in a
timely and proper manner in the event of a reversal or loss of power.
D. Broken Step Chain Switches
Send signals to the control board if there is step chain elongation or failure (located in
the return station).
E. Missing Step Detector
Monitors the integrity of the step band using an electrical proximity detector, sends a
signal to the control board if a step is missing.
F. Step Up Thrust Switch
Monitors the path of the steps through the lower transition curve using electrical
proximity detectors, sends a signal to the control board if a step lifts off the track.
G. Step Sag Switches
Send signals to the control board if a step sags by more than 5 mm before it enters the
comb segments. For example, this may be caused by a deformed step tread or a
damaged step/chain roller.
H. Skirt Switches
Send signals to the control board if the skirt panels become deformed. Deformation can
be caused by foreign objects being carried into the gaps between skirt panels and steps.
I. Handrail Inlet Switches
A catapult mechanism inside each handrail inlet, is linked to an electrical limit switch.
Sends a signal to the control board if a foreign object becomes caught in the handrail
inlets.
J. Handrail Speed & Breakage Monitors
Send signals to the control board in the event of handrail breakage or if the handrail
speed is 15% faster or slower than the step speed for more than 2 seconds.
K. Comb Plate Impact Devices
Send signals to the control board if objects become trapped between the comb teeth
and the moving step band. The devices shall react to both vertical and horizontal impact
forces to detect unsafe conditions with higher accuracy.
L. Access Cover Safety Switches
Send signals to the control board if the access covers are not in place.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Located beneath the access covers, the switches plunge under the load of the access
covers to complete the safety circuit. Lever or spring actuation shall not be accepted, it
shall not be feasible to permanently bend or manipulate the switch to give a false
reading.
M. Emergency Stop Buttons
Located at each landing in the skirting for passenger use.
N. Engineer Stop Switches
Located within the upper and lower pits for engineer use.
O. Phase Failure Device
Monitors the 3-phase mains power supply and sends a signal to the control board if a
fault is detected (due to phase loss detection, phase sequence monitoring, under-
voltage detection).
P. Broken Drive Chain Device
Sends a signal to the control board if there is excessive elongation of the drive chain or
in the event of drive chain failure.
The broken drive chain device shall be activated by drive chain slag due to chain wear
or unexpected drive station movement. Once it is activated by a loose drive chain, a
signal shall be transmitted to the main board. The main board shall then send a signal
to the operational brake control module and (where applicable) the auxiliary brake
control module, cutting supply power to all brake magnets simultaneously. Auxiliary
brake and motor brake shall be released to stop the escalator.
Q. Motor Speed Sensor System
Electronically monitors the motor for over speed, under speed, unintentional reverse
and braking deceleration.
Two motor speed sensors shall be installed under the flying wheel to monitor the speed
and direction of the motor. Sensors transmit signals of speed and running direction
continuously to the control system.
If the motor speed exceeds a value 1.15x the nominal, an over speed signal shall be
transmitted to the control system. The control system shall then send a signal to both
operational brake control PCB and (where applicable) auxiliary brake control PCB to cut
power supply for the magnet. Motor brake and auxiliary brake shall be released
simultaneously to stop the escalator.
For unintentional reversal running, an incorrect direction signal shall be transmitted to

the main board. The main board shall send a signal to both operational brake control
module and (where applicable) auxiliary brake control modules to cut power supply for
the magnets. Motor brake and (where applicable) auxiliary brake shall be released to
stop the escalator.
_____________________________________________________________________________
R. Motor Thermal Protection
Monitors the operating temperature of the escalator motor and sends a signal to the
control board in case of overheating, before there is fire risk.
S. Fire Alarm Relay Contact
A volt free contact provided in the control cabinet which sends a signal to the control
board if the building fire switch is activated (once connected to the building fire detection
system).
T. Smoke Detectors
Fitted within the truss at the drive and return stations, send signals to the control board
if smoke particles are detected.
The control system shall be connected to the building fire monitoring system and send
a warning relay output to the client.
U. Buzzer Alarm
Sounds a 3-5 second alarm to make nearby pedestrians aware when the escalator has
stopped or is being started.
3.1. Retouch and Cleaning
A. Restore marred or defaced surfaces prior to turn over.
B. Protective hoarding to be provided by Owner to protect units during Store construction.

Escalator Subcontractor shall be responsible to clean out from truss spaces all construction
dust and debris, once protective hoarding has been removed.
C. Completely clean truss interior and machinery spaces of all construction dust and dirt prior
to substantial completion.
3.2. Protection
A. The Escalator Contractor shall deliver equipment with the manufacturer’s protection at site.
B. During installation, the Escalator Contractor shall provide adequate protection of the
equipment against reasonable damage. Protection shall be provided until handing over of
the escalator is accepted by the client.
C. The Escalator Contractor shall provide proper and adequate protection to the escalator
working space to prevent other trade personnel intruding the area.
3.3. Site Inspection
A. Periodic Site Inspections
Throughout the works on site, periodic site inspections shall be carried out to measure the
progress of the work, the safe execution of the work and the compliance of the escalator to
specification and regulation requirements. This specification document shall serve as a
_____________________________________________________________________________
reference for the periodic inspections and the Escalator Contractor shall fully co-operate
with the inspecting party, allowing unrestricted access to the installation.
All inspections shall be documented by reports signed and stamped by both parties.
Should the escalator fail inspection, corrective action shall be coordinated between the
inspecting party and Escalator Contractor, with follow up inspections planned and
documented accordingly.
B. Commissioning Test
At the time of commissioning inspection, the Escalator Contractor shall perform all tests and
inspections to confirm specification and regulation compliance and the satisfactory
operation of the delivered installation in compliance with this specification document.
The Escalator Contractor shall provide all test instruments and other monitoring equipment
required for use during the commissioning tests and inspections.
3.4. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
One copy of the escalator operating, and maintenance manual shall be specially prepared for the
client and complete for the purpose of safely operating the escalator equipment.
The manual shall include:
i. A full and detailed table of contents.

ii. Description of the escalator design.
iii. Starting and stopping procedure.
iv. Emergency measures and Escalator Contractor contact numbers.
v. As built drawings.
vi. Certification documents.
Where necessary, the operating and maintenance manuals shall be copied for multiple
departments or buildings, depending on the requirement of the project.
3.5. Schedule of Escalators
A. Quantity: 2
B. Arrangement: Single
C. Daily Operating Hours: 24 hours per day.
D. Installation Environment: Indoor
E. Speed: 0.5m/s
F. Capacity 6000 Persons /h
G. Angle of Inclination: 35 Degree
H. Vertical Rise: 4200mm

_____________________________________________________________________________
I. Height of balustrade: 1000mm.
J. Step Width: 1000mm.
K. No. of Horizontal Steps: 2
L. Lifetime: 70,000 hours minimum (design life).

If adequately maintained
M. Operation: Automatic start / Stop
N. Direction of Operation: Up & down (reversible).
O. Cladding: Silver Brushed stainless steel (Grade 304)
The escalator supplier is preferred to present a range of different finishes options in their offer. To
be shown as separate prices.
END OF SECTION

Volume 03 - University Civil Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume 03 - University Civil Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

S.T.

H Consultant ‫ﺳوﺳﯾﺗﻲ ﺗﻛﻧوﻟوﺟﻲ ھﺎوس‬

Kyung Hee University

Al Ain City, U.A.E.

COMM. NO. STH/Q/343

LIST OF CONTENTS PAGES

SECTION NO. TITLE

DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 2: EXISTING CONDITIONS

03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 16

04200 MASONRY UNITS 6

05300 METAL DECK 8

DIVISION 6: WOOD AND PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 6

LIST OF CONTENTS PAGES

DIVISION 7: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07100 DAMP PROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 5

DIVISION 8: DOORS & WINDOWS

08100 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 12

09200 PLASTER & GYPSUM BOARD 4

DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES

10150 COMPARTMENTS & CUBICLES 3

DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT

11014 WINDOW WASHING EQUIPMENT 7

DIVISION 12: FURNISHING

12700 LABORATORY FURNITURE 6

13100 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEM 13

DIVISION 14: LIFT INSTALLATION

14200 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR 36

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Project Location: Al Ain City.

1.03 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

1.04 SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS LOG

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS

The term ‘shop drawings’ as used here in shall also include:

Manufacturer’s standard drawings, descriptive literature, catalogues, brochures, performance

1.06 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

1.07 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Marble & Granite.

F. Pumps (All Types)

I. Industrial kitchen & laundry.

1.08 CONTROL AND TEST EQUIPMENT TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR

1.09 SAMPLING AND TESTING

1.10 THIRD PARTY

1.11 DAILY & MONTHLY REPORTS

1.12 FIRST AID

1.13 CHECK REQUEST

1.2. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

1. Scheduled preconstruction, progress meetings.

1.3. PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

As soon as possible, arrange meeting(s) between the Engineers, subcontractors,

1.4. SITE MEETINGS

1.5. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

1. Submit a construction progress schedule within fourteen (14) working days of

2. Correct, revise, up-date, and otherwise maintain schedule during progress of

4. Construction progress schedule to be in bar chart format in sufficient detail to monitor

1.6. PROGRESS REPORTS

5. Dates, status and particulars of submissions, i.e. shop drawings, samples,

6. Dates, status and particulars of deliveries, i.e. manufacturing dates,

2. Make submittals specified in this Section to the Engineer unless otherwise

1.2. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

1. Submit proposed construction progress schedule.

2. As construction progresses, submit updated construction schedules each